DE.· 

·.·.•· Soviet-Afghan War 

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A 

Approved for Public Release 

Distribution Unlimited 

20000509 187 
THE OTHER SIDE OF THE .MOUNTAIN: 

Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

by 

Ali Ahmad Jalali and Lester W. Grau 

Foreign Military Studies Office, Fort Leavenworth, Kansas 

Introduction by 

Lieutenant General John E. Rhodes 

Commanding General 

U.S. Marine Corps Combat Development Command 

Courtesy of 

The United States Marine Corps Studies and Analysis Division 

Quantico, Virginia 

DTIC QUALITY INSPECTED 2 
ii 
CONTENTS 

Introduction 

Foreword 

Acknowledgements 

Preface 

Chapter 1: Ambushes 

Vignette 1 - Ambushes at the Mamur Hotel 

Vignette 2 - Yet Another Ambush at the Mamur Hotel 

Vignette 3 - Ambush South of the Tangi Waghjan Gorge 

. Vignette 4 - Ambush at Kanday 

Vignette 5 -Ambush on the Jalalabad-Asadabad Road 

Vignette 6 - No-Pula Ambush 

Vignette 7 - Two Convoys in the Kill Zone 

Vignette 8 -Ambush Near Abdullah-e Burj 

Vignette 9 - Deh-Khwaja Ambush 

Vignette 10 - Duranay Ambush 

Vignette. 11 - Kandahar Ambushes 

Vignette 12 -Ambush at Qala-e Haidar 

Vignette 13 - Ambush at the Sadre Azam Hill 

Vignette 14 -Ambush at Mazar Creek 

Vignette 15 - Ambush at Qafus Tangay 

Vignette 16 - Sisay Ambush 

Chapter 2: 

Vignette 

Vignette 

Vignette 

Vignette 

Vignette 

Vignette 

Vignette 

Vignette 

Vignette 

Vignette 

Raids 

1 - Raid on the Totumdara Security Post 

2 - Chamtala Raid 

3 - Raid on Bagrami District Headquarters 

4 - Attack on the Tsawkey Security Outposts 

5 -Raid on Pul-e Charkhi Radio Transmitter 

Station 

6 - Raid from Cheltan on Outposts in the 

Kabul Suburbs 

7 - Raid on Mahipar Outposts 

8 -Raid on Lataband Security Outposts 

9 - Raid on Outposts at Wreshmin Gorge 

10 - Raid on the Bridge Post in Alingar 

vii 

ix 

xi 

xiii 

3 

5 

9 

13 

17 

21 

23 

27 

31 

35 

39 

.43 

49 

53 

55 

59 

63 

69 

71 

73 

76 

77 

81 

87 

89 

93 

97 

101 

iii 
Chapter 3:. Shelling Attacks 105 

Vignette 1 - A Shelling Attack Turns Bad . 107 

Vignette 2 - A New Years Present for the Soviets 113 

Chapter 4: Attacking a Strong Point 117 

Vignette 1 - Taking Alingar District Capital 119 

Vignette 2 - The Battle for Panjwayee 123 

Vignette 3 - Attack on the Bodyalay Garrison 127 

Vignette 4 - Attack on Sorubay 129 

Vignette 5 - Storming Gula'i · 132 

Vignette 6 - Destruction of the Bagh-e Mumtaz Brigade 135 

Chapter 5: Mine Warfare 139 

Vignette 1 - Mujahideen Demolition Methods 141 

Vignette 2 - Mining attacks near Mehtar Lam 143 

Chapter 6: · Blocking Enemy Lines of 147 

Communication 

Vignette 1 - Carving up Regiments on the Approach 149 

to Wazi 

Vignette 2 - Blocking the Paghman Highway 153 

Vignette 3 - Road Block at Estalef 157 

Vignette 4 - Defense of a River Line and Road Block 161 

at Sayad 

Vignette 5 - The Defense Against the Soviet 165 

OPERATION "MAGISTRAL" 

Vignette 6 -OPERATION GASHEY (Arrow in Pushto) 175 

Vignette 6a - The Battle for the Khairokhel Post 189 

Vignette 6b - The Battle for Spina Thana Base 193 

Chapter 7: Siege Warfare 197 

Vignette 1 - Failed Siege at Urgun 199 

Vignette 2 - Dehrawud Offensive 205 

Chapter 8: Defending Against Raids · 211 

Vignette 1 - Soviet Raid on Mujahideem Hideout 213 

at Sayghani 

Vignette 2 - Battle for Alishang District Center 217 

Vignette 3 - Vision in the Bar Kot Valley 219 

Vignette 4 - Surprised by the Soviets in the Dara-e Nur 223 

iv 
Chapter 9: Fighting Heliborne Insertions 227 

Vignette 1 - Soviet Heliborne Raid Achieves Surprise 229 

Vignette 2 - Soviet raid on Kanda 233 

Vignette 3 - Air Assault on Maro Stronghold 237 

Chapter 10: Defending Against a Cordon and Search 241 

Vignette 1 - Battle of Baraki Barak 243 

Vignette 2 - Defending Against An Offensive in Paghman 24 7 

Vignette 3 - Battle for Kama 251 

Vignette 4 - Defending against a Cordon and Search 257 

Operation in Parwan 

Vignette 5 - Last Stand on the Islands Opposite 263 

Gerdi Kats 

Chapter 11: Defending Base Camps 267 

Vignette 1 - Soviet Offensive through Surkh Rud 269 

Vignette 2 - Defending Surkhab Base Camp .273 

Vignette 3 - Fall of Surkhab Base Camp 277 

Vignette 4 - Loss of the Tor Ghar Base Camp 281 

Vignette 5 - Battles for Sharafat Koh Mountain Fortress 285 

Vignette· 6 - Qala-e Naw Base Camp Defense 297 

Vignette 7 - Defending the Suburbs of Kandahar 301 

Vignette 8 - Defending the Malajat 305 

Vignette 9 - Battle for Chaharqulba Village 311 

Vignette 10 - Zhawar One 317 

Vignette 11 - Zhawar Two 323 

Vignette 12 - Krer One 327 

Vignette 13 - Krer Two 331 

Vignette 14 - The Fall of Chaghni Base Camp 335 

Chapter 12: Counterambushes 341 

Vignette 1 - Caught in a Soviet Ambush 343 

Vignette 2 - Ambushed at Farza 347 

Vignette 3 - Blasting out of an Ambush 349 

Vignette 4 - Caught in a DRA Ambush 350 

Vignette 5 - Ambushed on the High Plain 351 

Chapter 13: Fighting in an EnCirclement 355 

Vignette 1 - A trip to the "Governor's House" goes bad 356 

Vignette 2 - The Battle for Musa Qaleh 359 

Vignette 3 - Escape from the Arghanday Encirclement 363 

v 
Chapter 14: , Urban Combat 365 

Vignette 1 - Kidnaping a Soviet Adviser 366 

Vignette 2 - Four Urban Bomb Attacks 368 

Vignette 3 - Incident at Qala-e Jabar 371 

Vignette 4 - Mshar Ambush 373 

Vignette 5 - Remote-control Attack on a Convoy in 377 

the Suburbs . 

Vignette 6 - Attack on the Ministry of Defense 379 

Vignette 7 - Alcohol Can Be Deadly 382 

Vignette 8 - Raid on Balahessar Fortress 383 

Vignette 9 - Raid on the Kabul Metropolitan Bus 385 

Transportation Authority 

Vignette 10 - Weapons raid in Charikar 387 

Vignette 11 - Night raid. on a city outpost 389 

Vignette 12 -Raid on Kandahar Communications Center 391 

Vignette 13 - Attack on KHAD Headquarters 393 

Vignette 14 - Raid on the 15th Division Garrison 396 

Chapter 15: Conclusion 399 

Glossary 

Symbols library 

Index 

About the authors 

vi 

407 

415 

417 

421 
INTRODUCTION 

As we have throughout our history-the Philippines, Haiti, 

Nicaragua, Lebanon, Vietnam and Somalia-Marines will encounter 

guerrilla forces in the 21•1 century. Marines must understand potential 

adversaries, and learn as much af? possible about them. The 

mujahideen of the Soviet-Mghan War prevailed against a larger and 

decisively better equipped foe, the Soviet Army. The Other Side of the 

Mountain presents the story of the mujahideen's fight against that foe. 

On 27 December 1979, Moscow ordered the Soviet Army into 

Mghanistan. Organized, equipped, and traip.ed for the execution of 

combined arms operations, that force embodied the concept of 

blitzkrieg. Nine years later, it withdrew in defeat. The Other Side of 

the Mountain was written from the reports of mujahideen combat veterans and provides a tactical look at a decentralized army of footmobile guerrillas waging war against a technologically superior foe. 

Absolute supremacy of firepower did not guarantee victory. Native 

knowledge of terrain and detailed study of a known adversary offset 

that advantage. In particular, the chapter on urban combat will be of 

great interest to commanders concerned with force protection. This 

book and its companion volume, The Bear Went Over the Mountain: 

Soviet Combat Tactics in Afghanistan, published for the United States 

Marine Corps in 1996, offers a chronicle of the Mghan War by the 

warfighters. 

The Marine Corps of the 21•1 century will have tremendous advantages over guerrilla forces. Our equipment, technology, training, and 

support are the best in the world. Yet, technological superiority is not 

in and of itself a guarantee of success. Insight into our adversary's 

capabilities, tactics and motivation will provide the decisive edge. The 

Other Side of the Mountain will help us gain this insight. I heartily 

recommend this book to all Marines. 

J. E. RHODES 

Commanding General 

Marine Corps Combat 

Development Command 

vii 
FOREWORD 

When the Soviet Union invaded Afghanistan in 1979, few experts 

believed that the fledgling Mujahideen resistance movement had a 

chance of withstanding the modern, mechanized, technologicallyadvanced Soviet Army. Most stated that resistance was futile and that 

the Soviet Union had deliberately expanded their empire to the south. 

The Soviet Union had come to stay. Although some historians looked 

at the British experience fighting the Afghan mountain tribesmen, 

most experts discounted any parallels since the Soviet Union possessed an unprecedented advantage in fire power, technology and 

military might. Although Arab leaders and the West supplied arms 

and material to the Mujahideen, they did so with the hope of creating a permanent, bleeding ulcer on the Soviet flank, not defeating 

the Soviet Union. They did not predict that the Soviet Union would 

voluntarily withdraw from Afghanistan in 1989. 

What caused the Soviet withdrawal? The Soviets realized that 

they were trapped in an unwinnable war where they were suffering 

"death from a thousand cuts" by an intractable enemy who had no hope 

of winning, but fought on because it was the right thing to do. After 

failing to achieve military victory, the Soviet Union cut its losses and 

withdrew. The Soviet Union ·lost 13,833 killed. Over 1.3 million 

Afghans died and over a third of the population became refugees. Most 

have not yet returned to war-torn Afghanistan. 

There have been few studies of guerrilla warfare from the guerrilla's perspective. To capture this perspective and the tactical experience of the Mujahideen, the United States Marine Corps commissioned 

this study and sent two retired combat veterans to interview 

Mujahideen .. The authors were well received and generously assisted 

by various Mujahideen who willingly talked about their long, bitter 

war. The authors have produced a unique book which tells the guerrillas' story as interpreted by military professionals. This is a book 

about small-unit guerrilla combat. This is a book about death and 

survival, adaptation and perseverance. 

This is a book for the combat-arms company and field grade officer 

and NCO. It provides an understanding of guerrilla field craft, tactics, 

ix 
techniques and procedures. It has application in Basic and Advanced 

Officer and NCO courses as well as special warfare courses. Senior 

leaders will also find valuable insights for training and supporting 

guerrilla forces as well as defending against guerrilla forces. This book 

is a companion piece to The Bear Went Over the Mountain: Soviet 

Combat Tactics in Afghanistan which National Defense University 

press published in 1996. 

X 
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 

This book would not be possible without the open, friendly and willing support of the many Mujahideen we interviewed. We thank 

Mawlawi Abdul-Rahman, Haidar Ahmadi, Mohammad Akbar, 

Akhtarjhan, Doctor Abdul Qudus Alkozai, Assadullah Mohammad 

Asef, Assadullah, Mawlawi Mohayddin Baloch, Abdul Baqi Balots, 

Abdul N asrin Baz, Commander Didar, Daoud, Gulaga Farid, Ghulam 

Farouq, Pir Syed Ahmad Gailani, Haji Zaman Ghamsharik, Abdul 

Ghani, Sofi Lal Gul, Wazir Gul, Tsaranwal Sher Habib, Haji 

Habibulah, Ghulam Haidar, Haji Sayed Mohammad Hanif, Mawlali 

Nezamuddin Haqani, Hedayatullah, Toryalai Hemat, Engineer 

Mohammad Ibrahim, Mohammad Shah Kako, Asef Khan, Asil Khan, 

Haji Badshah Khan, N awaz Khan, Counsel General Haji Abdul 

Khaleq, Haji Badshah Khan, Major Sher Aqa Kochay, Lalai, Mulla 

Malang, Haji Malangyar, Akhtar Mohammad, Amir Mohammad, Haji 

Lal Mohammad, Haji Pir Mohammad, Engineer Sayed Mohammad, 

Qari Feda Mohammad, Sultan Mohammad, Mohammad Amin 

Mudaqeq, Haji Nematullah, Lieutenant Zabet Omar, Sher Padshah, 

Haji Abdul Qader, Akhund Zada Qasem, Mawlawi Qasem, LTC Haji 

Mohammad Rahim, Abdul Razek, Mohammad Saber, Abdul Sabur, 

Doctor Mohammad Sadeq, Amin Safi, Haji Aaquelshah Sahak, Abdul 

Sadiq Sahebzada, Sarshar, Haji Mohammad Seddiq, Shahabuddih, 

Haji Mohammad Shah, Mohammad Humayun Shahin, Mawlawi 

Abdul Shukur Yasini, Haji Sidiqullah, Qazi Guljan Tayeb, General 

Abdul Rahim Wardak, Doctor Mohammad Wakil, Doctor Mohammad 

Wali, Haji Mohammad Yakub, General Gulzarak Zadran and Zakari 

for generously sharing their time and experience. We can only hope 

that peace will finally come to Mghanistan so that they can start the 

long, difficult job of rebuilding their shattered country. 

Our special thanks for the generous hospitality and support 

extended to us by Nancy Dupree of the Agency Coordinating Body for· 

Mghan Relief, Pir . Gailani, Mr. Kamaluddin of the Mghan Media 

Resource Center, Abdul Ahad Karzai, Ahmed Wali Karzai, General 

Counsel Haji Abdul Khaleq, Vice Counsel Muhammad Wali Naeemi 

and Abdul Ghani Wardak. 

A special thanks to our colleague, Major N asrullah Safi, who went 

into areas of Mghanistan to conduct interviews where we could not go. 

We contacted several major Mujahideen commanders such as Ismail 

xi 
Khan, Masood, Abdul Haq, and Jaialuddin Haqani for interviews and 

material, but we were unable to meet with them before the book deadline. Our thanks in advance for the privilege of returning at a future 

time to conduct those interviews and to include them in a follow-on book. 

Our special thanks to Colonel David 0. Smith, Lieutenant Colonel 

Terry Cook, Captain Bob Hehl and TSGT Barry Cuthbertson of the 

United States Defense Attache Office in Islamabad and Principal 

Officer of the United States Consulate in Peshawar, Brad Hanson. 

The United States Marine Corps funded the research, writing and 

publication of this book. Charlie Cutshaw, Karen Dolan and Dick Voltz 

of the USMC Studies and Analysis Division at Quantico, Virginia 

provided funding for printing The Bear Went Over The Mountain: 

Soviet Combat Tactics in Afghanistan and agreed to underwrite the · 

production of this counterpart volume on Mujahideen tactics. Colonel 

Charles Johnston, the former Director of the U.S. Army Foreign 

Military Studies Office (FMSO) enthusiastically supported the 

research and production as did FMSO Director Dr. Graham Turbiville, 

and FMSO analysts Dr. Jacob Kipp, Tim Thomas and Major Ray 

Finch. Robert Love helped with translation support and Linda Pride 

and Al Lindman provided computer assistance: The Combined Arms 

Research Library and Command and General Staff College Map 

Library at Fort Leavenworth provided invaluable assistance. Alice 

Mink of FMSO kept the whole production on time and under budget. 

A ''band of brothers," skilled in tactics, read and provided commentary on the manuscript. Our special thanks to Colonel (Ret) David M. 

Glantz of Carlisle, Pennsylvania; Colonel (Ret.) Charles E. Johnston, 

foriner Director of FMSO; Colonel (Ret) William M. Mendel of FMSO; 

Allen E. Curtis, Director of Intelligence and Security at the National 

Training Center; former Marine Captain (Ret) Tim Leaf of Quantico, 

· Virginia; Lieutenant Colonel John E. Sray of CENTCOM; Lieutenant 

Colonel Karl Prinslow of FMSO; and Major Darr Reimers of the 1st 

. Cavalry Division. 

Mary Ann Glantz graciously edited the manuscript. Jonathan 

Pierce was the book editor/designer, Rhonda Gross created the initial 

map graphics, and Emily Pierce did a superb job of finishing the maps 

and designing the cover. 

Homaira Jalali and Gina Grau showed remarkably good humor 

and supported the efforts of their husbands as they gathered the material and worked on the book; We thank all of you for your help. Any 

mistakes are the authors. 

xii 
PREFACE 

Mghanistan, a multi-ethnic state in southwest Asia, is home to 

diverse social communities that share common experience through 

interaction with dominant states, empires, invading armies, trade 

and cultural movements that traversed the land during their thousands of years of history. The different ethnic groups in modern 

Mghanistan (Pashtuns, Tajiks, Uzbeks, Turkmans, Persian-speaking 

Hazaras, Balochis, etc.) straddle the boundries of the state. However, 

their national identity is mostly defined by their differences with 

their ethnic kinsmen across the borders rather than their national 

commonalities. About 99% of Mghanistan's over 17 million population are Muslim, of which 85% are followers of the Sunni sect while 

the rest are Shia. About 85% of Mghans live in rural communities in 

a land dominated by mountains and deserts. Modern travel is 

primarily restricted to a highway ring connecting the various cities. 

There is no railroad network. 

Mghanistan has mostly been a loose collection of tribes and nationalities over which central governments had varying degrees of influence and control at different times. The country has been historically 

known for its remarkable Islamic and ethnic tolerence. However tribal rivalries and blood feuds, ambitions of local chieftains, and tribal 

defiance of pervasive interference by the central government have kept 

the different parts of the land at war at different times. In such cases 

the kinship-based identity has been the major means of the community's political and military mobilization. Such identity places far 

greater importance on kinship and extended family than ideology. 

Mghanistan stands at a geographic crossroads that has seen the 

passage of many warring peoples. Each of these has left their imprint 

on the ancient land and involved the people of Mghanistan in conflict. 

Often this conflict got in the ~ay of economic development. What has 

developed is a country composed of somewhat autonomous "village 

states" spread across the entire country. 1 Mghans identify themselves 

. by Qawm-the basic subnational identity based on kinship, residence 

and sometimes occupation. Western people may refer to this as "tribe", 

but this instinctive social cohesiveness includes tribal clans, ethnic 

1 Ali A. Jalali, "Clashes of Ideas and Interests in Afghanistan", paper given at the Institute 

of World Politics, Washington, D.C., July 1995, page 4. 

xiii 
subgroups, religious sects, locality-based groups and groups united by 

interests.2 The Qawm, not Mghanistan, is the basic unit of social 

community and, outside the family, the most important focus on individual loyalty. Mghanistan has, at times, been characterized as a 

disunited land riven by blood feuds. The feuds center on family and 

Qawm. Yet, the leaders of the various Qawm have resolved feuds and 

held the land together. Village elders can put feuds on hold for a 

decade or longer and then let them resume once the agreed-on time has 

expired and the matter is still unresolved. Mghanistan's ancient roots 

and strong ties of kinship provide an anchor against progress, but also 

the means to cope when central authority has collapsed. Historically, 

the collapse of the central government of Mghanistan or the destruction of its standing armies has never resulted in the defeat of the 

nation by an invader. The people, relying on their decentralized political, economic and military potential, have always taken over the 

resistance against the invaders.3 This was the case during two wars 

with Great Britain in the 19th Century (1839-1842, 1878-1880). This 

happened again in the Soviet-Mghan War. 

The tactics of the Mujahideen reflected this lack of central cohesion. Their tactics were not standard, but differed from valley to 

valley and tribe to tribe. No more than 15 percent of the guerrilla 

commanders were military professionals. However, Mghanistan had 

a conscript army and virtually every 22-year-old male served his two 

year obligation. This provided a basic military education which eased 

cooperation between the various Mujahideen groups. The Mujahideen were true volunteers-unpaid warriors who fought to protect 

their faith and community first and their nation next. As true volunteers, fighting for their Qawm and religion, the Mujahideen looked 

down on the professional soldier (asker) as a simple mercenary who 

was either the victim of a press gang or too stupid to ply any other 

trade.4 This disdain did not attach to the professional officer, who 

enjoyed a great deal of prestige. 

Mghanistan was . not a guerrilla war ala Mao Tse Tung or Vo 

Nguyen Giap. The Mujahideen were not trying to force a new ideology and government on a land. Rather, they fought to defend their 

Qawm and their religion against a hostile ideology, an atheistic value 

2 ibid,3. 

3 ibid,4. 

4 Oliver Roy, The Failure of Political Islam, Cambridge: Harvard University Press, ·1994, 

page 158-159. 

xiv 
system, an oppressive central government and a foreign invader. It 

was a spontaneous defense of community values and a traditional way 

of life by individual groups initially unconnected to national or international political organizations.5 

The Great Game 6 

Russian expansionism and empire building in Central Asia began 

in 1734 and Moscow's interest in Afghanistan was apparent by the late 

1830s. The Great Game described the British and Russian struggle for 

influence along the unsettled northern frontier of British India and in 

the entire region between Russia and India. Afghanistan lay directly 

in this contested area between two empires. Russia described her 

motives in the Great Game as simply to abolish the slave trade and to 

establish order and control along .her southern border. The British, 

however, viewing Russian absorption of the lands of the Caucasus, 

Georgia, Khirgiz, Turkmens, Khiva and Bukhara, claimed to feel 

threatened by the presence of a large, expanding empire near India 

and ascribed different Russian motives. The British stated that 

Russian motives were to weaken British power and to gain access to a 

warm-water port. Britain claimed that her own actions were to protect 

the frontiers of British India. 

The Great Game spilled into Afghanistan when British forces 

invaded during the First Anglo-Afghan War (1839-1842). Britain 

claimed that the invasion was supposed to counter Russian influence. 

After hard fighting, the British withdrew. By 1869, the Russian 

empire reached the banks of the Amu Darya (Oxus) river-the north- . 

ern border of Afghanistan. This caused additional British concern. In 

1878, the arrival of a special Russian diplomatic mission to Kabul led 

to another British invasion and the Second Anglo-Afghan War. The 

British Army again withdrew. In the Anglo-Russian Treaty of 1907, 

the Russians agreed that Afghanistan lay outside its sphere of interest and agreed to confer with Britain on all matters relating to 

Russian-Afghan relations. In return, Britain agreed not to occupy or 

annex any part of Afghanistan nor interfere in the internal affairs of 

that country. Although the Amir of Afghanistan refused to recognize 

the treaty, Russia and Britain agreed to its terms and honored them . 

s Jalali,1 

6 Section derived from Richard F. Nyrop and Donald M. Seekins (editors), Afghanistan: A 

Country Study, Fifth edition, Washington: US Government Printing Office, 1986, 22-73 and 

Peter Hopkirk, The Great Game, New York: Kodansha International, 1994. 

XV 
until 1919 when Afghan troops crossed into British India, seized a 

village and attempted to raise a popular revolt in the area. The 

Brit~sh responded, with yet another invasion and the Third AngloAfghan War. The political settlement resulted in Afghanistan's full 

independence from Great Britain. 

Afghanistan's foreign policy from 1919 until 1978 balanced the 

demands of her immediate neighbors, and external powers such as the 

United States, Germany and Great Britain. Normal relations with her 

northern neighbor, the Soviet Union, led to increased Soviet investment and presence in Afghanistan. 

In April1978, a small leftist group of Soviet-trained Afghan officers 

seized control of the government and founded the Democratic Republic 

of Afghanistan, a client state of the Soviet Union. Civil war broke out 

in Afghanistan. The putsch installed President Nur M. Taraki, a 

Marxist who announced sweeping programs of land distribution, 

changed status for women and the destruction of the old Afghanistan 

social structure. Disregarding the national social structure and mores, 

the new government enjoyed little popular support. The wobbly Taraki 

government was almost immediately met by increased armed resistance as the Mujahideen ranks grew. In 1978, religious leaders, in 

response to popular uprisings across Afghanistan, issued statements of 

jihad (holy war) against the communist regime. This was an appeal to 

the supranational identity of all Afghans--a fight to defend the faith of 

Islam. The combat readiness of the Army of the Democratic Republic 

of Afghanistan plunged as government purges swept the officer corps. 

Soldiers, units and entire regiments deserted to the resistance and by 

the end of 1979, the actual strength of the Afghan Army was less than 

half of its authorized 90,000. In March 1979, the city of Herat revolted and most of the Afghan 17th Infantry Division mutinied and joined 

the rebellion. Forces loyal to Taraki reoccupied the city after the 

Afghan Air Force bombed the city and the 17th Division. Thousands of 

people reportedly died in the fighting, including some Soviet citizens. 

Soviet Intervention 

The Soviet-Afghan War began over the issue of control. The 

Democratic Republic of Afghanistan was nominally a socialist state 

governed by a communist party. However, the state only controlled 

some of the cities, while tribal elders and clan chiefs controlled the 

countryside. Furthermore, the communist party ofAfghanistan was 

split into two hostile factions. The factions spent more time fighting 

xvi· 
each other than trying to establish socialism in Afghanistan. In 

September 1979, Taraki's Prime Minister, Hafizullah Amin, seized 

power and murdered Taraki. Amin's rule proved no better and the 

Soviet Union watched this new communist state spin out of control. 

Meanwhile, units of the army mutinied, civil war broke out, cities and 

villages rose in revolt and Afghanistan began to slip away from 

Moscow's control and influence, Leonid Brezhnev, the aged Soviet 

General Secretary, saw that direct military intervention was the only · 

way to prevent his client state from disintegrating into complete chaos. 

He decided to intervene. 

The obvious models for intervention were Hungary in 1956 and 

Czechoslovakia in 1968. The Soviet General Staff planned the 

Afghanistan invasion based on these models. However, there was a 

significant difference that the Soviet planners missed. Afghanistan 

. was embroiled in a civil war and a coup de main would only gain 

control of the central government, not the countryside. Although 

participating military units were briefed at the last minute, the Soviet 

Christmas Eve invasion of 1979 was masterfully planned and wellexecuted. The Soviets seized the government, killed the president and 

put their own man in his place. According to some Russian sources, 

they planned to stabilize the situation, strengthen the army and then 

withdraw the majority of Soviet forces within three years. The Soviet 

General Staff planned to leave all fighting in the hands of the army of 

the Democratic Republic. But Afghanistan was in full revolt, the 

dispirited Afghan army was unable to cope, and the specter of defeat 

following a Soviet withdrawal haunted the Politburo. Invasion and 

overthrow of the government proved much easier than fighting the 

hundreds of ubiquitous guerrilla groups. The Soviet Army was 

trained for large-scale, rapid-tempo operations. They were not 

trained for the platoon leaders' war of finding and closing with small, 

indigenous forces which would only stand and fight when the terrain 

and circumstances were to their advantage. 

Back in the Soviet Union, there was no one in charge and all decisions were committee decisions made by the collective leadership. 

General Secretary Brezhnev became incapacitated in 1980 but did not 

·die until November ~982. He was succeeded by the ailing Yuri 

Andropov. General Secretary Andropov lasted less than two years and 

was succeeded by the faltering Konstantin Chernenko in February 

i984. General Sec;retary Chernenko died in March 1985. Although 

the military leadership kept recommending withdrawal, during this 

xvii 
"twilight of the general secretaries" no one was making any major decisions as to the conduct and outcome of the war in Mghanistan. The 

war bumped on at its own pace. Finally, Mikhail Gorbachev came to 

power. His first instinct was to order military victory in Mghanistan 

within a year. Following this bloodiest year of the war, Gorbachev realized that the Soviets could not win in Mghanistan without unacceptable international and internal repercussions and began to cast 

about for away to withdraw with dignity. United Nations negotiators 

provided that avenue and by 15 October 1988, the first half of the 

Soviet withdrawal was complete. On 15 February 1989, the last Soviet 

forces withdrew from Mghanistan. Soviet force commitment, initially 

assessed as requiring several months, lasted over nine years and 

required increasing numbers of forces. The Soviet Union reportedly 

killed 1.3 million people and forced 5.5 million Mghans (a third of the 

prewar population) to leave the country as refugees. Another 2 million 

Mghans were forced to migrate within the country. The country has 

yet to recover. 

Initially the Mujahideen were all local residents who took arms and 

banded together into large, rather unwieldy, forces to seize the local 

district capitols and loot their arms rooms. The DRA countered these 

efforts where it could and Mujahideen began to coalesce into much 

smaller groups centered around the rural village. These small groups 

were armed with a variety of weapons from swords and flintlock muskets to British bolt-action rifles and older Soviet and Soviet-bloc 

weapons provided . to Mghanistan over the years. The guerrilla 

commanders were usually influential villagers who already had a 

leadership role in the local area. Few had any professional military 

experience. Rebellion was wide-spread, but uncoordinated since the 

resistance was formed along tribal and ethnic lines. 

The Soviet invasion changed the nature of the Mujahideen resistance. Mghanistan's neighbors, Pakistan and Iran, nervously regarded the advance to the Soviet Army to their borders and began provid- · 

ing training and material support to the Mujahideen. The United 

States, Peoples Republic of China, Britain, France, Italy, Saudi Arabia, 

Egypt, and the United Arab Emirates pegan funneling military, 

humanitarian and financial aid to the Mujahideen through Pakistan. 

Pakistan's assessment was that the Soviet Union had come to 

Mghanistan to stay and it was in Pakistan's best interests to support 

those Mujahideen who would never accept the Soviet presence. The 

Pakistan Inter-Services. Intelligence Agency (lSI) began to funnel aid 

xviii 
through various Mghan political factions headquartered in Pakistan. 

Eventually there were seven major Mghan factions receiving aid. The 

politics of these factions were determined by their leaders' religious 

convictions-three of which were Islamic moderates and four of which 

were Islamic fundamentalists. Pakistan required that .the various 

ethnic and tribal Mujahideen groups join one of the factions in order to 

receive aid. Over time, this provided the leaders of these factions with 

political power which they used to dominate the politics of postcommunist Mghanistan. The Pakistani authorities favored the mostfundamentalist groups and. rewarded them accordingly. This aid 

distribution gave the Mghan religious leaders unprecedented power in 

the conduct of the war. It also undermined the traditional authority of 

the tribal and village leaders. 

The Mujahideen were unpaid volunteers with family responsibilities. This meant that they were part-time warriors and that spoils of 

war played a major role in military actions. Mujahideen sold mostly 

· captured weapons and equipment in the bazaars to support their 

families. As the war progressed, mobile Mujahideen groups emerged. 

The mobile Mujahideen groups were larger and consisted of young 

(under 25), unmarried, better-trained warriors. Sometimes the mobile 

Mujahideen were paid. The mobile Mujahideen ranged over a much 

larger area of operations than the local Mujahideen and were more 

responsive to the plans and desires of the factions. 

The strategic struggle for Mghanistan was a fight to strangle the 

other's logistics. The Mujahideen targeted the Soviet lines of communication-the crucial road net work over which the Soviet supplies 

had to travel. The Soviet attack on the Mujahideen logistics was two 

phased. From 1980 until 1985, the Soviets sought to eliminate 

Mujahideen support in the rural countryside. They bombed granaries 

and rural villages, destroyed crops and irrigation systems, mined 

pastures and fields, destroyed herds and launched sweeps through 

rural areas-conscripting young men and destroying the infrastructure. The Soviet leadership, believing Mao Tse Tung's dictum that the 

guerrilla lives in the population like a fish in water, decided to kill the 

fish by draining off the water. 7 As a result, Mghanistan became a 

nation of refugees as more than seven million rural residents fled to 

the relative safety of neighboring Pakistan and Iran or to the cities of 

Afghanistan. This Soviet effort denied rural support to the 

Mujahideen, since the villagers had left and most of the food now had 

1 Claude Malhauret, Afghan Alternative Seminar, Monterey, California, November 1993. 

xix 
to be carried along with weapons and ammunition and materials of 

war. The Mujahideen responded by establishing logistics bases inside 

Afghanistan. The Soviet fight from 1985 to withdrawal was to find 

and destroy these bases. 

Terrain, as any infantryman knows, is the ultimate shaper of the 

battlefield. Afghanistan's terrain is varied and challenging. It is 

dominated by towering mountains and forbidding desert.. Yet it also. 

has lush forests of larch, aspen and juniper. It has tangled "green 

zones"-irrigated areas thick with trees, vines, crops, irrigation ditches and tangled vegetation. It has flat plains full of wheat and swampy 

terraces which grow delicious long-grained rice. It is not ideal terrain 

for a mechanized force dependent on fire power, secure lines of communication and high-technology. It is terrain where the mountain 

warrior, using ambush sites inherited from his· ancestors, can inflict 

"death from a thousand cuts". The terrain dictates different tactics, 

force structure and equipment from those of conventional war.· 

This book is not a complete history of the Soviet-Afghan War. 

Rather, it is a series of combat vignettes as recalled by the Mujahideen 

participants. It is not a book about right or wrong. Rather, it is a book 

about survival against the overwhelming firepower and technological 

might of a superpower. This is the story of combat from the guerrilla's 

perspective. It is the story of brave p.eople who fought without hope of 

winning because it was the right thing to do. 

About the Book 

Author Les Grau, regularly travels back and forth to Russia. He 

received a book from the History of Military Art department at the 

Frunze Combined Arms Academy in Moscow. The book was intended 

for students' classroom use only and, as such, shows both the good 

and the bad. With Frunze Academy permission, Les translated this 

book and added commentary before it was published by NDU Press 

as The. Bear Went Over the Mountain: Soviet Combat Tactics in 

Afghanistan. Author Ali Jalali, helped in the editing process. "The 

Bear" showed the tactics of the Soviets, but the Mujahideen tactics 

were absent. Charlie Cuthbertson and Dick Voltz of the USMC in 

Quantico agreed that both sides needed to be presented and sent Ali 

and Les to Pakistan and Afghanistan to interview Mujahideen commanders for a companion volume. 

Author Ali Jalali has the perfect credentials to do this book. Ali 

was a Colonel in the Afghan Army and taught at the Afghan Military 

XX 
Academy and Army Staff College. His foreign education included the 

Infantry Officer's Advanced Course at Fort Benning, Georgia; the 

British Army Staff College at Camberley; and the Soviet Frunze 

Academy. Many of Ali's officer students were key resistance figures. 

Ali was also a member of the resistance and an accredited journalist 

during the conflict. Now Ali works as a journalist and has covered 

Mghanistan and Central Asia over the last 15 years. Ali is respected 

by all the factions and has exceptional entre to the Mujahideen. 

Ali and Les arrived in Pakistan in Septemb.er 1996 and were 

preparing to go into Mghanistan when the Taliban advance on Kabul 

closed the borders to American citizens. Ali interviewed some 40 

Mujahideen during a month in Peshawar, Quetta, and Islamabad, 

Pakistan. Our colleague, Major N asrullah Safi, conducted interviews 

for another two months inside Mghanistan for this book. The interviews are the basis of this book. In those interviews where we have 

several sources for the same vignette or where we have lots of. 

supporting written reports and material, we have written the vignette 

in the third person. In those cases where the person interviewed is the 

primary source, we have written the vignette in the first person. The 

vignettes are arranged chronologically by type of action. Occasionally, 

when the actions occur at the same place over time, we lump those 

actions together instead of chronologically. We have tried to make the 

book as accurate as possible, but realize that time and retelling may 

have altered some of the facts. We have limited the span of the book 

from the Soviet invasion until their withdrawal. The war started 

before the Soviet invasion and continued long after their departure. 

We plan to write about these battles in a future book. 

We used edition 2-DMA series U6111:100,000 maps from the U.S. 

Defense Mapping Agency for the final preparation of the material. 

For those who wish to consult the map sheets, map sheet numbers 

are given with each vignette. We have numbered each vignette within the chapter and started each chapter with a country map showing 

the rough location of each vignette. The interviews were long and 

exhaustive, so many details are available. Many of the interviews 

were conducted at different times and places, with different people 

who had been part of the same battle or operation. This allowed us 

to check and compare details and sequences of events. Map elevations are given in meters. Contour intervals are not consistent and 

merely show elevation. Place and name spelling is based on Ali 

Jalali's best transliteration efforts. Consistency in spelling is diffixxi 
cult when two alphabets are involved-some spellings are different 

than in other books on Afghanistan. Although the Mujahideen 

always say 'Russian' instead of 'Soviet', we have used 'Soviet' 

throughout unless it is a direct quote. · 

We use Russian map graphics on the maps. The Afghan Army 

used the Soviet graphics system and most Mujahideen were familiar 

with them. Russian graphics are more "user friendly" ( flexible and 

illustrative) than Western graphics. The Russians can show the 

sequential development of an action by adding times or identifying 

lines to their graphics. These lines are explained in the legend. A 

table of Russian map graphics is located in the back of the book. 

Mujahideen forces are shown in blue and Soviet/DRA forces are 

shown in red. 

xxii 
THE OTHER SIDE OF THE MOUNTAIN: 

Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 
CHAPTER 1 

AMBUSHES 

The ambush is a favorite tactic of the guerrilla since it allows him 

to mass forces covertly, attack the enemy, seize needed supplies and 

retreat before the enemy can effectively react. The ambush has long 

been part of the Afghan warrior tradition and has been a key feature 

of historic Afghan warfare-whether fighting other tribes, the British 

or the government. The Mujahideen ambush served to attack the 

Soviet/DRA lines of communication, provided needed supplies, and 

forced the bulk of Soviet/DRA maneuver forces to perform security missions .. Logistics were key to the conduct of the Soviet/Afghan War and 

Mujahideen ambushes threatened the resupply of Soviet and DRA 

forces and limited the number of Soviet troops that could be deployed 

into the country. The Mujahideen ambush was their most effective 

counter to Soviet/DRA military activity and threatened the ability of 

the Soviets and DRA to prosecute the war. 

Afghanistan 

Chapter 1 

Incidents 
Page 4 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War • 

N 

I 

• • • • ••• • AHMADZI KALA 

• 

•••• I .• '=.• ••• MOHAMMAD 

••• ••• 

•• 

I PUL-E QANDAHARI 

{ 0 2 3KM 

' ~----~----~-----J 

' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' \ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

MAMUR1 

Map.1 
VIGNETTE 1 

AMBUSHES AT THE MAMUR HOTEL 

by Commander Mohammad Akbar 

A day seldom passed without a clash between the Mujahideen and 

the Soviets. or DRA in Logar Province. In the summer of 1980, my · 

group set an ambush to attack a supply column of Soviet and DRA 

forces moving from Kabul to Gardez on highway 157. At that time, the 

populace had not migrated from the area and it was full of people. The 

Mujahideen had contacts in the government who reported on the movement of columns along the main highway. This was to be our first 

attack on a major column on this highway following the Soviet invasion. The ambush site was located around the Pul-e Qandahari junction with the main highway. At this point, the Logar River comes within 200 meters of the highway to the east, and the Kuh-e Mohammad 

Agha hills rise some 700 meters over the highway to the west. Ten 

kilometers to the south, the road runs through a steep gorge where 

vehicles cannot easily turn back (Map 1 - Mamur 1). We had 50 

Mujahideen armed with Mosin-Nagant carbines, Enfield rifles and two 

RPG-7s. Our leader, Commander Hayat, divided our men into three 

groups and put one group in the Bini Sherafghan ruins some 70 meters 

west of the road. He put the . second group to the east of the road 

around the Mamur Hotel and put the third group to the east in Pul-e 

Qandahari facing the Mohammad Agha High School. Our ambush 

occupied a two-kilometer stretch. At this time, I was the late 

Commander Hayat's deputy commander, commanding the Pul-e 

Qandahari positions. 

Commander Hayat ordered that the attack would start when 

the end of the column reached the Bini Shirafghan ruins. The DRA 

column came. It had about 100 vehicles carrying food, ammunition 

and fuel. There were quite a few POL tankersin the column. We let 

it pass and, as the end of the column reached the ruins, we started 

to attack at the end of the column. In those days, convoy escort was 

very weak and air support was insufficient. There was practically no 

resistance or reaction to our attack from the column. Even the APCs 

which were escorting the column were passive. We left our positions 

Mohammad Akbar is' from the village of Shahi Kala in Mohammad Agha District of Logar 

Province. He graduated from high school in the region and joined the resistance in 1979 

and fought in Logar Province until the collapse of the DRA. He was a member of the 

Islamic Party (HIH- Hezb-e Is/ami Gu/buddin). [Map sheet 2885, vic grid 1086]. 
Page 6 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

and started moving up the column, firing as we went, and damaged 

or destroyed almost all the vehicles. We had no casualties. I don't 

know how many DRA casualties there were, but we wounded many 

drivers who the government evacuated later. We left the area 

promptly after the ambush. 

The area around the Mamur Hotel was ideal for an ambush and 

we, and other Mujahideen groups, used it often. In September 1981, 

we set an ambush at the Mamur Hotel and in Pule-e Qandahari facing 

the high school. The Mamur Hotel group was commanded by the noted 

HIH commander Doctor Abdul Wali Khayat and the Pule-Qandahari 

position was commanded by my commander, the late Commander 

Hayat. There were some 35 Mujahideen armed with AK-4 7 rifles and 

three RPG-7s. The ambush site occupied about one kilometer of roadway. When the column arrived, we destroyed twelve trucks and captured three intact. The three trucks were large, heavy-duty, eightcylinder trucks and they were loaded with beans, rice and military 

boots. We needed all this gear. We also captured two 76inm field guns 

and a heavier gun that I don't know the type or caliber. We did not 

have any Mujahideen casualties. 

In July 1982, the late Doctor Wali Khayat set an ambush near the 

.Mamur Hotel. A Soviet column, moving supplies from Kabul to Gardez, 

entered the ambush kill zone. During the attack, one Mujahideen fired 

an RPG-7 at an escorting APC. It hit the APC and a Soviet officer 

jumped out of the damaged APC and took cover. The officer was 

wounded. While the fighting was going on, the column sped up and left 

the ambush area-and left the officer behind. Doctor Abdul Wali 

Khayat fired at the position where the Soviet officer was. The Soviet 

officer returned fire with his AK-74. Doctor Khayat fired again and 

wounded the Soviet officer a second time-this time in the hand. The 

Soviet officer dropped his AK-7 4 a:nd took out his pistol. Doctor Khayat 

threw a hand grenade at the officer and killed him. Then he crossed 

the road and took his AK-74 and his Makarov pistol. He left the body 

where it lay and the Mujahideen left the ambush site. 

The next day the Soviets returned in a column from Kabul. They 

cordoned off the area and searched the houses around Mohammad 

Agha District headquarters and the town of Kotubkhel. They went 

house to house looking for their missing officer. HIH commander 

Sameh Jan was in Kotubkhel at that time. He coordinated and organized the actions of all the Mujahideen factions which were caught in 

the cordon. There were about 150 Mujahideen caught in the cordon. 

The Mujahideen began attacking the searching Soviets. They 
N 

i 

• • • "•"•" AHMADZI KALA 

• 

Chapter 1 , Vignette 1 Pag·e 7 

MAMUR2 

Map2 

2 .3KM 

~----~----~----~ 

LEGEND 

t;m~ 

Cordon Operations V c ¥" / 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 
Page 8 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

launched sudden, surprise attacks in the close streets and alleys of the 

villages and in the spaces between the villages. The fighting was 

often at point-blank range. The fighting began in the morning and 

continued until the late afternoon (Map 2- Mamur 2). Soviet casualties are unknown but we think that they were heavy. The Mujahideen 

captured four AK-7 4s. Mujahideen casualties were seven KIA including Sameh Jan. Most of the dead Mujahideen had run out of ammunition. The Soviets captured the weapons of the dead Mujahideen 

including someAK-47s, a Goryunov machine gun, an RPG-7 and a few 

AK-7 4s captured from the Soviets in the past. As the Soviets got 

involved in fighting, they stopped searching. As daylight waned, the 

Soviets disengaged, took their dead and withdrew back to Kabul. 

They did find and evacuate the body of their officer who Doctor 

Khayat killed the day before. It was still lying where he was killed. 
VIGNETIE 2 

YET ANOTHER AMBUSH AT THE MAMUR HOTEL 

by Toryalai ·Hem at 

My mobile regiment fought in many provinces in Mghanistan 

during the war. One of our battles was in Mohammad Agha District .. 

of Logar Province. The Jihad began here attacking columns between 

Gardez and Kabul. This action occured on 8 July 1986. It was a 

joint action with the HIH Mujahideen commanded by Doctor Wali 

Khayat and was reported in the media. It was a small ambush 

involving 13 Mujahideen armed with two RPG-7s, one PK machine 

gun and 10 AK-47s. Seven of the Mujahideen were my men and six. 

were HIH. We set the ambush in Kotubkhel near the Mamur Hotel 

which sits beside the main highway. I split the force into two groups. 

I put a six-man group on the east side of the road along the Logar 

River bank. At this point the river is some 40 meters from the road 

and some two meters lower than the surrounding ground. This site 

is by the hotel. I put my seven-man group on the west side of the 

road on high ground. This site is a little further to the south, about 

150 meters from the hotel. The high ground is known as Gumbazo 

Mazogani by the locals. There was an RPG-7 at both sites. We had 

instructed the group that if the column came from Kabul the furthest group (the western group on the high ground) would fire first 

to get the column into the kill zone. That would be the river site's 

signal to fire. We prepared our high ground positions in a ditch 

which was not visible from the road. It is some 200 meters from the 

road. We camouflaged our positions well (Map 3- Mamur 3). 

Our base was three kilometers southeast of Mohamad Agha south 

of the village of Qala-e Shahi near Ahmadzi Kala. We moved from 

Ahmadzi Kala at midnight. It took us one hour to reach the ambush 

site. I was with the western group. We took our positions in the ditch. 

At that time, there was fighting in Paktia Province, Jajai District and 

the enemy was moving reinforcements to the area. In the morning, a 

reinforcing column came. We opened fire when it reached us and the 

eastern ambush site opened up as well. We destroyed or damaged two / 

armored vehicles, three jeeps and eight trucks. Some trucks turned 

Toryalai Hemat was a regimental commander of a Mujahideen Mobile Regiment belonging 

to the Etehad-e Islam[ (IUA) faction of Sayyaf. He fought in many provinces in Afghanistan 

during the war. [Map sheet 2885, vic grid 1 086]. 
Page 10 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

N 

f 

••• I .• ~· 111 MOHAMMAD c •• ~\: .. . ' .. . \ PUL-E QANDAHARI 

I 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

QL----~------~~-----J~KM 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

MAMUR3 

Map3 
Chapter 1, Vignette 2 Page 11 

back to Kabul and others were abandoned. There were some intact 

abandoned trucks outside the kill zone. Dead and wounded lay on the 

ground. Only damaged vehicles were left in the kill zone. We had no 

casualties. In one of the jeeps we fo:und some movie projectors. We 

also captured 11 AKs, two pistols and one heavy machine gun (which 

was mounted on an armored vehicle). We took what we could and split 

the spoils. HIH got all the projectors. We left and went to Wazir Kala 

some fourkilometers away. Helicopter gunships came and fired at our 

old positions. Four Soviet helicopters came and took away their dead 

and wounded. We stayed in Wazir Kala for two or three hours. The 

helicopters were bombing and strafing the .positions all of this time. In 

the late afternoon, when everything settled down, we returned to the 

area to search and see what was left. We removed the heavy machine 

gun and projectors at this time. We stopped a passing bus and asked 

the passengers for matches. At first they refused, not wanting to be 

accomplices, so we searched their pockets and got some matches and 

set fire to the damaged vehicles. Two days later, the Soviets sent a 

force to search our old positions. Of the 13 men in the ambush, only 

Baryali, Asef of HIH and I survived the war. 

COMMENTARY: Both the Soviets and Mujahideen set patterns. The 

Mujahideen use the Mamur Hotel ambush site over and over again, 

yet apparently the Soviets or DRA seldom dismounted troops to 

search the area to spoil the ambush or to try to set a counterambush. 

This last example is from 1986, yet there seems to be no learning 

curve on the part of the Soviets. Air support is tardy, artillery fire is 

unavailable and there is no reserve to move against the ambush. 

Aggressive patrolling, specially-trained counter-ambush forces and 

priority counter:ambush intelligence are lacking. The standard 

Soviet/DRA counter-ambush techniques include an aerial patrol in 

front of the column, an engineer sweep in front of the column looking for mines, armored vehicles in the front of the column, occasional armored vehicles throughout the column and a robust rear guard. 

Once hit, the armored vehicles in the column would return fire while 

the soft-skin vehicles tried to drive out of the kill zone. Seldom 

would the ambushed force dismount forces to clear the ambush site 

and pursue the ambush party. 

The Mujahideen did vary ambush positions in the same ambush 

site. Their primary concern was to hit the column where it was weakest-usually in the middle or rear-unless the purpose was to bottle up 

the column. In most ambushes, a small number of highly-mobile 
Page 12 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

Mujahideen were able to move and attack with little logistic support, 

but were unable to conduct a sustained fight. The RPG-7 was probably the most effective weapon of the Mujahideen. When used at close 

·quarters with the element of surprise, it was devastating. 

In this region, Mujahideen ambushes occupied a very wide front. 

This was a function of the open terrain and the spacing between convoy vehicles. Convoy SOP was to maintain 100 meters or more 

between vehicles. In order to have enough vehicles in the kill zone to 

make the ambush worthwhile, the Mujahideen had to constitute a kill 

zone much bigger than that employed by most Western armies. 
VIGNETTE 3 

AMBUSH SOUTH OF THE TANGI WAGHJAN GORGE 

by Haji Sayed Mohammad Hanif 

In May 1981, we joined other Mujahideen for an ambush in 

Kolangar District, Logar Province (Map 4 - Kolangar). We were 11 

Mujahideen with an RPG-7, seven Kalashnikovs and two Enfields. We 

moved into the area the night before, spent the night in a village and 

set up our ambush site the next morning north of Kolangar District 

Headquarters. We were told that a column was coming from Kabul to 

Gardez, and so we had time to set up during the daylight before the 

column arrived, since the convoys always left Kabul in the morning 

well after dawn. Kabul is about 50 kilometers north of the ambush 

site. We set our ambush just south of the Tangi Waghjan Gorge. 

There, the river continues to run parallel to the road and restricts 

maneuver while providing better firing positions for the ambush force. 

We had a collapsed electric pylon that we stretched across the road as 

a road block. We put in an RPG firing position for Mulla Latif, 1 our 

RPG gunner, and put two other Mujahideen on the edge of the river in 

positions. Then we set up the rest of our positions and went to some 

nearby houses for breakfast. At that time we were so popular with the 

population that we didn't have to worry about supplies and the people 

were always feeding us in their homes or sending us prepared food. 

Mulla Latif left his RPG at the ambush position since the people were 

moving about freely and would keep an eye on things. 

As we were leisurely enjoying our breakfast, some people came into 

the house and said that the convoy was coming from the north. This 

was at about 1000 hours. While we were running to our positions, the 

lead tank in the column came to our road block. The tank driver 

stopped his tank, got out of the tank and moved the barrier. He had 

gotten back into his tank and driven past as we reached our positions. 

Mulla Latif was breathing heavily as he picked up his RPG-7 and fired 

at the next tank. His first shot missed. He reloaded, fired again and 

missed again. He was still breathing too heavily to aim accurately. He 

then reloaded, jumped out of position, and ran down to the road. He 

then sat down in the middle of road and fired at the tank from close 

range·. He hit the tank this time and it burst into flames. The column 

Haji Sayed Mohammad Hanif is from Logar Province. [Map sheet 2885, vic grid 0674]. 

1 Mulla Latif was killed in fighting later in the war. 
Page 14 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

N 

I 

2 3KM 

KOLANGAR 

Map4 
Chapter 1, Vignette 3 Page 15 

was just coming out of the narrow Tangi Waghjan Gorge. This burning tank stopped the convoy since there was no room to maneuver or 

pass. Other Mujahideen from other areas and groups ran to the area 

and moved up the gorge by the trapped column and started firing at 

the vehicles. There was not much resistance from this supply convoy. 

The column consisted of 150 to 200 trucks full of many things such as 

food and furniture. Whatever we could take away, we did. Hundreds 

ofMujahideen came and looted the column. We captured 15 trucks for 

my group which we eventually moved to our base in Durow canyon. 

We torched the vehicles we could not take and left the area around 

1300 hours. Mter we had finished, helicopters and aircraft came and 

pombed some areas around the ambush site. Despite our lack of warning when the lead vehicle came toward our ambush site, the ambush 

turned out well. 

There is a reason why we were not in our positions when the column came. Prior to any ambush, we would select and prepare our 

ambush positions, but we would not occupy them since helicopters 

would always overfly the route ahead of the convoy looking for 

ambushes and roadblocks. Normally, we would not put out the road 

block until after the flyover, but for some reason this time we did. The 

helicopter flyover was our usual tipoff that the convoy was coming, and 

our signal to put out the roadblock and occupy our positions. The helicopters did not do their road sweep in front of this particular convoy. I 

later learned why the helicopters were absent. DRA President Barbak 

Karmal was flying to Moscow that day and so the DRA had imposed a 

"no fly zone" over Kabul. This meant that helicopters were either 

grounded or had to refuel at Ghazni. The helicopters were not available to do the sweep. 

COMMENTARY: The Mujahideen were quick to key on Soviet and DRA 

tactical patterns and procedures and came to rely on them. As a result, 

Mujahideen reactions to these patterns were often stereotyped, but the 

Soviets and DRA evidently did not always pick up on Mujahideen patterns or insure that the relevant tactical commanders got the word. In 

this case, the Tangi Waghjan Gorge is an obvious choke point and 

ambush area. The convoy commander needed to send reconnaissance/security elements ahead of the convoy to secure the gorge's entry, 

high ground and exit prior to moving the convoy into the gorge, but did 

not. His lead armored vehicle spotted the road block and removed it. 

This should have served as a warning, but the convoy commander 

already had the leading part of the convoy driving through the gorge. 
Page 16 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

Depending on initial vehicle interval and the commander's ability to 

stop the convoy from bunching up, some 70 to 150 vehicles may have 

been caught in the three-kilometer gorge. The drivers were dependent 

on firepower to rescue them, but the convoy was unable to bring firepower to bear to save their column. . 

Helicopters have an important role in· convoy security, not only as 

scouts, but as a rapid reaction force and as a lift force to move security elements from one piece of dominant high ground to the next. The 

lack of helicopters deprived the convoy of needed warning and firepower. 

The Mujahideen needed radios and early warning pickets to alert 

ambush forces about the approach of convoys and aircraft. At this 

point of the war, few Mujahideen had tactical radio communications 
VIGNETTE 4 

AMBUSH AT KANDAY 

by Doctor Mohammad Sadeq 

We fought the DRAand Soviets for control of the KunarValley. The 

area borders Pakistan and is very mountainous and forested. Many of 

the mountains are over 5,000 meters high and are permanently snowcapped. We operated in Shewa District along the Kunar River. There, 

the mountains are not as high and the key terrain feature is the Kunar 

River and the highway which parallels it. In September 1982, we 

ambushed a supply column which was traveling from Jalalabad to 

Kunar (Map 5- Kanday). The column was about eight kilometers in 

length. I had 22 Mujahideen armed with two RPG-7s, four AK-47 

Kalashnikovs and 16 bolt-action Enfield rifles. 

I set up the ambush on the high ground north of the Kunar River. 

at Kanday. I divided my force into a support group and an ambush and 

attack group. The support group was on the high ground, while the 

ambush and attack group was below them next to the road. When the 

column came, we let it pass. I wanted to attack near the end of the 

column. As the head of the column reached Ziraybaba, which is six 

kilometers northeast ofKanday, a contact signaled us. We then opened 

fire on the column with our RPGs. An armored vehicle turned off and 

left the road to fire at us. It hit an antitank mine that we had planted 

there. We also hit it with RPG-7 fire. We also hit a ZIL truck. Our 

action split the convoy. Half of the· conyoy went on to Kunar and the 

rest returned to Jalalabad. We didn't have enough fire power to continue the fight, so we withdrew. Besides taking out the armored vehicle and truck, we killed six enemy. I had one Mujahideen wounded. 

COMMENTARY: Deciding where to ambush a long convoy is usually driven by geography, intent and escape routes. The Soviet/DRA convoy 

commander was primarily concerned with not being on the road at 

night and delivering the bulk of his cargo on time. He did not want to 

fight a long, involved battle with guerrillas. If the terrain at the 

ambush site is very constricted, the guerrilla may want to attack the 

head of the convoy and block the route with a combination of a road 

block 3;nd burning vehicles. If the convoy has armored vehicles and 

engineer vehicles concentrated to the front of the convoy, the guerrilla 

Doctor Mohammad Sadeq was a commander with the HIH in Kunar Province. [Map sheet 

3186, vic grid 5328]. 
Page 18 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 
Chapter 1, Vignette 4 Page 19 

may want to attack the middle or tail of the convoy .with the hope that 

the convoy commander will not divert a great deal of combat power 

back to deal with his attack. If the guerrilla is after supplies, the 

middle of the convoy is best if he can isolate a piece ofthe middle, since 

most convoys have a rear guard. In this case, the purpose of the 

ambush was to harass, not to capture supplies. The ambush site was 

fairly constricted due to the proximity of the riverand road to the high 

ground, but it still allowed armored vehicles to turn around in the 

area. The ambush commander decided to attack toward the rear of the 

convoy, but far enough forward to avoid the rear guard. 
Page 20 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afgban War 

0 

BABUR 

Map6 

N 

l 

2KM 
VIGNETTE 5 

AMBUSH ON THE JALALABAD-ASADABAD ROAD 

by LTC Haji Mohammad Rahim 

The Ja.lalabad-Asadabad road runs right by the mouth of the 

Babur Valley (which we nicknamed Islamdara-the Valley of Islam). 

I had my base in the valley with 150 Mujahideen, one 82mm recoilless rifle, three DShK heavy machine guns, a Goryunov medium 

machine gun, five RPG-7s, some Kalashnikovs and some Enfields. I 

decided to set the ambush at the mouth of the valley. It was 

December 1984. The area is perfect for an ambush (Map 6- Babur). 

The mouth of the valley allows a U-shaped ambush with a 1000-

meter kill zone. The forested valley allows a quick escape into the 

forested mountains. I positioned the DShK machine guns on the high 

ground· and put the five RPGs and the recoilless rifle close to the 

road. I had three positions for my force-the bottom of Spereh Ghar 

facing southwest, the valley floor and the ridge of Shunkolay Ghar 

facing south and southeast. I put myself in the center in the valley 

floor position where I could best control the ambush. I had good 

fields of fire to both sides of the ambush site. The terrain is close and 

prevented the enemy from massing fires against the ambush. The 

river prevented the enemy from maneuvering effectively against the 

site. The withdrawal routes are covered. 

A supply convoy came from J alalabad. We let part of it pass to 

attack the middle of the convoy. When we opened fire, the enemy 

was hit from three directions. We destroyed three armored vehicles 

and one truck fully loaded with melons and other fruit and one truck 

full of boxes of cash. Some enemy tried to flee, but were trapped by 

the river which has many channels in this area. The money truck 

caught on fire and some of the money was burned, but we took what 

we could and later I made it a payday for everyone. I still have some 

of those burnt notes and someday I will cash them in for some good 

ones. The enemy tried to fight back and maneuver against us, but 

he could not find any favorable positions. Eventually, enemy helicopter gunships came and forced us out of position. Our concealed 

withdrawal routes through the trees protected us from the gunships. 

Sameh Jan Hejran from Chakdara was killed. He was a teacher. I 

also had one WIA. The enemy losses are unknown since they evacLTC Haji Mohammad Rahim was an officer in the Afghan Army who became a Mujahideen 

and led a group in Kunar Province. [Map sheet 3186, vic grid 7842]. 
Page 22 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War . 

uated their dead. The following day, the DRA came and towed the 

damaged armored vehicles· away. 

CoMMENTARY: The Mujahideen were unpaid volunteers, so the money 

truck was a real boon. Mujahideen still had to support their families, 

so normally all heavy weapons and 1/5th of the loot from .an ambush or 

raid went to the commander. The other 4/5ths was divided among the 

Mujahideen combatants. Some Mujahideen would take their captured 

Kalashnikovs to Pakistan where they would sell them and give the 

money to their families to live on. Governments supporting the 

Mujahideen would buy the weapons in Pakistan's bazaars and give 

them to Mujahideen faction leaders for distribution. 

LTC Rahim's military professionalism shows throughout this 

vignette. His ambush lay down is by the book and very effective. He 

might have blown the bridge in the middle of the kill zone,· but that 

would have meant that a guarded bridge repair crew would be 

near his base camp for an indefinite period of time impeding his freedom of movement. · · 
VIGNETTE 6 

No-PULA AMBUSH 

by Commander Sofi Lal Gul 

In December 1980, I led a group of 12 Mujahideen in an ambush on 

the Kabul-Charikar highway at No-Pula, near Qara Bagh. We were 

armed with Kalashnikov rifles and two RPG-7s. I selected the ambush 

site at a point where orchards and other vegetation provide covered 

approaches to the road and offered concealed positions for the ambush 

team.2 We left our base at Farza, some ten kilometers to the west, long 

before daybreak to arrive at the ambush site before sunrise. I deployed 

my force into two ambush positions near the road and placed a threeman flank security team on the road which intersected with the main 

highway (Map 7- No-Pula). 

About 0900 hours, an enemy column of trucks, jeeps and armored 

vehicles arrived. As the head of the column passed our ambush position kill zone, we opened fire on the convoy and destroyed one of the 

·leading tanks with a direct hit by RPG-7. As the convoy unsuccessfully scurried to take cover, our. fire destroyed a jeep and an APC. 

· Explosions in the disabled vehicles set some trucks on fire. The enemy 

returned fire but failed to use its infantry to attack us directly. The 

action continued for less than an hour. When enemy aircraft arrived 

over the ambush site, we broke contact and pulled out through the 

green zone. We had no casualties, while we destroyed or damaged one 

tank, one APC, one jeep and eight trucks. 

CoMMENTARY: , The Mujahideen group achieved surprise by deploying 

in the dark and using the covered area close to the road for the 

ambush. The small number of the Mujahideen limited its action to one 

strike, after which they had to pull out. Failure to act decisively cost 

the convoy several vehicles and allowed the Mujahideen to slip away 

unscathed. The passive response of the Soviets caught in ambush 

often was due to the fact that they were carrying very few infantry in 

Commander Sofi Lal Gul is from Farza village of Mir Bacha Kot District, about 25 kilometers north of Kabul. He was affiliated with Mojadeddi's Afghanistan National Liberation 

Front of Afghanistan (ANLF) during the war with the Soviet forces. Commander Sofi Lal 

Gul concentrated his efforts on the Kabui-Charikar highway. [Map sheet 2886, vic grid 

1356]. 

2 The green zone is an irrigated area thick with trees, crops, irrigation ditches and tangled 

vegetation. Green zones usually run parallel to rivers and are usually practically impassable for vehicles. 
Page 24 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

N 

t 

NO-PULA 

Map7 

0 100 200 300 400 

BAGHAREGE 

ULYA 

500 METERS 
Chapter 1, Vignette 6 Page 25 

their escorting personnel carriers. 

The cover provided by the orchards and vegetation that flanked 

both sides of the Kabul-Charikar highway helped the Mujahideen lay 

successful ambushes. Later in the war, the Soviets · destroyed the 

roadside orchards and villages to prevent the Mujahideen from using 

them in their ambushes. 
Page 26 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

N 

i 

0 2 3 KM 

2CONVOYS 

MapS 
VIGNETTE 7 

Two CoNVOYS IN THE KILL ZONE 

by Toryalai Hemat 

In the summer of 1986, the Soviets and DRA were moving lots of 

reinforcements and supplies to Paktia Province. We set an ambush 

on Highway 157 south of Mohammad Agha District headquarters on 

the 12th of July. This was four days after an ambush at the Mamur 

Hotel. I sited the ambush along a two-kilometer stretch between 

Qala-e Shekhak and Dehe Naw .. Qala-e Shekhak is six kilometers 

south of Mohammad Agha and Dehe N aw is three kilometers further 

south from Qala-e Shekhak. There was ·a DRA outpost at Qala-e 

Shekhak, so we started our ambush a kilometer south ofthe outpost. 

The outpost was surrounded by mines and the DRA seldom left the 

outpost. I felt that the DRA might shoot at us, but would not attack 

from the outpost (Map 8- Two Convoys). 

I had 35 Mujahideen in my group. I divided them into four 

groups-a northern containment group, an ambush group, a southern 

security group and a support group. The northern containment group 

was to fire on the DRA outpost to prevent them from interfering with 

our ambush. The ambush group would attack the convoy from close 

up. The southern security group would occupy a position at Dehe Naw 

to protect our southern flank and prevent the arrival of reinforcements 

from the south. These three groups were armed with AK-47s, PK 

machine guns and RPGs. The support group had one 82mm mortar 

and a Goryunov machine gun. 3 I positioned the support group on the 

east bank of the Logar River behind the ambush group. All the groups 

were on the east side of the road. We moved from Ahmadzi Qala before 

dawn and occupied our ambush positions. 

We did not have any advance information on the movement of 

columns, but there were enough columns moving to Paktia. At this 

time, there was usually a daily column, so it was a free hunt. There 

were many petrol tankers in these convoys. They were easy to set on 

fire, and just firing at them would do the job. Once you set them on 

fire, it would demoralize the entire column as everyone could see the 

smoke. We always wanted to hit DRA columns since they wouldn't 

Toryalai Hemat was a regiment commander of a mobile force allied with the IUA-Islamic 

Union of Afghanistan of Sayyaf. He fought in many provinces in Afghanistan. [Map sheet 

3185, vic grid 0680]. 

3 The Mujahideen acquired a lot of Afghan Army and ORA material. The Afghan infantry 

battalion had nine Goryunov 7.62mm machine guns and nine 82mm mortars by TO&E. 
Page 28 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

fight, whereas Soviet columns would. Usually when a column would 

come, the enemy would establish security forces at suspected 

ambush sites and occupy them until the column passed or until they 

were certain that nothing was going to happen. Many times we· 

wouldn't risk taking on the entire column. We would attack the tail 

since the enemy would not turn back to help the petroleum tankers 

at the rear. The column would often reach Gardez, but they would 

have lost a piece of it along the way. Attacking the column from the 

rear was less risk to us, although sometimes there would be some 

APCs at the rear of the column. 

The enemy reaction when caught in the kill zone was usually 

ineffective. They normally stopped, dismounted and took cover. They 

fought back only when assistance arrived. We learned to hit the 

column and leave. We did not want to fight reinforcements or helicopters because we did not have enough combat power and it was very 

hard to move our wounded from the area under fire. 

Later in the morning, a Soviet security force of armored vehicles 

moved close to us and occupied a position. Then the column came from 

the north. The security force rejoined the column before the entire column passed. This left the fuel tankers in the rear of the column for us! 

We hit them by surprise, and it was effective. We damaged or 

destroyed one jeep and nine tankers. Mohammad Hashem took out an 

armored security vehicle with his RPG. We later learned that two 

Russians fled from the south-bound column when we ambushed it. 

They were captured by Mujahideen from HIH. 

As we were getting ready to leave the ambush site, a Soviet 

armored column came from the south. My southern security group had 

already pulled back, so we were caught totally by surprise. They began 

pouring fire into our ranks. Four helicopters also flew over firing at us. 

Mohammad Hashem hit one helicopter with his RPG, but the fight was 

unequal. All of my group, except for Ehsan and myself were wounded-most of them were wounded while we were withdrawing. Most 

were lightly wounded, but two of them are still paralyzed. 

What happened is that as we ambushed the tail of the southbound column, a north-bound column was traveling on the same 

section of road. The heavily-armored head ofthe north-bound column 

arrived at the kill zone as we were withdrawing. Helicopters were 

flying air cover for the arriving column as well. Since my southern 

security group had withdrawn, we did not know of their arrival until 

they were firing at us. 

CoMMENTARY: The road runs through a deep gorge three kilometers 
Chapter 1, Vignette 7 Page 29 

south of Dehe N aw. The Soviets probably had anticipated problems at 

this area and leapfrogged the security force there and put the helicopters overhead to deal with this probable ambush site. Security 

elements should be the last elements to pull out of an ambush-not the 

first. The southern security element should have been south on the 

high ground where it could see. Simple hand-held walkie-talkie radios 

and a security element that performs its mission would have averted 

disaster for this Mujahideen commander. 

The RPG-7 could be an effective anti-helicopter weapon- particularly when several RPGs were fired simultaneously at a hovering helicopter or at a helicopter on the ground. 
Page 30 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

0 2 

BURJ 

Map9 

3 

N 

t 

4KM 
VIGNETTE 8 

AMBUSH NEAR ABDULLAH-E 8URJ 

by Haji Abdul Qader and Haji Qasab 

In October 1980, a Soviet column left its base in Bagram to conduct 

a four-day operation against the Mujahideen in the Nejraw District of 

Kapisa Province. To get there, they crossed the Abdullah-e Burj bridge 

over the Panjshir River. The bridge is on the main highway connecting Bagram with the provincial capitals of Mahmoud-e Raqi and Deh 

Baba'Ali and other major towns including Gulbahar in the north and 

Sarobi in the south. Since this is the only bridge over the Panjshir 

River in this region, Mujahideen felt that the Soviet force would return 

to their base by the same route. 

The Mujahideen based_ around the Abdullah-e Burj decided to 

ambush the column on its return trip when the troops were tired and 

more vulnerable. They decided to hit the column while it was crossing 

over the bridge from Kapisa to Parwan Province. The Soviets would be 

most· vulnerable when half their column had crossed the river and 

their force was divided by the river (Map 9 - Burj). 

Haji Abdul Qader and Haji Qasab jointly planned and executed the 

ambush. They decided to let the Soviet force move unopposed until the 

head of the column reached Qala-e Naw, about 3.5 kilometers southwest of the bridge. The Mujahideen had watched the column depart 

and knew how long the column was. They calculated that when the 

column reached Qala-e Naw, half of the column would still be on the 

north of the river with the tail of the column just south of Deh 

Baba'Ali. Haji Abdul Qader's group (about 150 men) would set up their 

ambush south of the river along the Bagram-Kapisa road. They would 

set up in the orchards and hills between Qala-e Naw and Abdullah-e 

Burj. Haji Qasab, reinforced with local Mujahideen from Commander 

Shahin's group (about 200 altogether) would ambush north of the river 

between Abdullah-e Burj and Deh Baba'Ali. The two areas were part 

of the normal AOs of the two commanders. In both areas, the 

Mujahideen positioned their RPG-7s close to the road and their heavy 

machine guns further back on dominant terrain. The Mujahideen also 

supported the ambushes with a few recoilless rifles and 82mm mortars. 

On 5 October, the Mujahideen secretly deployed into their designated ·positions and prepared. covered positions for their anti-tank 

Haji Abdul Qader was a HIK commander in the Bagram area. Haji Qasab was a JIA commander in the Deh Baba'Aii area. [Map sheets 2886 and 2887]. 
Page 32 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

weapons. The Soviet column returned that afternoon. It moved unopposed across the bridge atAbdullah-e Burj, and the head ofthe column 

reached Qala-e N aw around 1600 hours. Then, at Haji Abdul Qader's 

signal, the ambushes opened fire on the tanks, APCs, and trucks along 

the entire length of the column. The Soviets _were caught by surprise. 

South of the river, the Soviet forces drove off the road to try to escape 

to the open plain. However, many vehicles were hit and destroyed by 

RPG-7 fire. Vehicles were burning and the Soviet infantry which dismounted from the APCs came under heavy machine gun fire. 

On the north side of the river, there is little room for vehicles to 

maneuver in the surrounding green zone of orchards and vineyards. , 

Many soldiers abandoned their vehicles and rushed to try and ford the 

river.4 Some soldiers were washed away, while others made it to the 

other side and headed for Bagram across the open plain. Many Soviet 

soldiers were in a state of panic, and overall command and control had 

broken down. Some troops established perimeter defenses around 

their vehicles to hold on until help came. Others abandoned their vehicles and escaped toward Bagram. Some 20 or 30 vehicles were burning. 

Night fell. Soviet artillery pounded Mujahideen positions around 

Qala-e Naw, but it was not very effective. The Mujahideen moved 

through the burning and abandoned vehicles removing supplies and 

scores of weapons. In the morning, the Soviets sent a relief column 

from Bagram to relieve the trapped column. The Mujahideen with- / 

drew from the battlefield. At 0800 hours, the remnants of the Soviet 

column moved on to their Bagram base. Mujahideen losses were light. 

Haji Abdul Qader's group had two KIA and seven WIA. Total enemy 

casualties are unknown. 

CoMMENTARY: There were several factors contributing to the 

Mujahideen success. First, proper selection of the ambush site was 

key. The Mujahideen caught the Soviet column straddling the river 

and forced it to fight two separate, unsupported battles. There was little room to maneuver except over the sourthern escape route. Second, 

the time of the ambush was optimum. The late afternoon arrival gave 

Mujahideen gunners just enough time to inflict maximum damage, but 

not enough time for Soviet air power to react. Soviet artillery could 

cover only a portion of the battlefield and apparently no forward 

4 Crossing the Panjshir River, or any of Afghanistan's major rivers, is always very risky. 

The rivers often appear calm and shallow, but they are treacherous. The Soviet soldiers, 

who expected to cross the river on a vehicle over the bridge, were probably not briefed as 

to the danger. 
Chapter 1, Vignette 8 Page 33 

observers were forward to adjust artillery fire during the night. Third, 

the Mujahideen had surprise. The column had driven out on this road 

unmolested and expected to return unopposed. The soldiers were cold 

and tired, and their guard was down. The head of the column could see 

Bagram airbase when they were hit. Fourth, the simultaneous attack 

along the entire length of the column stripped the convoy commander 

of any uncommmited force which he could use as an emergency 

reserve. The Mujahideen occupied very wide ambush frontages relative to their manpower and this allowed them to attack the entire convoy simultaneously. In retrospect there is little more that the 

Mujahideen could have done except employ mines and mortar fire on 

the southern escape route. 

The Soviet commander contributed to his own defeat. He had poor 

intelligence on the area that he was travelling through and did not use 

reconnaissance forces effectively. He did not use forward detachments 

to seize dominant terrain and obvious chokepoints, such as the 

Abdullah-e Burj bridge, in advance of the column. He was highly predictable and used the ·same route to return that he had left on, yet 

failed to post security along that route to support his movement. He 

failed to leap-frog artillery groups along the column so that artillery 

fire support was immediately available. He apparently did not have 

helicopter gunships on stand-by to respond to ambush. He appears to 

have not trained his force in standard counter-ambush drills and procedures. He apparently lost control of the column within the first 

minute of the ambush. 

The Soviet force in Bagram was reluctant to go to the aid of the 

beleagured column at night. Apparently they were afraid of also being 

ambushed. This reluctance to leave the relative safety of their base 

camp at night was to the Mujahideen advantage. 
~ Q ~KM 

ATTACHED TO THE STUDY OF HERAT COLUMN AND KANDAHAR AMBUSH • AMBUSH #1 • AMBUSH #2 

KABUL~ 

DEH-KHWAJA 1 

Map 10a 

"1J 

~ CD 

~ 

-l 

:::r 

CD 

Q 

:::r 

~ 

en 

a: 

CD 

a 

...... 

:::r 

CD 

s:: 

0 

c:: 

::::1 

iii 

::;· 

s:: 

E. 

Ill 

:::r 

a: 

CD 

CD 

::::1 

m' 

$4 

~;r 

5 

::r 

CD 

en 

~ 

~ 

~ :::r 

Ill 

::::1 

~ 
VIGNETTE 9 

DEH-KHWAJA AMBUSH 

by Commander Mulla Malang 

In 1982, the ·Soviet 70th Separate Motorized Rifle Brigade, 5 

supported by DRA forces, launched a block and sweep operation 

against the Mujahideen forces in the center of Panjwayee District. 

Panjwayee District is located some 25 kilometers southwest of 

Kandahar city. Mujahideen sources estimate that hundreds of enemy 

tanks, APCs, BMPs and other vehicles were involved in the 25-day 

operation. Th~ Soviet purpose was to punish the Mujahideen,groups 

who constantly harassed Soviet and DRA troop columns and supply 

convoys on the main Kandahar-Herat highway. The operation was 

also designed to destroy the resistance bases in the area and widen the 

security zone around the government-controlled district center. 

The Soviet operation in Panjwayee required constant resupply 

from the main Soviet base located in the Kandahar air base. The supply columns had to travel along the main Chaman-Kandahar road to 

its junction with the Kabul-Herat highway and then proceed through 

Deh-Khwaja and Kandahar city to Sarpuza where the Panjwayee 

access road joins the main highway. (Map lOa - Deh-Khwaja 1) 

The Mujahideen groups around Kandahar decided to launch a 

diversionary action against the enemy in order to relieve the pressure 

on the resistance in Panjwayee. The Mujahideen realized that the 

Soviets were weakest and most vulnerable along their supply route 

and, therefore, decided to strike them there. Although the Mujahideen 

could conduct small-scale ambushes along the entire stretch of the 

road, there were only two places suitable for large-scale ambushes. 

One is. a two-kilometer length of road between Manzel Bagh Chawk 

and Deh-Khwaja. The other is a one-and-a-half kilometer stretch 

between Shahr-e Naw and Sarpuza. 

Mulla Malang was one of the most famous commanders of the Kandahar area. He was an 

adherent of Mawlawi Mohammed Yunis Khalis-lslamic Party (Hezb-e-lslami-Khalis-HIK). 

[Map sheet 2180]. 

5 The 70th Separate Motorized Rifle Brigade was created using a regiment of the 5th 

Motorized Rifle Division shortly after the Soviet invasion of Afghanistan. The 70th was 

designed especially for counterinsurgency and had three motorized rifle battalions, an air 

assault battalion, an artillery howitzer battalion, a reconnaissance battalion, a tank battalion and support troops. There are also some indications that a MRL battalion might have 

belonged to this organization. 
500 0 500 KM 

l..t 

t~ l..t 

l..t l..t 

"'U 

~ CD 

c:.v 

en 

--i 

::r 

CD 

Q 

::r 

g: 

(f) 

a: 

CD 

9. 

::T 

eo 

s:: 

0 

c:: 

~ 

sr s· 

s:: 

E. 

Ill 

::r 

a: 

CD 

CD 

~ 

ill' 

n. 

(')" 

en 

s· 

so 

CD 

(f) 

0 

< 

~ 

~ ::r 

Ill 

~ 

~ 
Chapter 1, Vignette 9 Page 37 

The local Mujahideen groups in the Malajat6 held a council of war 

and decided to block the road and conduct a large-scale ambush at each 

site. In addition to the ambush forces, the Mujahideen also designated support groups for both ambushes to protect the flanks and rear of 

· the blocking/ambush detachments. About 150 Mujahideen, split up 

into small groups, moved from the Malajat area during the night and 

took up positions in the orchardS, buildings and ditches along the main 

road between the Manzel Bagh Chawk and Deh-Khwaja gas station. 

The back-up group for the detachment deployed south of the city. (Map 

lOb- Deh-Khwaja 2) A similar detachment blocked the road between 

Shahr-e Naw and Sarpuza. 

Early in the morning, a convoy of trucks carrying ammunition, 

rockets and gasoline moved from the Kandahar air base toward 

Panjwayee. As the column reached the first roadblock, the Mujahideen 

opened fire simultaneously with RPG-7s, machine guns, rifles and a 

recoilless rifle. Taken by surprise, the column stopped while the Soviet 

security vehicles returned fire. Their fire hit the Deh-Khwaja residential areas and caused much destruction. However, Mujahideen fire 

finally struck the ammunition trucks. They caught fire and hundreds 

of rockets and boxes of other ammunition began to explode. The explosions were so powerful that burning tires from APCS were thrown as 

far away as Bala Karz, some two kilometers from the ambush site. The 

ambush destroyed about 30 enemy supply trucks and damaged many 

others. The rest of the Soviet convoy turned back. The Mujahideen 

roadblock at Shahr-e Naw and Sarpuza had no enemy to attack. 

This Mujahideen ambush had a decisive impact on the enemy 

operation in that it forced the Soviet forces to end their siege of ~ 

Mujahideen forces in Panjwayee and return to Kandahar. However, 

in order to prevent future ambushes in the area, the Soviet forces 

bulldozed Deh-Khwaj a homes along the main road out to a distance 

of 300 meters from the highway. 

CoMMENTARY: Security of the lines of communication was a constant 

challenge facing the Soviet forces in Mghanistan. Security of the lines 

of communication determined the amount of forces which the Soviet 

could deploy in Mghanistan and also determined the scale and frequency of offensive combat directed against the Mghan resistance forces . 

. In this example the Soviets had to move supplies to a large group 

of forces about 50 kilometers away. The road, although an all-season 

major highway, was vulnerable to Mujahideen ambushes at almost 

6 The large green zone to the south of Kandahar. 
Page 38 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

every point. Further, the Soviets and Mujahideen fought for control of 

Kandaha'r for the entire war. The Soviets knew that the road was not 

secure. And yet, the convoy commander did little to ensure the security of the movement along the supply route. A preliminary road~clearing patrol could have preempted the Mujahideen's successful ambush. 

Instead, their entire operation was disrupted due to their failure to 

move the supplies to Panjwayee. 

Normally, the Soviets spaced APCs throughout the convoy as security vehicles. In case of ambush, the APCs would stop in the kill zone 

and return fire while the rest of the convoy caught in the kill zone 

would drive outofit. The portion of the convoy not under attack would 

stop and wait for the APCs to drive off the ambushers. Then, when the 

ambushers had been driven off, the convoy would reform and continue. 

This is why the Mujahideen established two ambush zones. They did 

not think that they would stop the convoy at the first ambush and so 

the second ambush was ready to hit the Soviet convoy again. 

On the other hand, it took the Mujahideen about three weeks to 

decide to help the resistance forces in Panjwayee by hitting the Soviets 

elsewhere. Had they launched their attack earlier, it could have forced 

their enemy to terminate his operation against Mujahideen groups in 

Panjwayee earlier. 
VIGNETTE 1 0 . 

0URANAY AMBUSH 

by Commander Haji Mohammad Seddiq 

In September 1983, my group and I were visiting the area of 

Maidan. The Maidan Mujahideen had heard about a future convoy 

going from Kabul to Ghazni and were planning to ambush it. I joined 

HIH commanders Ghulam Sakhi, Captain Amanullah, Mawlawi 

Halim and Zabet Wali in setting up an ambush some 30 kilometers 

southwest of Kabul. Together, we had some 60 Mujahideen arnied with 

AK-47s, 60mm mortars, RPG-7s and an 82mm recoilless rifle. We 

planned two ambush sites. One group would deploy east of the road 

between Duranay Bazar and Sur Pul. The other group would deploy 

west of the road on the forward slope ofDuranay mountain close to the 

road (Map 11- Duranay). The Mujahideen already had well-prepared 

positions at both these sites. 

We occupied our positions at dawn and waited for the column. At 

about 0900 hours, the convoy came from Kabul. It was a column of 

trucks and armored vehicles. A forward security element preceded the 

convoy. It drove through the ambush area, but failed to detect our 

forces. Then the convoy entered the ambush area. We let it pass 

through until the head of the column-reached the second ambush site 

at Duranay mountain. Now, the column was in about a five-kilometer 

stretch of kill zone. We opened up fr:om all positions along the entire 

length of the exposed column. 

A heavy battle ensued as we fired at all the vehicles in the open. 

The enemy had a security outpost at Sur Pul which joined in the battle and fired on ourpositions. Despite this security post fire, and the 

fire from the armored vehicles, the Soviet response was fairly passive. Our prepared positions protected us, and the Soviets apparently did not have any infantry accompanying the convoy, so they could 

not dismount and maneuver against us. Our positions were vulnerable to a flank attack through Kashmirian or Ghlo Ghar, but the 

apparent lack of Soviet infantry support kept their vehicles pinned 

Haji Mohammad Seddiq is from No-Burja village in Logar Province. The village is in the 

Tangi-Wardak area which connects the Saydabad District of Wardak Province to ttie Baraki 

Barak District in the Logar Province. Commander Seddiq's village is located on the border 

between the two provinces. Therefore, his command fought in both provinces in coordination with other Mujahideen. Commander Haji Mohammad Seddiq was affiliated with 

Hekmatyar's HIH. [Map sheet 2785, vic grid 8494]. 
Page 40 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

) 

DURANAY 

Map 11 

0 .._ __ _._ __ __.2 KM 
Chapter 1, Vignette 10 Page 41 

down on the lower ground where we continued to shoot them with 

our anti-tank weapons. 

Later in the day, the enemy brought reinforcements to the battlefield and began to pound Mujahideen positions with artillery and air 

strikes. We began to gradually withdraw our ambush force and by 

1500, there were no Mujahideen left in the area. A major Mujahideen 

commander, Ghulam Sakhi, and several other Mujahideen were killed 

and many were wounded. We damaged or destroyed 33 armored vehi-. 

cles and 27 trucks. We captured some 40 weapons of different types. 

COMMENTARY: The Mujahideen showed good planning and discipline 

in this ambush, but used prepared positions that they had used before. 

They also knew that these positions had exposed flanks, but took no 

precautions. They felt that the Soviets would not dismount to check 

the known ambush sites and did not expect immediate Soviet counteractions to turn their flanks. They were right. The Mujahideen were 

setting a pattern, but the Soviets failed to react to it. The Mujahideen 

stocked their positions with sufficient ammunition for a fight of several hours duration. They apparently took many of their casualties from 

artillery and air strikes while moving to the burning vehicles to loot or 

when pulling back. 

The Soviet convoy movement was no secret. The Mujahideen had 

contacts within the DRA and agents near the assembly areas. The 

Soviets usually left after first light and therefore arrived in the area 

between 0830 and 0930. This made it convenient for the Mujahideen 

who did not have to stay in position all day. The Soviets knew that this 

was an ambush site, but did not destroy the ambush positions, put 

· security elements on the high ground with helicopters or put a dismounted force through the area to check for ambushes. Further, they 

did not have helicopter gunships flying overhead or on strip alert. 

They did not carry an immediate reaction force which could get up into 

the mountains and turn the flanks of the ambush sites. Instead, they 

relied on the combat power of their armored vehicles and slow-reacting 

artillery and air support. 

The Mujahideen commander had 60 combatants spread over a five 

kilometers stretch of ambush on both sides of the road. He did not 

have radio communications with all his people. Instead, the signal to . 

initiate fire was the commander firing the first shot. Other commands 

were given by messenger or visual signals-mirrors, flares, smoke 

grenades and waving. Command and control depended greatly on the 

commander's pre-ambush briefing and SOP actions. 
Page 42 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

:.:: 

t \'~~ \ ~~ :!! 

a: \ ~~ ct: 

:z: \ - i:!i =l®li z 

::! 

g 

' .:.:: :E .,.. :.:: 

N 

C> 

> w 

c 

z 

::::> 

:z: 

~ 

m ,. '• 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

z..,_ I 

I 

I z 

:;;: 

I ... 

eo. 

I 1-

:z: 

a: U) 

/ < i:!i 

/ ::I: 1:'1 ~ 

/ ~ 

.,... a: a. w 

:z: I C'CI N 

I z ::E 

I ~ I 

I , 
VIGNETTE 11 

KANDAHAR AMBUSHES 

by Commander Mulla Malang 

Despite their best efforts, the Soviets were never able to gain full 

control of the major Pashtun city of Kandahar. The battle for 

Kandahar was unusual in that all guerrilla factions cooperated and 

regularly rotated forces in and out of the battle to maintain pressure 

on the Soviet and DRA garrisons. The suburbs of Kandahar were one 

of the major scenes of Mujahideen road blocks and ambushes during 

the war. Hardly a day would pass without a Mujahideen attack on 

enemy columns along the main highway connecting the city with 

Ghazni in the northeast and Girishk in the west. 

The enemy columns were most vulnerable on a stretch of the road 

between the western suburbs of the city and Hauz-e Madad, located 

about 40 kilometers west of Kandahar. In this area, the Mujahideen 

were able to hide in the orchards and villages to ambush enemy 

columns. As the road leaves Sanjari on the Arghandab River, the green 

zone runs parallel to the highway in the south and an arid plain, that 

gradually rises toward the mountains, flanks the road to the north. 

(See Map lOa - Deh-Khwaja 1 in Vignette 9.) 

The Herat Column 

In one of their early large-scale ambushes, the Mujahideen groups 

affiliated with different parties planned a series of ambushes along 

the main highway from Girishk to Kandahar (Map 12 -Kandahar). 

In September 1984, a Soviet/DRA supply column moved from 

Torghundi on the Soviet Turkmenistan border through the Shindand 

air base in western Mghanistan to the Soviet garrison in Kandahar. 

The column consisted of several hundred trucks escorted by tanks 

and APCs. Most of the trucks were loaded with gasoline which they 

Mulla Malang, now 38, is a Pashtun from the northwestern province of Badghisat. He was 

a student (taleb) at a religious school (madrassa) in Kandahar when the communists came 

to power in a bloody coup in Kabul in 1978. Mulla Malang joined a resistance cell in the 

southern suburbs of Kandahar (Malajat) and started fighting the communist regime. He 

was arrested in the fall of 1979 for spreading anti-government leaflets and later released 

in general amnesty after the Soviet invasion in January 1980. Mulla Malang immediately 

fled to Pakistan and joined Mawlawi Mohammad Nabi Muhammadi's Harakat faction. He 

returned to Kandahar for combat. Mulla Malang later joined HIK and became a major commander of the faction in the province with bases in Arghestan, Malajat, Pashmol and 

Khakrez. [Map sheet 2180]. 
Page 44 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

brought from Shindand. Shindand was supplied with gasoline from 

a Soviet-built field pipeline. 

Saranwal Abdul Wali of NIFA and I coordinated the Mujahideen 

plan. We planned to position several interconnected ambushes, 

manned by small groups of Mujahideen, to surprise and take the 

entire length of the column under simultaneous fire. This required 

selection of a favorable stretch of the road that could accommodate 

all the ambushes required to attack the entire column. ·we selected a 

stretch of nearly seven kilometers between a point at the end of 

Sanjari (the beginning of Ashoqa villages) and a point immediately to 

the east ofPashmol as the killing zone for the enemy column. We estimated that this stretch of the highway corresponded to the length of 

the enemy column. 

We decided to divide the 250 available Mujahideen into several 

groups. The groups were armed with RPG-7 antitank grenade launchers and four-to-five 82mm recoilless rifles. All ambushes were sited in 

the green zone to the south of the road. Each ambush group had an 

assigned sector of the kill zone. All groups were instructed to open fire 

simultaneously as the head of the column reaches the Ashoqa villages. 

It was expected that at that time the tail of the column would have just 

cleared the Pashmol villages. 

At that time, most of the local population still lived in their homes 

along the road. Few had migrated to Pakistan since no major Soviet 

military actions had taken place there. The Mujahideen groups coming 

from Malajat (the southern and southwestern suburbs of Kandahar) 

and other neighboring bases moved during the night to their designated ambush sites. The ambush plan was kept secret from the local 

population and local Mujahideen units since resistance groups based 

in the ambush area were reluctant to participate, fearing retaliation 

directed at their homes and families still living there. 

The ambush groups moved into position during the night and 

deployed patrols to secure the area. As the day began and locals 

started moving around, Mujahideen patrols temporarily detained 

the villagers to ensure secrecy. The Soviet convoy reached the kill 

zone at 0900 hours. As instructed, the Mujahideen groups opened 

fire simultaneously, surprising the enemy. The column stopped and 

many vehicles began moving north onto the open plain. The escorting tanks and APCs fired randomly in panic from on the road 

without trying to maneuver or close with the ambush sites. Enemy 

vehicles moving north off the highway soon were out of range of 

many of the Mujahideen weapons. 
Chapter 1, Vignette 11 Page 45 

In the meantime, several gasoline trucks caught fire and the fire 

quickly spread to other vehicles. The chain reaction set off several 

explosions which threw burning debris on both sides of the road. We 

scored direct hits on about 50 vehicles while many others were damaged in explosions caused by the blown up trucks and gas tankers. The 

action lasted 30 minutes. We withdrew before enemy aircraft could be 

scrambled. The enemy did not pursue us. 

This ambush marked the beginning of a continuous battle for 

control of the western road to Kandahar. Until the Soviet withdrawal 

in 1989, this road was under constant threat by the Mujahideen who 

would set up road blocks, conduct ambushes, mine long stretches of 

the road and demolish bridges, underpasses and viaducts using unexploded aerial bombs. Faced with continuous Mujahideen ambushes 

and attacks on convoys along the highway, the Soviet forces established several security posts and fire bases in the area. They built a 

major fire base at Kandahar Silo and another at Karez Slim in the 

northern plain overlooking the Kandahar western highway. 

The Soviets set three security outposts at the points where 

orchards and the green zone stretched to the road providing concealment for Mujahideen in ambush. They were established on both 

sides of Pasab and at Hauz-e Madad (Map lOa Deh-Khawaja 1 in 

· Vignette 9). The posts were protected by earth berms. The road-side 

security posts were connected to the main fire base at Karez Slim by 

communications trenches which allowed safe, rapid reinforcement. 

The twin Pasab posts were each manned by 10-15 men and each had 

a tank, a howitzer and a mortar. The security post at Hauz-e Madad 

was two times as large as the two Pasab posts combined. 

The new security arrangement impeded Mujahideen movement in 

the area. Repeated attempts by the Mujahideen failed to knock out the 

Soviet outposts. Lala Malang7 sent for me and asked me to join in a 

coordinated attack on the Soviet security posts in November 1985. 

Mujahideen forces lacked the ability to knock out security posts since 

they had to fight from exposed positions with little cover and they 

lacked engineering equipment to neutralize mine fields around the 

enemy positions. Therefore, the Mujahideen could not sustain pressure on the outpost garrison. 

We Kandahar Mujahideen decided to first enhance our tactical survivability and then renew attempts to destroy the enemy security 

7 Lala Malang was a well-known Mujahideen commander who was based in Pashmol (he 

was killed during a major Soviet sweep of the Arghandab Valley in 1987). 
Page 46 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

posts. We began to steadily improve field fortifications areas around 

Kandahar. We dug trenches with overhead cover overlooking the 

enemy security posts. We constructed bunkers, underground night 

shelters and covered access trenches, and stocked ammunition and 

supplies in these prepared positions. Wherever possible, we built overhead cover using timbers covered with a thick layer of dirt as protection against artillery and aviation. We prepared firing positions for 

our multi-barrelled rocket launchers. Each of these positions had a 

pool of water so that the firing crew could splash water on the site 

before firing to absorb the flames and fumes from the rocket launch. 

These positions significantly enhanced Mujahideen field sustainability and enabled them to fire on the enemy outposts around 

the clock. Enemy attempts to dislodge the Mujahideen with air 

strikes and artillery fire repeatedly failed. Enemy tanks and motorized rifle forces were also unable to penetrate the green zones to 

eliminate the positions. 

Finally the enemy was forced to abandon his posts at Pasab and 

Hauz-e Madad and shift his forces to Karez Slim. A local Mujahideen commander, Mulla Nek Mohammad, and some others intensified their daily harassment of enemy movements in the area close to 

the green zone. Every morning, the Soviets would deploy security 

patrols from their base at Kandahar Silo to secure the highway 

from the city to Sanjari area. The Karez Slim fire base covered the 

area west of Sanjari. 

As Mujahideen attacks further threatened the security of the 

enemy convoys on the highway, the Soviets decided to avoid the stretch 

of road they could not control. They constructed a detour road to the 

north of the highway. The bypass road was built in 1985 and connected Sanjari and Karez Slim (See Map10a- Deh-Khwaja 1 in Vignette 9). 

CoMMENTARY: Soviet lack of adequate reconnaissance cost them 

dearly. Moving a convoy of supply vehicles in close terrain, without 

effective security arrangements, often resulted in major tactical 

setbacks. They further failed to cover the' convoy movement with 

helicopter reconnaissance and helicopter gunships. The Mujahideen 

had calculated the reaction time for helicopter gunships from 

Kandahar air base. Timely action by helicopter gunships could have 

saved the day for the Soviet convoy, but they were apparently not 

planned for and not on call. 

Normally, the Soviets spacedAPCs throughout the convoy as security vehicles. In case of ambush, the APCs would stop in the kill zone 
Chapter 1, Vignette 11 Page 4 7 

and return fire while the rest of the convoy caught in the kill zone 

would drive out of it. The security detail followed this SOP. Instead of 

aggressive efforts to use their armored strength and fire power to 

outflank the ambush groups and cut off their withdrawal, the Soviet 

security vehicles passively remained with the embattled column and 

fired on suspected Mujahideen positions. They had little effect. 

Later on, as the Soviet forces established stationary security posts 

i~ the key areas along the highway, they failed to support and sustain 

them in the face of constant Mujahideen attacks. This laterled them 

to construct a bypass road further to the north away from the dangerous green zone. The Soviet surrendered the initiative in movement 

control to the Mujahideen and never regained it. Consequently most 

of the Soviet actions in the area were reactive. In a guerilla war, the 

loss of initiative becomes decisive in the outcome of tactical combat. 

What mostly contributed to Mujahideen success in inflicting heavy 

losses on the enemy was their elaborate planning, secrecy in movement and coordinated action. This became possible through detailed 

information about the enemy including the size, direction of movement 

and estimated time of arrival of the enemy convoy to the ambush site. 

Simultaneous attack on the enemy column along its entire depth was 

perhaps the most decisive element in this ambush. In this case, the 

Mujahideen had approximately 40 combatants to a kilometer of 

ambush. This was much denser than usual Mujahideen ambushes and 

reflected that they were fighting from a green zone which could accomodate more combatants. 

However, the Mujahideen failed to exploit the initiative they 

achieved through surprise by moving to the road to complete the 

destruction of a demoralized and panicked enemy. Instead, they 

pulled out immediately after their success. This failure to fully exploit 

an ambush became a hallmark of Mujahideen hit and run tactics 

throughout the war. 

Later fighting confirms the importance of field fortifications and 

terrain to increase battlefield survivability and sustain combat despite 

enemy air and artillery superiority. This was a lesson once learned by 

the Mujahideen that was effectively implemented throughout the war. 

The Soviets and DRA, on the other hand, did not make a concerted 

effort to find and destroy these positions. 

The parochial nature of the resistance always affected selection of 

the place and time of tactical actions against the enemy. In areas 

where the local population remained in their homes and had not emigrated, local resistance units preferred to reserve for themselves the 
Page 48 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

choice of time, place and method of action against the enemy and not 

let outside Mujahideen groups risk their security and plans by conducting combat in their area without their consent. The decentralized 

nature of the resistance, factionalism and lack of unified command 

were both a Mujahideen strength and weakn~ss. 
VIGNETTE 12 

AMBUSH AT QALA·E HAIDAR 

by Asil Khan 

As early as 1980, Mujahideen began attacking Soviet columns 

along the major southwest highway connecting the Mghan capital of · 

Kabul to Ghazni and Kandahar. This 480-kilometer stretch was vulnerable in many areas. The road between Cheltan and Maidan, just 

outside of Kabul, was continuously attacked by Mujahideen operating 

out of bases in the suburbs of Kabul, Paghman, Kurugh, Arghandeh 

and Maidan. Initially, Soviet/ DRAforces would establish security outposts at key points along the .road every time they moved a column on 

the highway. According to the DRA security plan, different military 

units were responsible for sections of road and for manning the security outposts while Soviet or DRA convoys were moving through their 

area. Later on, as military traffic along the highway increased, units 

would routinely post security details at the outposts in the morning 

and pull them out at dusk. One of the outposts was located at the old 

fort of Qala-e Haidar, some 15 kilometers west of Kabul. This outpost 

was vulnerable to attacks by Mujahideen who would sneak up on the 

outpost from neighboring villages which were not under government 

control (Map 13 - Haidar). 

In the beginning of October 1984, the DRA tired of the repeated 

Mujahideen attacks and did not man the outpost for many days. Asil 

Khan decided to conduct an ambush at Qala-e Haidar, although he 

knew that he could not hold the site for more than a few minutes after 

the ambush, since the DRA could quickly reach the outpost from adjacent outposts. On the night of 18 October 1984, Asil Khan led a 15-

man team to Qala-e Haidar. There had been some road repair by the 

outpost and the road had been scraped down and graded. Asil Khan 

had his men bury three powerful remote-controlled mines in the road 

immediately in front of the outpost. They also buried or disguised the 

wires leading away from the mines to the ambush site. They spent two 

nights mining the highway and preparing fighting positions in the 

orchards and in a ditch in front of Qala-e Haider. Lookouts watched 

the road for approaching columns. 

Asil Khan is a famous urban guerrilla who operated in and around Kabul. He belonged to 

the NIFA faction. Other notes and the ORA security plan consulted for this vignette. [Map 

sheets 2785, 2786, 2885 and 2886]. 
Page 50 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

N 

t 

••• 

··: CHELTAN 

0 2 K L-----~~----~-------J M 

HAIDAR 

Map 13 
Chapter 1, Vignette 12 Page 51 

On the morning of 20 October, there were an unusual number of 

helicopters flying in the area. Asil Khan felt that this indicated that a 

convoy was leaving Kabul and so he moved his men into the ambush 

site and waited for the column to arrive. Around 1000 hours, a large 

supply column, escorted by tanks and APCs, approached the 

Mujahideen position. Helicopters were flying overhead. As the leading tanks and APCs reached the kill zone, the Mujahideen detonated 

the mines. One tank blew up and the column came to a sudden halt. 

The Mujahideen opened fire on the column. But the Mujahideen were 

so concerned about making a fast getaway, that their fire was not too 

effective against the vulnerable column. They destroyed just one truck 

with their RPGs before they broke contact and fled unscathed to 

friendly territory in the west. 

COMMENTARY: The Mujahideen achieved surprise but failed to exploit 

it fully once the column stopped. The commander's desire to safeguard 

his force prevented their further damaging the column. Still, a tank 

and a truck is a good days work for a 15-man ambush. Proper selection of the ambush site is key and this area was very open and offered 

little protection to the fo~ce. Some 12 kilometers further south is the 

Kotal-e Takht (the Takht pass) which is far more suitable for an 

ambush. The terrain there also allows surprise and provides better 

protection and concealed exit routes for the ambushing force. An 

ambushing force could fight much longer in this area and inflict more 

damage on a column. However, there are certain limitations in selecting an ambush site in the area. First of all, Mujahideen groups generally operated on their home turf. Acting outside their home turf could 

have unfavorable political, and support ramifications. Secondly, the 

Mujahideen wanted to. harass their enemy as close to the capital as 

possible for political and propaganda reasons. Attacks at the gates of 

Kabul were more significant than attacks further out. Finally, since 

the area is very open, an ambush here had a good chance at surprise 

since it is not an obvious ambush site. 
Page 52 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

N 

t 

MORAD 

Map14 

0 2 
VIGNETTE 13 

AMBUSH AT THE SADRE AZAM HILL 

by Doctor Mohammad Wakil 

It was August 1984. We had information that a Soviet supply 

column would come to Kabul from the north. There is a small hill 

on the highway south of Qala-e Morad Beg. (Map 14 - Morad) It is 

the Sadre Azam hill. It is an excellent site for an ambush and 

we set up our ambush on the hill to the east of the highway. 8 I 

had 30 Mujahideen and four RPG-7s. This area was closely 

watched by the enemy and so we could not spread our force out. 

Therefore, I concentrated the force on the hill with the rifles 

forward and the RPGs higher up on the hill. We thought that the 

convoy would arrive at 1600 hours and were in place before that 

time. At 1600 hours, the convoy came. It was led by a BMP. Soviet 

soldiers were sitting on top of the BMP. Usually we would not 

attack the head of the column, but since the lead vehicle was such 

a good target, we opened fire on it and destroyed it. We took the 

column by surprise. The column stopped and the enemy dismounted some soldiers who took up positions and fired back at us. We 

fired at each other for about an hour until a relief column, arrived 

from nearby Kabul to help the ambushed column. We pulled out. 

The enemy lost one BMP, four gasoline tankers and probably about 

ten killed and wounded. We lost Malek Mohammad from Karez-e 

Mir who was killed. 

COMMENTARY: This is typical of the small-scale ambushes that the 

Mujahideen regularly conducted. The losses _on both sides were minor, 

yet over time they added up. The Soviet soldiers customarily rode on 

top of their APCs since it is safer if the APC hit a mine. A powerful 

antitank mine blast might merely hurl the the soldiers off the APC 

whereas it would almost certainly kill everyone inside. Furthermore, 

the inside of an APC is crowded, is hard to see out of and, in August, is 

unbearably warm. 

Doctor Mohammad Wakil is from Shakardara District north of Kabul. He graduated from 

high school before the war. He joined the resistance and received medical training in 

Pakistan. [Map sheet 2886, vic grid 0734]. 

8 Author Ali Jalali has conducted tactical classes on this very terrain while teaching Afghan 

Army officers at the Higher Education School. It truly is an excellent ambush site. 
Page 54 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

The convoy was hemmed in by the village of Morad Beg, so the 

Soviets had difficulty maneuvering armored vehicles forward to 

fire into the ambush site. Since the object of the ambush was to 

destroy vehicles, it made sense to hit the head of the convoy. If the 

object had been to capture weapons, then an attack on the middle 

or end of the convoy would have been better. Available terrain kept 

the Mujahideen ambush compact-which is not what they prefer. 

This is closer to a Western-style ambush. After the initial firing, 

the ambush turned into a desultory, protracted sniping exercise 

which was more like an afternoon's recreation for the ambushers 

than decisive combat. 
VIGNETTE 14 

AMBUSH AT MAZAR CREEK 

by Commander Qazi Guljan Tayeb 

East of my base in Baraki Barak is the town of Padkhab-e 

Shana. It is located one and a half kilometers from the KabulGardez highway. The Soviets had put security posts on the high 

ground around this town to protect the highway from Mujahideen 

attacks coming out of Baraki Barak District. I decided to attack 

these posts in July 1985. By that time I had switched from the 

Hikmatyar faction to the Sayaf faction. 

We moved out from Baraki Barak at dusk. I had some 100 

Mujahideen with me. We crossed the highway and entered Padkhab-e 

Shana town. It is a large town occupying a square kilometer and 

containing some 1,000 houses. My Mujahideen moved into houses and 

stayed with the people throughout the next day. That night, using 

local guides, we set up ambushes on the roads leading into the village. 

The area around the town is also a green zone with orchards and woods 

(Map 15 - Mazar). Mazar Creek passes through the town near the 

bazaar. Mazar Creek begins at a spring and has good water. Soviet 

soldiers would go to the creek to get water, wash, fish and take a dip. 

We put an ambush at the creek near the spring. We put another 

ambush along their supply route which ran to the Soviet security posts 

from the main road. There was a path that ran from the security posts 

to the town dwellings. Soviets would often come down this path to the 

town to steal or extort things. We set our third ambush along this path 

in an area covered by buildings and orchards where the enemy maneuver would be restricted and constrained. We set our fourth ambush 

along the path from the creek to Mir Ghyas hill. 

In the morning, a few Soviets came to the creek. The Mujahideen 

at this ambush site opened fire and then left quickly after they saw 

that they had killed some Soviets. About the same time, a Soviet jeep 

drove along the supply route. That ambush opened fire and hit the 

jeep. Soviet tanks came from Pule-e Alam and surrounded the town. 

We hid our weapons and mixed with populace. Gradually we ,left the 

Commander Qazi Guljan Tayeb was a third year student in Kabul Theological College during the communist takeover in 1978. He joined Hikmatyar and later switched to the Sayef 

faction in the mid-1980s. He was the Commander of Baraki Barak District of Logar 

Province. [Map sheet 2884, vic 0657]. 
Page 56 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

I 

I 

I 

I 

/ ~sr / 

....... ....... 

--............. 

a::Lt) 

<(..-

Nc.. 

<(CIS 

:::E:ii: 
Chapter 1, Vignette 14 Page 57 

area disguised as civilians and went to the north and west. We had two 

wounded Mujahideen. We killed 12 Soviets, destroyed one jeep and 

captured four weapons. 

COMMENTARY: The Soviets had set a pattern of behavior which 

enabled the Mujahideen ambushes. They used the same roads and 

paths regularly. Their behavior toward the villagers made the 

villagers willing accomplices in setting the ambushes and hiding the 

Mujahideen and their weapons. The DRA had traveling propaganda/civil affairs teams which provided entertainment, medical 

treatment and pro-regime propaganda throughout Mghanistan.9 

Their actions, however, did not offset the effects of poor behaviour by 

Soviet combat forces. 

9 N. I. Pikov, "Vidy spetspropagandistskoy deyatel'nosti Armii Respubliki Afganistan" 

[Methods of Special Propaganda Activity of the Army of the Republic of Afghanistan], Opyt 

primeneniya Sovetskikh voysk v Respublike Afganistan [Experience applied by Soviet 

Forces in the Republic of Afghanistan], Moscow: Institute of Military History, 1990, 151-184 

provides a good view of the composition and employment of these teams. 
-- QAFUS 1 

Map 16a 

N 

"'U 

~ CD 

01 

CX> 

-I 

:::r 

CD 

Q 

:::r 

~ 

Ul 

0.: 

CD 

9. 

=r 

eo 

s:::: 

0 

c: 

:::J 

s-s· 

s:::: 

E. 

Ill 

:::r 

0.: 

CD 

CD 

:::J 

p;l 

n. 

~r 

s· 

=r 

eo 

Ul 

~ 

~ 

~ :::r 

Ill 

:::J 

~ 
VIGNETIE 15 

AMBUSH AT QAFUS TANGAY 

by Major Sher Aqa Kochay 

On August 13, 1985, my 40-man Mujahideen force moved from its 

base at Sewak (20 kilometers southeast of Kabul) to establish an 

ambush at the Qafus Tangay (some 25 kilometers east of Kabul). The 

area was protected by a Sarandoy (Internal Ministry Forces) regiment. 

This area was previously protected by tribal militia, but exactly one 

year prior, the local tribal militia of Hasan Khan Karokhel defected to 

the Mujahideen. Hence, the regiment deployed east of Kabul between 

Gazak and Sarobi to protect the power lines supplying electricity from 

N aghlu and Sarobi hydroelectric dams to Kabul. The regiment's headquarters was at Sur Kandow and its forces were deployed along the 

Butkhak-Sarobi road10 in security posts. (Map 16a- Qafus 1). 

Each day, the regiment sent truck convoys with supplies from headquarters to the battalions. In turn, battalions sent trucks to make 

deliveries to all their highway outposts. About two kilometers from the 

DRA Mulla Omar base, the road cuts across the mouth of a narrow valley called Qafus Tangay. Qafus Tangay begins at the Khak-e Jabar pass 

in the south and stretches north to the Gazak-Sarobi road. The valley 

offered a concealed approach from the Mujahideen bases in Khord 

Kabul in the south. The road at the mouth of the valley passes through 

difficult terrain forcing the traffic to move very slowly. This was a 

favorable point for an ambush. 

I moved my detachment at night reaching the ambush site early in 

the morning of August 13. My group was armed with four RPG-7 antitank grenade launchers, several light machine guns and Kalashnikov 

automatic rifles. I grouped my men into three teams. I positioned a 

10-man party with the four RPG-7s at the bottom of the valley near the 

road. I positioned two 15-man teams on each of the ridges on the two 

sides of the valley that dominated the road to the north. Both of the 

flank groups had PK machine guns. (Map 16b - Qafus 2) 

Major Sher Aqa Kochay is a graduate of Afghan Military Academy, Kabul, and received 

training in commando tactics in the Soviet Union. He served in the 37th Commando 

Brigade and participated in ORA actions against the Mujahideen in Panjsher Valley. He 

defected, with a large amount of weapons, to the Mujahideen in 1982 and became a NIFA 

commander in Kabul. He organized a new Mujahideen base in the Khord Kabul area some 

20 kilometers south of the Afghan capital. [Map sheet 2986, vic grid 4919]. 

10 The southern east-west road on the map. 
Page 60 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

:;: 

g 

"' 

0 

g 

"' 

.., ,_. ......... -- , --

-------

.-- - - -- ...._'- -------........ 
Chapter 1, Vignette 1 Page 61 

The plan was to wait until the enemy's supply vehicles arrived at 

the difficult stretch of road directly facing the Qafus Tangay Valley. I 

planned to assign targets to the RPGs as the trucks moved into the kill 

zone (for example number one, fire at the lead truck). I hoped to engage 

four trucks simultaneously, maximizing surprise and fire power. The 

teams on the ridges were to cover the valley with interlocking fields of 

fire and to support the withdrawal of the RPG teams while repelling 

any enemy infantry. They would also seize prisoners and carry off captured weapons and supplies once they had destroyed the enemy convoy. 

Finally, the group heard a vehicle approaching from the east. Soon 

an enemy jeep appeared around a bend in the road. As the jeep slowly moved over the rocky road to the ambush site, a machine gunner on 

the ridge suddenly opened fire at the vehicle. 

I was extremely upset because the ambush had been compromised 

and ordered one RPG-7 gunner to kill the jeep before it escaped. A few 

seconds later, the vehicle was in flames and the wounded driver was out 

of the jeep. He was the sole occupant of the vehicle. He was returning 

from the battalion headquarters at Lataband where he had driven the 

regimental political officer. We gave him first aid and released him. 

He was a conscript soldier from the Panjsher Valley who had recently 

been press-ganged into the military. 

The Sarandoy sent out patrols from the nearby Spina Tana and 

Nu'manak outposts. Because it was too risky to remain at the ambush 

site we withdrew through the Qafus Tangay Valley to our base. 

COMMENTARY: The Mujahideen ambush failed for lack of fire discipline. The unauthorized initiation of fire compromised a carefully 

planned and deftly prepared ambush. It was always a challenge for 

Mujahideen commanders to train and control a volunteer force fighting an organized military power. Further, some Mujahideen commanders ignored certain basic control measures. It is not clear what 

arrangements Major Aqa made to control the fire of the Mujahideen 

deployed on the ridges. Had the commander assigned sub-group leaders on each ridge with clear instructions to control the fire of the teams 

the outcome of the ambush could have been different. 

The ambush also lacked sufficient early warning which could 

communicate the size, composition and activity of approaching convoys. If the commander had early warning and a chain of command, 

he could have anticipated the arrival of vehicles using something 

other than sound, determined whether or not to attack the vehicles 

and gotten his new orders to his men in a timely manner. 
Page 62 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

N 

t 

0 
VJGNETIE 16 

SISAY AMBUSH 

by Commander Haji Mohammad Seddiq 

In October 1985, several Mujahideen groups cooperated to establish an ambush at Sisay, some five kilometers north of the Saydabad 

District Headquarters in Wardak Province. The ambush site is located along the main highway between Kabul and Ghazni. It is located at 

the mouth of the valley which extends to Logar and offers concealed 

approach and withdrawal routes for an ambush force. The terrain 

facilitates the use of all types of weapons by an ambushing force, while 

restricting maneuver to a force caught in the kill zone. 

Mawlawi Faizan, the Wardak provincial leader of HIH, was overall commander of the Sisay combined ambush. He had information 

from his sources that a large Soviet/DRA column would move from 

Kabul to Ghazni. Mawlawi Faizan planned the ambush at Sisay and 

called on several local Mujahideen groups to participate (Map17 -

Sisay). He assembled a combined force of 80 Mujahideen armed with 

four 82mm mortars, six 82mm recoilless rifles, four 60mm mortars, 11 

ten RPG-7s and an assortment of Goryunov machine-guns, AK-47 

assault rifles and bolt-action Enfield rifles. 

I brought my group from Logar Province. It took us three hours to 

reach the ambush site. Normally, we organized our force into six-man 

teams, but due to the expected strength of the enemy column, we organized our force into 10-man teams. The ambush had three groups-an 

assault group, a support group and a heavy weapons group. The 

assault group had four teams (40 men) armed with the anti-tank 

weapons. It deployed on Guley hill close to the road. The support 

group was located behind the assault group. It had three teams (30 

men) armed with the machine-guns. It's mission was to support the 

assault group with machine gun fire, evacuate the wounded and resupply ammunition. The heavy weapons group had one 10-man team 

Haji Mohammad Seddiq is from No-Burja village in Logar Province. The village is in the 

Tangi-Wardak area which connects the Saydabad District of Wardak Province to the Baraki 

Barak District in the Logar Province. Commander Seddiq's village is located on the border 

between the two provinces. Therefore, his command fought in both provinces in coordination with other Mujahideen. Commander Haji Mohammad Seddiq was affiliated with 

Hekmatyar's HIH. [Map sheet 2785, vic grid 7666]. 

11 The Mujahideen called the 60mm mortar the "guerrilla mortar" (cheriki hawan) due to 

its light weight and transportability. 
Page 64 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

armed with the mortars. It established firing positions across the 

Wardak River. The firing sites were screened from observation by 

Khadibooch hill. 

We occupied our prepared positions in the dark. At about 0900 

hours, the forward security element of the Soviet convoy drove into the 

kill zone from the north. There were two BMPs and another APC in 

the forward security element. We let them pass. The forward security element just cleared the kill zone and then stopped. They must have 

assumed that the way was safe, since they then signaled the main body 

of the convoy to proceed. The forward security element waited while 

the main body, consisting of GAZ-66 trucks and armored vehicles, 

moved out of the green zone south of Shekhabad village and into the 

kill zone. As the column moved into the kill zone, we opened up on the 

forward security element with our anti-tank weapons. We destroyed 

both BMPs and the other APC. Then we shifted our fire to the main 

convoy. The fighting lasted for two hours. The enemy returned fire 

from his APCs and other armored vehicles, but their fire had limited 

effect against our well-prepared positions. We punished the enemy 

severely with our anti-tank fire and mortar fire. The enemy did little 

to change the situation or to try to gain the initiative. They merely 

returned fire and those caught in the kill zone died there. I commanded the first team of the assault group. By 1100 hours, we had 

destroyed all the vehicles in the kill zone and we swarmed into the 

area to capture whatever weapons and equipment we could carry. 

Then we withdrew. We left 17 armored vehicles and 45 GAZ-66 trucks 

and gas tankers burning in the kill zone. We captured four AK-74 

assault rifles-the exclusive weapon of the Soviet forces. Mujahideen 

casualties were 10 KIA and two WIA. 

CoMMENTARY: Thorough planning, good intelligence, detailed instructions to the combat elements and a simple task organization all contributed to the success of the ambush. The heavily-armed Mujahideen 

were well-disciplined and controlled. They inflicted maximum losses 

on the Soviet column before moving forward to loot. This was very 

effective since it maximized their advantage of fighting from well-protected positions against an enemy caught by surprise and trapped in 

the open. Perhaps the ambush should have had four elements. The 

support group had a combat mission (machine gun support to the 

assault group and a logistics mission of ammunition resupply and medical evacuation). Perhaps these missions should have assigned to different groups. Further, the heavy weapons group needed more men. 
Chapter 1, Vignette 16 Page 65 

Ten men cannot adequately handle four mortars, let alone eight. 

The Soviets contributed to their own disaster. The forward security element "cleared" the area by simply driving through it and since 

they were not fired on, they assumed that it was safe. This was a 

favorite Mujahideen ambush site complete with well-prepared positions. The Mujahideen had conducted several ambushes from this very 

site in the past. As a minimum, the Soviets should have sent a force to 

destroy the positions prior to the convoy departure. Then, the forward 

security element should have dismounted some troops to search the 

area for possible ambush and held it until the convoy passed. The forward security element further contributed to the disaster by stopping 

within anti-tank weapons range (300-800 meters) in an area where the 

terrain restricted vehicular movement and waiting for the convoy to 

catch up to it. When the Mujahideen fired on these stationary targets, 

the forward security element became a burning blockade which 

trapped the convoy. Had the forward security element moved well 

ahead of the convoy, it would have allowed part of the convoy to escape 

south and enabled the forward security element to return to provide 

fire power to help extricate the trapped vehicles. Had the forward 

security element moved off the road to the west and taken up covered 

positions out of anti-tank weapons range, it could have provided considerable immediate firepower to the convoy. 

CHAPTER COMMENTARY 

The Mujahideen conducted ambushes for harassment or for spoils. 

Often, harassing ambushes were small-scale ambushes which would 

only fire a few rounds into the convoy to destroy or damage some vehicles. Then the ambushers would withdraw without attempting to loot 

the column before the convoy commander could react. Ambushes conducted for spoils (weapons, ammunition, food, clothing and other military supplies) were normally conducted by larger forces who could 

maintain their positions for up to an hour. Still, the ambush was a 

short-term action designed to capitalize on surprise and terrain. Road 

blocks, discussed in a later chapter, were designed to fight the enemy 

to a standstill and prevent his passage for an extended period of time. 

Ambushes for spoils were essential to maintaining the Mujahideen 

in the field. Mujahideen were unpaid volunteers. Most of them had 

family responsibilities. Normally all captured heavy weapons and 

1/5th of the spoils went to the commander. The other 4/5ths was divided among the Mujahideen combatants. Many Mujahideen would take 
Chapter 1, Vignette 16 Page 66 

their captured Kalashnikovs and other trophies to Pakistan where they 

would sell them and then give the money to their families to live on. 

Although the popular concept of the Mujahideen combatant is a 

hardened warrior clutching a Kalashnikov assault rifle, the most 

important Mujahideen weapon in the conflict was the RPG-7 anti-tank 

grenade launcher. This Soviet-manufactured, short-range weapon 

allowed the Mujahideen to knock out tanks, trucks and, occasionally, 

helicopters. The RPG was a great equalizer and a great weapon in an 

ambush. Although the Mujahideen were light infantry, heavier crewserved weapons gave them more range and staying power in a fight. 

Mortars, rockets, recoilless rifles and heavy machine guns were essential to the force that intended to hold its ground for a time against 

mechanized Soviet and DRA forces. 

The standard Soviet!DRA convoy had a group of armored vehicles at 

the front of the convoy, more armored vehicles spaced evenly throughout the convoy and another group of armored vehicles constituting a 

rear guard. The convoy might have a helicopter or ground advance 

guard or patrol sweep the route prior to movement. Sometimes a minedetection/clearing force would precede the convoy, although mine-clearing was usually the responsibility of the unit guarding the road and the 

convoy would not start until the unit had given the "all clear." 

Sometimes a convoy would have artillery groups move within the 

column and "leap-frog'' to provide rapid, on-call fire support. 

When hit, the convoy's standard reaction was to leave armored 

vehicles inside the kill zone to return fire while the trucks drove out of 

the kill zone. If the armored vehicles chased the ambushers away, the 

convoy would continue. If the armored vehicles could not deal with the 

ambush, helicopter gunships could usually drive the ambushers from 

their positions. The convoy commander tried to maintain the movement of his convoy and would not usually turn forces around to deal 

with ambushes. Sometimes this meant that an ambush would split a 

convoy. The Soviets and DRA seldom dismounted infantry to pursue 

their ambushers since convoy movement had priority, and they seldom 

had enough infantry accompanying the convoy to pursue the 

Mujahideen into their neighborhood and overpower them. 

The Mujahideen seldom hit the head of a column unless terrain 

allowed them to bottle-up the column by doing so. The Mujahideen 

preferred to hit the middle of the convoy where there were fewer 

armored vehicles. If possible, they tried to seal off the section of convoy they were attacking if they meant to loot it. Mujahideen usually 

prepared fighting positions at the ambush site which enabled them to 
Chapter 1 , Vignette 16 Page 67 

withstand fire from enemy armored vehicles and, sometimes, helicopter gunships. 

The most successful Mujahideen ambushes organized the ambush 

into a heavy weapons support group, flank security groups, an assault 

group, and a logistics support/spoils removal group. The best ambushes had a well-understood chain of command and radio communications 

between the groups. Following the ambush, the flank security groups 

(with an air defense element), covered the withdrawal of the other 

groups over a secured withdrawal route. 
CHAPTER 2 

RAIDS 

The raid is a surprise attack designed to seize a point, exploit success and then withdraw. It is a temporary measure to capture equipment, destroy installations, bait traps to draw enemy reactions and 

attack morale. The Mujahideen conducted raids as a primary way to 

obtain weapons and ammunition-preferably from DRA security posts. 

They also conducted raids to demonstrate their ability to attack DRA 

and Soviet installations with, relative impunity. Raids generally 

require fewer supplies than an attack on a strong point since there is 

no intention of holding the objective for any length of time following a 

raid. 

Afghanistan 

Chapter 2 

Incidents 
Page 70 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

0 2KM 

TOTUMDARA 

Map 2·1 
VIGNETTE 1 · 

RAID ON THE TOTUMDARA SECURITY POST 

by Commander Sarshar 

The Soviets had a series of security posts protecting the SalangKabul highway. They had one at Totumdara which is eight kilometers 

north ofCharikar1 (Map 2-1- Totumdara). This post had five armored 

vehicles. We mounted a raid on the security post in September 1981. 

My base was in Ghorband Canyon. I had 60 Mujahideen armed with 

four Goryunov heavy machine guns, two PK medium machine guns, 

four RPG-7s, and Kalashnikov rifles. The area around my base is very 

mountainous, but also heavily patrolled, so we had to move at night. 

We moved from our base over the mountain pass to our staging area at 

Ofian-e Sharif. Ofian-e Sharif is about three kilometers south of our 

target and it took us six hours to reach it from Ghorband. We had to 

carry all our equipment on our backs. 

We stayed in Ofian-e Sharif during the day and rested and made 

our plan. That night we crossed over to the east into the green zone 

and moved into the villages near the target. I positioned 40 of my 

Mujahideen to secure our route back into the mountains and to help 

carry the gear. The other 20 were my raiding party. I divided these 

20 men into a 10-man group for immediate security and a 10-man 

assault group. The assault group had two Goryunov heavy machine 

guns, two PK medium machine guns, two RPG-7s and some 

Kalashnikovs. We attacked the post that same night. We destroyed 

two tanks with our RPGs and terrified their infantry with our 

Goryunovs. However, the security post was heavily protected by 

mines so we could not cross the mine fields to get into. the post. The 

Soviet security post at Pul-e Matak and the Project security post 

(named after the Chinese irrigation project) were on the Totumdara 

security post flanks. Both of these posts opened fire on us and we 

Commander Sarshar was a police officer in Parwan who worked clandestinely with the 

Mujahideen. When his cover was about to be blown, he became a Mujahideen commander in Ghorband. He commanded a mobile group in the Ghorband front near Charikar. 

[Map sheet 2887, vic grid 1680]. 

1 This was part of the Soviet 1 08th Motorized Rifle Division area of responsibility. At this 

time, the division's 285th Tank Regiment was stationed in Charikar while the 177th 

Motorized Rifle Regiment was stationed 13 kilometers north at Jabulassarai. The outpost 

belonged to one of these two regiments. 
Page 72 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

were forced to withdraw. We withdrew to our base in Ghorband by 

the same route we came. We had no casualties. 

CoMMENTARY: The Soviets employed millions of mines in Mghanistan 

for installation security, LOC security and area denial. Mine clearing 

was a major problem for any Mujahideen attack on a prepared site and 

often prevented Mujahideen success. The Mujahideen needed rugged, 

light-weight mine detection and clearing gear which would allow them 

to clear mines quickly under fire. Often the Mujahideen had to resort 

to heaving large rocks to create a path through a minefield. 

Attacking parked vehicles is certainly easier than attacking vehicles which are crewed and moving. Apparently the Soviets had not 

bothered to create a sandbag wall around their tanks, although an 

RPG can penetrate the turret armor of older tanks. 

The Mujahideen chose a target flanked by two other outposts that 

could bring fire onto their attacking flanks. The flank security elements were close-in elements that merely guarded the flanks and did 

nothing to pin the outposts in position. The bridge outpost should have 

been an easier target with a better chance of success. This attack also 

could have employed a larger force in two phases. The first phase 

would be an attack to the flanks to neutralize the flanking fire. The 

second phase would then be an attack on the Totumdara post. ·Such an 

attack would require better coordination and discipline than demonstrated. 
VIGNETTE 2 

CHAMTALA RAID 

by Tsaranwal (Attorney) Sher Habib 

In June 1982, Commander Sheragai led a group of ten of my 

Mujahideen on a successful raid on a DRA outpost on the Chamtala 

plain near Highway 2, just north of Kabul. Commander Sheragai 

was a Kochi2 and a kinsman of a Kochi clan which had its summer 

quarters in Paghman and in the areas aro~nd Kabul. Some of the 

families of the clan pitched their tents in Chamtala plain. There 

they tended their flocks of sheep and goats in the grazing lands just 

north of Kabul. Their grazing lands were close to a DRA security 

outpost. The DRA outpost hindered Mujahideen movement through 

the area (Map 2-2 - Chamtala). ~ 

We decided to raid the DRA outpost. I selected Commander 

Sheragai to lead the raid since he could easily gain the full cooperation 

of his Kochi clansmen in the area. His group was armed with small 

arms. They left our base at Qala-e Hakim in Paghman and walked to 

the Chamtala plain. There, Kochi families took the raiding party into 

their tents and cared for them. The raiding party stayed with the 

nomads for several days while they studied and evaluated the outpost 

and prepared for the raid. Commander Sheragai wanted to find an 

unmined approach to the outpost, so he asked his kinsmen to move 

their flocks to various spots around the outpost so he could probe the 

approaches. This went on for three days while Commander Sheragai 

picked the most secure approach to the outpost where the terrain 

allowed to Mujahideen to sneak up on the outpost unobserved. They 

cleared this approach of mines. 

On the morning of the raid, the Mujahideen raiders moved to the 

target within a herd of sheep. Some Mujahideen posed as shepherds, 

while others crawled along in the 'middle of the grazing sheep. The 

herd moved right up to the DRA outpost, but the Mujahideen presence 

was never detected or suspected by the DRA guards. The raiding 

group spent the whole day in the middle of the sheep herd and found 

hiding places. At sunset, the shepherds drove the flock back toward 

Tsaranwal (Attorney) Sher Habib commanded the lbrahimkhel Front north of the city of 

Paghman. His primary AOR extended from Paghman east and northeast to Kabul (some 

20 kilometers). [Map sheet 2886, vic grid 2369]. 

2 Kochi are nomadic peoples. 
Page 74 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

CHAMTALA 

Map 2·2 
Chapter 2, Vignette 2 Page 75 

the encampment, while the Mujahideen remained behind in hiding 

places. One of the things that the Mujahideen had discovered was 

when the seven-man security outpost had dinner. One guard was left 

on duty while the rest ate their dinner. As dinner was being served, 

three Mujahideen crept to the outpost, jumped the guard and disarmed 

him. One Mujahideen kept his hand on the mouth of the guard to 

prevent him from screaming. Then the rest of the raiding party 

swarmed into the outpost. They surprised the rest of the DRA soldiers 

and captured them all without firing a shot. A DRA lieutenant was 

among the prisoners. The Mujahideen took whatever they could carry 

and then left for their base with all their prisoners. 

COMMENTARY: Kabul and the surrounding area were heavily guarded. 

The Soviet 103rd Airborne Division, the 180th and 181st Motorized 

Rifle Regiments of the Soviet 108th Motorized Rifle Division, the DRA 

8th Infantry Division, the DRA 37th Commando Brigade and the DRA 

15th Tank Brigade were all garrisoned in Kabul. Careful reconnaissance, strict camouflage discipline and a clever deception plan enabled 

the Mujahideen to carry off this raid. Local assistance from the Kochi 

was essential to the plan. The selection of a Kochi commander and his 

efforts to gain the cooperation of his kinsmen paid off. The Mujahideen 

relied on the local populace for cover, food and water, intelligence, shelter and early warning. The time and effort spent were essential to the 

Mujahideen success. 

On the other hand, the DRA commander allowed his outpost activities to become routine. The Mujahideen planned the attack when 

security was relaxed and captured the outpost without firing a shot or 

alerting neighboring garrisons. 
VIGNETTE 3 

RAID ON BAGRAMI DISTRICT HEADQUARTERS 

by Commander Shahabuddin 

In July 1983, local units of all seven major factions united to raid 

the Bagrami District Headquarters to the southeast of Kabul. (No 

Map) We assembled about 250 Mujahideen armed with six 82mm mortars, nine recoilless rifles, and eight RPG-7s. We assembled at my base 

at Yakhdara, made our plans and then spread our forces out in the villages. We assigned 100 Mujahideen to route security and posted them ' 

prior to moving our main raiding forces to Bagrami and Qal-e 

Ahmadkhan. These towns are in the suburbs just outside of Kabul 

and are part of the inner security belt of Kabul. The Bagrami 40-man 

assault group had eight RPG-7s, three recoilless rifles and two mortars. They were to attack the district headquarters from three directions. I led the assault group at Qal-e Ahmadkhan. I had 50 men-10 

of which I used for flank protection and 40 for the raid. I also attacked 

from three directions. As we approach Qal-e Ahmadkhan, we were 

stopped by a small outpost. We overran it. Then we attacked one of 

the many security outposts in the village. We overran this outpost 

killing 25 and capturing eight DRA soldiers. We also captured 14 

Kalashnikovs and a telephone set. The Bagrami assault group could 

not get close enough to their target to attack it directly, so they shelled 

it instead. 

CoMMENTARY: The DRA and Soviets surrounded Kabul with a series 

of three security belts composed of outposts, minefields and obstacles. 

Their purpose was to deny Mujahideen entry into the city and prevent 

Mujahideen shelling attacks. The Mujahideen often attacked these 

outposts, but could not hold them. The main benefits of the security 

belt system to the Mujahideen were these attacks kept a large numbers of troops tied up in passive security roles, the outposts provided a 

source of weapons and ammunition and these attacks affected the 

morale of their opponents. 

Commander Shahabuddin is from Shewaki Village south of Kabul. There is no map with 

this vignette. [Map sheets 2885 and 2886]. 
VIGNETIE 4 

ATIACK ON THE TSAWKEY SECURITY POSTS 

by LTC Haji Mohammad Rahim 

Tsawkey is a district of Kunar Province. The DRA established a 

security post in the Tsawkey High School. This high school seclirity 

post provided protection for a section of the J alalabad to Asadabad 

highway. (Map 2-3- Tsawkey) It was a usual practice of the DRA to 

convert public buildings to such uses. I decided to capture this post in 

October 1983. I had approximately 70 Mujahideen armed with two 

82mm mortars, one DShK and some Enfield rifles. We planned our 

battle in our base in the nearby Babur Gorge. Other Mujahideen 

joined us from Dawagal. We would attack from three directions-from 

the north (high ground), along the road from the northeast and from 

the west. We moved from our base at night, deployed and attacked the 

target. Our attack lasted 30 minutes. We overran the post but could 

not hold it. We killed 11 DRA and captured one. We also captured a 

ZGU-1, a DShK and some Kalashnikovs. We had three Mujahideen 

KIA and one WIA. We could not hold the security post, so we left it. 

There were two DRA security outposts near the Tsawkey District 

headquarters. One was in the high school and the other was near the 

bridge. We had a contact inside the second post who was a DRA officer-Musa Khan. In June 1985, he helped us capture his security post. 

I assembled 50 Mujahideen armed with an RPG-7, Kalashnikovs and 

Enfields. We came during the night from our base in Babur Valley and 

followed the road bank to the southwest. We approached the post at 

dawn from the high ground to the north. Our contact led us inside. 

Most of the soldiers were asleep and we wanted to capture them. 

However, some of our Mujahideen were not very quiet and the detail 

woke up and started fighting us. We killed seven of the security detail 

and captured one. We also captured one PK medium machine gun, 12 

Kalashnikovs and ammunition. The firing alerted the other enemy 

unit in the Tsawkey high school. They sent a detachment to the outpost, but I had posted a security element on the road. This security element blocked the movement of the detachment and covered our withdrawal. We all withdrew up to our base in the mountains. I had one 

Mujahideen wounded. 

LTC Haji Mohammad Rahim was an officer in the Afghan Army who became a Mujahideen 

and led a group in Kunar Province. [Map sheet 3186, vic grid 7640]. 
Page 78 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

TSAWKEV 

Map 2-3 
Chapter 2, Vignette 4 Page 79 

CoMMENTARY: Less than 15% of the Mujahideen commanders had previous military experience, yet the impact of the military who joined the 

Mujahideen was significant. They provided a continuity, an understanding of military planning and issues, a modicum of uniform training and an ability to deal with outside agencies providing aid to the 

Mujahideen. On the other hand, these were fairly soft targets. The 

security outposts were situated in existing buildings backed by wooded high ground. The Mujahideen had concealed approaches and exits 

as well as inside help. 
N 

I 

- KABUL5KM 

,e;;.'_.---..2ANGI KAL~ ( /0;: ~ROBI45KM~ 

1 0 1 2 3 KM 

~ 

~ tAU\.\.tt- otAr>-1'\ s \<.tA 

sr>-1'\oe\ ~s \<.tA 

PUL-E - CHARKHI 

Map 2-4 

"1J 

~ CD 

00 

0 

-1 

:=T 

CD 

Q 

:=T 

~ 

en 

a: 

CD 

9. 

::;:. 

CD 

s::: 

0 

c:: 

:::J 

or 

::;· 

s::: 

E. 

Ill 

:=T 

a: 

CD 

CD 

:::J 

iii' 

n. 

(')" 

en 

::;· 

::;:. 

CD 

en 

0 

< §.. 

~ :=T 

Ill 

:::J 

~ 
VIGNETTE 5 

RAID ON PUL-E CHARKHI RADIO TRANSMITTER STATION 

by Major Sher Aqa Kochay and others 

In June 1984, Provincial NIFA leader Wali Khan issued orders to 

Major Sher Aqa Kochay, the commander of a NIFA base in Sewak 

(about 20 kilometers southeast of Kabul). Major Aqa would join two 

other regional commanders-Haji Hussein Jan of Narey Oba and 

Sayed Hasan Khan of Khak-e Jabar-in a raid on a radio transmitter 

station. The transmitter was located near Pul-e Charkhi (20 kilometers east of Kabul city) and the raid would take place on the night of 

26 June. The Soviet-backed Mghan government was expanding the 

transmitter facility which would reach wider audiences inside and outside the country. The station used local broadcasts as well as programs 

produced in the Soviet Union. 3 

The transmitter station was located in Pul-e Charkhi near a military complex which included the DRA 15th Tank Brigade, DRA lOth 

field Engineer Regiment and some other units. (see Map 16a- Qafus 1, 

Chapter 1 and Map 2-4- Pul-e Charkhi.) Further to the east, between 

Butkhak and Sarobi, a government-paid militia force patrolled the 

area and protected the power lines and pylons that supplied electricity from N aghlo Dam through Sarobi to Kabul. The militia was recruited from the local tribe of the Karokhel clan of Ahmadzai Pushtuns. 

Their chief was Hasan Khan Karokhel. On the surface, Hasan Khan 

was a government supporter. But he was actually a major Mujahideen 

collaborator. He provided the Mujahideen with logistic support, sheltered their resistance fighters and even provided medical care to 

Mujahideen wounded at regime medical institutions. 4 

Principally based on an interview with Major Sher Aqa Kochay in Peshawar on September 

14, 1996. Other sources include NIFA documents about the battle, Ali Jalali's discussions 

with Hasan Khan Karokhel in 1986 in Peshawar, his interviews with the late Wali Khan 

Karokhel (NIFA's provincial military commander of Kabul) in Peshawar and Islamabad in 

1984 and 1986 and interviews with General Abdul Rahim Wardak. [Map sheet 2886, vic 

grid 3221]. 

3 The Soviet Union and their clients in Kabul were also engaged in jamming international 

broadcasts beamed to Afghanistan. Afghans considered such broadcasts the only source 

of objective and uncensored news to the country. The jamming was done at other sites. 

4 In fact NIFA's provincial commander, Wali Khan Karokhel, was the brother of Hasan 

Khan Karokhel. Hasan Khan Karokhel had his headquarters in Mulla Omar, the ancestral 

home of the Karokhel chiefs. 
Page 82 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

According to the plan, Mujahideen from the three bases would 

assemble at Mulla Omar for final instructions prior to the raid. By the 

afternoon of 26 June, all three groups were in Mulla Omar. Major Sher 

Aqa and Haji Hussein Jan had each brought 30 men from their bases 

in Sewak and Narey Oba. Sayed Hasan Khan came with a 50-man 

unit from Khak-e Jabar. · 

Wali Khan Karokhel issued the final instructions. Major Sher Aqa 

was appointed the overall commander of the raiding group. He divided 

his force into four teams. A 20-man assault team, commanded by Haji 

Hussein Jan, carried automatic rifles, light machine guns and RPG-7 

antitank grenade launchers. Their mission was to attack the transmitter from the southwest, destroy the facility and then withdraw 

under the cover of the support group. 

Major Sher Aqa's 20-man support team would cover the assault 

team from positions in a ditch immediately to the east of the target. 

The group had one 82mm mortar, a single barrel 107mm rocket 

launcher (BM-1), a PK medium machine gun, a few RPG-7s andAK-47 

assault rifles. Major Sher Aqa decided to stay with this team since it 

would be the last to pull-out. 

Sayed Hasan Khan commanded a 25 to 30-man containment team. 

They were armed with small arms and RPG-7s. They would block the 

Pul-e Charkhi-Butkhak road on the east bank of Kabul River and prevent the enemy forces from reaching the target. The rest of the ~ 

Mujahideen were assigned as supply and evacuation elements to help 

the other groups. 

Major Aqa decided to launch the assault at midnight. Since it is 

Hasan Khan later cooperated with the Mujahideen in a major action in 1984. He sheltered, guided and supported a NIFA force which blew up all the electric pylons between 

Butkhak and Sarobi. This cut off electrical power to Kabul for a long time. "Operation 

Black-out" marked the end of Hasan Khan's service as the head of the government militia 

and he, along with his family and 400 followers, migrated to Pakistan and continued his 

struggle against the Soviet-backed regime from there. Hazhir Teimourian reported on this 

in The Times of London on 31 August 1984. 

Wali Khan, Hasan Khan's brother, remained NIFA's provincial leader in Kabul until 

1986. Afterwards, he acted independently mostly in the anti Communist political movement outside the country. After the Soviet withdrawal, he joined the Council of Solidarity 

and Understanding--a movement of Afghan intellectuals campaigning for creation of a 

moderate government in Afghanistan. The movement, and particularly Wali Khan Karokhel, 

supported the restoration of the former King of Afghanistan as a person who would serve 

as a symbol of unity among the fractionalized Afghan Resistance. Wali Khan was assassinated in 1994 on the road between Peshawar and Islamabad by yet unidentified gunmen. 

Some speculation points to his political enemies among the extremist Islamic groups as the 

perpetrators of the murder. 
Chapter 2, Vignette 5 Page 83 

about 15 kilometers from Mulla Omar to the site and since the raiding 

party had to bypass a Soviet unit deployed in Gazak, the departure 

time was set at dusk (about 2000 hours). The party would move from 

Mulla Omar through Gazak to reassemble briefly at Lewano Kandow. 

The Mujahideen force moved out in small groups following each other 

on the same route all the way to Lewano Kandow. A pair of reconnaissance patrols moved on the flanks and one moved to the front of 

the column-keeping within voice contact distance. 

When the force reached a water spring at the Lewano Kandow, Major 

Sher Aqa issued the last coordinating instructions and ordered the 

groups to open fire when he did. This would signal the start of the raid. 

From their Lewano Kandow assembly area, the different elements of the 

raiding p~rty moved separately toward their designated areas. 

Just before midnight, all groups were in place. Everything was 

quiet around the transmitter site. At Major Sher Aqa's signal, the 

assault team opened fire on the site and began the attack. The support 

team covered their advance. RPG rounds set the wooden buildings on 

fire and soon fire swept the site. The defenders at the site panicked 

and failed to put up an organized resistance ... The assault team overran the site, killed several soldiers, captured five Kalashnikov assault 

rifles and demolished the transmitter station. 

The DRA quickly responded by moving a tank column from the Pule Charkhi garrison to the site. The column crossed the bridge over the 

Kabul River but then left the main road and bypassed the Mujahideen 

blocking positions established by the containment (holding) team of 

Sayed Hasan Khan. The tanks, driving with their headlights off, cut 

across the plain to the east of the Mujahideen, cutting off their escape '-

route. A young Mujahideen named Babrak hit one tank with an RPG7 rocket and set it on fire. But the rest of the column moved swiftly to 

the south-west. 

Fearing encirclement, the containment (holding) team and the 

assault team immediately broke contact and, without notifying Major 

Sher Aqa, pulled out toward the Lewano Kandow, leaving the support 

team behind. As Commander Sher Aqa was desperately trying to establish contact with the other teams, he heard tanks moving to the rear of 

his position. By this time, all electric lights in the area were extinguished, but the transmitter station continued to burn brightly. The 

Mujahideen and the DRA tank column both used the fire for orientation. 

Facing a threatening situation, Major Sher Aqa instructed his men 

not to panic but to exfiltrate individually through the intervals 

between the tanks. Using masking terrain, his Mujahideen managed 
Page 84 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

to exfiltrate and move to the designated assembly area at Lewano 

Kandow. As they straggled in, they found that the assault and containment teams along with supply and evacuation personnel were 

already waiting there. Major Sher Aqa discovered that all the groups, 

except his support group, had withdrawn when the enemy tank column 

arrived. All Mujahideen reached Lewano Kandow by 0200. 

Mujahideen casualties were six wounded-one from the supporting 

team who died on the way back, two from the assault team and three 

from the containment team. It was not safe for the Mujahideen to 

move further, since daybreak would be in two hours and the Mujaideen 

would once again have to bypass the Soviet force at Grazak. The raid 

on Pul-e Charkhi would clearly have alerted the Soviets to the presence of a Mujahideen force in their area. 

Two groups, Haji Hussein Jan's detachment and Sayed Hasan 

Khan's party, decided to stay during the day in the Lewano Kandow 

mountain since they could not reach their bases during the remaining hours of the night. Major Sher Aqa's group, along with the 

wounded, moved forward to Mulla Omar. This was only possible 

since Hasan Khan Karokhel had sent trucks to Lewano Kandow to 

carry the wounded and other Mujahideen to safety before daybreak. 

The trucks, posing as militia patrols trying to hunt down the raiding force, took these Mujahideen to Mulla Omar where they were 

taken care of and medical personnel were summoned from Kabul 

who tended to the wounded. The next night, the Mujahideen groups 

returned to their bases and sent the body of the one dead warrior to 

his family for burial. 

COMMENTARY: The assistance extended by the Karokhel militia contributed markedly to the Mujahideen success. Such assistance was 

essential for actions conducted around a strongly defended city like 

Kabul. From 1980 to 1984, the militia helped many Mujahideen infiltrate into Kabul before defecting en masse to the resistance. Their 

assistance was particularly important in suporting the withdrawal of 

Mujahideen strike groups at the end of an action. Such inside help 

made it possible for a force of more than 100 to launch a raid right in 

the heart of the enemy stronghold. Ideally, a much smaller group, like 

a 15-man team, would have been more appropriate to the task. But the 

Mujahideen preferred to move in large groups. Large groups could 

carry heavy loads, provide needed labor in the field and carry and 

escort the wounded and dead. Many Mujahideen felt more comfortable 

having their relatives or close friends with them. 
Chapter 2, Vignette 5 Page 85 

Lack of reliable internal communications among the Mujahideen 

combat teams led to a situation {hat could have turned disastrous. The 

containment team did not contain the DRA tanks and pulled out immediately after it saw the tanks bypass its position. The group helped the 

assault team during the assault,'but this was not their assigned mission. Had the group laid anti-tank mines in areas that the enemy 

tanks had to pass over- particularly in the vicinity of the bridge over 

the Kabul River and the river fords-it could have delayed the tank 

column and allowed them to engage it more effectively. This would 

have prevented the enveloping movement that almost encircled the 

whole Mujahideen contingent. 

Apparently, the DRA had not developed and rehearsed contingency 

plans to deal with such a raid. This, and luck, helped the Mujahideen 

escape heavy casualties. A more active reaction by the DRA could easily 

have jeopardized the concentration of a sizeable Mujahideen force in an 

area totally controlled by Soviet/DRA forces. Relying on tanks, the 

enemy failed to deploy infantry with the tanks. Infantry are more effective in the dark against guerrillas and provide protection to the tanks 

against anti-tank gunners. At the same time, the Mujahideen failed to 

take advantage of the tank column's vulnerability and use their RPG-7s 

at close distance against the unprotected tanks. The Mujahideen had the 

opportunity to kill more than the one tank they actually destroyed. 

Fear of being cut off inhibite.d much of the Mujahideen action after 

they successfully destroyed the transmitter. However, through good 

leadership, Major Sher Aqa turned a threatening tactical situation into 

a more manageable one and succeeded in pulling his men out through 

the tank cordon. 
Page 86 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

N 

I 

\.U..(, 

(20) ~ ~? (20) ··n< (h • ;r A •• PUL-E 

ASIA·E •: vv ':•• KHUSHK 

BENI • V •• (5) 

0 

CHELTAN 

Map 2·5 

2KM 
VIGNETTE 6 

RAID FROM CHELTAN ON OUTPOSTS IN THE KABUL SUBURBS 

by Commander Asil Khan 

Kabul was surrounded by three security belts made up of security outposts manned by Soviet and DRA forces. A battalion from the 

DRA 8th Infantry Division garrisoned the old highway construction 

headquarters, commonly known as "the company," in the western 

suburbs of Kabul. The battalion also guarded a number of government supply depots located across the highway to the west. The 

battalion built security outposts on the Khwaja Pushta hills in the 

south. The battalion protected all its installations with mine fields 

except for the outposts on the hills. This made all the other installations too difficult to attack in the dark. 

I commanded a joint 200 Mujahideen detachment made up from 

local resistance units affiliated with NIFA, HIK and Etehad-e Islami 

(IUA). According to our agreed plan, we were to move from our bases 

around Cheltan and converge on the target area in the dark. We 

would continually shell the main battalion camp and the depots, 

while the assault groups would attack the Khwaja Pushta hill 

outposts (Map 2-5 - Cheltan). 

In the late afterno6n of 1 June 1985, I led my NIFA Mujahideen 

from our base at Morghgiran. We arrived near the target after 2000 

hours. We deployed for battle according to plan. I established blocking positions at Asia-e Beni and Pul-e Khushk and deployed about 20 

Mujahideen at each position. I positioned one 82mm mortar with its 

five-man crew and two 82mm recoilless rifles (each with a five-man 

crew) at Asia-e Benito shell the enemy battalion. 

The raid began around 2100 hours and lasted until 2300 hours. 

Our heavy weapons kept the enemy battalion and the depot forces 

pinned in place. The enemy responded with artillery fire but made no 

attempt to counter with infantry or tanks. No enemy helicopters 

responded throughout the raid. This lack of response left the tactical 

initiative in my hands. We easily overran the enemy outposts on the 

Khwaja Pushta hills and captured weapons and a radio set. Most of 

the DRA soldiers ran away. At one outpost, we killed two enemy soldiers and wounded another. We had no casualties. We pulled out 

before midnight and the force split up and returned to their bases. 

Asil Khan was a NIFA commander and a famed guerrilla commander in the Kabul area. 

[Map sheets 2885 and 2886]. 
Page 88 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

CoMMENTARY: Throughout the war, Soviet and DRA forces were reluctant to respond aggressively to Mujahideen night attacks. Unless the 

Soviet and DRA forces had planned and rehearsed a counter-attack 

drill, they rarely left the relative safety of their prepared positions to 

deal with Mujahideen night attacks. This encouraged the Mujahideen 

to harass the enemy continuously at night and to attack the weakest 

points of their defenses. Often, the Mujahideen boldly attacked areas 

adjacent to large forces. These security posts were out of supporting 

range of other posts, so the DRA refusal to react to the attack practically handed the outpost to the Mujahideen. 

However, the Mujahideen could not fully exploit their enemy's 

reluctance to fight at night to achieve decisive tactical results. The 

Mujahideen could not readily penetrate the heavily-mined zones 

surrounding Soviet and DRA positions. As long as the Soviet/DRA 

forces felt no serious threat from isolated Mujahideen night attacks, 

they preferred to respond by artillery fire instead of risking stumbling 

into an ambush. The Soviet and DRA response came in the form of 

well-planned major cordon and search operations in those areas where 

the Mujahideen had gained an upper hand. 
VIGNETTE 7 

RAID ON MAHIPAR OUTPOSTS 

by Commander Wazir Gul 

In July 1984 three groups of Mujahideen combined to raid 

Soviet/DRA security outposts on the main Kabul-Jalalabad highway. 

(Map 2-6- Mahipar) Highway 1 at Mahipar passes through a deep 

gorge, with the river flowing immediately to the north of the road 

and with a steep ridge rising on the south. Other than the highway, 

the main access to Mahipar is through Mulla Omar Dara, a mountain valley connecting Mulla Omar Village with Highway 1. At that 

time, the DRA had a militia unit headquartered at Mulla Omar. The 

DRA militia commander was Hasan Khan Karokhel, the local 

Ghilzai Pashtun chieftain. Hasan Khan was also a secret collaborator with the Mujahideen. He helped facilitate our movements and 

combat against Soviet/DRA forces in the area. 

My group reached Mulla Omar in the evening after a day march 

from our base at Tangi Tezin. There, we were joined by two NIFA 

commanders, Captain Mghan of Deh Sabz, and Sayed Hasan Khan of 

Khak-e Jabar. All together, we had 80 Mujahideen armed withAK-47s 

and .303 Enfield rifles, five BM-1s, four 82mm recoilless rifles, four 

82mm mortars, two DShKs and 13 RPG-7s. We planned our combined 

action at Mulla Omar and moved out the next morning toward 

Mahipar over Lataband mountain. We had packed our heavy weapons 

on mules. There were three chief components in our combined forcetwo fire support groups and an assault group. Each fire support group 

had BM-1s and 82mm mortars. Their mission was to attack and pin 

down the DRA base on the left flank and the Soviet base on the right 

flank. The assault group consisted of three teams. Each assault team 

had a designated outpost to attack. Each assault team had RPGs and 

recoilless rifles to support their attack. 

In order to minimize the daylight available to the enemy's aircraft, 

we began our attack at 1600. We knew it would take several hours for 

them to respond. Our heavy weapons pounded the flanking bases to 

isolate the attack area. The assault teams began to fire on the security posts and slowly move forward. The attack on the security posts 

was hindered by enemy mines and it took several hours for the 

Commander Wazir Gul was affiliated with Jamiat-e lslami Afghanistan (JIA) of Burhanuddin 

Rabbani. His base was in Tezin southwest of Sarobi. He fought in the Sarobi, Lataband 

and Mahipar areas. [Map sheet 2986, vic grid 4723]. 
Page 90 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

z 

a: a.!. ::E <( tO ~ I 0 N c.. N a: 

c( 

- Q. 

~ :I: co 

~ <( :iE 

:E 

0 ( 
Chapter 2, Vignette 7 Page 91 

Mujahideen to overrun the outposts after heavy clashes. By 2100, the 

DRA soldiers manning the outposts were either killed or had escaped. 

We took one tank crew prisoner. 

The Soviet base and outposts further down the road could not 

support the embattled DRA outposts. But as we pulled out, the 

Soviet base began heavy fire on the withdrawing Mujahideen 

groups. Their fire had little effect in the dark. We destroyed two 

tanks, killed nine enemy soldiers and captured three DShKs, six AK47 rifles and a large amount of ammunition. Two Mujahideen were 

wounded in the battle. We spent the night at Mulla Omar and 

returned to our bases the next day. 

COMMENTARY: . The terrain here is very restrictive and rugged. The 

Soviet/DRA bases and outposts were all in the canyon. The 

Soviets/DRA surrendered the initiative in this area and trusted that 

the difficulty in crossing the rugged terrain, coupled with their 

bunkers and field fortifications, would protect these sites from the 

Mujahideen. There were a series ofthree security outposts along the 

road: two on the high ground on both sides of the gorge and the other 

on the road. The purpose of security outposts was to protect bridges, 

hydroelectric installations, dams and block the side valleys. The outposts on the high ground were not high enough to interfere with 

Mujahideen freedom of action. There were a few observation posts on 

the high peaks but they were not effective, particularly at night. The 

security outposts on the high ground were mostly manned by DRA or 

militia which lacked training and were in fact prisoners in their mineprotected enclaves. The Mujahideen could easily bypass them-particularly at night. The Soviets/DRA had mined the main approaches to 

the gorge, but given the steep nature of the approaches, the mines usually washed away when it rained. The Mujahideen often used such 

steep areas to descend to the highway. 

The Mujahideen, on the other hand, saw this set up as an .excellent 

opportunity to punish their opponent, pick up some weapons and 

resupply ammunition. The Mujahideen developed a standard pattern 

for attacking outposts along this road. They would attack late in the 

afternoon to minimize the effectiveness of air strikes and artillery. 

They would fire rockets and mortars at the main base camps on both 

flanks of the target a:rea to seal the area and hold the attention of the 

base camps so that they would not interfere with the main attack. 

Then they would launch the attack against the outposts which were 

mostly manned by ill-trained, poorly-motivated conscript DRA. The· 
Page 92 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

DRA had little stomach for the fight and, once the Mujahideen got 

through the minefields surrounding the outposts, the Mujahideen 

would strip the outposts of everything they could carry and disappear 

into the night. The Mujahideen would usually offer DRA prisoners the 

opportunity to serve as labor service with the Mujahideen or simply 

turn them loose. The Mujahideen felt that the conscript DRA soldier 

had little choice in the fight. DRA officers were kept prisoner until 

they could be tried by field tribunal. The Mujahideen felt fairly secure 

from sallies from the base camps at night. Soviet and DRA reaction 

was mainly limited to area shelling and bombing. 
VIGNETTE 8 

RAID ON LATABAND SECURiTY OUTPOSTS 

by Commander Wazir Gul 

There are two highways between Kabul and Sarobi. The northern 

highway is the newer one and is part of Highway 1-the main highway 

of Mghanistan. The older Kabul-Sarobi highway runs roughly parallel to Highway 1, some four-ten kilometers to the south. A series of 

Soviet and DRA security bases and outposts protected both highways. 

In September 1985, several Mujahideen groups combined to conduct a 

raid on the Soviet/DRA security outposts in the Lataband pass east of 

Kabul (Map 2-7 - Lataband). Lataband is located on the old KabulSarobi highway. The Lataband pass was protected by a Soviet base at 

Mulla Omar in the west, and a DRA Sarandoy base at Lataband in the 

east. The area between the two bases was protected by several security outposts manned by DRA military detachments. 

My group's base was in Zandeh Kalay which is some 25 kilometers 

south of the pass. I planned the attack at the base. We left the base at 

1500 and moved to the Tezin Valley where we spent the night. We carried our supplies and ammunition on mules. Once we got to the Tezin 

Valley, I met with'the commanders of other groups and we coordinated 

our attack. The total strength of the combined Mujahideen force was 

about 150 fighters. We left what we did not need for immediate combat at Tezin and moved out toward our targets. We brought the m:ules 

with us. There were three chief components in our combined forcetwo fire support groups and an assault group. Each fire support group 

had heavy weapons (three BM-1, four DShK, three 82mm mortars). 

Their mission was to attack and pin down the Soviet base at Mulla 

Omar and the Sarandoy base at Lataband. The assault group had 

twelve RPG-7s and four 82mm recoilless rifles. The assault group was 

composed of three 20-man teams. Each 20-man team had a designated enemy outpost to attack. 

We moved into position. In order to minimize the daylight available to the enemy's aircraft, we decided to start'our attack in the late 

afternoon. We began the attack at 1600 with heavy fire on the bases 

at Mulla Omar and Lataband. Meanwhile, the assault teams occupyCommander Wazir Gul was affiliated with Jamiat-e lslami Afghanistan (JIA) of Burhanuddin 

Rabbani. His base was in Tezin southwest of Sarobi. He fought in the Sarobi, Lataband 

and Mahipar areas. [Map sheets 2985 and 2986vic grid 5618]. 
Page 94 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

:::;; 

~ 

"" CD 

., CD 

., CD 

., c "' "' "' .c .c .c c D.. D.. D.. z ..... z "E "'C /--.. 'lij "' <C I w "" c 

C\1 "' ,~ 

m <-' 

~ ~ ""t( a. w 'X ca --' 

<1: :iE \../ 

...J .___ _______ _, 0 

------------ -- ~~ > ..... ;g: 

Z~llll--

0 
Chapter 2, Vignette 8 Page 95 

ing the high ground south of the Lataband pass began to fire on the 

enemy outposts below. The shelling confused the enemy as the three 

teams of the assault group approached their outposts and launched the 

attack. The battle continued into the evening and the assault teams 

overran the enemy outposts. As the Mujahideen approached the outposts, most of the DRA soldiers ran away and left behind an enormous 

amount of ammunition and· other equipment. We loaded what we 

could on our mules and hauled it away. The enemy responded by saturating the area in and around the outposts with artillery fire and air 

attacks. We lost two mules to artillery fire and so withdrew at 2100. 

We suffered personnel losses. The losses in my own group were one 

KIA and six WIA. We captured two DRA soldiers and lots ofammunition and supplies. 

COMMENTARY: The isolated highway security posts were extremely 

vulnerable to attacks by Mujahideen who Controlled the surrounding 

high ground. The Soviets/DRA had insufficient intelligence or surveillance in the immediate region. Furthermore, their contingency plans 

. to reinforce outposts or to react swiftly against Mujahideen attacks 

were lacking or poorly executed. The forces in the bases seemed to 

have a severe case of "bunker mentality" and passively sat out the 

Mujahideen shelling and attack on the outposts. The Soviets and DRA 

seemed particularly reluctant to move and fight at night. The 

Mujahideen exploited this reluctance. Air support apparently was 

slow in coming and was not very accurate ·at night. 

In this example, the Soviet/DRA base forces waited until the out-

. posts were overrun and the Mujahideen were withdrawing before they 

reacted. They reacted with artillery and air strikes-not maneuver 

forces. The·DRA in the outposts were left to their own devices. The 

DRAforces were generally ill-trained and had poor morale. Most ofthe 

DRA soldiers had been press-ganged into the army and had no desire 

to fight their countrymen. Therefore, the DRA soldiers were more 

interested in escaping than in stubborn defense and were quite willing 

to .abandon the ammunition and supplies of the outpost to the attacking Mujahideem. The Mujahideen preferred to attack DRA outposts for 

this reason. 

Mujahideen dependence on these types of raids for weapons and 

ammunition cost them casualties. The Soviets and DRA reacted with 

artillery and air strikes when they could, but they did not continue 

them all night long. This gave the Mujahideen the option or'immediately entering the camp to seize what material they could and then I 

/ 
Page 96 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

leaving to get far away before dawn or waiting for the artillery to subside and then leaving with less time until daylight. Both courses 

entailed risk. 
VIGNETTE 9. 

RAID ON OUTPOSTS AT WRESHMIN GORGE 

by Commander Wazir Gul 

During OCtober 1985, Mujahideen factions took turns blocking 

the Kabul-Jalalabad highway at Wreshmin Tangay (gorge) between 

Dabili and Dargo bridges (Map 2-8 - Wreshmin). My mission was to 

block the highway for eight days. At that time, I commanded 70 

Mujahideen. We were armed with five BM-1s, two BM-12s, four 

82mm recoilless rifles, two ZGU-1s, three 82mm mortars and many 

RPG-7s. In order to block the highway, I had to remove enemy security posts along that stretch of road. I moved my force from Manay 

in Hisarak to the Tsapar (Capar) mountain where I refined my 

battle plan. Since there are limited access routes into the area and 

since the area near the highway was heavily mined, I decided to 

launch the initial attack against the flanks of the area we were going 

to block, i.e. against the Dabili bridge in the west and the Dargo 

bridge in the east. These two places are relatively accessible from 

the mountains in the south. Mter destroying the road bridges at 

these two' points, I planned to isolate the area and continue the 

attack down the highway against 'the security outposts. The highway approach was best since the highway itself was not mined. 

I divided my detachment into two groups and moved them to Dabili 

and Dargo. I kept a reserve centrally located to the rear between the 

two attacking groups. The two groups approached the target at night. 

The next day, they captured the Dabili and Dargo bridges by swift 

attacks. They immediately destroyed the bridges with explosives. 

This isolated the area. Then, the two groups attacked down the road 

(to avoid the DRA minefields) from the opposite directions. They eventually overran 16-17 small Soviet/DRA security outpo:;;ts located on the 

road. Then they turned around to consolidate their success and reinforced the defenses at the east and west flanks of the blockade. 

During the next eight days, the Soviets and DRA tried to reopen the 

highway, but failed. Their air strikes and artillery were generally ineffective due to the narrowness of the canyon. The enemy sent a column 

from J alalabad to force the road, but we stopped them in the narrow 

confines around Dargo bridge and theyhad to withdraw. We spent the 

Commander Wazir Gul was affiliated with Jamiat-e lsi ami Afghanistan (JIA) of Burhanuddin 

Rabbani. His base was in Tezin southwest of Sarobi. He fought in the Sarobi, Lataband 

and Mahipar areas. [Map sheets 2985, 2986, vic grid 7617 to 8317]. 
Page 98 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

z ........... _ 

c 

z 

w 

CJ 

w 

..J 
Chapter 2, Vignette 9 Page 99 

eight days stripping all the ammunition, weapons and supplies out of 

the bases and outposts. We hauled the spoils of war into the mountains. We captured about 100 weapons and an enormous amount of 

ammunition. At the end of our eight days, I withdrew my detachment 

and we .returned to our base. I lost six KIA and 18 WIA or about 30% 

of my force. Enemy losses were heavier and included some 50 killed or 

wounded and 24 soldiers captured. 

COMMENTARY: The terrain played a major role in shaping the battle. 

The Soviets/DRA controlled the ribbon of highway running through a 

narrow gorge, while the Mujahideen controlled the surrounding mountains whenever they wanted to. The Mujahideen had the freedom to 

choose the time and place· to raid dozens of security outposts sprinkled 

along the treacherous highway snaking through the very narrow 

canyon in Mahipar and the Wreshmin Tangay. In the Wreshmin 

Tangay, virtually all Mujahideen groups habitually first attacked the 

two main bridges ·i.e. Dabili and Darga. Then, after destroying the 

bridges, they would attack the rest of the security posts from both 

ends. This method proved to be the most effective one given the terrain, minefields, enemy dispositions and Mujahideen capabilities. 
Page 100 The Other s·ide of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

ALINGAR 

Map 2·9 

l 0 

N 

t 

O.SKM L....---------1 

! TO i"NGAR TOWN 
VIGNETTE 10 

RAID ON THE BRIDGE POST IN ALINGAR 

by Doctor Abdul Qudus Alkozai and Commander Haji Sidiqullah 

In February 1986, Commander Abdul Qudus Alkozai led a group of 

15 Mujahideen on a raid of a government post near the center of the 

Alingar District in Laghman Province. The post overlooked a bridge 

on the Alingar River near Barwai Village, some four kilometers north 

of Alingar. The bridge outpost was located within a walled enclosure 

and included covered firing positions and parapets. The post included 

a one-room guard house for the six soldiers who manned the post. The 

outpost was part of a security belt protecting the district center against 

Mujahideen attacks. There were several other outposts in the area 

established in individual houses and fort-like structures. Among them 

were Ghulamali Qala to the north and Yawar Qala and Sahebgul Qala 

to the south of the bridge post. They were about 150-200 meters apart 

(Map 2-9 Alingar). 

My guerrilla raiding party left its base in a nearby village at 2200 

hours on a dark, cold, rainy winter night. Moving north to the objective, I dropped a two-man observation/security party opposite the 

Sahebgul Qala outpost. I posted another two-man observation/ security party outside the Yawar Qala outpost and a final two-man observation/security party alongside the road to the bridge. They were to pin 

down any forces which attempted to come to the aid of the bridge outpost. My eight remaining Mujahideen and I were armed with eight 

automatic rifles and one RPG-7. We moved to the bridge and deployed 

in the cover of a roadside ditch. We completely blocked the western 

approach to the bridge. 

My plan was to remain in the ditch until the soldiers at the outpost opened the door of the guard house to relieve the sentry. Then, 

using the light coming from the opened door to guide on, we would 

jump over the low (one-meter) outpost enclosure wall, storm the post 

and kill the occupants. 

We waited for two miserable hours in the cold rain, but nothing 

happened inside the outpost. Finally, I decided to take the ihitiative. 

Haji Sidiqullah was the Provincial Military Commander of the HIH party in Laghman. He 

joined Hekmatyar in the fight against Daoud--before the communist revolution. He had no 

formal military education. Dr. Abdul Qudus was a guerrilla commander under Sidiqullah. 

He doubled as the force medic, since he received medic's training in Pakistan. [Map sheet 

3086, vic grid 2455]. 
Page 102 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

I directed three men to. move quietly to the post, jump over the wall 

and attack the sentry. Then, as soon as the other soldiers started to 

come out of the guard house, we would rush the guard house and 

demand their surrender. 

I positioned the RPG-7 where it could hit the guard house and told 

the gunner not to fire if he heard his comrades telling the soldiers to 

surrender (surrender was the code word). I instructed him to open fire 

if the enemy initiated contact and opened fire on us. 

At about 0100, my three-men par,ty approached the outpost. One 

man covered the team while the other two jumped over the wall. One 

of these Mujahideen landed squarely on the back of the sleeping enemy 

sentry. The sentry was wrapped in a blanket and sound asleep, but 

when my Mujahideen landed on him, he woke up and began to shout. 

My panicked Mujahideen opened fire and killed the sentry. 

Anticipating the reaction of the guards, one Mujahideen tossed a hand 

grenade into the door of the guard room. As it exploded, they rushed 

into the structure. My RPG gunner heard the commotion, but did not 

hear his comrades demanding the enemy surrender. Since the code 

word was not used, my RPG gunner assumed that the enemy had overwhelmed his comrades and therefore opened fire on the guard house. 

The RPG-7 rocket ripped through the wall of the guard house, 

killing two soldiers and seriously injuring one of my Mujahideen standing nearby. This changed the situation drastically. My wounded 

Mujahideen was calling for help and his comrades stopped to evacuate 

him. As soon as my other Mujahideen saw their comrades stop to 

attend to their fallen comrade, they also stopped their attack. I called 

off the raid and ordered a withdrawal. As we withdrew, my security 

teams rejoined us and we returned to our base. 

COMMENTARY: The Mujahideen timing for the raid was ideal. 

Inclement weather and night movement covered their approach. The 

enemy guard was even asleep. This lack of enemy alertness was not 

unusual. The DRA and Soviets usually failed to deploy foot patrols at 

night between their outposts. There was also little tactical and fire 

. coordination between outposts. This passivity at night resulted in a 

bunker mentality among the Soviet/DRA s0ldiers manning isolated 

security outposts and allowed the Mujahideen freedom of movement 

and the chance to own the night and conduct their hit and run raids. 

Lack of control of the raiding party at the objective foiled an otherwise skillfully·planned action. What went wrong was a combination of 

Murphy's law, a lack of precombat rehearsals and a lack of a regular 
Chapter 2, Vignette 1 0 Page 1 03 

chain of command. Landing on a sleeping soldier was bad luck, but dry 

rehearsals would have exercised the option of an approach being dis- . 

covered and provided for the continuation of the attack while wounded 

are being evacuated. Since the force commander did not have communication with his RPG gunner, he needed the firm, positive control that 

. a subordinate leader, located with the RPG gunner, could have provided. Lack of communication, subordinate leadership and fire coordination at the objective cost the Mujahideen a tactical victory. 

CHAPTER COMMENTARY 

The Mujahideen raid depended on surprise and quick execution. 

Raids produced needed weapons, ammunition and equipment. They 

also proved a good way to destroy DRA or Soviet security posts and 

sites. A well-organized raid had an assault force, a fire support group 

and a security element. Portable radios were needed to coordinate the 

raiding elements, but all too often the Mujahideen lacked th~se radios. 

The Mujahideen primary obstacle in a raid was to get past the mine 

fields which the Soviets and DRA emplaced around their security posts 

and sites. The Mujahideen launched most of their raids at night. They 

did so to prevent being hit by effective air or artillery strikes and to 

avoid further contact with DRA or Soviet forces which were reluctant 

to leave their garrisons at night. 
CHAPTER 3 

SHELLING ATTACKS 

Mujahideen shelling attacks on garrisons, outposts, airfields and 

cities were a daily event. The Mujahideen usually used mortars, rockets and recoilless rifles in these attacks. Sometimes they used mountain guns and howitzers. The objective was to harrass their foes and 

destroy war material. Mujahideen gunners learned to construct multiple firing sites and to fire and then quickly displace before DRA or 

Soviet artillery or aviation could respond effectively. When possible, 

Mujahideen would keep water near their firing sites to dampen the 

ground behind the rocket or recoilless rifle. This would help curb the 

amount of tell tale dust raised by the backblast of the ordnance. The 

Soviets and DRA tried to curb these attacks with counterbattery fires, 

rapid reaction forces and ambushes. Due to their routine nature, the 

Mujahideen did not usually discuss these unless the interviewer 

probed. The Mujahideen considered these as usually rather dull 

events that did not bear retelling. The following attacks, however, 

were hardly dull events. 

Afghanistan 

Chapter 3 

Incidents 
Page 106 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

Z .... 411---
VIGNETTE 1 

A SHELLING ATTACK TURNS BAD 

by Mawlawi Shukur Yasini 

In the spring of 1981, the Soviets and DRA were very active in 

our area. As a result, we dismantled our permanent bases and 

changed them to mobile bases scattered throughout the area. I 

intended to launch a major show of force against the Soviets using 

my mobile bases. I had two mortars-a 60mm and an 82mm. The 

problem with the 60mm mortar is that it only has a range of 1,400 

meters, so the gunner has to get close to the target to use it. I also 

had two DShK machine guns, and five RPG-7s. I kept these heavy 

weapons at my base at Gerdab. My men had small arms which they 

kept with them. 

On 17 April1981, I launched a shelling attack against the Soviet 

66th Separate Motorized Rifle Brigade in Samarkhel. I only took 42 

men with me since we were not very well equipped and we were not 

ready for a major encounter with superior forces. Further, Kama 

District is right across the river from the 66th Brigade garrison and 

they kept the area under constant surveillance. I did not want to 

move a large group of men through the area and alert them. To 

avoid observation, we went north from Gerdab into the mountains 

and then west across the mountains and into Mamakhel Village in 

the Kama area (Map 3-1 - Darga). We stayed for three nights iri 

Mamakhel and spent the days in the mountains at Darga China 

spring-some three kilometers away. From Mamakhel, we went to 

Mawlawi Shukur Yasini is a prominent religious leader in Nangrahar Province. He is from 

the village of Gerdab in Kama District northeast of Jalalabad. During the war, he was a 

major commander of the Khalis group (HIK). Later, he joined NIFA. During the war, he 

took television journalist Dan Rather to his base in Afghanistan. He also accompanied 

Congressman Charles Wilson of Texas into Afghanistan several times. During most of the 

war he was active in his own area, fighting the DRA in Jalalabad and the Soviet 66th 

· Separate Motorized Rifle Brigade at Samarkhel. He became a member of the Nangrahar 

governing council after collapse of the communist regime-a position he held until the 

Taliban advance in September 1996. [Map sheet 3185]. 

One day, three Soviet soldiers from the 66th Brigade crossed the Kabul River for a 

picnic. They were drinking vodka and cooking shashlik around a campfire when Mawlawi 

Shukur captured them. One of the Soviets, named Naomov, converted to Islam and fought 

with the Mujahideen for three years. Author Ali Jalali interviewed Naomov during his visit 

to Washington;D.C. sponsored by the Freedom House. Naomov spoke Pushtu well by that 

time. Naomov recommended that "the Mujahideen quit fighting one another and unite 

against the enemy." Naomov settled in Canada. 
Page 108 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

Kama Village where some people were still living-although many 

people had already emigrated to Pakistan. 

At Kama, I put my nephew Shahpur in charge and told him to 

take my two mortars and 38 men and to go shell the 66th's camp.1 I 

kept four men with me. The shelling group left Kama at dusk. They 

positioned the 82mm mortar on the north side of the river at the 

house of Khan-e Mulla at Jamali Village-since it had the range. 

Then they crossed the river at Bela and approached the camp 

through the village of Samarkhel. They occupied positions close to 

the entrance of the enemy camp. They had the guerrilla mortar 

(60mm) and the RPGs with them. They opened fire with the RPGs 

and the 60mm mortar from close range at 2200 hours. The 82mm 

mortar joined in long-range fires onto the sleeping camp. The 

sheUing attack created chaos. The shelling group fired at intervals 

over a two-hour period and then broke contact and withdrew. I was 

in Kama throughout the attack. My men had orders to join me in the 

mountains at the Darga China spring the next day. I went to the 

rendezvous point. I arrived at dawn and they were already there. 

Two of my men were missing, since they had forgotten the 60mm 

mortar and a video camera and had gone back to retrieve them.2 

While I was in Kama, informers told me that the enemy would 

launch a search and destroy mission in Kama District in five days. I 

decided that they would now come sooner since we had shelled them. 

I decided that we had to leave the area. At sunrise, I instructed my 

· men to go deeper into the mountains. I was tired and had a cold, so 

I decided to go back home to Gerdab. However, as I set out, I saw two 

helicopters lifting off from the airport and flying low over Kama 

District. I hit the ground and hid. I was alone except for Haji 

Shahbaz. Other helicopters followed the first two. At first I thought 

that the helicopters were enroute to Kunar Province, but then they 

started landing troops from two helicopters at Mirji Gholi point" on 

Derghi Ghar mountain-about a kilometer away. They also landed 

1 The 66th and 70th Separate Motorized Rifle Brigades were forces created for counterinsurgency. They had three motorized rifle battalions, an air assault battalion, an artillery 

howitzer battalion, a MRL battalion, a reconnaissance battalion, a tank battalion and 

support troops. The 70th was located in Kandahar. The 2nd battalion of the 66th was 

located in Asadabad. · Each of its motorized rifle companies had four motorized rifle 

platoons instead of the usual three. 

2 The video camera was an important accessory of this war. Mujahideen used video 

cameras to record their actions so that they could prove that they expended weapons, 

ammunition and supplies and achieved results. The video tapes justified the issue of more 

supplies to the faction. 
Chapter 3, Vignette 1 Page 1 09 

troops north of Mamakhel on the plain and on Gedaro Ghunday hill. 

My men saw the helicopters landing and realized that they would be 

seen if they continued to climb into the mountains. So they turned 

around in the wide canyon and started back toward me. I was in a 

ditch between Mirji Gholi and Dargo China and was hidden by the 

early morning shadow from the mountain. As I raised my head, I 

could make out some 25 Soviet solp.iers along with several people 

wearing tsadar moving to the southeilst from the high ground of Mirji 

Gholi toward Gedaro Ghunday. I could also see Soviets setting up 

mortars on top of Gedaro Ghunday. I crawled about 50 meters in the 

ditch. The Soviets were facing the sun and I was in the shadow, so 

they couldn't see me. As I crawled, I got rid of heavy things that I had 

in my pockets-such as pliers and wads of money. I headed north 

toward the mountain ridge. At that point, Zafar and Noor, carrying 

the missing 60mm mortar and video camera, walked into the Soviet 

group setting up at Gedaro Ghunday. They were immediately captured. N oor was my cousin. 

I climbed Derghi Ghar Mountain to try and see what was happening. I saw that my men had split. Thirteen were now back in 

Dargo China. These 13 men were commanded by Tajahul and the 

rest, commanded by Shahpur, were going back into the mountains. I 

saw that part of the Soviets were heading toward my 13 men. The 

Soviets began firing flares at the group of 13 to mark their position. 

Helicopter gunships then attacked my men with machine gun fire. 

Other Soviets headed down from Derghi Ghar toward them. Mter 

the air attack, the Soviets began attacking my Ul-man group. I was 

midway between the attacking Soviets and my men-about 500 

meters away. I looked in my binoculars and saw that another group 

of Soviets were down in the valley picking up the pliers, first aid 

packets and money I had discarded. The group examining my things 

looked different than the others and I thought that they were officers. 

I decided that when the helicopters made their next strafing run, I 

would use the noise of their gunfire to hide my fire. When the helicopters made their next gun run, I fired on the group in the valley 

and hit one. I then took cover, raised my head, fired and got another 

one. This drew the Soviets attention and they opened up on me. 

Artillery started to fall all around. I .ran from this position to another position about 100 meters away. I had a "20-shooter" [Czechoslovak M26 light machine gun] and some of my men had "20-shooters." · 

As I ran to change positions, I heard firing from "20-shooters" in my 

group. They were involved in a heavy fire fight. 
Page 110 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

I then heard noise from the north and I thought that the Soviets 

were coming from that direction as well. But then I saw Shapur and 

one of my other men. They were coming for me. Shapur reported that 

tanks were moving through Kama and had sealed the exits. The 

enemy were arresting people throughout Kama. We decided to leave 

to the north. Earlier; Shapur had sent a messenger to my group of 13 

telling them to move north. However, they were pinned down by heavy 

artillery fire and direct fire. They could not break contact and fought 

to the last man. As we left the area, one of my Mujahideen fired an 

RPG at a helicopter. The helicopter caught fire and flew off and fell to 

the ground near Kama-where it exploded. I don't know whether the 

RPG hit the helicopter or whether other ground fire got it. 

We moved to the village of Ghara Mamakhel, some four hours into 

the mountains, where I met two more of my men. By morning, 12 of 

my people arrived there. I learned the fate of my group of 13. The 

Soviets remained in Kama for two days. Then we returned to retrieve 

the bodies of my men. I found the bodies of my 13 men in a group, plus 

those of Zafar and Noor and five more of my men. The Soviets had 

booby-trapped some ofthe bodies and had sprinkled chemicals on other 

bodies which caused them to disintegrate. We couldn't evacuate these 

bodies. So we built graves over them. Their bodies are still there 

under stones. I do not know what the Soviet casualties were, but I do 

know that I shot two, we downed a helicopter and the Soviets lost three 

armored vehicles to our mines during this action. 

Throughout the war, I faced the Soviets like this during seven 

sweeps. I moved the families of the martyrs to refugee camps in 

Peshawar, Pakistan, since we couldn't support them in the Kama area. 

I later learned that the Soviets were looking for me personally. They 

arrested someone who looked like me (the narrator has a prominent 

nose) while he was harvesting clover. At that time, my beard was 

shorter. They took him to Jalalabad and paraded him around-"We've 

caught the son of a b----" they said. Someone finally recognized him, 

and said that he wasn't me and so he was released. Around that same 

time, the DRAgovernor of Kama District was in the Merzakhel Village: 

The Soviets arrested him and put him into forced labor since they didn't recognize him. They had him carrying water to their soldiers on the 

high ground. The Soviets were very careless of Mghan lives. They 

killed several villagers indiscriminately. They also killed one of my 

men who was unarmed. I am glad we drove the Soviets out, but the 

subsequent actions of the Mujahideen tarnish their record of victory. I 

have written many poems of protest against their current activities. 
Chapter 3, Vignette 1 Page 111 

CoMMENTARY: The Mujahideen were able to fire on the garrison 

over a two-hour period since they periodically shifted firing positions 

to avoid return fire. The Soviets did not push out any night patrols 

to find the firing positions but only replied with artillery fire. The 

artillery fire did no good. Apparently, the garrison commander had 

not surveyed potential and actual Mujahideen firing positions to 

counter them. 

The Mujahideen rendezvous point was located in one of three 

escape routes into the mountains from Kama District. Further, it is 

adjacent to a likely blocking position which the Soviets used during 

their periodic block and sweep operations. The Mujahideen were 

caught downhill from the Soviet blocking force and could not escape. 

As usual, the Mujahideen were severely hampered by the lack of 

portable, short-range radios which would have allowed them to 

coordinate their actions. 
Page 112 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

~ 

:..: 

"' .... 

(.J 

a: 

.... 

~ 

c 

< 

~ 

~ 

a: 

<I:N 

wr, 

>c.. 3: C'CI 

w:E 

z 

a: 

< :1: 

CJ 

< m 

< m 
VIGNETTE 2 

A NEW YEARS PRESENT FOR THE SOVIETS 

by Mawlawi Shukur Yasini 

The Soviets invaded Afghanistan on 27 December 1979. I decided 

that we should give them a combination anniversary and New Years 

present on 29 December 1983. The present would be a shelling attack 

on the 66th Separate Motorized Rifle Brigade at Samarkhel. I assembled 150 Mujahideen with two 82mm mortars, two RPG-7s, one recoilless rifle, and five or six antitank mines. We had 250 mortar rounds 

for the attack. I placed my nephew Shapur in command. He formed 

four groups: a mortar group commanded by Awozubellah; a mortar 

group commanded by my son Abdul Basir; an observation post/fire 

adjustment group commanded by Shapur; and a light group. We started moving the ammunition and supplies on donkeys and mules two 

days before the attack. We had to move all of it across the Kabul River 

and stockpile it in the village of Gerdi Kats. From there we had to 

move it. to Khwaja Hanafi Baba Ghar Mountain overlooking 

Samarkhel (Map 3-2- New Year). 

We moved all the ammunition and supplies to the mountain area 

undetected during the two days. We set up the mortars behind the 

mountain and set up the observation post on top. The light group had 

the recoilless rifle, RPGs and antitank mines. They crossed the river 

at Bela at night and went through Samarkhel to the west. Local 

Mujahideen met them, guided them to the objective and helped them 

plant the mines. They planted the mines in the road near the main 

gate of the compound near a mosque. Our plan was to start with a 

quick strike by the light group and then follow on with the mortar 

attack. The 66th Brigade was garrisoned in barracks and tents, so we 

hoped that our mortar fire would be effective against them. It was a 

rainy night with lots of lightning. The light group launched the attack 

at 2200 by firing the recoilless rifle and RPGs at the main gate of the 

enemy compound. The enemy reacted with tanks and APCs which 

came roaring out of the gate. Two of them were destroyed or damaged 

by the antitank mines. The light group withdrew. At the same time, 

the mortars went into action. They sent all250 rounds ofhot steel into 

the enemy compound as our New Year's present to the 66th Brigade. 

The 66th Brigade responded with BM-21s, artillery and mortars. 

Mawlawi Shukur Yasini is the narrator of the previous vignette. [Map sheet 3185). 
Page 114 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

Round after round of enemy fire slammed into the mountains, while 

the Mujahideen mortars continued to fire from the valley between the 

mountains. With the Soviet fire, the Mujahideen mortars and the 

lightning, the night was practically turned into day. It was a spectacular·fireworks display.· , 

I had stayed at Gerdab and had a cow killed and cooked. I 

planned to welcome my returning heroes with a feast. They were 

supposed to return at dawn and so all the arrangements for the feast 

were ready as the eastern sky lightened. But, my men did not return 

at dawn. They were pinned down by the heavy Soviet return fire. At 

daybreak, ~oviet helicopters and aircraft began flying over the area 

and firing everywhere. I despaired that anyone would survive. I 

promised Allah that I would donate a large sum of money to charity 

if even half ofmy men would return. At 0800, my body guard, Juma 

Khan, and I left Gerdab and climbed the mountain overlooking 

Gerdab. I was using my binoculars, I saw a shepherd running toward 

me. Everything was now calm. The aircraft had returned to the 

airfield and the artillery had quit firing. I climbed down to meet the 

shepherd. He brought me the good news that my Mujahideen had 

survived and had returned to Gerdab. None of my Mujahideen: were 

even hurt! We had a very good feast 

Due to the heavy Soviet shelling, many other Mujahideen left 

their areas. Our contacts in the Soviet camp later reported that heli- j 

copters evacuated wounded and dead from Samarkhel to J alalabad 

airport. The helicopters made 12 trips. Our contacts told me that 

there were at least 200 killed and wounded. This attack increased 

Soviet activity and Soviet helicopters were out flying every day looking for Mujahideen. 

CoMMENTARY: A lot of Mujahideen mortar firing was observed fire 

from the forward slopes of a mountain with the gunner making firing 

adjustments. The mortar crews in this attack would not have survived 

the Soviet return fire if they had tried firing from the forward slopes. 

Their reverse slope firing positions in the valley made it difficult for 

Soviet artillery to reach the firing positions. The use of forward 

observers to adjust fire is a mark of sophistication among Mujahideen 

forces. However, the Soviet mortar battery commanders should have 

. surveyed these likely firing sites and had them plotted long before the 

Mujahideen attack. Apparently, they did not. This is a step that fire 

support commanders should take whenever their forces stop. This was 

a permanent garrison, so such planning should have been done years 
Chapter 3, Vignette 2 Page 115 

before. The figure of 200 dead and wounded seems high, but it was a 

well-planned and executed attack. 

DRA and Soviet intelligence efforts in the Kama area seem inadequate. Commanders, like the narrator, operated from the same area 

throughout the war and moved freely through populated areas, yet the 

DRA seemed unable to react in time. The Soviets and DRA knew who 

the narrator was, what he looked like and where he was from, but they 

were never able to kill or capture him. 

CHAPTER COMMENTARY 

The Mujahideen fired from fixed, surveyed sites and from mobile 

firing bases. The mobile fire base deployed in two phases. During the 

day, the firing survey party would move into the area, determine 

weapons positions, map locations, headings, intended positions for the 

aiming stakes and firing data. At night, the firing party would arrive 

in a jeep, meet with the survey party, set up their weapons, conduct a 

quick firing raid and depart. 

The Mujahideeri also employed unmanned firing bases. Unmanned 

firing bases were used against targets which were devoid of cover and 

concealment. The Mujahideen would survey these points in daylight 

and set up rockets on makeshift or disposable launchers. They would 

connect these rockets to time-delay firing devices. The Mujahideen 

would be well away from the area when the Soviet or DRA forces would 

launch a search for them. 

Shelling attacks had mixed results. When launched against military airfields and garrisons, they occasionally destroyed military -

targets of value. Further, they prevented the DRA or Soviet forces 

from sleeping and depressed morale. When launched against cities, 

they frequently killed innocent civilians. This cost the Mujahideen 

potential supporters. As some civilians expressed it, "the government 

oppress us during the day and the Mujahideen oppress us at night." 
CHAPTER 4 

ATTACKING A STRONG POINT 

Attacking a strong point is often similar to conducting a raid and 

many of the same tactical considerations and techniques apply. 

Attackers quickly abandon their objective after a successful raid, 

while there is usually an intent to hold a captured strong point 

for some period of time. Therefore, an attack on a strong point 

generally involves more supplies and heavier armaments. Most 

often, the strong points were political centers which the Mujahideen 

. wanted to hold for propaganda value. 

KABUL 

5, 4 

Gardez,., 

/_J 

Kandahar 

Afghanistan 

Chapter 4 

Incidents 
Page 118 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

0 

... 

•• .... •• 

I 

\ ' ' .. . ' -!.!1 .. 

0 

1 KM 

~ 

.:5 

a: 

;! 

::r 

w 

~ 

ALINGAR2 

Map 4-1 

N 

t 

NOTTOSCALE 
VIGNETIE 1 

TAKING ALINGAR DISTRICT CAPITAL 

by Nawaz Khan, Doctor Abdul Qudus Alkozai and Haji M. Siddiqullah 

In July of 1980, the subdistrict capital of Nengrach was collocated 

with the Alingar District Capital in the town of Alingar. This is 

because the Mujahideen had driven the government out of the mountain redoubt of Nengrach. The district government of Nuristan was 

also there. This was a common practice. The DRA maintained mimy 

"governments iri exile" for areas they did not control and held "nationwide" congresses using emigrants to represent those uncontrolled 

areas. The DRA never controlled more than 15% of the countryside. 

We decided to eliminate all these governments by seizing Alingar town. 

It proved to be a major victory. 

The DRA 81st Regiment had a battalion in Alingar and there were 

some DRA militia forces as welU (Map 4-1- Alingar 2) We had two 

contacts in the DRA garrison. One was Captain Yar Mohammad who 

had a brother in our Mujahideen group. Captain Mohammad was from 

nearby Koh-e Safi and routinely provided us information about government plans. We talked to the Captain about capturing Alingar and 

he agreed to help us. V;le introduced the Captain to our other contact, 

Piroz. Piroz was a cook in the DRA garrison. We gave drugs to Piroz. 

The Captain and Piroz agreed that Piroz would drug the food before 

our attack and that.the captain would signal us when that was done 

and we could launch our attack. We asked the cook how many 

Mujahideen we should bring. "Not too many to cause trouble, but not 

too few to fail" he replied. "Okay, about 70,000" we joked. "No, only 

about 10,000" he joked back. In any case, the Mujahideen sympathizers in the DRA camp would kill the com:rimnist officers. The signal to 

attack was the firing of a magazine full of tracer ammunition. · 

Nawaz Khan was a cadet in the Afghanistan Military Academy when he joined the resistance. He was a Mujahideen commander in Mehtar Lam, the Provincial Capital of 

Laghman Province. Haji Sidiqullah was the Provincial Military Commander of the HIH faction in Laghman. He joined HIH in the fight against Dauod before the communist revolution. Dr. Qudus was a commander under Sidiqullah who doubled as the force medic. [Map 

sheet 3086, vic grid 2455]. 

1 According to Soviet sources, the ORA 71st Infantry Regiment was garrisoned in Mehtar 

Lam with some forces in the Alingar area. The 81 st Mechanized Infantry Regiment was 

stationed further to the south in Nangrahar Province. General Alexandr Mayorov, Pravda 

ob Afganskoy voyne [Truth about the war in Afghanistan], Moscow: Prava Chiloveka, 1996, 

Map set. · · 
Page 120 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

There were about 300 total Mujahideen formed in four groups and 

about 30 subgroups. We called the group commanders together and 

told them to concentrate their men at night in Tokhi Khwar about one 

kilometer from the district headquarters. We told them that we had 

inside contacts but provided no details. We also assigned a group of 

· Mullas with megaphones to begin broadcasting after the attack. They 

were to persuade the beseiged DRA to surrender. H-hour was midnight. 

There were 150 Mujahideen in Nawaz Khan's group. They were 

armed with three DShK heavy machine guns, two 82mm recoilless 

rifles, some mortars and Kalashnikov rifles. Dr. Qudus group had 

one Soviet PPSH submachine gun, some bolt-action rifles and some 

other weapons. Several Mujahideen were unarmed. The other Mujahideen groups were similarly equipped. The signal to attack was 

given 10 minutes early. The tracers ripped into the air. Although the 

drugged food did not have its desired effect, Piroz and 10 other 

Mujahideen sympathizers had killed their communist officers. The 

DRA battalion surrendered to us as we stormed inside the battalion 

compound. The first one in was Doctor Nasar who just this year finished his education in Egypt. 

It was the 1st of July 1980. The Mujahideen had deployed forces to 

the north, south and west of the district center. One group attacked 

the DRA security posts on Baghal mountain to the northwest. One 

. group attacked along the main road which ran east of the river. One 

group attacked to seize and cross the bridge. One group attacked the 

DRA posts on the Amir Shahid hill to the southeast. The DRA military 

did not warit to fight us, however, the local militia units were reluctant 

to surrender and fought on. The militia were still protecting the government enclaves of Alingar, Nuristan and Nengrach. The military 

then cooperated with us and turned their guns on the militia. A fierce 

battle erisued with the Mujahideen and military fighting the militia. 

During the fighting, the district governor of Alingar and eight or nine 

aides managed to escape to Mehtar Lam. Still, we captured Alingar 

and eliminated the DRA governments of Nengrach and Alingar. 

Thirteen officials from Nuristan made a break, but were cut down in 

our cross fire. The governor of Nuristan was killed by a Mujahideen 

whose brother had been killed by this same governor. At one point, 

Sidiqullah saw Saidagul; the Alingar Communist Party Secretary, 

being dragged off by a group he did not recognize. Since he had lent 

his rifle to a friend, Sidiqullah was unarmed and so he struck two 

stones together to imitate a bolt action rifle action and challenged 

them. Mawlawi Rahim identified himself and stated that they had 
Chapter 4, Vignette 1 Page 121 

captured a DRA soldier. Sidiqullah identified Saidagul and told them 

that they had a much more important catch. The fighting 1continued 

through the night, the Mujahideen moving to cut off the fleeing DRA 

officials and pursuing them in the dark. The fighting ended in time for 

morning prayers. 

One of the groups involved in the fighting was a group of teenagers 

from 13 to 18 years old who we called the Khandakiano (bull terriers) 

group. During the fighting, one 14-year-old was fighting a desperate 

hand-to-hand combat with a DRA sp<;>rts captain named Sharif. 

Fortunately, another Mujahideen killed Sharif during the fight. · 

We killed 285 DRA officials, police, soldiers, militia and civilians.2 

We captured 80 heavy weapons, two armored vehicles and 1,200 small 

arms. The heavy weapons included one 76mm mountain gun, one 

76mm field gun, some ZGU-1 heavy machine guns, a 107mm mortar, 

several DShK heavy machine guns, and some 82mm mortars. Many 

government people also surrendered to us. It was a bonanza. In 

Nawaz Khan's group, they lost three KIA and seven WIA. In 

Sidiqullah's group they lost two KIA We kept the district capital for 

some time until a joint Soviet/DRA force pushed us out and reestablished DRA government in Alingar. 

·CoMMENTARY: Alingar is about 30 kilometers from the province capital 

of Mehtar Lam. At this point of the war, the Mujahideen were determined to control political centers so that they could claim to be a legitimate government in Mghanistan. The DRA was equally determined 

to prevent this. 

2 Sidiqullah states 120 DRA casualties. 
Page 122 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 
VIGNETTE 2 

THE BATTLE FOR PANJWAYEE 

based on an interview with Mulla Malang 

In September 1982, the DRA, backed by Soviet forces, had firm 

control of Panjwayee, the district capital of Panjwayee District (Map 

4-2- Panjwayee). Panjwayee is located some 25 kilometers southwest 

of Kandahar. The district was militarily significant to both sides since 

the town and its surrounding hills provided a favorable base for military action in the green zones which stretch all the way to the city of 

Kandahar. This area was also the hot bed of resistance in the region. 

Seizing control of Panjwayee was in the interest of all the local 

Mujahideen groups based in the area. Therefore, about 1,000 Mujahideen assembled near Panjwayee to take the town. The operation was 

directed by HIK commander Mulla Malang and others. 

The town was defended by up to 300 militia who lived there with 

their families. The militiamen had turned their houses and all other 

buildings into fortified positions. They placed bunkers on the roof tops 

and occupied and fortified the high ground overlooking the town and 

the approaches to it. The Mujahideen began by surrounding the town 

and shelling it for two days. The shelling had little effect on the 

defenders, but the Mujahideen soon found themselves the object of 

enemy artillery fire and aerial bombardment. Most of the Mujahideen 

withdrew into the neighboring villages of Sperwan and Zangabad. 

On the third day, Commander Mulla Malang decided to penetrate 

the town with a small group and to seize control of a number of the 

dominant positions that covered the approaches to the town. At noon, 

Mulla Malang led a group of25 Mujahideen to the southern edge of the 

town. They carried picks and shovels. They quietly dug a hole through 

the adobe wall and broke into a house. Once inside, they began to 

advance from house to house by knocking holes into the walls. Their 

advance was totally unobserved by the militia who were occupying the 

rooftop positions overlooking the streets of the town. The Mujahideen 

finally knocked a hole through a wall that opened onto a courtyard. 

They burst into the courtyard with weapons at the ready.· The 

militiamen were caught by surprise. They assumed that the town . 

Mulla Malang was one of the most famous commanders of the Kandahar area. He was an 

adherent of Mawlawi Mohammed Yunis Khalis-lslamic Party (Hezb-e-lslami Khalis). [Map 

sheet 2180, vic grid 4794]. 
Page 124 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

was already captured by the Mujahideen, and fled from the town. 

Mulla Malang's group established a secure area and signaled the 

Mujahideen outside the ·town. Soon, hundreds of other Mujahideen 

poured into the town and cleared it from the southeast to the northwest, ending on the bank of the Arghandab River. They cleared the 

town building by building, again avoiding the streets by advancing by 

knocking holes in the walls. Other Mujahideen immediately climbed 

to the rooftops and manned the abandoned positions. Only the district 

headquarters remained under militia control. That night, the 

Mujahideen consolidated their gains and captured the district headquarters the next day. 

The militia had suffered heavy casualties and retreated to the overwatching high ground of a neighboring hill. The Mujahideen surrounded the militia positions. The government forces then opened 

negotiations with the Mujahideen-apparently to gain time. As they 

were talking, an armored Soviet/DRA column arrived from Kandahar. 

The Mujahideen withdrew inside Panjwayee. 

The following night, the Soviet and DRA forces attacked 

Panjwayee and a heavy house~to-house battle ensued. The Mujahideen fired from the roof tops at the government forces advancing 

along the streets. Eventually, the Soviet/DRA combat power made the 

Mujahideen position untenable. The Mujahideen withdrew in small 

groups under the cover of darkness. The regime restored the district 

government in Panjwayee. 

COMMENTARY: The Mujahideen gradually learned that overrunning 

and seizing control of government administrative centers is easy, but 

retaining them usually resulted in rapid Soviet or DRA retaliation. 

The Soviets/DRA felt that they had to retain control of local government agencies and would go to great lengths and take high risks to 

defend local administrative centers, even when they were tightly 

besieged by the resistance. Control of a district center symbolized 

control of the district, though this was seldom the case. In some 

remote districts, government control was restricted to a few buildings 

in the center of the district town. The government spared no effort to 

maintain their presence in these remote district centers despite their 

insignificant military usefulness and the high costs,in men and material, of holding them. This policy was promoted by the political importance of maintaining control, albeit nominal, over all provinces, 

districts and subdistricts in a country which was in revolt against the 

foreign-installed government. 
Chapter 4, Vignette 2 Page 125 

The battle of Panjwayee is an example of how easily the resistance 

could seize control of an isolated district center and how vulnerable the 

resistance became once it was forced to defend the town in the face of 

overwhelming Soviet!DRA forces. For this reason, it was only toward 

the end of the Soviet occupation that the Mujahideen again moved to 

seize control of major district and provincial centers. The source of the 

resistance power was not the cities and towns but the rural areas and 

the hundreds of the cross-border supply and infiltration routes which 

they controlled throughout the war. 

Tactically, a 25-man detachment accomplished what a 1,000 man 

force could not. They did this through surprise and the indirect 

approach. However, the lack of an overall operational command left 

the Mujahideen vulnerable. Mter seizing Panjwayee, .the Mujahideen became overconfident and failed to prepare for the enemy 

counter. attack. They confidently parleyed with the militia while the 

Soviet/DRA forc.e formed and moved. The Mujahideen failed to 

consolidate their victory and to establish defensive positions on the 

hills to the east and west of Panjwayee and on the Arghandab River 

to the north. They failed to post reconnaissance and ambush forces 

on the likely enemy avenues of approach. Instead of having to fight 

their way through a series of ambushes and then bumping into 

outlying Mujahideen fortified positions, the Soviet/DRA relief force 

moved unopposed to the battlefield and surprised the victorious 

Mujahideen at Panjwayee. 

Tactically, the Mujahideen realized that movement along streets is 

suicidal in urban combat. However, the spontaneous nature of the 

unpaid, volunteer Mujahideen made control very difficult. Mujahideen 

forces joined the battle and left as they wished. Often, they did not 

bother to let the coordinating commander know. 
Page 126 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

N 

t 

DARA-E 

NUR 

VALLEY 

DARAH·E~ NUR •:.•..r \_ ,\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

BODYALAY 

Map4·3 
VIGNETTE 3 

ATTACK ON THE 80DYALAY GARRISON 

by Doctor Mohammad Sadeq 

A DRA border guard battalion3 at Bodyalay near Shewa District 

·had security posts on the high ground commanding the Dara-i-Nur 

Valley which stretches northward from Bodyalay. We decided to attack 

the security posts in March 1983 (Map 4-3 Bodyalay). We had 65 

Mujahideen armed with one DShK heavy machine gun, one 82mm 

mortar, four RPG-7s, 22 Kalasb.nikovs and other small arms. At that 

time, we did not have a permanent base but moved from village to village in the Dara-i Nur Valley. We came down from the mountains in 

the north through the side valley that opens onto Ziraybaba about 

eight kilometers to the east. From that valley, we moved on mountain 

paths to reach the eastern flank of the main valley at Bodyalay 

Mountain We positioned the DShK and mortar near the peak of 

Bodyalay Mountain. I divided our force into four groups. One group 

deployed against the south side of the battalion garrison to pin them in 

position and cut off any aid from the south. The second group deployed 

against the government base at the village ofDarah-e Nur to pin them 

down. The third group deployed against the two battalion outposts on 

Bodyalay Mountain. The fourth group was the support group which 

manned the DShK and mortar on the top of Bodyalay Mountain. 

We started our attack after midnight. One mortar shell scored a 

direct hit on a government OP and killed one and wounded five of the 

enemy defenders. We were fighting for 2 hours and 30 minutes but 

were unable to overrun either of the outposts. As the day dawned, we 

had to withdraw since we were surrounded by enemy forces and were 

about to lose the advantage of night. We withdrew over the same 

mountain paths. I had two wounded Mujahideen from the attack. 

CoMMENTARY: The Mujahideen force harassed the DRA battalion, but 

lacked sufficient combat power to overrun any of its outposts since 

much of its force was deployed to prevent the DRA forces from moving 

to reinforce the besieged outposts. Even if the attack succeeded, the 

attackers would have only had time to grab weapons and other spoils 

and leave. The Mujahideen force escaped over the same route that 

Doctor Mohammad Sadeq was a commander with the HIH in Kunar Province. [Map sheet 

3186, vic grid 4830]. ' 

3 Probably the 902nd Border Guards Battalion. 
Page 128 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

they arrived on. If the DRAinformer net was effective, the Mujahideen 

were risking ambush on their return. The Mujahideen had no radios 

or other rapid communications and so control of the battle was problematic at best. 
VIGNETTE 4 

ATTACK ON SORUBAY 

by Toryalai Hemat 

There were a lot of DRA sympathizers in the Nazian Valley. We 

called this area "Little Moscow", as did the many Arabs in the area 

who had joined us injilJ,ad.4 The district headquarters of the Nazian 

Valley is Sorubay. All the residents of Sorubay were communist 

sympathizers. We decided to seize the district center in July 1985 

(Map 4-4 - Sorubay). It was a combined action by the forces of 

Hikmatyar, Sayyaf, Mohammadi and Khalis (HIH, IUA, IRMA and 

HIK). There were about 1,000 Mujahideen in various bases in the 

Mara Mountain stronghold area. 

Sorubay District center is 12 kilometers north of the Me lava base 

and Mara Mountains-about a six-hour hike through the mountains. 

I had 80 men in my command and we were well armed. I had three 

BM12s, some medium mortars and many heavy machine guns in my 

group. This was a major attempt by us to seize the Nazian District 

government and in many respects was closer to conventional war 

than guerrilla war. For two weeks, Mujahideen supply trains resupplied Melava base, replenished our ammunition and our MRL rockets. We prepared for the attack for an additional week and then 

moved from Mara Mountain down into the Nazian Valley. Early in 

the morning, we deployed our first groups against the DRA OPs 

which sat on the small mountains overlooking Sorubay. There were 

about 12 security OPs on the mountains surrounding Sorubay, so the 

attack on the center started with the attack on the security posts. 

After conducting heavy fire on these posts, we attacked and seized 

them. We captured Sar Ghar and Tor Ghar security posts by 1000 

hours. Then we started shelling the district center and descended on 

Sorubay. Government officials, DRA soldiers and their families started fleeing. They left in such a hurry that when we entered Sorubay, 

we discovered that the occupants had left their dinners still cooking 

and bread dough was waiting to be baked. We captured many imporToryalai Hemat was a regiment commander of a mobile force allied with the IUA-Islamic 

Unity of Afghanistan of Sayyaf. He fought in many provinces in Afghanistan. [Map sfieet c ·<~ 

3185, vic grid 8299]. . 

4 Moscow soghra is the Arabic. Many Arabs came to Afghanistan for the jihad. The overall Afghan impression of the Arab Mujahideen, gathered from our interviews, is that they 

were prima donnas who were more interested in taking videos than fighting. 
Page 130 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

' ~~HINWAR . . . ., .. , ~,.~.' ' ' ' ' '\ 

\ 

I 

I 

I 

------.~ ....... 

.... ---

SORUBAY 

Map 4-4 

N 

I 

0 1 2 3 4 5KM 
Chapter 4, Vignette 4 Page 131 

tant government documents which we sent to Peshawar. We sent our 

DRA captives to Landay. I lost seven KIA during the attack. We 

stayed in Sorubay overnight. 

The enemy responded by sending forces from J alalabad. Heavy 

enemy' artillery fire began to fall on the OPs located on the high 

ground. Aircraft. hit us as enemy armored vehicles neared the district 

center. We could not hold the district center against the air and 

artillery and so we vacated the place. During this fighting, we lost 

many people. I lost another seven KIA in my group. We left one of 

our dead, Ahmad Said, behind. He used to wear camouflage fatigues. 

The next day the DRA radio stated that they had identified Chinese 

mercenaries among our dead. Perhaps this was Ahmad. Two days 

later, we attacked Sorubay again and I lost yet another seven KIA. I 

had lost 21 of 80 men in this action. I don't know what the enemy 

casualties were, but I personally saw 15 bodies when we captured 

· Sorubay. We returned to our bases. 

CoMMENTARY: There was a political advantage to holding district 

capitals, as it conferred a degree of legitimacy on the Mujahideen. 

However, these capitals were usually located on accessible ground 

and were not sited for defense against modern artillery and air 

power. In this instance, the Mujahideen moved from guerrilla warfare to a set-piece battle to capture Sorubay and were victorious. 

However, their attempt to hold the prize resulted in heavy losses and 

no political advantage. 

The outposts overlooking Sorubay appear to have been sited 

rather haphazardly with little planning for mutual support. The DRA 

evidently fragmented their force to little advantage. 
VIGNETIE 5. 

STORMING GULA'I 

by H.aji Malangyar 

The Nangrahar agricultural/irrigation project was located in 

Shinwar District, Nangrahar Province southeast of Jalalabad. The 

massive irrigation project was built with Soviet help and guarded 

by several DRA military garrisons. (No Map) A battalion and some 

militia units protected the irrigation system. The battalion was garrisoned at the main water pump some 1.5 kilometers north of Gula'i. 

Gula'i is three kilometers northwest of Ghanikhel. A canal runs parallel to the main road north of Ghanikhel and a militia unit guarded a bridge on this road. Another battalion protected a bridge further 

to the northwest. 

Our base at Marochina, was seven kilometers west of Gula'i. 

There were no people left in Gula'i since everyone had migrated. I 

had 59 Mujahideen armed with an 82mm mortar and 12 RPG-7s. 

The 8th of July 1985 was the last day of fasting in Ramadan. The 

next day would be the Feast of Ramadan (Eid-al-Fitr). We felt that 

many DRA soldiers would celebrate the festival at home making 

this a good time to attack. As was our custom, we prayed to God 

and put the Koran inside the cloth tsadar. We held the tsadar high 

and had every Mujahideen pass under it to ask God's blessing on 

us. We walked to Gula'i and spent the night of July 8th in an .abandoned house. I selected four groups of eight-to-ten men each to 

divert and contain the outposts at the N arai Pul bridge, the Aozhda 

Ghundai hill, Smats hill, and the Spin Khwar syphon. I had radio · 

communication with all groups. I commanded the 19 men in the 

main attack. Each containment group had two RPGs and the main 

attack group had four RPGs. I positioned our mortar near the 

Congregation Mosque (Eidgah). I started the attack at 1600 hours 

and three hours later we overran the government post in Gula'i. The 

containment groups prevented any assistance to the post. After 

dark, we all gathered at the designated assembly area. We had two 

WIA. The enemy lost three KIA and two POWs. We also captured 

11 Kalashnikovs, 100 boxes of badly needed ammunition and some 

hand grenades. 

Haji Malangyar fought in the heavily contested Shinwar District. There is no map with this 

vignette. [Map sheet 3185, vic grid 791 0]. · 
Chapter 4, Vignette 4 Page 133 

CoMMENTARY: Radios greatly helped coordinate Mujahideen actions. 

Evidently, attacking during the Feast of Ramadan also helped. 

Because the DRA had to protect military, political and economic installations this spread the DRA force thin and inhibited offensive actions. 

The agricultural project was vital to the economic well-being of the 

area and, although the Mujahideen attacked the military posts, they 

did not attack the canals. 
Page 134 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

. ··~ . ·-......_ SHAKARDARA \. ~ - -

()':::" 

••• ·::· 

KAREZ-E 

MIR 

N 

t 

SHAKARDARA 

Map 4-5 

2 3 4 KM 
VIGNETTE 6 

DESTRUCTION OF THE BAGH·E MUMTAZ BRIGADE 

by Doctor Mohammad Wakil 

In 1988, the DRA deployed a security .brigade north of Kabul to 

secure the route for the withdrawal of the Soviet 40th Army. It was 

stationed on the Kabul-Charikar highway near the road junction with 

the road leading to Shakardara-the district headquarters of 

Shakardara District. The brigade was stationed in the Mumtaz 

orchard, so it was called the Bagh-e Mumtaz Brigades (Map 4-5 -

Shakardara). My brother, the late Commander Wasil, was the overall 

commander of the many factions involved in this battle. He worked 

out the plan during several commanders councils at thevarious faction 

bases. At 0800 hours on 21 June 1988, we would begin our attack on 

. the brigade. The first phase would be the isolation and artillery preparation phase. Mujahideen would block the road from the north and 

south to isolate the garrison and begin a seven-day artillery preparation with a BM-12, Saqar MRL, 122mm howitzer, 82mm mortars and 

. 82mm recoilless rifles. The artillery preparation would be fired from 

four directions. The second phase would be the ground offensive. One 

hundred Mujahideen would attack on each of four axes. The attack 

from the south would be led by my.brother, Commander Wasil, on the 

southern axis Sehab-e Quli Village-Morad Beg town. Commander Taj 

Mohammad would lead the attack on the southwest axis from Karez-~ 

Mir Village. Commander Naser would lead the attack on the western 

axis while Commander Anwar would lead the attack on the eastern 

axis. Mujahideen armaments included one Saqar, one BM12, ·one 

122mm howitzer, six 82mm mortars, eight 82mm recoilless rifles and 

approximately 40 RPG-7s. We also had some ZSU-23-2 antiaircraft 

guns and some Stinger antiaircraft missiles. 

The attack started on time, hut the garrison did not last for the seven 

days. The brigade's morale broke and we overran it by 1400 hours on the 

first day. The brigade's tanks broke out. The brigade commander and 

some ofhis deputies were on board the tanks. We tried to stop them with 

RPG fire, but they escaped to Kabul. I do not know the total Mujahideen 

casualties, but I do know of four KIA, including my brother. I also know 

Doctor Mohammad Wakil is from Shakardara District north of Kabul. He graduated from 

high school before the war. He joined the resistance and received medical training in 

Pakistan. [Map sheet 2886., vic grid 0737]. 

5 Bagh-e means orchard. This was probably the 520th Brigade. 
Page 136 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

10 of the Mujahideen WIA. We killed around 100 in the brigade and captured some 400-450 DRA soldiers. We also captured some 40 armored 

vehicles, although not all of them were functioning. We captured 10 

trucks and some 600 small arms. The Kabul government was slow in 

reacting to our attack, since they did not expect that the brigade's·resistance would collapse so quickly. After 1400 hours, the artillery of the 

DRA 8th Infantry Division· began firing on the captured garrison from 

positions in Qargha and the Kabul airport. However, they did not 

employ any aircraft against us due to the presence of the ZSU-23-2s and 

Stingers. We did not intend to hold the garrison area and had no desire 

to remain under artillery fire, so we grabbed what we could and left. The 

government never reestablished a unit at that garrison site. 

CoMMENTARY: Planning a seven-day siege within 15 kilometers of the 

heavily garrisoned capital of Kabul is a high-risk option, but the garrison evidently capitulated as soon as its commander abandoned it and 

fled in a tank. The Mujahideen southern roadblock was evidently not 

too effective since the brigade's tanks managed to blast right through 

it. At this point in the war, the DRA's morale (which was never high) 

was at a record low. The Soviets had begun their withdrawal on May 

15th over this same road and were conducting few offensive actions. 

The DRA felt like the hapless brigade watching their commander flee. 

The Soviets were clearly preparing to abandon the DRA. 

The Mujahideen, on the other hand, were practically giddy with 

anticipation of the complete Soviet withdrawal. The Mujahideen had 

not expected to win the war and now could sense victory. Their actions 

became more daring. However, after the Soviet withdrawal, the 

Mujahideen began quarreling among themselves even more than usual 

and the DRA resolve strengthened. The war went on. 

Coordinating an attack by different factions with uncertain 

communications from four directions is also a high-risk option which 

chances fratricide. However, audacity prevailed and the Mujahideen 

quickly destroyed a larger force. 

The introduction of the U.S.-manufactured, shoulder-fired Stinger 

air defense missile caused a change in Soviet aerial tactics. The 

Soviets would not employ close air support forward of their own forces 

if Stingers were present. Further, a Mujahideen rocket attack on the 

Kabul airfield about this same time reportedly destroyed five SU-25 

close air support aircraft and damaged three others. Mujahideen air 

defenses and aircraft availability probably limited the Soviet/DRA 

response to artillery fire. 
Chapter 4, Vignette 5 Page 137 

CHAPTER COMMENTARY 

When the guerrilla force decides to seize and hold a strong point, 

implied missions are the conduct of regular logistic resupply, the 

continual manning of the strong point and the ability to withstand 

artillery and air strikes. None of these are easy for a guerrilla force 

dependent on part-time guerrillas. Further, it requires the commitment of crew-served weapons· and sufficient ammunition-commodities that are hard to remove during a forced withdrawal. The 

guerrilla is trading his mobility and anonymity for a fixed-piece 

conventional battle. Quite frequently, the guerrilla is unable to 

make the transition. 
CHAPTER 5. 

MINE WARFARE 

Mine warfare is a favorite technique with the guerrilla. It is a relatively inexpensive way to attack personnel and vehicles. Most 

Mujahideen mines were anti-tank and anti-vehicular. When the 

Mujahideen employed anti-personnel mines, they prefered the direC:-

tional mine (similar to the U:S. claymore mine). Soviet mines were 

mostly anti-personnel. During the war, the Mujahideen were supplied 

with many types of foreign anti-tank mines. Often, the Mujahideen 

·would stack three anti-tank mines on top of each other to guarantee a 

catastrophic kilL Many Mghans are inveterate tinkerers and they 

preferred to make their own antitank mines from unexploded ordnance 

and other antitank mines. 

Afghanistan 

Chapter 5 

Incidents 
Page 140 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War· 

DIAGRAM 1 MINE AND BATTERY 

. DIAGRAM .2 WATER DETONATOR 
VIGNETTE 1 

MUJAHIDEEN DEMOLITION METHODS 

by Commander Mulla Malang 

The Mujahideen would move heavy unexploded bombs (250-500 kilograms) at night by tractors to the road and bury them under bridges, 

underpasses and viaducts. The bombs were remotely controlled, usually by home-made detonators, fired some 500 meters from the road. 

Several such bombs would be detonated under a passing enemy convoy 

to heaVily damage the vehicles. Tanks and other armored escort 

vehicles were the primary target for remote-controlled bombs. 

If remote~control detonation was unfeasible, the Mujahideen used 

another method to selectively attack the tracked armored vehicles. 

The Mujahideen would stretch two metal wires across the paved road. 

The wires were spaced close together and hooked to· an electric battery. 

The rubber tires of civilian and military vehicles would pass over the 

wires, but the metal tracks of tanks and BMPs would close the electrical circuit and set off the explosion. (See diagram) 

Abdul Wali, a Mujahideen from Kandahar, was known for his 

creative bomb-making. Once in 1986, he sent a floating bomb down 

the Nosh-e Jan creek (which runs in the western suburbs of Kandahar 

city from northeast to southwest) to destroy a government outpost at a 

hotel\ Abdul Wali strapped a 250 kilogram bomb onto some truck tire 

inner tubes. He measured the distance from the outpost to his release 

point- upstream where he would launch his floating bomb. The bomb 

was hooked to a wire whose length was the length from launch point 

to outpost. Once the floating bomb stretched out the full length of the 

wire, it was exactly under the outpost. Abdul Wali remotely-detonated 

the bomb and destroyed the outpost. 

In well-defended enemy areas, the presence of minefields and other 

obstacles did not allow Mujahideen to raid enemy bases. In this case, 

delay-fired rockets hit the enemy positions. Kandahar air base, which 

became a major Soviet military base, was one of these difficult targets. 

The Mujahideen used delay-firing mechanisms so that they could leave 

the area before the rocket fired and the Soviet counter-fires began. 

Initially, only field-expedient delay-firing mechanisms were available. 

Mulla Malang was one of the most famous commanders of the Kandahar area. He was an 

adherent of Maulavi Mohammed Yunis Khalis-lslamic Party (Hezb-e-lslami Khalis). 

1 Gul Sardar Hotel near Sarpuza. 
Page 142 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

Later in 'the war, the Mujahideen acquired factory-produced remote 

control devices to fire their rockets, but they still continued to use field 

expedient methods to do the job. 

One local method was to use a leaking water container. The 

Mujahidden would punch a hole in the bottom of an empty threegallon tin can and fill it with water. The trigger wire would be 

attached to a wooden float. The trigger wire would be inserted into the 

can. The other end of the wire would be connected to a battery. The 

battery would not be strong enough to complete the circuit through the 

water. The tin can would be attached by wire to the rocket. As the 

water leaked from the can, the floating wire would move lower until it 

reached the bottom of the can. The contact would complete the electric 

circuit and set the rocket off (see diagram). 
VIGNETTE 2 

MINING ATTACKS NEAR MEHTAR LAM 

by Commander Sher Padshah and Sheragha 

Mter the battle for Alishang District Center, Commander Padshah 

gathered 30 Mujahideen and moved further south to the village of 

Mendrawur. Mendrawur is about 11 kilometers south of the provincial 

capital of Mehta:r Lam and about five kilometers north of the KabulJalalabad highway. We received information that an armored column 

would be moving from Jalalabad to Mehtar Lam toward the end of 

August 1981 (Map 5-1 - Mehtar). We decided to attack the column 

with bombs and an ambush. We liked powerful mines, so we usually 

took the explosives from two Egyptian plastic mines and put these into 

a single large cooking oil tin container. We also used the explosives 

from unexploded Soviet ordnance to make our own bombs. We put one 

bomb under a small bridge and hooked a remote-control device onto it. 

We strung the detonating wire about 100 meters further south where 

we established our ambush in an orchard on the east side of the highway. We had two RPG-7s, one PK machine gun and one Bernau light 

machine gun. There were three M.ujahideen in the bomb-firing party. 

We saw the Soviet column approach slowly. Dismounted Soviet 

engineers were walking in front of the column with their mine detectors. They were carefully checking the route. When they came to the 

small bridge, they discovered the bomb. Several Soviets gathered 

around the bomb, but instead of disconnecting the wires, they stood 

around talking about the bomb. The three-man firing party, Sheragha, 

Matin and another Sheragha; were watching them through binoculars. 

We saw several Soviets checking the bomb and knew that the ambush 

was spoiled, so we detonated the bomb killing several Soviets. The 

Soviet column began firing in every direction. We left the orchard and 

withdrew through the Bazaar of Mendrawur going north. Some of the 

villagers were wounded by the Soviet fire. 

Three or four days later, we had 40 Mujahideen in our group and 

were ready to try another ambush. We went to the village of 

Mashakhel. We buried two of our bombs in the road. We did not have 

any more remote-control firing devices, so we rigged these bombs with 

pressure fuses. We put cow manure on the mines to hide them. God 

bless Matin's soul, he used to always put the manure on the mines. We 

Commander Sher Padshah and Sheragha are from Laghman Province. [Map sheet 3086]. 
Page 144 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

MEHTAR 

Map 5·1 
Chapter 5, Vignette 2 Page 145 

set up our ambush covering the mines. 

We saw the column approach slowly. Soldiers with mine detecting 

dogs were walking in front of the column. The dogs were running loose 

and they promptly found and pointed out our bombs. Sheragha and 

Shawali moved forward when they saw the dogs. They watched as the 

dogs stood by the mine. Two soldiers got out of an APC with a long 

probe. The soldiers started probing the manure piles and they· found 

the mine in the third pile. Four Soviets, including an officer, crowded 

together looking at the mine. So, Sheragha and Shawali opened fire 

killing the four Soviets. The remaining Soviets pulled back out of the 

ambush kill zone. 

The Soviets· began to return fire. Commander Padshah ordered 

four Mujahideen to move north onto Tarakhel hill to provide covering 

fire for the group's withdrawal. To confuse the enemy, he grabbed his 

megaphone and yelled "Keep your positions. The reinforcements just 

arrived." A DRA column came from Mehtar Lam and took up defensive 

positions and started firing at us .. Tanks also maneuvered against us 

on the Mehtar Lam plain west of the road. We withdrew under the 

cover of night. We know we killed four Soviets and may have killed or 

wounded up to 18 DRA and Soviets. We destroyed one of their tanks 

and two trucks. 

CHAPTER COMMENTARY 

The Mujahideen preference for home-made mines in metal cans 

made it easier for Soviet mine detectors to find them. The tendency for 

curious troops to. cluster around a newly-discovered mine is not 

uniquely Soviet, and the Soviets eventually trained their engineers to 

quit clustering around mines. 

The Mujahideen usually combined demolitions and mining with 

other forms of offensive and defensive action. They usually covered 

their mines with direct fire weapons. The Mujahideen seldom left 

their mines unattended if they were located a distance from the border 

and a ready supply of mines. Mter an ambush or fight, they would 

often dig up their unexpended mines and take them with them to the 

next mission. 
CHAPTER 6 

BLOCKING ENEMY LINES OF COMMUNICATIONS 

The war was a contest by both sides to control the other's logistics. 

The Soviets used aerial bombing, scatterable mines, crop burnings and 

assaults on rural villages to drive the rural population into exile or into 

the cities. Their objective was to deprive the guerrilla of his source of 

food, shelter and rest. 

The Soviet lines of communication (LOC) was a double-lane highway 

network which wound through the Hindu Kush Mountains-some of the 

most inhospitable terrain on earth. Mujahideen constantly cut the road 

and ambushed convoys carrying material from the Soviet Union. The 

Soviet presence depended on its ability to keep the roads open. Much of 

the Soviet combat in Afghanistan was a fight for control of the road network. Soviet security of the Eastern LOC required 26 battalions manning 199 outposts, patrolling the LOCs or escorting convoys. The moreopen Western LOC required three battalions. More than three-fourths of 

Afghanistan 

Chapter 6 

Incidents 
Page 148 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

Soviet combat forces were routinely involved in security missions. DRA 

forces were also tied down in LOC and area security. 

The resistance destroyed over 11,000 Soviet tru<:ks. DRA truck 

losses were reportedly higher. The Mujahideen ability to interdict the 

LOC was a constant concern to the Soviets and prevented them from 

maintaining a larger occupation force in Mghanistan. 
VIGNETTE 1 

CARVING UP REGIMENTS ON THE APPROACH TO WAZI 

by Haji· Badshah Khan 

In April1980, I set out to capture the Wazi District Headquarters 

which sits astride the main road between Gardez and Khowst. I had 

some 400 Mujahideen who came from the Dari Khel Valley. The 

Saroti pass is at the northern end of the Dari Khel Valley and offers 

access from Gardez to Khowst. The Satakandow pass on the main 

Gardez-Khowst highway was already controlled by the Mujahideen, 

so the Dari Khel approach was the only possible route for the DRA. 

In those days, we did not have base camps, but lived in our villages 

and used whatever weapons were at hand. We had rifles plus some 

locally manufactured machine guns from Pakistan. I made my plan 

of attack. During the night, we moved to Wazi which is close to the 

Dari Khel Valley (Map 6-1- Wazi). I divided my men in groups and 

we surrounded the district headquarters on all four sides. I ordered 

my subordinate group commanders to wait for my signal to attack. In 

the morning, I intercepted radio communications between the Wazi 

garrison and their headquarters. The commander was asking for 

help and stated that he was surrounded by Mujahideen. Shortly 

after that, two helicopters came, circled the area and returned. The 

commander of the garrison was Mohammad Hashem. He was from 

the Jaji tribe and we knew each other. He sent a mediator to me who 

announced that the garrison was ready to surrender. I told him to 

disarm his men first and then we would negotiate. He did and then 

he surrendered the garrison. We captured a lot of weapons. The 

spoils of this action encouraged other Mujahideen to besiege other 

posts for their weapons. 

The DRA reacted to the fall of Wazi by sending two columns to 

reestablish government control. The government forces moved on 

two axes, one from Khowst and the other from Gardez. The coluhm 

from Khowst reached Said Khel and formed an assembly area 

there. The column from Gardez approached the Saroti pass. I began 

to mobilize people against. the government forces. I sent harbakai 

(tribal ~alice or regulators who kept law and order in their areas) 

Haji Badshah Khan is from the warrior subtribe of Dari Khel of the Zadran tribe. He. lives 

on the Saroti pass approach to Khost. When the communist coup occurred, he took his 

family to Pakistan and then returned to build resistance forces in the area. [Map sheets 

2883 and 2983]. 
Page 150 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War· 

WAZI 

Map 6·1 

2 3KM 

2528 

X 
Chapter 6, Vignette 1 P(1.ge 151 

to rally the tribes and the tribes responded since they knew that the 

DRA would loot the villages if they let them irito the area. I assigned 

two harbakai groups to reinforce the Mujahideen blocking DRA forces 

at Said Khel. I took the rest of the Mujahideen to the Saroti pass. I 

arrived at Saroti in the late afternoon and surveyed the area. I determined how many Mujahideen I would need and where I would position the forces. I did not have enough Mujahideen, so I assembled 

some of the local barbers (Pushtun barbers usually also play drums) 

to play their drums to gather a lashkar. 1 I did this to raise the whole 

area and to demoralize the enemy. The drummers did a great job. 

Warriors came from many tribes to Saroti and soon I had a large 

army. Originally, I had planned to defend the pass, but when I 

viewed the size of my army, I decided to attack. I promised them the 

weapons we captured and we attacked the column and captured 

weapons, trucks and tanks. When we had dealt with the Saroti force, 

I left a blocking force to deal with any further columns and then took 

the lashkar to Said Khel. 

We cut the road to Khowst behind the DRA regiment which was 

still assembled at Said)\hel. Then we surrounded the regiment. It 

remained trapped for 20 days. The DRA sent another column out of 

Khowst to relieve this force, but they could not break through the 

Mujahideen blockade. Mter some fighting, the entire force at Said 

Khel surrendered. There were 1,300 personnel in the column and we 

captured 1,200. The enemy lost another 100 either KIA or WIA. We 

captured all the weapons of this regiment including 50-60 trucks and 

armored vehicles. Mter the surrender, the DRA air force bombed 

their own column and destroyed the rest of the vehicles in it, or we 

would have had even more booty. A few vehicles managed to escape 

from us. The father of DRA Minister of the Interior Gulabzoi was 

wounded in the fighting and managed to escape in one of the APCs. 

His name was Gulab Shah and he was a member of the Zadran tribe, 

so perhaps some tribesmen helped his escape. 

CoMMENTARY: Ear.ly in the war, the Mujahideen resistance was mostly centered on the tribes. Only later, when the United States, Egypt, 

Saudi Arabia and other countries began supplying the Mujahideen 

through the various religious-based factions, did the Mujahideen's primary focus and loyalty shift to the factions. The method of 

1 Lashkar in Pushto usage means a tribal army or armed force. A lashkar is usually gathered for a short time. 
Page 152 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahdeen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

raising the force and fighting the DRA columns described here is 

little different from what the British forces experienced fighting 

these same tribes on the northwest frontier. Once the lashkar assembled, the warriors would chant and sing along with the drums. This 

occurred here as well. 
VIGNETTE 2 

BLOCKING THE PAGHMAN HIGHWAY 

by Commander Haji Aaquelshah Sahak 

I have been in many actions, but one stands out that I won't ever 

forget, because it was a very trying situation. On 4 or 5 June 1983 we 

were in Paghman, a district capital (garrisoned by DRA forces)/ which 

is some 25 kilometers west of Kabul. We received information one 

evening that a major Soviet/DRA column would attempt to resupply 

and reinforce Paghman's garrison and government enclave. There are 

two parallel highways from Kabul to Paghman. (Map 6-2- Paghman) 

The late Commander Habibullah, the late Commander Wahed and others planned to block the convoy. They had some 250 to 300 Mujahideen 

armed with two mortars, one ·recoilless rifle, 12 RPG-7s, and some . . . ~ 

Kalashnikov and Enfield rifles. They assigned sectors of responsibility to different groups. Each group would block the highway with 

ambushes in its sector. Habibullah (HIK), Commander Aman (IUA) 

and I (NIFA) were ·given the sector from Khwajajam to Khwaja 

Musafer. Khwaja-jam is about a kilometer from the Cheltan road fork. 

We occupied positions primarily on the south side of the road. 

Commanders Ajabgul, Wahed, Abduljan and Kochi had the sector from 

Khwaja Musafer to Pajak. They occupied ambush positions mostly on 

the southern side of the road. From Pajak to Paghman, Mujahideen 

occupied ambush positions on both sides of the road. 

We occupied our ambush positions at night. The next morning, the 

column left Kabul. As the leading armored vehicle reached Kwaja 

Musafer, we opened fire. The ambush turned into a battle as we 

destroyed 11 armored vehicles and two helicopters. Enemy aircraft 

and helicopters continually tried to drive us from our positions, but we 

held and the fighting continued for three days. 3 Even during the fightCommander Haji Aaquelshah Sahak is from the Chardehi District of Kabul (which is a 

southern suburb). He was affiliated with NIFA. [Map sheets 2786 and 2886]. 

2 Reportedly two companies from the 200th Separate Reconnaissance Battalion. 

3 Zakari, a Mujahideen in Commander Sahak's group, gave the following account of a portion of the battle. "I had an 11-shooter [bolt-action Enfield rifle]. It held 10 rounds in the 

magazine and one in the chamber. The Russians knew the sound of the 11 shooter and 

would count off the 11 shots and then charge after the 11th shot while you were trying to 

reload. I was shooting at this Russian and had fired all 11 shots. He had counted my shots 

off and charged me. I yelled for help to my friend who had an RPG-7 antitank grenade 

launcher. 'What, shoot him with this thing?' my friend replied. 'Yes, he'll kill me' I 

answered. 'Okay" he yelled and fired his RPG-7. It completely disintegrated the Russian." 
Page 154 Th_e Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

z 

<C N 

:E I 

co 

::J: c. 

" ca 

&f == ::;; 

:..:: 

.., 

"' 

_, 

UJ 

::c 

:..:: .. ~ 

•a: ••• 0 

..... 
Chapter 6, Vignette 2 Page 155 

ing, the women from the villages would bring bread and milk forward 

to our positions. The whole area was actively supporting us. The 

inhabitants of Paghman, Oryakhel and Khaldari were feeding us. 

Mujahideen came from outside the area to reinforce us. Modir Zaher 

of Khaldari took nine wounded Mujahideen into his home. His wife 

cared for them, nursed them and applied dressings on them. The 

Soviets tried to bypass our ambush by moving on the northern route to 

Paghman through Qaragha. Mujahideen stopped this column at 

Dodamast northwest of Qaragha. The enemy then tried to bypass the 

Kwaja Musafer ambush by skirting around it, but the bypassing force 

soon fell into further Mujahideen ambushes. The center of fighting 

was Kwaja Musafer and we stopped and held the enemy there. Mter 

three days of fighting, the enemy broke contact and withdrew to Kabul. 

In my sector, we lost 13 KIA and many wounded. I personally know of 

20 wounded, but there were many more. The enemy lost 14 armored 

vehicles and trucks in my sector. I know that over 40 DRA soldiers 

were captured or defected. We captured hundreds of small arms 

during this battle. 

CoMMENTARY: This is an example of good Mujahideen field cooperation-not always a feature of the war. The Mujahideen cooperated and 

their overall formation strengthened as the battle continued since 

Mujahideen came from all around the area to join in the fight. The 

British noted that a good fight had almost a magnetic effect on the 

warrior-tribesmen of Mghanistan and the Soviets learned that this 

trait had not disappeared over time. The Soviets and DRA broke contact after three days although their lines of communication were intact 

and the enemy was fixed in known positions. Firepower could not 

break the Mujahideen and the Soviets and DRA would not commit the 

necessary infantry to close with the Mujahideen. 

The road to Paghman runs through a heavily-populated green zone 

and the Mujahideen were able to select and fortify good ambush positions along the route. In this summer fighting, the trees and crops provided good concealment for the Mujahideen. 
Page 156 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

-+I:IV>III:I\fH:> 

u. 

WM 

...Jcb 

~gCJ):E 

w 
VIGNETIE 3 

ROAD BLOCK AT ESTALEF 

by Commander Sofi Lal Gul 

In October 1983, one of my men was injured during a fight with 

other Mujahideen from the local area. I took a group of 20 of my 

Mujahideen from my base in Farza and went five kilometers north 

to Estalef. We were going to meet with local elders in Estalef to settle the dispute with other local commanders. Estalef is a popular 

summer resort some 40 kilometers north of Kabul. 

Informers told the DRA and Soviets about our gathering and the 

enemy decided to attack us. The Soviet forces came from nearby 

Bagram and the DRA forces came from Kabul. At night, Mujahideen 

patrols at the Estalefjunction of the Kabul-Charikar highway reported that Soviet and DRA columns have moved from Kabul and Bagram 

and were heading toward Estalef. The Mujahideen alerted their men 

at dawn. My 20 men joined a force of nearly 100 commanded by a 

local commander who was the son of a leading Estalefi chieftain 

(Wakil Mohammad- Amin Khan). We took up positions in the 

orchards at Deh-e Khwajahasan and Qabr-e Malik (Map 6-3 -

Estalef). We planned to block the Estalef road and deny the enemy 

access to the town which dominated the fertile valley. 

The Mujahideen commanders divided their men into small teams 

of four-five men and deployed them in the orchards along the road in 

order to ambush the enemy column over a wide stretch. We instructed our men to let the head of the enemy column reach Qabr-e Malik 

and then everyone should open fire. As the leading vehicles reached 

Qabr-e Malik, the attack signal was given and relayed through 

portable megaphones. We hit the lead armored vehicle and a jeep. 

The battle raged along the length of the column from Qabr-e Malik to 

Deh-e Khwajahasan. The Soviet infantry dismounted and attacked 

the Mujahideen positions and heavy fighting ensued. We were scattered throughout the orchards and had plenty of room to maneuver, 

so it was hard for the Soviet infantry to pin us down. However, we 

were short of supplies, particularly ammunition. Further, the 

Soviets/DRA had much more combat power than we did and they 

Commander Sofi Lal Gul is from Farza village of Mir Bacha Kot District about 25 kilometers north of Kabul. ' He was affiliated with Mojaddedi's Afghanistan National Liberation 

Front of Afghanistan (ANLF) during the war with the Soviets. Commander Sofi Lal Gul concentrated his efforts on the Kabui-Charikar highway. [Map sheet 2886, vic grid 0754]. 
Page 158 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

were using helicopter gunships and other aircraft against us. Since 

we were scattered over a wide area in small groups, Mujahideen 

command and control over the battle was difficult and sporadic. 

Coordination of the actions of the many resistance groups became 

very difficult. 

The battle in the orchards continued until 1400 hours. As they 

ran out of ammunition, the various Mujahideen groups withdrew in 

different directions and moved their wounded to safe areas. The 

Soviets consolidated their advance through the green zone, securing 

the high ground commanding the approaches to Estalef. I pulled my 

men out to Shoraw, about three kilometers northeast of Estalef. The 

Soviet/DRA column moved to Estalef and launched an intensive search 

of homes. The soldiers looted homes, destroyed property and set fire to 

the houses of suspected Mujahideen. Many people lost their livelihoods due to their actions. The Soviets stayed three days in Estalef 

and then returned to their bases. Mujahideen casualties in my group 

were two KIA and 18 WIA. Most of the casualties were from Soviet air 

strikes. 

COMMENTARY: The large Mujahideen concentration in Estalef, close 

to Soviet/DRA forces, was an extremely imprudent move.' If the 

Mujahideen patrol had not provided early warning, the Mujahideen 

losses at Estalef might have been much higher. The Mujahideen 

deserve high marks for their quick reaction and rapid deployment 

along the road to Estalef. They utilized their familiarity with their 

home area to quickly select effective fighting positions and they used 

local terrain and vegetation to conceal themselves from Soviet ground 

and air power. However, the Mujahideen suffered from lack of effective command and control which prevented the timely coordination of 

counterattacks and countermeasures. Better command and control 

might have enabled the Mujahideen to hold the high ground dominating the Estalef approach and to prevent the Soviet entry. But the 

well-armed and supported Soviet force was able to push its way 

through. The Mujahideen were reluctant to become decisively 

engaged in a protracted battle with a much-stronger, better-supplied 

opponent. They felt that they had to survive to face this opponent 

over and over again. The Mujahideen lack of a structured, viable 

supply system hampered their tactical capabilities significantly. 

The Soviets and DRA deserve high marks for carrying enough 

forces for dismounted combat and for using them aggressively. The 

combination of overwhelming firepower and ground maneuver 
Chapter 6, Vignette 3 Page 159 

unhinged the Mujahideen defense and the decisive action taken by 

the Soviet infantry forced the poorly-supplied Mujahideen to break 

contact-leaving the dominant terrain and subsequent access to 

Estalef open. However, the Soviet/DRA forces merely pushed at a 

more-nimble foe and failed to try to outflank or encircle the 

Mujahideen force. This kept them from bringing the Mujahideen to 

decisive combat and allowed the Mujahideen to withdraw without 

heavy losses. 
Page 160 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 
VIGNETTE 4 

DEFENSE OF A RIVER LINE AND ROAD BLOCK AT SAYAD 

by Commander Haji Abdul Qader 

In late summer and early fall of 1983, the Mujahideen in Nejrao 

and Tagao Districts of Kapisa Province increased their attacks on 

government facilities. These districts are located on the east side of 

the Panjshir River and link Sarobi on the Kabul-Jalalabad highway 

with key locations in the provinces of Parwan, Kapisa and Laghman. 

These districts also provided access to several Mujahideen mountain 

base camps. The only permanent bridge across the Panjshir River (at 

Abdullah-e Burj) is located in this area and provides direct access to 

Bagram. We expected Soviet/DRA forces at Bagram to launch a 

strike through the area. Their purpose would be to protect Sarobi 

and the main road connecting Sarobi with the Kapisa Province 

Capital of Mahmoud-e Raqi and Gulbahar located further north at 

the mouth of the Panjsher Valley. 

We decided to block this expected advance with my forces and the 

forces of Commander Shahin (based around Mahmoud-e Raqi). We 

prepared defensive positions on the north bank of the Panjshir River 

around the bridge at Abdullah-e Burj (Map 6-4 - Sayad) We built 

blocking positions in a deep ditch which passes through upper Sayad 

village and covers the road as it approaches the bridge. We prepared 

positions on the high ground south of the river which dominates the 

approach and both banks of the river. We put in land mines and built 

shelters with overhead cover to protect our Mujahideen from air and 

artillery fire. We moved supplies forward to a forward supply base in 

Deh Babi village immediately northwest of Sayad village. We built 

covered trenches from the base to the forward positions. The trenches were big enough to allow us to resupply by pack horses, mules and 

foot porters. 

Commander Shahin had approximately 600 men and I had 

approximately 250. There was not enough space to deploy them all, 

so one-third of the force occupied fighting positions while the rest 

were in reserve or given support tasks. Some Mujahideen held flank 

positions to contain the enemy. Since all of the Mujahideen were 

locally based, we were able to deploy the blocking force in total 

Haji Abdul Qader was a Commander for the HIK faction. His forces were based around 

the vital Bagram area. [Map sheet 2886, 2887, vic grid 2872] 
Page 162 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

secrecy. This helped surprise the enemy and hit him at a time and 

place where he was not fully ready to react effectively. 

Early on the morning of 31 October 1983, Soviet and DRA forces 

moved out of their Bagram base along two parallel routes and 

approached the Abdullah-e Burj bridge. I estimate the strength at 

several regiments backed by strong artillery support and ample logistics. Tanks and APCs led the column. As the head of the column 

reached the lower Sayad village on the southern bank, the tail of the 

column had not cleared their Bagram base some ten kilometers to the 

southwest. As the enemy tanks and APCs passed through lower 

Sayad village toward the river, we opened fire and took the enemy by 

surprise. It took the enemy some time to react and find our positions. 

We intensified our fire as more vehicles of the enemy column came 

into anti-tank weapons range. We hit several of their vehicles and 

they started to burn. Instead of trying to secure the bridge by 

infantry, the enemy continued to push his tanks and APC's toward 

the bridge. One tank and two APCs made it to the bridge, but we 

knocked them out at the bridge site. 

The enemy stopped and began pounding suspected Mujahideen 

positions with artillery fire and air attacks. He also began indiscriminately bombing the area, including the surrounding ·villages. 

However, our blocking force was well entrenched and protected 

against the enemy fire. Most of our Mujahideen moved into the 

covered shelters for the duration of the enemy fire preparation. As 

soon as the enemy began to shift his fire so that he could launch an 

attack, our Mujahideen would reoccupy their fighting positions and 

engage enemy infantry and tanks with mortars, machine guns, 

82mm recoilless rifles and RPG-7s. The news of our defense against 

the Soviet/DRA forces soon spread throughout the area and reached 

as far as Kabul, Charikar and Panjsher. Mujahideen from these 

areas began to move to the fight. This had a demoralizing impact on 

the enemy as these Mujahideen began probing attacks against his 

flanks and rear. 

In early afternoon, the enemy reinforced his efforts with some 

DRA troops and launched another attack to clear the roadblock. We 

drove back the attack and inflicted heavy casualties on the enemy. In 

the late afternoon, the enemy again conducted heavy artillery and air 

strikes on our positions. Artillery, jets and helicopter gunships took 

their turns against us and then a Soviet unit attacked us. We defeated this attack as well. During the night, the enemy tried to attack 

across the bridge three times. Each time he was unsuccessful. The 
Chapter 6, Vignette 4 Page 163 

river could not be forded by vehicles and he did not try using infantry 

in assault boats to cross at another point to outflank us. Probably the 

number of Mujahideen who had come to the fight on both sides of 

the river discouraged the enemy from risking· ~n infantry assault 

crossing at night. 

On the morning of 1 November, the enemy resumed heavy 

artillery fire and air attacks. At the same time, we detected enemy 

activity toward the south. Around 1000 hours, the enemy facing the 

bridge began to break contact. Most of their troops headed south 

across the plain on the southern bank of the Panjsher river. We later 

found out that the enemy built an engineer bridge across the river 

near Shokhi, some 20 kilometers down stream and crossed there to 

move against Nejrao and Tagao Districts. Seeing the enemy withdraw, we left our positions and collected what the enemy had left 

behind. The next day, we pushed their disabled tanks and APCs off . 

the bridge into the river. 

CoMMENTARY: The Soviet/DRA force did not lead with reconnaissance, 

nor did it use forward detachments to seize potential chokepoints 

before it moved. The Soviet/DRA force was evidently surprised by the 

strong resistance they met. Had they detected the Mujahideen road 

block in advance, they could have dealt with it more effectively than 

trying to force a crossing through repeated frontal attacks. 

The Soviet/DRA force had several options besides frontal attacks. 

First, they could have moved DRA forces from Jabul-e Seraj and 

Gulbahar in the north to attack the Mujahideen positions from the 

flank and rear since these forces were already garrisoned across the 

river. Second, they could have conducted an infantry assault crossing 

at an unopposed site and then attacked the Mujahideen position from 

the flank. Third, if speed was essential, the planners could have selected the option it was later forced to choose after sustaining losses and 

losing much time at the Abdullah-e Bu:rj bridge. 

Once delayed by a strong Mujahideen resistance, the Soviet!DRA 

columns acted very slowly to try to seize the initiative. Tanks were 

ineffective in forcing the bridge. The Soviet/DRA force needed to use 

well-train~d infantry to seize the dominant Kuh-e Top Mountain quickly. This mountain was on their side of the river and would facilitate 

forcing the bridge. By allowing the column to stall in a Mujahideen 

area, the Soviet/DRA force became vulnerable to flank and rear attacks 

by local Mujahideen. Quick, decisive action is key to the survival of a 

stalled, surrounded force. 
Page 164 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

Mujahideen secrecy while planning and implementing the road 

block was commendable. The local commanders coordinated their 

actions and the force fought staunchly. Their well-prepared defensive 

positions allowed them to survive artillery fire and air bombardment. 

The Mujahideen had the advantage of fighting on home turf with local 

support. 

Had the Mujahideen developed a more eff'ective system of operational cooperation and coordination, the enemy column might not have 

succeeded in reaching Nejrao and Tagao. Lack of a viable operational 

command and control system prevented the Mujahideen atAbdullah-e 

Burj, Shokhi, Nejrao and Tagao from acting together. Amore elaborate 

operational coordination could have mobilized the Mujahideen forces 

at Shokhi to prevent the Soviet/DRA troops from crossing the river to 

Kapisa Province. 
VIGNETTE 5 

THE DEFENSE AGAINST THE SOVIET OPERATION "MAGISTRAL" 

by General Gulzarak Zadran, Lieutenant Omar, 

Mawlawi Nezamuddin Haqani, and Mawlawi Abdul-Rahman 

'We were a very desperate people without much equipment or armaments, but we had the power of our faith, 

love for our homeland, love of freedom and reliance on 

the Almighty. We were fighting against very heavy 

odds." 

General Gulzarak Zadran 

Sources in the DRA warned us that a combined Soviet/DRA 

force would launch an offensive to open the road between Gardez 

and Khowst. We Mujahideen closed the road in March 1979 and 

the government had supplied their garrison at Khowst by air ever 

since. The DRA had tried to open the road on many occasions and 

had two entire regiments annihilated in the process. The road had 

become a thing of myth-the Mujahideen-held road that no power 

could open. We watched the enemy mass his forces and supplies in 

Gardez in November 1987. This was clearly going to be a major 40th 

Army operation involving forces from several Soviet motorized rifle 

divisions, the Soviet airborne division, DRA units, Spetsnaz, massed 

artillery, surface-to-surface missiles, and Soviet air power. At the 

time, General Zadran analyzed the impending operation to determine its operational significance. He determined two possible goals 

for the operation: this unprecedented massing of such a major force 

either meant that the Soviets wanted to escalate the war by threatening Pakistan directly from Paktia; or the Soviets wanted to shatter 

General Guzarak Zadran was an officer in the Afghan Army and attended the Afghan Army 

Higher OfficersTraining Institute where the author, Ali Jalali, was his instructor. He joined 

the resistance and fought in Paktia Province. He fought in Zhawar 1 and 2 and at the 

Satakandow pass. He belonged to IUA. After the fall of the DRA, he became the Deputy 

Minister of Defense in the interim government. Currently he lives near Peshawar. [Map 

sheets 2883, 2884, 2983]. 

Lieutenant Omar (Zabit Omar) grp.duated from the Kabul Military Academy in the 1970s. 

After the communist coup and the Soviet invasion, Lieutenant Omar joined the Mujahideen 

of the fundamentalist Islamic Party (HIK) founded by Mawlawi Mohammed Yunis Khalis. 

He was a close aide to Jalaluddin Haqani and fought with him throughout the war. Haqani 

ran the Mujahideen effort in the crucial Paktia Province. Lieutenant Omar also served as 
Page 166 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

Z+---
Chapter 6, Vignette 5 Page 167 

the myth that the Mujahideen along the Gardez-Khowst highway are 

invincible by opening the unopenable road. If the Soviet goal was to 

escalate and to threaten Pakistan, then the Soviets needed to bring 

more forces to Paktia Province after they opened the road to Khowst. 

General Zadran thought that this was too dangerous a gamble for 

the Soviets to take, considering the probable international and 

regional implications. Instead, General Zadran concluded that the 

Soviets meant to show their military might to the world by doing · 

the impossible, so that they could then end the Soviet occupation 

of Mghanistan and withdraw with a solid victory to their credit. In 

order to accomplish the impossible, the Soviets needed to force 

the main road from Gardez with at least a division and, having 

achieved the breakthrough, move toward Khowst to link-up with 

the DRA 25th Infantry Division which would try to open a corridor 

to the west. General Zadran's final analysis was that the Soviets 

needed to flex their muscles by opening the road that had been closed 

for all those years. 

We started to prepare for the Soviet offensive against the 

Satakandow pass. The shoulders of the pass loom some 400 meters 

over the road and, once in the pass, the road follows a slow, twisted 

route packed with hairpin curves. It is an excellent place to defend. 

We reinforced the minefields along the road.· We laid three mine 

belts on a three kilometer front at the opening of the pass with 300-

400 meters between mine belts. We reinforced our positions on the 

high ground overlooking the road and pass. We had a total of ten 

BM-12s in the area. We crowned the pass with ZGU-1 air defense 

machine guns. These are both good positional weapons but are 

very difficult to displace rapidly when the situation requires. We 

also had DShK machine guns, 7 5mm and 82mm recoilless rifles 

and plenty of RPG-7s. Haji Nawab Khan commanded the 

Mawlawi Nezamuddin Haqani was a group commander and a deputy to Jalaluddin Haqani. 

He was a member of the fundamentalist Islamic Party (HIK) led by Mawlawi Mohammed 

Yunus Khalis. He joined the Mujahideen following the communist coup in 1978 and fought 

in the Paktia area. Prior to the Soviet invasion, his group had liberated the area surrounding Khowst and only the city of Khowst remained under government control. 

Mawlawi Abdul-Rahman of Zadran is the son of Noor Mahmuod from Kandow village. 

When Soviet forces attacked Satakandow pass, his group of 100-120 local Mujahideen 

occupied positions at Ghelgoy. They were armed with 82mm recoilless rifles, ZGU-1 

machine guns, DShK machine guns, 82mm mortars, MBRL and one Stinger. His group 

fought a rearguard action through the pass to Sewak before they went into the mountains. 

He lost ten KIA in the fighting. 
Page 168 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

Satakandow pass approach. Two kilometers to the west of the 

Satakandow pass is the Khadai pass-a secondary pass with a dirt 

trail going through it. We reinforced the defenses here as well. 

Ismail commanded the Khadai pass approach (Map 6-5 - Magistral). 

Most of the Mujahideen in this area were local men who were 

defending their own villages. Unlike other parts of Mghanistan, the 

people still lived here and had not been driven out to the refugee 

camps in Pakistan. The majority of the people in the area belonged 

to the Zadran tribe, but other tribes and different factions were also 

involved. The decision to prepare and the decision to fight was not 

made by the factions, but by the tribal council. This was to be fight 

for homes and neighborhoods. Our local major commanders were 

Mawlawi Neza-muddin Haqani, Mula Ibrahim, Mula Abdurrahman, 

Captain Khan· Zamak, Izat Khan, Ghaday, Dool Khan, Ghanamkay, 

. Sadat, Hakem, Jung, Dr. Khiali, Badshah and Alef. 

We focused our efforts on the main road where it runs through 

the Satakandow pass. There is another road some seven kilometers 

to the east which goes through the Saroti pass and joins the main 

highway at Lakatega4-some 25 kilometers to the south of the 

Satakandow pass. This is a poor road which passes through the Dari 

Khel tribe.s We did not expect that the Soviets would want to move 

vehicles along this road, so we did not mine it. However, we did reinforce the local Mujahideen in this area. Each tribe sent harbakai to 

help and we sent about 300 harbakai as reinforcements to the Saroti 

pass in the Dari Khel area. Commander Badshah commanded the 

Saroti approach. 

The Soviets established forward bases at Dara and Zawa. They 

deployed their artillery in Division Artillery Groups (DAGs) near 

Dara and deployed their Army Artillery Group further back south of 

Gardez. They moved a maneuver force to Zawa. Suddenly, they 

launched an attack from Zawa toward Saroti. We were completely 

taken by surprise. In four to five days of fighting, the Soviets pushed 

us back on the Saroti approach. Commander Badshah was killed in 

this fighting. Qader Shah took over command and fought a stubborn 

withdrawal back through the Saroti pass (Map 6-6 - Phase 1). 

Once the Soviets captured the Saroti pass, they launched air 

assault landings on the high ground located between the main road 

and the road through the Saroti pass. They now held key terrain 

4 Lakatega means erected stone. 

5 The Dari Khel tribe is a subdivision of the Zadran tribe. The Dari Khel have a well 

deserved reputation as a very military and warlike people. 
[§) 

PHASE 1 

Map 6·6 

~ l ><\ SAROTI PASS 

0 1 2 3 4 5KM 

() 

::T 

-g 

~ 

.9> 

< <0" 

:::::J 

~ <D 

(11 

"U 

~ <D 

...... 

Ol 

CD 
Page 170 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

controlling both axes with air assault troops and small caliber 

artillery.6 From these peaks, they could hit our positions and 

support their advance through the Satakandow pass on the main 

road. At the same time, they could support their continued advance 

along the Saroti approach. Their sudden seizure of the high ground 

between their two axes gave them a tremendous advantage. The 

Soviets began bombing the Mujahideen headquarters at Sarani. 

Command and control suffered greatly from the shelling. 

The Soviets on the high ground began directing artillery and rocket fire on the villages in both valleys leading from Satakandow and 

Saroti. The Zadrans in the villages had not emigrated and the 

Soviets wanted to displace them. They were successful. Many 

Mujahideen, concerned about the danger to their families, left the 

fighting to evacuate their families to Pakistan. This exodus opened 

the way for the further advance of the Soviet troops. They were now 

ready for the main attack on the Satakandow axis. 

The Soviets opened their operation against the Satakandow pass? 

with heavy air strikes and artillery fire while they moved their 

maneuver forces to Dara. Then, once their positions were set, they 

flew an airplane over the pass at high altitude, dropping paratroopers. Reconnaissance aircraft, flying at much higher altitudes, trailed 

the aircraft that was dropping the paratroopers. We engaged the 

paratroopers with all our air defense machine guns and whatever 

other air defense weapons we had. As the paratroopers drifted closer, we realized that we had been duped. The "paratroopers" were 

dummies and the reconnaissance aircraft had photographed our 

response and pinpointed our positions. 

The Soviets now began firing on our positions in earnest. Heavy 

artillery strikes followed air strikes, which were followed by more 

artillery strikes. We were pinned down in our positions by the strikes 

which continued for hours. Our positions were generally artilleryproof but not bomb-proof and, thanks to their reconnaissance, they 

were hitting our positions exactly. They then launched their ground 

attack, but we readily defeated it. The next day, 1 December 1987, 

they resumed their heavy shelling and bombing. 

The overwhelming force of their artillery and airpower took the 

6 Possibly the AM 289 Vasilyek (Cornflower) 82mm automatic mortar. This weapon can 

fire direct and indirect fire. Other candidates are the older D-44 85mm gun (which was 

found in airborne units) or the M-69 76mm mountain gun. 

7 Vignette 17 in The Bear Went Over the Mountain describes the battle for the Satakandow 

pass from a Soviet perspective. 
Chapter 6, Vignette 5 Page 171 

initiative from us. There were no Soviet forces garrisoned in Paktia 

and we were used to fighting the DRA. The DRA had no artillery 

larger than 130mm. Now we were getting pounded by heavy artillery 

including BM21 and BM-27 MRL. In Dara, the Soviets had three, 

powerful, long-range heavy artillery pieces with four tires each. We 

saw one of these firing. The firing recoil gases alone flipped a jeep 

over.a Aircraft were dropping cluster bombs on us. We could not 

survive in these positions, so we left our positions and moved to 

higher mountains in the west called Ghumbor Khwaley and Fakhry. 

The Soviets advanced on our positions behind us and, after five days, 

they seized the Satakandow pass. 

We had cut and destroyed sections of the road in the Satakandow 

pass. As the Soviets tried to repair the road, we started firing on 

them with our heavy weapons from the high ground. But the Soviet 

firepower was strong and the Soviets pushed us higher into the 

mountains. As their converging fo-rces cut our rear, we fell back. They 

captured Gulzarak Zadran's base at Shwak. The Mujahideen took 

what equipment they could, but some had to be abandoned to the 

enemy. The Mujahideen withdrew to the southwest mountains and 

the Soviets/DRA advanced and established a base camp where they 

stayed for two days. Then they resumed their advance to Sarani. 

They destroyed .the Mujahideen base camp at Sarani-our first indication that the Soviets/DRA planned to abandon the route instead of 

trying to maintain a long-term presence there. 

The Mujahideen plight was serious and we were suddenly faced 

with a new problem-the absence of drinking water. The intensity 

of Soviet shelling was so great, that the chemical residue from 

the explosions had contaminated the streams. Some of us thought 

that the Soviets had poisoned· the water since one glass of water 

would choke you up and make you very ill. We had to use snow for 

drinking water, but the snow was also affected by the chemicals. Our 

supplies were cut off and food was scarce, but our major problem 

was thirst. People were suffering from dehydration, but they could 

not use the local water. We had not made arrangements to haul 

water into the area since local water had always been adequate · 

for our needs. The roads were blocked so trucks could not enter the 

area. We had some mules that we could use in some of the area, but 

8 This was probably the 2A36 152mm gun, the "HyaCinth". It has a maximum range of 

28.5 kilometers and fires 5-6 rounds per minute. The round weighs 46 kilograms and has 

a muzzle velocity of 942 meters/sec. The piece weighs 9,800 kg and has a 8.197 meter 

long barrel. Krasnaya zvezda [Red star], 16 July 1993, page 2. 
Page 172 The Other Side of the Mountain: Muja~ideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

we carried in most of our supplies by Mujahideen porters. 

The Soviets continued their move south. They preceded their 

movement by air assault landings to seize high ground on both 

sides of the road. Their columns would then advance under the 

protection of these picketing forces. As the Soviets moved forward, 

they left security OPs behind to secure their lines of communication. 

The Soviets reached Lakatega and the columns from Satakandow 

and Saroti linked up. Mter that, it was smoother for them. The 

Soviets/DRA left a security detachment at Lakatega and advanced 

· on Khowst. At the same time, a DRA detachment from the 25th 

Infantry division moved . west out of Khowst to link up with the 

approaching column. Mter the force secured the road to Khowst, they 

began moving supply columns along the road to resupply the 

beleaguered city. 

The tide was beginning to turn. The local Mujahideen, who had 

taken their families to Pakistan, returned. Mawlawi Jalaluddin 

Haqani and other commanders (Matiullah, Mula Abdul Ghafur, 

Gulzarak Zadran, Amanullah, Mula Seddiq, Tawakal, Abdur-rahman, Wakil Wazir Mohammad, Pari, Padshah Khan and Sadat) 

arrived and moved into the mountains west of the highway. Colonel 

Imam of the Pakistani lSI arrived and tried to coordinate. the 

Mujahideen action. Haji Amanullah Khan and other commanders 

arrived. Mujahideen from other areas in Mghanistan arrived. 

Mujahideen and Taliban arrived from Pakistan. They were all eager 

for a fight. The Mujahi-deen selected 12 commanders and assigned 

enemy outposts between Wazi and Satakandow for them to attack. 

The Soviets had moved into the side valleys, but the 12 commanders 

forced the Soviets out of the side valleys and confined them to the 

vicinity of the road. Then they began attacking the road. Jalaluddin 

Haqani, was at Fakhry. Once again; Jalaluddin Haqani was wounded during battle-this time with shrapnel in his thigh. Although 

Haqani was wounded, he stayed on for a we-ek. Then he was evacuated on mule back over mountain paths to Miram Shah. 

The Soviets/DRA could only keep the road open for 12 days. Then 

they withdrew. When the· Soviet air assault abandoned the heights, 

they took their weapons, but left all the ammunition behind. The 

Mujahideen recaptured the road and neither the DRA nor the Soviets 

could reopen it. 

Despite the intensity of battle, Mujahideen casualties were light. 

There were perhaps some 100 Mujahideen KIA. The villagers 

suffered greatly and the villages were heavily damaged or destroyed. 
Chapter 6, Vignette 5 Page 173 

Some 80% of the villages in the area were damaged. Soviet/DRA 

losses are unknown. The Mujahideen shot down one helicopter and 

three jets. As the Soviets withdrew, we· captured two intact Soviet 

tanks and four trucks. Some 600 DRA soldiers defected or were 

captured. Most of them defected with their weapons. 

CoMMENTARY: Gulzarak Zadran's evaluation of the Soviets is· not 

flattering. "I should mention here that the Russian Army is a worthless military institution and that no professional soldier will 

give them a high mark in discipline or the will to fight. They are 

useless. I should also note that the Russiahs relied throughout the 

action on maximum use of artillery and one Mujahideen would draw 

the fire of a battery or more for several minutes. The high peaks 

which they occupied by heliborne troops helped them a lot. Even 

there, they surrounded themselves with all sorts of mines. And these 

'bears' would be sitting around lighted campfires to keep themselves 

warm in the winter, so the peaks were on fire all night. The Soviet 

Air Force was not very effective because they flew very high, probably out of fear of our Stingers." 

Despite General Zadrari's comments, the Soviet planning and 

execution of this operation was well done. It matches the initial 

Soviet invasion in tactical surprise, the use of multiple axis, operational tempo and innovation. The fire support and logistics portion of 

the plan were first rate and the use of dummy paratroopers was a 

masterstroke. The use of air-assault forces was well-planned and 

executed. The Soviets needed a "save-face" operation before withdrawal and Magistral was that. 
ARROW1 

Map 6-7a 

5 10 KM 

N 

r 

0 v.lJ 

' DAM\ 

" '\. 

""tJ 

~ CD 

_. 

~ 

-1 

::::r 

CD 

Q 

::::r 

~ 

(J) 

a: 

CD 

9.. 

::r 

CD 

·s:: 

0 

c:: 

::::J 

m-

::;· 

s:: 

E. 

Ill 

::::r 

a: 

CD 

CD 

::::J 

~ n. &r 

::;· 

::r 

CD. 

(J) 

~ 

~ 

~ ::::r 

Ill 

::::J 

~ 
VIGNETTE 6 

OPERATION GHASHEY (ARROW IN PUSHTO) 

by General Abdul Rahim Wardak · 

From 23 October to 7 November 1988, a force of some 2,000 

Mujahideen from the National Islamic Front of Afghanistan (NIFA) 

shut down the Kabul-Jalalabad highway along a 70-kilometer stretch 

between Sarobi and Laghman. I commanded them. 

This action was part of a four-party (NIFA, HIK, HIH and JIA) 

combined operation aimed at closing the eastern supply route to 

the Afghan capital for a period of two months (October-November). 

Each party was responsible for deploying its units to keep the highway blocked for 15 days. The operation was planned in the wake of 

Soviet forces withdrawal from the N angrahar Province. The 

Mujahideen intent was to prevent the government from reinforcing 

the Jalalabad garrison while the Mujahideen prepared to advance on 

J alalabad from Torkham. 

Elements of the DRA 8th and 18th border guard brigades, the DRA 

60th Infantry Division, tank subunits from the 15th Tank Brigade, a 

Sarandoy battalion and local militia manned the enemy's six bases and 

nearly 20 outposts along this stretch of road. The DRA hoped to protect the highway against Mujahideen attacks and keep the supply 

route to Jalalabad open (Map 6-7a -Arrow 1). Each base was manned 

by at least a platoon reinforced by one or two tanks or APCs, 122mm 

D30 howitzers plus heavy machine guns and 82mm mortars. The 

outposts consisted of five to ten men reinforced with machine guns, 

AGS-17 and mortars.9 

I assembled my force from Mujahideen groups based across 

General Wardak was an officer in the Afghan Army. He trained at US military schools 

before the war and testified before the United States Congress on several occasions during the war. He was one of the most noted Mujahideen commanders. At the close of the 

war, he was seriously wounded by a SCUD missile and was treated in the United States 

for his wounds. He became the first Chief of the General Staff of the Armed Forces of the 

Islamic Government of Afghanistan in 1992 following the Mujahideen victory and the downfall of the communist regime in Kabul. NIFA records and other interviews conducted by Ali 

Jalali are used in this vignette. Correspondent Askold Krushelnycky accompanied NIFA 

forces and filed a report on Operation Gashay in The Sunday times of 6 November 1988. 

[Map sheets 2985, 2986,3085 and 3086]. 

9 A layout and discussion of the security outposts along this stretch of highway are found 

in LTC Tubeev's article on pages 129-133 of The Bear Went Over the Mountain: Soviet 

Combat Tactics in Afghanistan, edited by Lester W. Grau, Washington: NDU Press, 1996. 
Page 176 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

several districts in N angrahar and Kabul Provinces. Some of these 

groups were based more than 200 kilometers apart. Other groups 

and a contingent of 70 former Mghan Army officers, who were used 

to work with combat task forces, came from the NIFA central reserve 

based in Pakistan. 

I organized my force into five strike groups (task forces Bravo, 

Charlie, Falcon, Gulf and Hurricane), two containment (holding) 

groups (task forces Alpha and Delta), one reserve (task force Echo) and 

one rocket launcher group (Saqar Rocket launcher). The force composition follows: · 

A. NIFA's Kabul Province Eastern Sector Forces under the overall command 

of Dr. Shahrukh Gran 

1. Task Force Alpha 

AO: Marora and Salamkhel Tangay 

Number of Mujahideen: 350· 

Unit commanders: Sadiq Patang, Haji Sangeen, Mir Wali, Khawani, 

Mirajan, Wrekhmin, Haji Habib, and Mo'alem Karim. 

2. Task Force Bravo 

AO: Debili 

Number of Mujahideen: 393 

Unit commanders: Janat Gul, Haji Mir, Gulbat, Sakhi Usmankhel, Ghulam 

Rasoul 

3. Task Force Charlie 

AO: Kamkay Dargo 

Number <ifMujahideen: 276 

Unit commanders: MohammadAlam, Zaher Khan, Sahak, Sakhi Janikhel, 

Majnoon 

4. Task Force Delta 

AO: Ghata Dargo 

Number ofMujahideen: 411 

Unit commanders: Noor Hasan, Sayed Rahman, Captain Zalmay, Afridi, 

Gulab, Noor Rahman, Ruhullah. 

5. Task Force Echo 

AO: Dargo 

Number ofMujahideen: 343 . 

Unit commanders: Hasan Khan Kairokhel, Sartor, Asel Khan, Captain 

Hashmat, Khalil, Ehsan 

6. Task Force SSM (Saqar) 

AO: Chakari targeting Kabul Airport 

Number ofMujahideen: 100 

Unit commanders: Captain Sediqullah, Zaher Kahn, Shinwari, Hanan, 

Ghulam Haider, Umar, Hasan Khan, Momin Khan 
Chapter 6, Vignette 6 Page 177 

B. NIFA Forces From Nangrahar Province, Southwestern Sector: 

1. Task Force Falcon 

AO: Tor Ghar opposite the Kaftarkhana base 

Number of Mujahideen: 250 

Unit commanders: Lt. Wali, Shari'ati, Mohammad Anwar 

2. Task Force Gulf" 

AO: Tor Ghar opposite the Spina Thana base 

Number of Mujahideen: 350 

Unit commanders: Haji Zaman Ghamsharik, Za}?it Zaher 

3. Task Force Hurricane 

AO: Tor Ghar opposite Khairokhel base 

Number of Mujahideen: 130 

Unit commanders: Asef Khan, Qazi Samiullah 

While all these groups were assembling to the south of the Kabul 

River, I ordered a group of about 50 Mujahideen under command of 

Lieutenant Ali Ahmad and Ghuncha Gul to move from their bases in 

the north (Ozbin area) and take positions at the northern ridge along 

the Kabul-Jalalabad highway overlooking the Debili bridge. They 

were to observe enemy activity and support the operation by fire. This 

group occupied the designated position but was unable to participate 

effectively and withdrew after a few days. 

While the number of Mujahideen in each group ranged between 

100 and 350, I could use only one third of them for combat since the 

rest were required for logistics and security tasks and occasionally 

relieving combatants at the front lines. 

My force was armed with individual automatic rifles (AK-4 7), light 

machine guns (RPK), heavy machine guns (PK), light anti-tank 

grenade launchers (RPG-7), Milan anti-tank missile launchers, 82mm 

recoilless rifles, 75mm recoilless rifles, 82mm mortars, 107mm 

Multiple Barrel (twelVe barrel) rocket launchers (BM12), Saqar Rocket 

Launchers, and Stinger shoulder-fired air defense missiles. 

I instructed my five strike groups to attack and seize enemy 

bases/outposts, establish road blocks and lay ambushes against the 

enemy columns. . 

The western containment (holding) group-Task Force Alphawas positioned in Marora and Salamkhel Tangay area. I ordered them 

to block enemy columns attempting to enter its AO or attempting to 

outflank my forces along the old Sarobi-Jalalabad road. This road 

passes through Jegdalay, one of my main Mujahideen supply bases. I 

gave Task Force Alpha an "on order" mission to disrupt any enemy concentration in Sarobi by fire. I gave the eastern containment (holding) 
Page 178 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

group-Task Force Delta-a similar mission on the eastern flank of 

the operation area, i.e. eastern mouth of the Abreshmin Gorge. I gave 

Task Force Delta an "on order" mission to be prepared to serve as a 

strike group. I had the Reserve group (Task Force Echo) concentrate 

in the Dargo area. They were prepared to act against enemy heliborne 

insertions; to relieve task forces Alpha, Bravo, Charlie, Delta; and to 

launch a counter-attack if needed. 

I had the rocket launcher detachment operate independently. 

Their mission was to occupy firing positions in the Chakari area (about 

80 kilometers away)and hit the Kabul airport to divert attention from 

the rest of the operation. 

Conduct of the Operation 

During the late part of September and first three weeks of October 

1988, I directed the preparation, resupply and movement of participating Mujahideen forces as they moved to the area of operation and 

deployed for action. I moved a total of 400 tons of various supplies 

from Pakistan to the area of operation by mules and other pack animals. Supplies included mines, small arms ammunition, rockets, mortar rounds and anti-tank ammunition. 

One major challenge facing me was to covertly move the various 

Mujahideen groups from widely dispersed locations to the deployment 

area, avoiding enemy observation and air attack. Further, moving 

ammunition, supplies and men from Pakistan through the three 

provinces of Paktia, Logar and Kabul required detailed planning and 

careful execution. 

Mujahideen were all unpaid volunteers who joined the jihad to 

fight. One leadership challenge was to convince guerrillas to perform 

the vital, if unglamourous, missions of rear area security and LOC 

security instead of participating in actual combat. This was always 

hard since these volunteers wanted to fight. 

Another leadership challenge was commanding and controlling 

a volunteer multi-regional force and integrating them into a single 

command. In fact, as later transpired, the right flank strike groups 

(task forces Falcon and Hurricane) left their positions and withdrew 

unannounced to their permanent bases when their permanent bases 

came under enemy threat. Further, as our operation continued over a 

week many Mujahideen became restless and gradually left the battle 

area unannounced. Mujahideen had developed the habit of what Ali 

Jalali terms "short hit and long run tactics." 
Chapter 6, Vignette 6 Page 179 

There were several reasons for this. First, the Mujahideen felt that 

they were fighting a war of "a thousand battles" and no single battle 

was a decisive one. Therefore, the Mujahideeh felt that combat should 

be limited in terms of time and space in order to increase the 

Mujahideen's survivability. 

Another reason was the absence of an efficient logistic system to 

provide meals, medical support and other required services. The fighters were issued all available supplies prior to the battle. There was 

seldom resupply available afterwards. This forced the Mujahideen to 

carry heavy 'loads and forage for food. Local food resources were scarce 

since the Soviets had destroyed the local economy and driven out the 

population in the rural areas. Consequently, Mujahideen field rations 

had to be carried from Pakistan and were poor and monotonous (usually bread with tea or boiled rice and dhal (a split chick pea dish). 

Mujahideen fought best on their home territory. This area of operation was not the "home turf' for most of my forces. They were not 

fighting on their home territory but away from their villages where 

they were better provided for and had a better chance for rest. Given 

the traditional attachment of the Mghan resistance to its home territory, many Mujahideen did not feel the same enthusiasm they showed 

in fighting their own villages. 

Finally, the long treks in the mountains sometimes lasted for 

weeks and contributed to fatigue before the battle began. 

Mujahideen commanders were hard pressed to keep their extremely 

hungry and tired fighters together for an extended period of time. 

Although my operations plan encompassed a wide front from 

Sarobi to Surkhakan Bridge (70 kilometers), the main action took 

place on a four-kilometer stretch between Debili and Darga bases 

(Map 6-7b- Arrow 2). Combat at other points was either in support 

of this action (task forces Alpha, Delta and Echo), or were separate 

actions (such as attacks on Khairokhel Post, Spina Thana Base and 

Kaftarkhana Base). . 

The operation began with rocket attacks on the Kabul military 

airport on October 19. The rocket launcher detachment targeted the 

airfield and kept it under intermittent fire until a few days after 

the beginning of the road block when the rocket detachment 

moved to Jagdalay to fire on an enemy concentration in the NghluSarobi area. 

My operations plan had four phases: 

1. Attack to destroy and seize enemy bases and outposts: 
ARROW2 

Map 6-7b 

N 

f 0 1 2 3 4 5KM 

"0 

~ CD 

~ 

OJ 

0 

-1 

= CD 

Q 

= 

~ 

en 

a: 

CD 

Q.. 

stCD 

s:: 

0 

c:: 

::I 

ill s· 

s:: 

..!:. 

Ill 

= a: 

CD 

CD 

::I 

~ Q. 

f)" 

en. 

s· 

stCD 

en 

~ a;· 

i 

= Ill 

::I 

~ 
Chapter 6, Vignette 6 Page 181 

2. Block the road by destroying bridges, laying mines and shelling 

enemy columns attempting to reopen the highway. 

3. When the enemy manages to reopen the highway, conduct a largescale ambush to inflict heavy losses. 

4. ·Break contact and withdraw. 

PHASE ONE 

The strike groups initiated their attack along the extended 

front at 1000 hours, October 23. Rocket launchers, mortars, recoilless rifles and heavy machine guns provided supporting fire from the 

southern high ground overlooking the highway. Since the area was 

heavily mined by the enemy, my Mujahideen could not descend on 

the road from all points. Instead, they moved down a limited number 

of mountain arroyos. These arroyos were safe since minefields could 

not be maintained in them due to the periodic flash floods which 

swept through them. These arroyos were mostly in the Debili and 

Dargo area. 

Once my Mujahideen passed through the mined area, they fanned 

o·ut and attacked the enemy using the paved road as the main 

approach. Their movement was covered by fire from the high ground 

dominating the gorge. The assault groups stormed the targeted 

enemy outposts and bases. Mter fierce fighting, several posts were 

overrun and others isolated from their bases and neighboring posts 

by 1600 hours. 

During subsequent attacks through October 25, my force seized 

14 outposts and four bases. The occupants were killed, fled or 

captured. We seized about 100 prisoners, 11 tanks or APCs and 21 

other vehicles. We damaged the hydroelectric installations at Sarobi 

and Nghlu which supply electricity to Kabul and Jalalabad. Our losses were 10 killed and 21 wounded. 

Phase Two 

As my strike groups secured the highway, they destroyed 

three highway bridges-Khairokhel bridge, Istehkam (Dargo) bridge 

and Debili bridge; mined the road; set up road blocks and estab.-

lished firing positions on the southern high ground overlooking 

the highway, the roadblocks and the destroyed bridges. Four other 

outposts and the remaining bases, except the Mash ala base, fell to 

us by October 31. 

The DRA's reaction was slow and incremental. The DRA now 

lacked sufficient observation and security posts on the high ground 
Page 182 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

flanking the highway. The DRA failed to recapture any of his outposts except the Owa-Tsalay post. The Owa-Tsalay post was located 

on the highest peak overlooking Sarobi and provided observation of 

Mujahideen groupings and artillery positions. The Owa-Tsalay outpost changed hands several times, but we finally held it. The DRA 

held the Mash'ala Base throughout the operation. · 

Our attack gained control of this stretch of the highway. DRA 

reaction was very slow and ineffective. DRA forces in Sarobi fired 

lots of artillery against my attacking force while their aircraft 

bombed suspected Mujahideen positions on the rocky ridges south 

and southwest of the gorge. DRA and Soviet helicopter gunships 

were not very effective since they did not dare fly low through the 

gorge or fly close to our positions. · The DRA made no attempt to 

outflank NIFA positions from Sarobi or from the eastern mouth of the 

gorge at Mash'ala base. They also made no attempt to use heliborne 

troops to cut our supply and withdrawal routes. 

From October 25 through the end of the operation, the enemy 

concentrated its efforts on building up forces at the two entrances 

of the gorge and continuously tried to demolish our roadblocks 

and regain control of the gorge section of highway. The DRA 

launched frontal attacks using infantry supported by tanks moving 

from the Mash'ala base in the east and from Sarobi in the west. 

The DRA reinforced the beleaguered Mash'ala base with elements of 

the 11th DRA Division which had been operating in Alingar District 

of Laghman Province. 

The DRA build-up from Laghman and Jalalabad was possible 

because Mujahideen groups from Nangrahar Province (task forces 

Hurricane, Gulf and Falcon) withdrew a week after overrunning their 

assigned objectives. The DRA had moved reinforcements and 

launched attacks in Nanagahar Province and the Mujahideen from 

that area left to defend their homes. Consequently the DRA was 

able to push more troops into the gorge from the east in an 

attempt to break through the main obstacles (between Dargo and 

Debili). From 25 through 31 October, the DRA launched several 

unsuccessful attempts to open the road and suffered losses in men 

and vehicles. 

As the task forces Falcon, Gulf and Hurricane withdrew from 

their sectors, two mechanized columns of .DRA moved into the area 

from two directions. Elements of 8th DRA Division, reinforced with 

Soviet elements, moved east from Kabul to Sarobi and tried to open 

the highway. Another column moved west from Jalalabad trying to 
Chapter 6, Vignette 6 Page 183 

overrun Mujahideen blocking positions between Dargo and Debili. 

The pressure of the two-pronged attack on the widely scattered 

Mujahideen groups and the lack of supplies forced me to narrow my 

front and concentrate in the four-kilometer stretch between Dargo 

and Debili between the two highway bridges· which his Mujahideen 

had destroyed earlier. 

From 1 to 6 November, the enemy moved bridge-building vehicles 

supported by tanks and motorized infantry to lay bridges across 

the Kabul river at Debili and Dargo. We Mujahideen repeatedly 

disrupted and defeated these attempts by firing from the high ground 

south of the narrow gorge. We also took DRA columns under crossfire from well-prepared positions. During these attempts, the DRA 

lost several tanks, APCs and bridging equipment sets. 

PHASE THREE 

The third phase of the operation w~s the conduct a large-scale 

ambush before withdrawal. I ordered all Mujahideen task forces to 

observe complete radio silence and cease firing effective 2000 hours 

on 6 November. I further directed some Mujahideen to physically 

withdraw as part of the deception. The next morning, the entire front 

was quiet. The DRA moved freely along the highway and replaced 

the necessary bridges. At 1530 hours, the DRA started moving large 

mechanized columns across the Debili bridge toward Dargo, entering 

our "kill zone." A large number of vehicles entered the kill zone as 

traffic surged into the gorge from both directions. The two-way lanes 

were full of vehicles and a traffic bottleneck ensued. The head of the 

column coming from the east reached the repaired bridge at Debili 

and the head of the column coming from the west reached the newlyEnemy Outposts Overrun: 

1. Owa-Tselay Post 7. Dargo post 

2. Sherkhan Upper Post 8. Kalima Post 

3. Gharray Post 9. Girdabi Post 

4. Two outposts set between the 10. Toot Post 

Pul-e Estehkam bridge and 11. Soorey Tiga Post 

Debili bases. 12. Lakai Post 

5. Two outposts around the Pul-e 13. Tekas Post 

Estehkam Base 14. Surkhakan Bridge Post 

6. One outpost set between the 15. Khairokhel Post 

Dargo and Pul-e Estehkam 16. Lower Khairokhel Post 

Bridge 
Page 184 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

Enemy Bases Overrun during the Operation 

1. Debili Base 

2. Dargo Base 

3. Pul-e Estehkam Base 

(Engineer Bridge Base) 

4. Tori Zhawari Base 

5. Kaftarkhana Base 

6. Spina Thana Base 

restored bridge at Dargo. The four-kilometer stretch between the two 

restored bridges was jammed with traffic when I gave the signal to 

open fire. My Mujahideen opened fire along the entire front, taking 

the DRA by surprise. Mujahideen firing began at 1600 hours and 

continued until 1900 hours in the evening. We inflicted heavy losses 

on the trapped columns. The DRA columns retreated into Sarobi. 

PHAsE FoUR 

My Mujahideen withdrew without DRA interference. They broke 

.contact during the night following the ambush and returned to their 

bases. 

DRA/Soviet Losses 

Total losses during the entire operation include: 

• Forty-two tanks and APCs, six BMPs, nine artillery pieces, one 

BM-13 MRL, one bulldozer, two cranes, 65 soft-skin vehicles, two 

jet aircraft and one helicopter gunship destroyed or damaged. Most 

vehicle losses were inflicted during the Phase 3 ambush. 

• Over 500 soldiers killed or wounded and 212 soldiers and 11 officers captured. 

• Four pistols, 261 assault rifles, two flare guns, three light machine 

guns, four medium (PK) machine guns, three heavy 7.62 machine 

guns, three 12.7 DShKmachine guns, seven ZGU-114.5mm heavy 

machine guns, two AGS-17 automatic grenade launchers, thirteen 

RPG-7 antitank grenade launchers, seven medium 82mm mortaraj 

and nineteen tactical radio sets captured. · 

Mujahideen Losses 

18 killed and 53 wounded. 
Chapter 6, Vignette 6 Page 185 

COMMENTARY: OPERATION ARROW was one of the few thoroughlyplanned and fairly well-coordinated large~ale operations conducted 

by the Mujahideen. The command and staff and the Mujahideen 

combatants showed a high level of combat capability and resoluteness during the action. It was a complex, daring undertaking which 

achieved an ambitious goal. Considering the number of combatants, 

the time spent for preparation (two-three mont;hs according to 

General Wardak), the complexity of the planning, the amount of 

supplies needed to be moved to the battle iuea:.__mostly all the way 

from Pakistan across three provinces (Paktia, Logar, N angrahar )-

and the results achieved, it appears that OPERATION ARROW was an 

expensive and not very cost-effective venture. 

OPERATION ARRow was driven more by political than military considerations. The Soviet Union was withdrawing from Mghanistan 

and, ·by this time, over half of the Soviet forces had already left. 

People expected the DRA to rapidly crumble once the Soviets were 

gone. The various political factions ofthe Mujahideen were jockeying· 

for position in the post-communist government of Mghanistan. In 

order to maintain the interest and financial support of their Arab and 

Western backers, the Mujahideen had to demonstrate their ability to 

work together militarily-a cooperation that had been lacking 

(except, to some extent, in the fighting around Kandahar) throughout 

the war. This need for a show of inilitary/political cooperation was 

one of the key factors in planning and conducting such a large-scale 

operation in this guerrilla war. OPERATION ARROW was a success and 

boosted Mujahideen prestige and particularly promoted the lagging 

image of the National Islamic Front of Mghanistan (NIFA), which 

enjoyed the greatest military success during the operation. 

Miiitarily, the resources could have been better used by substituting a series of smaller actions (conducted successively by groups of 

about 50-70 Mujahideen at a time) at different points along the 

highway. These actions would each last for a few days over an 

extended period of time. Such an option, ·although not very spectacular, would effectively block the highway for a longer period of time 

than during OPERATION ARRow. The DRA losses would not have been 

spectacular each time but should have ended with higher over-all 

losses. While NIFA could afford to launch an "Arrow"-sized operation 

once a year, it could conduct several similar actions of smaller size 

with the same or less cost in men, material, time and other resources. 

The political requirement to employ the forces of four Mujahideen 

factions to close the Kabul-Jalalabad highway for two weeks each 
Page 186 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

was an expensive option. It required four separate deployments of 

forces, four separate plans of operation, three relief operations as 

one faction took over the task from another and four withdrawals. 

This inevitably entailed tactical and logistic duplications, unnecessary transportation costs, and the tactical complications involved 

with relieving one group by another over a wide front. Dividing the 

area into four sectors, each the responsibility of one faction for a 

period of eight weeks, would have achieved the same goal with 

fewer complications, lower costs, better logistic support, and more 

focused action. However, the lack of a unified political and military leadership and factional differences among the Mujahideen 

prevented this option. 

The combined command and staff of the Mujahideen force showed 

a high level of professionalism and operational vision in both planning and execution. The movement of a large force from widely 

dispersed bases to the area of operation and providing for its logistic 

support using very limited local resources is an extremely challenging task. The leadership of the force accomplished this with 

admirable effectiveness. The impact of the operation went far beyond 

the tactical and operational level, contributing to strategic and political destabilization of the Soviet-backed government in Kabul. The 

operation panicked the DRA government which committed unnecessarily-large forces into the area and accepted heavy casualties. 

But the Mujahideen also paid a political price for the operation. 

The highway closure caused losses to civilian merchants who, at 

this time of the year, export pomegranates from Tagao and grapes 

from Kabul to Pakistan. The fresh fruit and vegetable trade is one 

of the major sources of income in Mghanistan. During the first week 

of November, representatives of fruit dealers appealed to the Mujahideen to open the highway, but to no avail. In a guerrilla war, support 

of the local population is too valuable ~o be risked by actions that hurt 

local economy. 

Tactically, the DRA committed several errors. Inadequate DRA 

reconnaissance allowed the Mujahideen to deploy a several-thousand 

man force within a short distance of DRA positions without detection 

· · or interruption. Most of the Mujahideen movement took place at 

night and employed natural cover and concealment in the mountainous terrain. However, a more active DRA reconnaissance would have 

disclose the Mujahideen secret deployment and allowed countermeasures to interrupt the Mujahideen preparations for the operation. 

DRA failure to establish and man observation posts on the higher 
Chapter 6, Vignette 6 Page 187 

mountains also let the Mujahideen move· into the area and prepare 

attack positions undetected. 

The enemy forces in Sarobi were in a favorable tactical position to 

launch a flanking attack against the main base of the Mujahideen 

toward Hisarak. Such a move, supported by air and artillery support, 

should have foiled the Mujahideen operation and cut off their 

withdrawal. Such a move, supplemented by heliborne landings 

behind the Mujahideen lines, could have created chaos and forced 

the Mujahideen to abort the operation. The DRA reaction, however 

was reactive and unimaginative. The road-bound DRA forces paid 

heavily for this leadership failure. 

Falling into the final Muj~hideen ambush was the worst arid 

the most costly DRA mistake. Mter the Mujahideen guns fell silent, 

the DRA did not bother to ensure that the silence really meant that 

the Mujahideen had withdrawn and was not a "calm before the 

storm." The DRA then allowed too much traffic to move down the 

unsecured highway. The DRA traffic jam occurred right in the 

Mujahideen kill zone. 

The two following vignettes describe battles within OPERATION 

ARROW on the eastern approaches to the gorge. 
GARDAYKAC 

-·· 

a ZIRANI 

·-'· /I 

// I 

_.{/ 

. - l~t4J~ 

~· I 

/ 

/ 

/ 

/ ~ 1\AIIUL HIVCH \ - \ 

............ _____ !_ __ a 

SOBIKHEL • 

~ 

ARROW3 

Map 6-8 

0 1 2KM 

N 

'f 

""'0 

~ CD 

_.. 

CD 

CD 

--! 

:::r 

CD 

Q 

:::r 

~ 

en 

a: 

CD 

a 

::T 

CD 

s::: 

0 

c 

~ 

ill s· 

s::: 

E. 

Ill 

:::r 

a: 

CD 

CD 

~ 

~ n. 

~-

s· 

:T 

CD 

en 

0 

< 

~ 

~ :::r 

Ill 

~ 

:::: -~ 
VIGNETTE 6A 

THE BATTLE FOR THE KHAIROKHEL POST 

by Asef Khan 

I brought my 130 Mujahideen from our permanent base in 

Surkhrud District, southwest of Jalalabad to join OPERATION ARRow. 

My group was designated Task Force Hurricane. My group deployed 

at night into its attack position located in the folds of the Tor Ghar 

Mountain. My attack position was about 3 kilometers directly south of 

my objective-the Khairokhel post (Map 6-8- Arrow 3). 

Khairokhel po·st was located immediately west of the Khairokhel 

village. It was manned by a platoon-sized unit supported by two tanks 

and one APC. They also had mortars and machine guns including 

DShKs. There was another post connected with the Khairokhel defenses between the village and the Surkhakan Bridge Post to the east. The 

enemy would detach small teams during the day to patrol the main 

highway between Khairokhel and the Surkhakan bridge. The patrols 

would return to their base at night. 

Task Force Gulf, commanded by Haji Zaman Ghamsharik, was 

deployed on the left flank of my group. Its mission was to attack the 

adjacent enemy base at Spina Thana. Further to the west, Task Force 

Falcon, commanded by Shari'ati and Lt. Wali, was to attack the 

Kaftarkhana Base. The right flank of my task force Hurricane was 

exposed and covered only by mountainous terrain. 

I formed my task force into three groups: an assault group, a support group and a service detachment. There were 50 Mujahideen· 

armed with assault rifles and 15 RPG-7 anti-tank grenade launchers 

in the assault group. The support group manned the heavy weapons 

including one BM-1, one 75mm gun, and three 82mm recoilless rifles. 

At 2200 hours on the night of 22 October 1988, I took a few men 

down to the Khairokhel village on reconnaissance. I had dinner with 

the local elders and asked them to talk to the government post 

commander and convince him to abandon his positions rather than 

face attack. Following the meal, I completed my reconnaissance and 

returned to the attack position in the hills overlooking the village. It 

was so close to the enemy that an American female journalist who 

was accompanying my group said "If I were the government militia, 

you would not be able to survive a single night sitting so close to the 

Asef Khan was the commander of Task Force Hurricane. 
Page 190 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

government post within range of heavy weapons." 

The operational commander, General Rahim Wardak, radioed my 

adjacent commander, Haji Zaman, and told him that the attack time 

on the posts would be at 0800 hours, 23 October. When I returned from 

my reconnaissance, Haji Zaman relayed this information to me. I 

moved my raiding party into some ruins located one kilometer south of 

the Kabul-Jalalabad highway in preparation for the next mornings 

attack. I also set up an ambush near the highway to kill the patrol 

that left the Khairokhel post and moved toward the Surkhakan bridge 

every morning. My aim was to keep the area clear for my raid on the 

Khairokhel Post. 

At 0700, a group of about 15 soldiers left the government post and 

started moving in the direction of Surkhakan bridge to set up securi- · 

ty checkpoints. My Mujahideen let them clear the village and, as 

soon as they reached an open stretch of the road, opened fire from 

well-concealed positions near the .road. My ambush killed six enemy 

soldiers and wounded a few others. 

This action drew a heavy barrage from the enemy bases on either 

side of Khairokhel. Artillery and tanks were firing from the Spina 

Thana in the west and from Surkhakan Bridge Post on the east. At 

this point I radioed a coded message to Haji Zamari saying "get the 

dogs off my back." He immediately responded with heavy fire against 

the enemy base at Spina Thana. Haji Zaman's group was ready since 

it was 0800 hours, the time to start the attack. 

Mujahideen fire on Spina Thana took the pressure off my 

Khairokhel sector. For several hours, Task Force Gulf exchanged fire 

with the Spina Thana base. Then, some direct hits on fuel drums set 

the fort ablaze. Task Force Gulf then: attacked the enemy base. 

As Task Force Gulf launched its attack against Spina Thana, I 

launched the main part of Task Force Hurricane against the enemy 

positions around the Khairokhel Post. I kept a security detachment 

east of the village to block enemy forces trying to enter the engagement 

area. The coordinated attacks of Task Forces Gulf and Hurricane overran the adjacent Spina Thana base and Khairokhel Post at about 1430 

hours. My Mujahideen destroyed the tanks andAPCs at the Khairokhel 

Post and, while part of my group established a perimeter defense 

around the captured post, the other part moved captured weapons and 

equipment to my mountain hideout. This. continued all day. 

During the attack, the enemy was moving communist officials of 

the Alingar District government to Jalalabad in a military convoy (at 

this time, due to the ongoing Soviet withdrawal, the communist 
Chapter 6, Vignette 6a Page 191 

regime was withdrawing its military and administrative units from 

those remote areas which could not be easily maintained or defendeP.). This convoy deployed in the Mehtar-e Lam Baba hills north of 

. the Kabul river and began to employ long-range artillery and rocket 

fire across a wide front stretching from Khairokhel to Kaftarkhana. 

Their artillery and BM-21 multiple rocket launchers were firing at a 

range of over 10 kilometers, so their fire was not very accurate or 

effective. However, later in the day, part of the column moved along 

the main road toward the battle area and tried to cross the 

Surkhakan bridge. The enemy base at Kaftarkhana was still alive. 

However it was under attack by Shari'ati's group and could not spare 

its fire against the Mujahideen in adjacent areas. 

In order to contain the movement of the enemy column, I moved 

my assault group with all available RPG-7s to positions facing the 

Surkhakan bridge. I also destroyed the highway bridge at Khairokhel village with demolition charges that we had brought for this 

purpose all the way from our home base. The enemy tanks and APCs 

in his column came under flanking fire from my RPGs. The enemy 

could not hit my RPG gunners since they were protected by a steep 

turn in the road. The enemy could not flank my position since the 

off-road areas were heavily mined and the blown bridge prevented a 

frontal assault. This significantly boosted my Mujahideen's morale 

and gave them a sense of improved security. For some reason, enemy 

air activity was weak despite the fact that the area was open and the 

fight was going on in broad daylight. 

At dusk the enemy column pushed its infantry out front to clear 

the way for the vehicles, but it did not make any headway. Later, as 

we moved our spoils an~ POW s to their mountain positions in the 

south, I withdrew my security elements from the highway since the 

enemy was moving yet another motorized column into the area from 

J alalabad. By the next day, Task Forces Falcon, Gulf and Hurricane 

had withdrawn their forces from along the highway. The enemy 

columns coming from Jalalabad and Laghman moved slowly down 

the road all the way to Mash'ala Base and reinforced it~ The 

Mujahideen never overran this base and it played a pivotal role in 

maintaining enemy's presence. 

Following this, I limited our action to firing our heavy weapons at 

enemy targets on the highway. Shortly thereafter, I withdrew my 

Mujahideen from the operation since DRA forces had moved into my 

district and were threatening our homes. 
CoMMENTARY: The confident commander's meal with the village elders 

certainly helped his reconnaissance, but clearly tipped off the defending DRA commander that the Mujahideen attack might come soon. On 

the other hand, the Mujahideen had been in the area for some time. 

Further, the guerrilla commander apparently assumed that all the 

local inhabitants were favorably disposed to the Mujahideen. His 

brash behavior succeeded this time, but could have compromised operational security. Apparently, the DRA commander took no action to 

increase his defenses and may not have eveninformed his superior. 

Apparently, the Mujahideen lacked enough working radios so that 

each Task Force Commander could have one. General Wardak could 

not rapidly influence the course of the battle since communications 

were scarce. Further, General Wardak lacked radio communications 

with his eastern flank. This seems a serious problem in case the DRA 

decided to roll up his operation from that flank. 

Once the Mujahideen withdrew to the hills, their long-range fires 

had little apparent effect. Their early departure, however, did create 

additional problems for General Wardak. 
VIGNETTE 6B 

THE BATTLE FOR SPINA THANA BASE 

based on interviews with Haji Zaman Ghamsharik 

I commanded the 200-man Task Force Gulf (See Map 6-8 -Arrow 

3). As part of OPERATION ARROW, I launched my attack on the government base at Spina Thana in coordination with attacks on the 

Khairokhel Post to the. east and Kaftarkhana Base to the west. Spina 

Thana was one of the main military bases providing security for 

columns moving along the Kabul-Jalalabad highway. It also 

patrolled against guerrilla incursions across the Kabul River into 

Laghman Province. A reinforced company supported by tanks, 

BMPs, APCs, heavy machine gun and guns garrisoned the base. 

They protected the base with mines and other obstacles. The entire 

area surrounding the base, except the paved highway running 

through the base was heavily mined. 

Spina Thana would 'l:ze a tough nut to crack. I could assign up to 

150 Mujahideen to the assault group, but using such a large force for 

the attack carried some risks. I could incur heavy casualties since the 

group could not effectively deploy due to the mines. I considered a 

night attack, but this was equally difficult because of the mines, particularly since the enemy habitually mined the exits and entrances to 

the base at night. I decided on a day-light attack. I intended to move 

part of my force as close to the base as possible under heavy covering 

fire. I decided. to put my attacking force on the highway outside the 

mined area and move on the highway in the attack. This was the only 

route guaranteed free of mines. 

I constituted a Task Force support group which manned our BM-12 

and BM-1 MRL, 82mm recoilless rifles, ZGU-1 · and DShK heavy 

machine guns and mortars. I positioned it in the terrain folds of Tor 

Ghar dominating the enemy base on the low ground between the main 

highway and Kabul river. 

I had to begin my planned fires earlier than intended when Task 

Force Hurricane came under heavy fire from the Spina Thana Base. 

The enemy responded resolutely to my fires. The fire exchange went 

Haji Zaman Ghamsharik was the commander of Task Force Gulf. At the start of the war, 

Ghamsharik controlled Khogiani District. He faked a defection to the DRA and requested 

that the DRA provide him trained personnel to run the district. The DRA responded by 

sending 'him 71 communists-who were promptly executed. 
Page 194 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

on unabated until my Mujahideen gunners set part of the base on fire 

with some direct hits. This was the turning point in the battle. As 

panic spread throughout the defenders, I led a 60-man assault group 

through a ravine to the west of the base. We got on the highway 

and attacked east. I instructed my men to stay on the pavement. 

Two of my Mujahideen who strayed had their legs blown off by 

mines. We moved quickly to the base entrance. The defenders had 

little time to mount an organized defense, particularly since some of 

the defenders had fled from their positions in panic and were rushing 

to the river to escape the fire. We met little resistance in storming 

the base. We captured scores of defenders including the base 

commander, Rahmatullah Spelanay. We destroyed the tanks and 

APCs and whatever else could not be moved. We continued the 

attack to the east to help Task Force Hurricane which was locked in 

battle with the defenders of the Khairokhel Post. As we Mujahideen 

advanced from two directions, most of the Khairokhel defenders 

fled toward the river. We captured the rest. The actions for the rest 

of the day unfolded as detailed in the preceding vignette. 

CoMMENTARY: One estimate claims that the Soviets left over 13 

million landmines behind in Mghanistan. The Soviets and DRA 

surrounded their outposts and bases with minefields. A major 

Mujahideen problem in capturing a position was getting through the 

minefield. Mujahideen minefield clearing methods included: 

• probing the ground cautiously in a slow advance; 

• driving a flock of sheep through the minefield; 

• heaving boulders ahead of an advance to provide stepping 

stones for the advance; 

• firing recoiless rifles into the minefield and creating a path via 

the recoiless rifle craters; 

• limited use of some mineclearing systems provided by western 

and Arab backers. 
Chapter 1 , Vignette 1 Page 195 

CHAPTER COMMENTARY 

Control of the highway net was essential to the Soviet/DRA effort, 

but in some regions, the Mujahideen were able to block the highway for 

weeks, months and even years. The best blocks were maintained by 

local Mujahideen who were able to look after their personal interests 

and yet maintain an effective blockade. The least effective road blocks 

were those done by mobile guerrillas who lacked the supplies and 

commitment required to keep the road closed. 
CHA,PTER 7 

SIEGE WARFARE 

The Mujahideen besieged several isolated DRA garrisons. If the 

besieging Mujahideen were local, then the siege went on indefinitely. 

If outside Mujahideen were involved, the siege usually failed since 

the Mujahideen could not maintain the supplies necessary for 

the siege or keep enough of the Mujahideen in place. Since the 

Mujahideen were unpaid volunteers who also had family responsibilities, they were seldom interested in staying around for uninteresting, lengthy sieges. 

Afghanistan 

Chapter 7 

Incidents 
Page 198 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

LEGEND 

L:.. ) INmAL SITUATION 

:=+-~ PHASE 1 

~~: PHASE2 

URGUN 

Map 7-1 2KM 

I 
VIGNETTE 1 

fAILED SIEGE AT URGUN 

by General Gulzarak Zadran 

Urgun was the home of the DRA's 21st Mountain Regiment. It is 

located near the Pakistan border and is close to the strategic positions of Khost, Gardez, and Ghazni, as well as Waziristan, Pakistan. 

Once, after the Mujahideen formed their government in exile, they 

wanted to make Urgun the symbolic seat of their government. 

Despite the fact that Urgun is located in an isolated area, its political significance prompted the DRA and Soviet forces to keep it under 

control at all costs. One of the major Mujahideen actions at Urgun 

took place in 1983. About 800 Mujahideen from the Wazir, Zadran, 

and Kharoti tribes took part. Major commanders at the seige included Mawlawi Jalaluddin Haqani, Mawlawi Arsalah, Matiullah, 

Mawlawi Ahmad Gul and Qauzi Kharoti. The military council for the 

seige included Captain Abdul Majid, Major Arsala Wazir, Captain 

. Qayum, Captain Sardar, Amanullah, Mawlawi Abdul Ghafur and me. 

The regiment's main force was located in the old fortress at Urgun 

which is commonly called the Octagonal Fort (Hashtrakha Kala). It 

had one battalion based in another fort four kilometers south of the 

regiment at Nek Mohammad Kala. A reinforced company held the 

airfield to the west of the regimental headquarters. Another company protected the main road to Urgun at a post some 1.5 kilometers to 

the north. (Map 7-1- Urgun) 

We planned to destroy the regiment in two phases. The first phase 

would destroy the security around the main headquarters (the southern battalion plus the two outlying companies). The second phase 

would destroy the regimental headquarters. The first phase began in 

August 1983. The Mujahideen based in the mountains east of Urgun 

Valley encircled and besieged the battalion at N ek Mohammad Kala. 

This enemy battalion was deployed in a fort which had several towers. 

The fort was surrounded by minefields and heavy ZGU-1 machine 

General Gulzarak Zadran was an officer in the Royal Afghan Army. He trained in the 

United States and attended the Afghan Army Higher Officers Training Institute, where the 

author, Ali Jalali, was his instructor. He joined the resistance and fought in Paktia Province . 

. He fought in Zhawar one and two and at the Satakandow pass. He belonged to Abdui-Rab 

Russul Sayyaf's Islamic Union of Afghanistan (IUA). After the fall of the ORA, he became 

the Deputy Minister of Defense in the interim government. Currently he lives near 

Peshawar. [Map sheet 2882]. 
Page 200 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

guns were positioned in the towers which made it impossible for the 

Mujahideen to approach close to the fort. This prevented the 

Mujahideen from tightening their seige on the fort. 

A few days after the seige began, the religious Festival of Sacrifice 

(Eid-al-Adha) occured. It was customary for Mujahideen to go home 

duririg the festival and the enemy felt that few Mujahideen would still 

be around. This time, however, we did not let our people go home but 

kept them at their bases. Thinking that the Mujahideeri were not a 

threat, the DRA took advantage of the holiday and sent three tanks 

and a few trucks from the main regimental base to resupply the 

battalion. We put an ambush force of approximately 70 Mujahideen, 

commanded by Mawlawi Hasan, in a dry stream bed about halfway 

between the two forts. Among their weapons were some RPG-7s. 

When the DRA column entered the kill zone, he sprang the ambush. 

The ambush destroyed one tank and damaged another. The ambush- · 

ers killed some DRA soldiers and captured 25. Some others escaped. 

The DRA abandoned one intact tank, but the Mujahideen could not 

retrieve it due to heavy machine gun fire from the battalion's fort . 

. The fire forced the Mujahideen force back into a side canyon. When 

night fell, Mawlawi Hasan and Khan Zamak led a group of 

Mujahideen back to the intact tank. The Mujahideen group included 

some former DRA tank crewmen. They drove the tank away to their 

position. 

We planned to attack the battalion fort three days later, using 

the tank as the main weapon. We formed an 11-man tank protection 

group and mounted them on the tank. They were armed with some 

RPGs and small arms. They would ride the tank during a night 

advance through the antipersonnel minefield that surrounded the 

fort. In case the tank got stuck, the tank protection group would 

protect the tank and free it. A 65-man assault force would follow in 

the tracks of the tank as it passed throught the minefield. The tank 

crew would blow a hole in the wall of the fort using the main gun 

of the tank. The 11-man tank protection crew would. then dismount 

and secure the hole opening and the 65-man assault team would 

enter the fort. Mujahideen communications personnel would also 

help in .the assault by interrupting the communications between 

the battalion and regiment. When possible, the radio operators 

would misdirect the artillery. 1 

1 It was common practice for Mujahideen and ORA to enter each others radio nets for 

deception, harassment or to pass messages. General Gulzarak would often talk to the 

other side and curse and insult them. 
Chapter 7, Vignette 1 Page 201 

At 2100 hours, the attack started. The Mujahideen tank moved 

on its designated route with the tank protection crew mounted· on 

top. As it approached the fort and crossed the antipersonnel minefield, a few antipersonnel mines exploded, but the tank protection 

crew was unscathed. The tank crew opened fire on the fort's towers 

with their main gun. The main gun rounds knocked out the heavy 

machine guns. However, the artillery located with the regimental 

headquarters began firing into the area. Our Mujahideen communications personnel began screaming into the radio their fire was 

short and was falling on the battalion. The artillery command post 

became confused with their demands that the fire be shifted further 

away. The artillery stopped fir:lng. The Mujahideen tank crew then 

fired at the wall of the fort. Mter several rounds, they knocked a hole 

in the wall. The tank drove to within ten meters of the wall and 

the tank protection crew signaled the assault group with a flashlight. 

The tank protection crew immediately dis;mounted and secured the 

breach. The assault group followed in the tank's tracks and entered 

the fort. The enemy was surprised by the sudden breach and offered 

no resistance. The Mujahideen captured 243 men plus all the 

weapons and ammunition in the fort. We let those DRA prisoners 

who wanted to join us. We released the others. We were now four 

kilometers closer to the main fort. 

Pishiano Ghar (the mountain of the cats) overiooks the octagonal 

fortress. The regiment had a security post with mortars located on 

the mountain. Our next· move was to seize the security post so that 

the seige would become more effective. A few days later, 70 Mujahideen attacked the security post from the north and south in a night 

attack. The Mujahideen attack was successful. Once we controlled 

Pishiano Ghar, the regiment pulled back the company that protected 

highway 141 to the regimental base. We prepared for phase two. The 

enemy was now completely beseiged and could not receive supplies by 

road and had to get supplies by air. The beseiged DRA could only get 

to the airfield, located some 1.5 kilometers to the west of the fortress, 

by armored vehicles, since we could take out trucks and jeeps. Our 

machine guns on Pishiano Ghar prevented DRA resupply by day.· We 

continued to tighten the seige. · Mujahideen from Zadran brought 

their tank to help out. 

The DRA brought in an operations group from Kabul. Their job 

was to help the regiment plan its defense and a linkup with a Soviet 

unit which was coming from Ghazni to break the seige. DRA General 

Jamaluddin Omar was in charge of the group. He was my old tactics 
Page 202 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

instructor at the Royal Mghan Military Academy. The DRA spread 

their 3rd battalion in the south of the city instead of in the fort. They 

had two companies in the forward defensive line. To the southeast, 

natural ditches and ravines created barriers to our advance. The 

airfield lay to the west. One approach to west of the airfield was inadequately mined, so the DRA covered the gap with guards and patrols. 

Besides our two tanks, we had two 76mm mountain guns; one 

122mm D30 howitzer, one 107mm mountain mortar, other lighter · 

mortars, many RPGs, many DShK and ZGU heavy machine guns and 

other lighter machine guns. It was January and snow was on the 

ground. We covered part ofour tanks with white cloth to hide them. 

We recorded the sound of a moving tank. We received some loudspeakers from Peshawar and assigned people to use them on the eastern flank to depict tanks coming from the east. We structured our 

forces for the assault by creating several groups: 

• A tank and tank protection group commanded by Mawlawi 

Shadam 

• Two assault groups-Northern and Southern 

• An evacuation group to carry away the spoils. 

• A family and dependents protection group to protect the families of DRA officers who were in the garrison 

• A truck transport group 

• A command and control group 

We planned the attack. Following an artillery preparation, a tank would 

spearhead the assault from the north and the south to clear a path 

through the antipersonnel minefields. An assault group would follow in 

the tank's tracks to hit the enemy from two sides simultaneously. 

I was with the southern forces. At 2000 hours on a cold January 

night, our Mujahideen were all in position. We started artillery 

preparatory fire on the DRA positions. Ten minutes later, our tank 

moved north toward the city. The tank fired on two city towers and 

knocked out the machine guns in them. Then we turned on the loudspeakers in the southeast to create tank noises there. The enemy 

fired at the noises as our tank changed direction and headed west 

where it could reach the unmined area. Fifteen Mujahideen, including Mawlawi Shadam, Ismail Turkistani and me were on the tank as 

it entered the city. As we passed through the mined area, we dismounted and moved to the rear of the 3d battalion. Assault group 

south followed the tank's tracks into the city. They stormed 'through 
Chapter 7, Vignette 1 Page 203 

the city and the 3d battalion resistance collapsed. Battalion personnne! either surrendered. or retreated north. As the Mujahideen 

continued to advance, we were stopped by the fire of a DShK machine 

gun some 50 meters to our north. It was now 0300 in morning. We 

attacked the position and killed the gunner-a· Soviet adviser. The 

rest of the DRA regiment had retreated into the fortress with General 

Jamaluddin Omar. 

At this point, Mawlawi Shadam reported that his tank was out of 

ammunition. The tank driver, Lt Mohammad Gul Logari, was wounded in the arm and the gunner was killed. The enemy resolve was 

strengthening and showing renewed resistance. Other Mujahideen in 

the assault group were running low on ammunition. We had failed to 

plan for ammunition resupply. We instructed Mawlawi Shadam to 

take the tank and go back to get all types of ammunition and then 

return to resupply and support our combatants. As the tank moved 

back, the Mujahideen and the DRA heard it and thought that we were 

withdrawing. It was cold, early in the morning and our command and 

control was collapsing. Mujahideen began to fall back. The enemy 

counterattacked and pushed us out of the city. Daybreak came with 

the disorganized Mujahideen milling around outside the city. Wave 

after wave of enemy aircraft appeared and began bombing and straffing the Mujahideen caught in the open. They destroyed our tank. We 

retreated into the mountains. 

I later learned that the northern assault group had not moved that 

night since their tank was stuck in the sand and they could not free it. 

The entire assault was from the south. This cost us an almost certain 

victory. We had no other choice but to withdraw into our mountain 

hideouts in the east. In the following days, as we were preparing to 

resume the seige, a Soviet regiment arrived in Urgun from Ghazni to 

resupply and reinforce the Urgun garrison. 

CoMMENTARY: Ammunition resupply was c;:learly a problem and the 

withdrawal of the tank at a critical juncture turned the tide of battle. 

Communications was as big a problem. The Mujahideen had radios, 

but they were not able to accompany the assault forces. The northern 

and southern assault groups were unable to communicate with each 

other and, presumably, with the command and control group. If both 

attacks had occured, prevention of fratricide would have been a difficult problem without radio communications. Further, members of the 

military council were forward with the assault forces rather than 

directing the battle. 
Page 204 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

Mujahideen air defense planning was also limited. The natural air 

approach into Urgun follows highway 141 in a north-south direction. 

The Mujahideen had heavy machine guns and control of the high 

ground flanking the approach. Evidently, most of the machine guns 

were used to fire on DRA ground forces and the air defense posture was 

degraded at the time of the Soviet air response. 

Mine clearance was a continual problem for Mujahideen forces and 

the use of tanks to clear lanes through antipersonnel miri.efields and to 

breach a hole in the fortress walls deserves high marks. The use of a 

tank protection group, mounted on the tank, was a tactical innovation 

that worked well. This may not seem a tactical innovation to professional officers who always keep infantry up with their tanks, but it was 

not a common practice when Mujahideen acquired armor. The presence of professional officers, like General Zadran, was responsible for 

the formation of the tank protection group. 
VIGNETTE 2 

DEHRAWUD OFFENSIVE 

In the spring and summer of 1984, the Soviet forces stepped up 

their attacks on Mujahideen hideouts and mobile bases in the three 

adjoining provinces of Kandahar, Helmand and Uru.zgan. The Soviets 

also intensified their efforts to intercept Mujahideen supply convoys 

coming through the mountains from Pakistan. In the fall, a number of 

major Mujahideen commanders in these provinces decided to set up a 

regional supply base in the Uruzgan Mountains that could support 

Mujahideen units deployed in the area. Dehrawud District, located in 

Uruzgan Province, seemed to be a suitable place for the supply base. 

It is an oasis in the mountains in the upper Helmand Valley. It is easy 

. to defend and it is conveniently located between the three provinces 

(Map 7-2- Dehrawud). 

The Dehrawud District capital of Dehrawud was garrisoned by 

some 500 government militia who manned security outposts around 

the town. They were supplied by air since the town was blockaded by 

the local Mujahideen who controlled all the roads leading into the 

town. The Mujahideen council decided to attack the government 

enclave, dislodge the militia and consolidate control over the entire 

valley. To do this, however, they first had to negotiate a truce between 

rival groups in the region to ensure their full cooperation during the 

upcoming operation. Two months before the action, Mujahideen delegations from Kandahar and Helmand mediated such a truce. 

In October, Mujahideen forces from Kandahar under Mulla 

Malang, Faizullah and other leaders joined a contingent of Helmand 

Mujahideen commanded by the late Nasim Akhund Zada, the leading 

resistance figure in Helmand Province. Haji Assadullah and some 

Mujahideen fighters from Uruzgan and Baghran areas joined the 

attacking force. This force eventually numbered over 1,000 men. The 

Mujahideen force moved along different approaches to Dehrawud and 

surrounded the government positions in the area. A 300-man detachment sealed off the main approach to Dehrawud from the south along 

the Helmand River. Another 100-man detachment deployed to the 

southeast to cover the Kotal-e Murcha (the Murcha pass) and mine its 

Sources for this vignette include Commander Mulla Malang, Akhund Zada Qasem, several Mujahideen from Uruzgan, Kandahar and Helmand Provinces and Mr. Jalali's personal 

notes and papers. 
Page 206 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

\ 

\ 

DEHRAWUD 

Map .7·2 

1. 0 2 3KM 
Chapter 7, Vignette 2 Page 207 

road. About 500 fighters deployed around the district center, while the 

rest were engaged in full time logistic support. 

The siege lasted 45 days while the Mujahideen gradually tightened 

the noose around the militia positions. The Mujahideen kept only one 

third of the fighters on the front line at any one time. The rest were 

either in reserve or involved in logistic service. The front line fighters 

were relieved every 24 hours. 

The Soviets and DRA supported the Dehrawud garrison with daily 

air strikes on Mujahideen positions to check their advance. They 

would run two or three attack missions daily using fighter bombers 

and helicopter gunships. In the meantime, the Soviet/DRA command 

assembled ground forces from Kandahar and Shindand to relieve the 

embattled militia at Dehrawud. However, it took the enemy weeks 

before he was ready to move large columns of infantry and tanks to the 

mountainous battlefield. 

One day, a Mujahideen gun crew on a ZGU-1 anti-aircraft heavy 

machine gun shot down one of a pair of Soviet fighter-bombers flying 

over Dehrawud. The plane burst into flames and fell in the Helmand 

. River. The pilot, said to be a high ranking officer,2 bailed out and landed five to six kilometers from the nearest Mujahideen position. The 

other fighter circled the area and flew away apparently after pinpointing the crash site of the fallen plane. A seven-man Mujahideen team 

under Mulla Juma Khan went to capture the pilot. By the time the 

Mujahideen reached the pilot, he had moved to a position from which 

he could fire his AK-74 at the advancing resistance fighters. The 

Mujahideen tried to capture the pilot alive. While they were preparing to try and capture him, a swarm of transport helicopters and helicopter gunships flew over the Kotal-e Murcha pass from Kandahar and 

began gun runs against the Mujahideen positions. Two helicopters 

hovered over the crash site. One hovered about 50 meters from the 

ground and lowered a ladder. The Soviet pilot jumped up from his 

hideout arid started climbing up the ladder. Seeing that the Soviet 

pilot was escaping, the Mujahideen opened fire and killed the pilot and 

damaged the helicopter. The helicopter tried to escape but crashed 

about three kilometers away. 

. This incident triggered increased Soviet air activity as they tried to 

soften up the area for the upcoming attack by ground forces moving on 

two axes to Dehrawud. One column was approaching along the 

Helmand River from Kajaki dam and the other from Khakrez across 

the Kotal-e Murcha pass. For three days, Soviet air strikes continued 

Mulla Malang states that he was a general officer. 
Page 208 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

uninterrupted from dawn to dusk. However, the Mujahideen suffered 

fewer casualties than the militiamen, who sustained losses from both 

collateral damage and "friendly fire." 

Following three days of heavy bombardment, a column of enemy 

infantry and tanks arrived from the Kajaki side. Although the 

Mujahideen groups assigned to cover this approach had left earlier, the 

terrain did not support tank movement. A Soviet Movement Support 

Detachment (MSD) used road construction machines and demolitions 

to open a way through the rocky approaches to Dehrawud for the tanks 

and APCs. The Soviets conducted airmobile insertions of soldiers on 

the heights overlooking the movement route to provide flank security. 

By this time, the Mujahideen were too widely dispersed for effective control. The contingents from Kandahar and Helmand were on 

opposite sides of the Helmand River and could not cross it. Their 

heavy weapons, such as the ZGU-1, DShK and surface-to-surface rockets were also positioned on both sides of the river. Their fires could not 

be coordinated. Five days after they killed the Soviet pilot on the 

Helmand River, the Mujahideen realized that they had lost command 

and control over the scattered detachments and could not deal with the 

two-pronged enemy advance. Therefore, the Mujahideen groups withdrew to their separate provincial bases by mountain paths. 

The Soviet column from Kajaki reached Dehrawud and recovered the body of the dead pilot. The Mujahideen had removed 

his documents earlier. As the Mujahideen pulled out, the column 

from Kandahar stopped at Khakrez and did not proceed to 

Dehrawud. It conducted a number of search and destroy actions 

in the area and returned. During the entire 45-day battle, the 

DRA militia incurred the heaviest losses. Mujahideen casualties 

were negligible. Mulah Malang states that the Mujahideen shot 

down a jet fighter and 10 helicopters. 

CoMMENTARY: This Mujahideen seige was a conventional battle by a 

guerrilla force. It ended in a tactical setback. Had the Mujahideen 

established an operational command system in the region, it would 

have been easier for them to coordinate their action in terms of time 

and space. Lack of such an arrangement left a sizeable Mujahideen 

force without operational support by other local groups, especially in 

blocking the movement of Soviet/DRA reinforcements. 

Guerrilla forces are best employed for actions of short duration . 

. Long, extended operations, such as this seige, asks a lot of unpaid 

volunteers. The Mujahideen did assign detachments to cover the 
Chapter 7, Vignette 2 Page 209 

approaches to Dehrawud from the south, but, as the seige continued, 

many of the fighters found more pressing business to attend to 

then sitting idly on a mountain. They departed one after another and 

left the approaches open. Both the Kajaki axis and the Kotal-e 

Murcha axis were very easy to block with a small detachment of 

determined fighters. If the Mujahideen had held their positions, 

they could have stopped the large columns of their enemy and celebrated a Mujahideen victory in Dehrawud. But, once again, the 

Mujahideen experience demonstrated their tactical and logistical 

limitations in maintaining control over large forces for an extended 

period of time. Most of the Mujahideen were not fighting on their 

home territory and, therefore, were less enthusiastic about remaining in stationary positions for an extended period of time while the 

Soviet Air Force attacked them. 

Air power, while seldom decisive in guerrilla war, played a major 

role in breaking this seige. Once the Mujahideen assumed static positions, the Soviet Air Force was able to delay the Mujahideen assault 

and gain the time needed for the ground forces to reach the battlefield. 
CHAPTER 8 

DEFENDING AGAINST RAIDS 

Effective defense against ground raids requires timely intelligence, 

plans and battle drills, prepared fighting and sheltered positions, a 

ready reaction force, accessible weapons and ammunition, escape 

routes, security patrols and sentries and early warning elements posted far enough away to provide adequate early warning. Rehearsal of 

plans, battle drills, the ready reaction force and escape and withdrawal are essential to effective defense against raids. 

Afghanistan 

Chapter 8 

Incidents 
Page 212 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

\ 

' ' ..,~~ 

..,----_,. ' 

r \ ', \ AMANULLAH 

I E:s:3 ~ Jl..,.,...t;i(' 

0 · 1 KM 

SAY GHANI VILLAGE 

MapS-1 

:y 

~RAZAKHAN 

I 

I 

I 

I 

/ I. 

I~ 

~ t:3RAHIM 

~ 

I 

I 

QADER'S HOUSE 

N 

l 

/ 

I 

/ 

/ 

/ 
VIGNETTE 1 

SOVIET RAID ON MUJAHIDEEN HIDEOUT AT SAYGHANI 

by Haji Abdul Qader 

On 9 January 1981, a Soviet detachment mounted a raid on 

my home in Sayghani Village, about six kilometers northeast of 

Bagram air base. At that time, I commanded a group of some 200 

local Mujahideen who were spread among several mobile bases in 

the area. We would conduct specific missions in Bagram and neighboring districts in Parwan and Kapisa Provinces. I rarely spent the 

night in my village since it is very close to the Soviet garrison at 

Bagram1

· and difficult to defend. I would alternate among my mobile 

bases and would stay at a P.ifferent location every night. I was 

usually accompanied by no more than 20 of my men who were 

disguised as peaceful civilians. 

A week before, JIA Commander Mawlawi Zaher of Gujarkhel and I 

combined forces to ambush a Soviet/DRA column at Sofi Baba along 

the road from Koh-e Top to Sayad. The column had seven or eight 

trucks and six APCs. The column was returning from Khanaqa and 

Niazi in the south where the DRA had conducted a press gang to draft 

recruits into the DRA army. We ambushed their column at dusk and 

destroyed two APCs and four trucks with short-range RPG-7 fire. We 

captured some 70 Kalashnikovs, which we desperately needed. We 

divided the weapons between our two groups. I believe that the raid 

on my home was in retaliation for this ambush. 

That night I had some guests from Laghman and entertained them , 

until late in the evening in my house in the village. In the late 

evening, I sent most of my men to other villages and kept about 40 at 

Sayghani (22 of them were residents of the Village). 

Sayghani is a village of about 100 homes located off the main road. 

My home is near the village mosque, protected by several fort-like 

structures ringing the village (Map 8-1- Sayghani). I posted two guard 

details-one at my house and the other at the mosque. The night was 

very quiet and at midnight the snow began to fall. Early in the mom-

. ing, I woke up for morning prayer. The guards on my roof reported 

Haji Abdul Qader was a school teacher who became a Mujahideen commander. He was 

initially with the HIK faction and later with the IUA faction. [Map sheet 2886, vic grid 2970]. 

Mr. Anthon Jalali's notes also used in this vignette. 

1 The Soviet 682nd Motorized Rifle Regiment and the 354th Separate Airborne Regiment 

were garrisoned in Bagram. 
Page 214 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

that everything was all right. However, when I was half way through 

ablutions,2 I noticed signal flares streaking across the cloudy sky. 

They were coming from the northeast and southeast. 

The night may have seemed'quiet to my guards, but it was busy for 

the Soviet raiding detachment. Led by local guides and informants, 

the raiders had stealthily walked from Bagram to the village during 

the snowfall and quietly occupied several buildings around the village. 

By dawn, the enemy had taken up positions at Haji Satar, Rahim, Haji 

Taleb, Raza Khan, Haji Rahmat Sayed and Amanullah forts.3 

As soon as I saw the flares, I asked the guards about it. They said 

that they thought that the enemy was on the road to the village some 

two kilometers away. I thought that the flares were much closer. I had 

no time to gather all my men, so I took the 15 men who were staying 

in my house and we tried to exfiltrate from the village. Shortly after 

we left my house, I realized that I had forgotten my briefcase full of 

data about my group. I sent my younger brother to fetch the briefcase 

and ordered my men to move down the road to the mosque and then on 

the Rahmat Said fort at the edge of the village. From there, we would 

take the path to Mujahideen-held areas. I waited for my brother. A 

few minutes later he joined me and we hurried after the group. We 

caught up with the group as they approached the stream beyond the 

mosque. 'rhe stream bed was full of Soviet soldiers in ambush. They 

opened up on my group withAK-74s and killed three ofmy men on the 

spot. The rest of my group disappeared in the dark and moved to the 

southwest, where they were soon trapped in another ambush and 

killed to the last man. An enemy tracer bullet had set my tsadar on 

fire. My brother warned me that I was on fire. I pulled off my burning tsadar and threw it away, but that attracted the attention of the 

first ambush group who again opened up on us and killed my brother. 

I had lost contact with my group and so I moved in the opposite direction and slipped out through a house at the edge of the village. The 

enemy had blocked all streets and escape routes arid none of my 

Mujahideen survived the raid. The enemy killed all 40 Mujahideen 

and 15 civilians at different locations in the village. 

COMMENTARY: Lack of effective security contributed decisively to the 

Soviet success and led to the destruction of the resistance force. 

Combat security should protect a unit from surprise attack and 

2 Muslims pray five times a day and wash before prayers. 

3 Many of the home in Afghanistan are surrounded by high, thick adobe walls and are actually small ~~ . 
Chapter 8, Vignette 1 Page 215 

provide sufficient time and space for the main body to prepare anddeploy for combat in the most favorable conditions possible. Had the 

Mujahideen posted security patrols on the approaches to the village, 

the Soviets probably would have been unable to approach undetected 

and to surprise the unprepared resistance fighters. The two guard 

details that Commander Qader deployed inside the village could 

provide only close-in protection but could not provide early warning 

or tactical security for the unit. 

The secrecy of the Soviet movement -to the village and their 

stealthy deployment at the village played a decisive role in the outcome 

of the raid. Taken by surprise, the Mujahideen lost control of the situation and were forced to act under conditions dictated by the Soviets. 

The Mujahideen could have avoided the disaster by preparing 

contingency plans with clear-cut instructions to the combatants and 

group leaders in the event of surprise attack. The plan would determine the location of each combatant and sub-group leader during their 

overnight stay in the village. Bagram was a major Soviet installation 

and the overconfidence and bravado of the Mujahideen contributed to 

their defeat. 

Once he discovered the Soviet presence, the Mujahideen commander did little to establish effective command and control over the 

situation. He said that he did not have time to reach every combatant 

and sub-group leader. But the commander failed to lead even the small 

15-man group that was with him. He waited for his briefcase and told 

his men to proceed without assigning a group leader in his absence. 

This group was leaderless as it blundered into the two ambushes. 

Local informers and collaborators were also vital to the Soviet 

success. The Soviet detachment could not have achieved its goal without help from the inside. Such cases of collaboration created a lot of 

suspicion among the Mujahideen and sometimes resulted in very tragic consequences to innocent people. 

Haji Abdul Qader learned a very important lesson at a very high 

price. As he says, his group never again stayed overnight in Sayghani 

without posting a strong security detail on approaches to the village at 

points not less than two kilometers from the place. 
Page 216 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

0 

ALISHANG 

Map 8·2 

2 3 

N 

t 

4KM ' 
VIGNETTE 2 

BATTLE FOR ALISHANG DISTRICT CENTER 

by Commander Sher Padshah 

In August 1981, the Mujahideen controlled the district center of 

Alishang in Laghman Province. My base was in a remote upper valley 

near Daulatshah. I brought 29 of my Mujahideen south through the 

fertile Alishang Valley to Alishang Village. (Map 8-2- _Alishang) This 

is a trip of over 45 kilometers. When we arrived, we were very tired 

and the local Mujahideen, who numbered 50, told us to sleep and that 

. they would provide security. In the morning, as w~ were rising for 

. morning prayers, we heard shots. The guards then realized that we 

were surrounded. We decided to escape into the mountains. The 

Badrow hills are about three kilometers northeast of the village and 

lead to the mountains. As we tried to get out of the village, we came 

under fire from all directions. Within five minutes, we lost 14 

Mujahideen KIA and 50 WIA. Mawlawi Niaz Mohammed, the local 

Mujahideen commander, was among the dead. Faced with withering 

fire and heavy losses, we retreated back into the village to conduct a 

desperate defense. 

Our force was down. to 15 Mujahideen but our mortars were still in 

position from where we had set them up the night before. Besides the 

mortars, we had RPG-7s, PK machine guns, Kalashnikov rifles, and 

Bernau "20-shooters."4 We mounted a stubborn defense. We discovered that Soviet forces had surrounded the village. At 0800 hours, a 

DRA reinforcing column with tanks and infantry came from the 

provincial capitol ofMehtar Lam. We started firing the mortars at the 

column. The DRA kept trying to get into the village, but we drove them 

back. Sometimes the fight degenerated to hand-to~hand combat. We 

hit one tank with a RPG-7. Around noon, a jeep full of Soviet advisers 

drove into range. One of my RPG-7 gunners destroyed the jeep. We 

also captured some of the DRA soldiers who were close to the jeep. We 

demanded that they surrender and they did. The fighting cqntinued 

until1600 hours. Then, as sunset neared, the DRA and Soviets withdrew, leaving the village in our hands. Besides our·14 Mujahideen KIA 

and 50 WIA, there were many dead and wounded Afghan civilians 

Commander Sher Padshah is from Laghman Province. [Map sheet 3086, vic grid 0149]. 

4 The Bernau is the Czechoslovak M26 light machine gun. The· Mujahideen called them 

"20-shooters." 
Page 218 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

including women and children. I do not know what the total enemy 

casualties were. 

I am sure that someone from the village had told the government 

that we were there. Some of the villagers had left the village before 

the Soviets surrounded it. The villagers that were left actively helped 

the Mujahideen in the defense. The women provided us with food and 

showed us where to take cover. They led us from house-to-house as the 

enemy tightened his noose around us. That evening, after the fighting, 

we asked the locals for donkeys and mules to haul away our dead. We 

put our dead on their animals and took the bodies to their villages for 

burial. We took our wounded to local doctors for treatment. They 

helped as best they could, including some of the doctors from the 

government hospital. 

The Soviets left some of their dead in the village of Alishang. They 

moved south to the village of Qawalkhel. They surrounded the village 

and told the villagers to go to Alishang and recover their dead or 

they would destroy their village. The Qawalkhel elders came to us and 

asked for the Soviet dead. We told them that they could recover the 

Soviet dead after we left. 

COMMENTARY: Mujahideen night time security, when sleeping in a 

village, was usually only a guard or two posted inside the village. 

The Mujahideen needed to get security out to the key terrain. dominating the village to provide timely warning. When the Soviets 

and DRA had timely intelligence, they were often able to surround 

sleeping Mujahideen whose guards were within yards of the sleepers. 

The Soviet forces were probably from the 66th Separate Motorized 

Rifle Brigade in J alalabad-some 40 kilometers away. The DRA 

force was probably from the 71st Infantry Regiment-garrisoned only 

seven kilometers away in Mehtar Lam. The area is open and easily 

accessible by road. The local Mujahideen's overconfidence hurt the 

resistance badly. 
VIGNETTE 3 

VISION IN THE BAR KOT VALLEY 

by Doctor Mohammad Sadeq 

It was December 1983. I left my village of Sotan in Dara-i Nur 

Valley for the nearby valley of Bar Kot. I had five of my Mujahideen with me. In Bar Kot Valley, we stopped at the village of 

Dud-Reg where we spent the night in a Mujahideen guest house 

(Map 8-3 -Vision). Dud-Reg is the last village in the valley before 

the forest begins. In this area, the mountains are all heavily wooded 

with pine, juniper and sycamore. It was foggy, rainy and very cold. 

There were other Mujahideen from IRMA staying in the house next 

door to ours. After supper, everyone but my sentry went to bed. I was 

asleep and dreaming. In my dream, I saw a man in a white robe who 

laid his hand on my shoulder and said ''You will prevail." Then the 

man dropped ammunition in my lap and gave· me an Enfield rifle. 

"This is the time to go forward" the man said. I woke up and looked 

around. I could not find any ammunition or Enfield rifle, but I 

checked to make sure that my Kalashnikov and pistol were still 

under my pillow as I was thinking about the dream. 

At 0030 hours, I again awoke as I heard a shot fired. I scrambled 

to my feet and asked the sentry what was going on. "Nothing, everything is all right" Agha Gul replied. I lay back down. Shortly afterward, I heard another shot. I jumped up, pulled on my shoes and 

grabbed my weapons. The other Mujahideen were also up. I looked 

outside. The sentry said "The Soviets are here. We are surrounded. I 

see their signal rockets all around us." The· other group of IRMA 

Mujahideen rushed out into the night and up into the mountains. My 

five Mujahideen asked me "What ·should we do?" I replied, ''Well, 

they've come for us, so let's give them a fight." The enemy had us 

surrounded and had blocked all the exits by this time. 

The house that we were in had a large, enclosed courtyard (60 

meters x 60 meters). The enemy were firing at us and they knew 

exactly where we were. I went to the back of the enclosure and 

crawled over the wall into a narrow meter-wide alley. I asked my 

Mujahideen to follow me. We moved down the alley and into the open 

fields. I could see Soviets in the open field. I told my Mujahideen 

Doctor Mohammad Sadeq was a commander with the HIH in Kunar Province. [Map sheet 

3186, vic grid 4341]. 
Page 220 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

0 

VISION 

Map 8·3 

2 3KM 
Chapter 8, Vignette 3 Page 221 

that I would lay down a base of fire so that they could cross the field. 

Once they crossed the field, they were to go to the flank of the field 

and hold it. Just behind us was the house where the IRMA 

Mujahideen had stayed. I did not know that they had gone and were 

worried that they would unintentionally fire into our backs. I fired 

as my Mujahideen crossed the field, but they came under fire. We all 

fired back and retreated into the mountains. As we started up the 

mountains, we bumped into still more Soviets who were positioned in 

the mountains. As we were taking shelter behind a wall, op_e of my 

Mujahideen was hit and killed. We did not know this area very well, 

so we did not know how to get out. It took us about three hours to 

find our way safely up into the mountain. As we reached the mountain, we met the IRMA Mujahideen who had escaped earlier. They 

asked us to use tracer rounds to mark targets for their mortars. I 

fired at the enclosure that .}Be had started out from with tracer 

bullets. The IRMA Mujahideen then fired their mortar at the enclosure. As daylight broke the IRMA Mujahideen mortar fire became 

more effective. In all, they fired 42 mortar rounds. The Soviets did 

not want to stay around and get mortared, so they withdrew. As I 

watched the Soviets pull back, I realized that we had prevailed and 

that my dream had come true. It was now time to go forward. 

Mter the battle, I learned that the IRMA Mujahideen also had one 

of their group killed by the Soviets. Two Mghan women were also 

killed near the enclosure. The Soviet force had come from J alalabad 

(about 20 kilometers away).5 They had come at night on their APCs. 

They were guided by an Mghan named Nader. He was from Shewa. 

Since the DRA was established in this area, the people were divided in 

their loyalties and people like Nader worked against us. 

CoMMENTARY: The Mujahideen were lax about security in this area, 

despite the known divided loyalties within the populace. The guesthouse that the Mujahideen were staying in was not a private home, but 

a Mujahideen guesthouse regularly used by Mujahideen· passing 

through the area. All the local villagers knew about its presence and 

function. The Soviet's guide came from Shewa, which is 15 kilometers 

away and yet he had no trouble pinpointing its location at night. The 

Soviets drove through a well-populated area on APCs to conduct their 

raid, yet the Mujahideen got no advance warning and their sentry was 

5 The Soviet force was either from the 66th Separate Motorized Rifle Brigade or the 

Spetsnaz battalion based in Jalalabad. 
Page 222 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

surprised. The Mujahideen were complacent about security and set 

patterns that the Soviets reacted to. Only the presence of the 

Mujahideen mortar and a large stock of mortar ammunition saved 

them. 
VIGNETTE 4 

SURPRISED BY THE SOVIETS IN THE 0ARA·E NUR 

by Doctor Mohammad Sadeq 

In March 1984, the DRA and Soviet forces again tried to destroy 

the Mujahideen forces in the Dara-e Nur Valley. A total of 120 

Mujahideen armed with seven RPG-7s, one 82mm mortar, one DShK 

and many Kalashnikovs blocked their advance at Shokyali Village 

which is located at the junction of Dara-e· Nur and Bar Kot Valleys. 

(Map 8-4 - Bar Kot) We positioned our forces to block both valleys 

and the high ground between them. The enemy came and tried to 

overcome our defenses but failed. Then the government sent a group 

of the area's elders to talk to us. The elders tried to persuade us not 

to fight in the area and to leave, but we refused. We held the area for 

another year before the enemy brought another column against us. 

Nader, the DRA police chief for the area, sent us a message also 

trying to persuade us not to continue to fight in this area. He warned 

us that, if we did not leave, the Soviets would destroy 'all the villages 

in the area. It was now April 1985. At 2030 hours one evening, my· 

group left the village of Sotan. We were armed with an RPG-7 and 

Kalashnikovs. We were moving to the junction of the two valleys along 

the foot of the mountains. One of my men stated "I will fire a shot to 

show our presence and let the people know that we are not cowards. It 

will show them that we are not intimidated and that we are still here." 

I tried to talk him out of it, but he finally fired the shot. As soon as 

he fired, the night lit up with return fire from all the Soviets who 

we discovered were in the area in force. The Soviets had arrived the 

previous night and had waited all day for us. We had not reached the 

junction yet, but were at a place called Kar. The Soviets were firing at 

us from positions on the mountain to the west and to the east is a steep 

canyon with a sheer 150 meter wall. We were trapped and surrounded, so we went to ground and fought back through the night and next 

day. With the day, helicopters came and fired at us. We grimly held 

our position and waited for the next night when we would try a breakout. But the Soviets had also had enough fighting, and they pulled out 

at the end of the day. I lost one KIA and one WIA. I do not know if 

there were any Soviet casualties. 

Doctor Mohammed Sadeq was a commander with the HIH in Kunar Province and was also 

the narrator of the previous vignette. [Map sheet 3186, vic grid 4742.] 
Page 224 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

0 

•• ••• 

JANJAPUR 

BARKOT 

Map 8·4 

2 

N 

I 

3KM 
. Chapter 8, Vignette 4 Page 225 

COMMENTARY: The Mujahideen believed in the invulnerability of 

their defenses and let the routines of positional defense dull their 

alertness. The Soviets again were able to infiltrate a force deep · 

into the Mujahideen· territory and take them by surprise. The lack 

of Mujahideen discipline triggered the ambush, but apparently 

triggered the ambush prematurely before the entire force was in the 

kill zone. Mujahideen leaders led by consensus, force of personality 

and moral persuasion. 

The Mujahideen failed to man their defenses around the clock arid 

the Soviets were able to move through their unmanned positions and 

surprise the Mujahideen. It is unclear whether the Soviets were in a 

deliberate ambush or were waiting for night fall to move on Sotan to 

attack the Mujahideen. 

One of the problems that a guerrilla movement has i~ that the people who suffer the retaliations for guerrilla actions are usually· the 

civilian populace. What starts as a popular cause, supported enthusiastically by the populace, can sour when the local populace has to bear 

the reprisals with no apparent end in sight. The local populace that 

remains often just wants to be left alone by all sides. The Mujahideen 

in this area lost a great deal of local support and, consequently, intelligence information and early warning. 

CHAPTER CoMMENTARY 

Mujahideen local security was often lax in those areas which they 

controlled or which Soviet/DRA forces had not visited in awhile. Often, 

Mujahideen local security was even lax in areas adjacent to major 

Soviet and .DRA garrisons. KHAD infiltrators and informers often 

managed to provide timely information that resulted in successful 

raids. The Mujahideen often failed to post security at a sufficient distance from their force to provide adequate warning. Instead, they 

relied on local inhabitants to provide that warning. In areas where the 

local populace had fled or were tired of the war, the Mujahideen were 

blind. The factional nature of the Mujahideen also discouraged the distribution of timely intelligence to all Mujahideen forces in an area. 

The Mujahideen often failed to plan against raids, constitute a 

ready reaction force, designate escape routes and assembly areas and 

rehe.arse their defense. Aggressive Soviet or DRA raids had a good 

chance of success against unprepared Mujahideen. The trick was to 

withdraw before the Mujahideen had a chance to recover and pursue. 
CHAPTER 9 

FIGHTING HELIBORNE INSERTIONS 

Soviet technology often had minimal impact on the Mujahideen · 

guerrilla. Many Mujahideen tactics were virtually unchanged and 

still effective from their combat with Great Britain in the nineteenth 

and early twentieth centuries. Soviet high-performance aviation 

posed a direct threat to the civilian populace of Afghanistan, but. the 

Mujahideen learned how to avoid or misdirect high-performance 

aircraft. However, the Soviet transport helicopter and helicopter 

gunship proved to be major concerns to the Mujahideen. Helicopters, 

and later the SU-25 close air support aircraft, were potent systems in 

the Soviet arsenal that the Mujahideen respected and feared. Soviet 

transports could land raiding parties deep in Mujahideen areas while 

gunships and close support aircraft could attack any opposition. 

Throughout the war, the Mujahideen had difficulty countering heliborne insertions, but they did learn that planning, drills and air 

defense ambushes could help alleviate the heliborne threat. 

Afghanistan 

Chapter 9 

Incidents 
Page 228 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

N 

i 

BADIABAD 

Map 9-1 

0 ~---------------~--------------- 2 _______________ ~3KM 
VIGNETIE 1 

SOVIET HELIBORNE RAID ACHIEVES SURPRISE 

. by Doctor Abdu~ Qudus Alkozai and Commander Haji Sidiqullah 

In the mid 1980s, Mujahideen forces based in Alingar District of 

the Laghman Province intensified their attacks on Soviet!DRA 

columns moving between Alingar and the provincial capital of Mehtar 

Lam. Mujahideen action included harassing supply columns, blocking 

traffic and launching raids on security outposts protecting government 

establishments. These actions were usually conducted by local resistance groups of 30 to 70 men. Most were affiliated with the Hezb-e 

Islami of Gulbuddin Hekmatyar (HIH). 

Mujahideen commanders dispersed their men, weapons and equipment in the villages and hideouts and sometimes even buried their 

weapons between actions. However, rarely a day would pass in the 

region without some combat initiated by the Mujahideen or the DRA 

forces. In response, the Soviet/DRA forces targeted suspected bases or 

houses (permanent residences or headquarters) of major Mujahideen 

commanders in the area. Most of the raids were conducted by ground 

troops. However, after 1984, Soviet special forces launched several 

heli-borne raids on Mujahideen targets in the region. Their action at 

Badia bad Village was one of these. 

In the summer of 1985, a Soviet heli-borne detachment raided the 

house of a local Mujahideen commander, Mamur Ghulam Jailani, in 

the village of Badiabad. The village is located about 15 kilometers 

northeast of Mehtar Lam on the main road connecting the provincial 

capital with the Alingar District (Map 9-1 - Badiabad). Commander 

Jailani commanded 150 Mujahideen located in and around Badiabad. 

His group was armed with automatic rifles, RPG-7 grenade launchers 

and a few heavy .and light machine guns. 

The Soviet raid began around 0900 hours with successive gun runs 

by pairs of helicopter gunships. Continual heavy helicopter rocket and 

machine gun raked the village and gave the villagers little opportunity to move into the surrounding hills-a standard practice by women 

and children to escape the ground force attacks that usually followed 

Haji Sidiqullah was the Provincial Military Commander of the HIH party in Laghman. He 

joined Hekmatyar in the fight against Daoud--before the communist revolution. He had no 

formal military education. Dr. Abdul Qudus was a guerrilla commander under Sidiqullah. 

He doubled as the force medic, since he received medic's training in Pakistan. [Map sheet 

3086, vic grid 17 45]. 
Page 230 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

air strikes. That day Commander J ailani was staying two villages 

away at Mirza Qala, less than one kilometer to the east. His 14-yearold son was alone in the house during the raid. The youngster was 

wounded, but managed to escape. 

The aerial preparation continued about 30 minutes without any 

Mujahideen reaction or return fire. Four lift helicopters then set down 

in some corn fields 200-300 meters west of the commander's house. 

The corn stalks were about 20-30 centimeters high at the time. About 

40 commandoes disembarked and. immediately split into three groups. 

Two 10-man groups· secured the northern and southern flanks of the 

village and a 20-man group stormed through the village to the house 

only to find that it was empty. The commandoes. seized (stole) cash 

and other valuables in the house and destroyed what they could not 

take away. They searched several neighboring houses and found only 

women and children. They detained two unarmed Mujahideen who 

had buried their weapons. They were later released. 

Several Mujahideen groups from the surrounding villages moved to 

Badiabad to fight the Soviets, but none arrived on time. The Soviet 

detachment withdrew unopposed and flew away in the helicopters that 

brought it in. The entire action lasted about an hour. 

COMMENTARY: Soviet intelligence as to the location of the commander's 

house was good, probably reflecting the presence of an informer in the 

area. However, the Soviets did not have current intelligence to pinpoint when the commander would be in his house. This indicates that 

they were relying on only one intelligence asset and should have directed other assets to supplement their agent's reports. The resulting lack 

of accurate, curr~nt intelligence resulted in a failed mission. On the 

other hand, the guerrillas did not have an early warning system and 

had not developed and rehearsed a plan or drills to counter a Soviethelicopter raid. This lack may have saved the Soviet force. 

The guerrillas' lack of an overall village security plan and slow 

reaction time cost the resistance a good opportunity for inflicting heavy 

losses on the raiding detachment. A good security plan would concentrate on destroying the lift ships first and then fragmenting and 

destroying the raiding detachment piecemeal. 

Eyewitnesses say that Jailani had leftan RPG-7 in his house. As 

the SoViet gunships started strafing the village, he asked for a volunteer to go to the village and retrieve the valuable weapon. He offered 

40,000 Afghanis (about 100 dollars) as a reward. His 17-year-old 

nephew, Ismail, volunteered, reached the embattled house and 
Chapter 9, Vignette 1 Page 231 

~ 

retrieved the weapon minutes before the Soviets stormed the place ... · 

Instead of retiring with the RPG-7, the Mujahideen commander 

could have it used against the raiding force-perhaps to knock out 

enemy helicopters. There was no lack· of brave men among the · 

Mujahideen, like Ismail, who rushed to the. village for combat. The 

Mujahideen, in this case, demonstrated a lot of individual courage but 

little tactical teamwork, initiative or cohesiveness. 

About one month later, the Mujahideen had another chance and 

reversed the outcome of a similar raid just four kilometers north of 

Badiabad. This is the subject of the next vignette. 
Page 232 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

N 

f 

[]RUINS 

•• ALUKHEL ••• 

1 KM 

'KANDA 

Map 9-2 

0 1 KM 
VIGNETTE 2 

SOVIET RAID ON KANDA 

by Doctor Abdul Qudus Alkozai and Commander Haji Sidiqullah 

In July 1985, about one month after the Soviet raid on the 

Mujahideen base in the village of Badiabad, the Soviets made a 

similar attack against the resistance base of Doctor Alkozai at Kanda 

Warajayee. Kanda Warajayee, commonly called Kanda, is located on 

the main road between the provincial capital of Mehtar Lam and 

the Alingar District in the Laghman Province. The viilage is nearly 

eight kilometers south of the Alingar District center. 

I located my base just outside the village to the west of the 

main road. I moved all the crew-served weapons. from my house in 

the village to the base since the Soviets had conducted a series of 

raids on the homes of known Mujahideen commanders. I located my 

base in a ruin near an intermittent drainage ditch and protected it 

with security posts and crew-served weapons firing positions. 

One day in July 1985, a group of six Soviet helicopters flew into 

my area. The helicopter group included four gunships which started 

firing at positions around my house. It seemed to me that the enemy 

intended to land troops and mount a raid on my house. The 

Mujahideen in my base opened up with machine gun fire on the · 

enemy helicopters. This forced the Soviets to land at a distance from 

the village. As the helicopters landed about three kilometers away 

from Kanda on Shakhatara Dashta (plain), six of my Mujahideen 

carried an 82mm Chinese-manufactured recoilless rifle to a natural 

drainage ditch which extended from the village to the Prang Ghar 

Mountain to the west (Map 9-2 - Kanda). 

The Soviet soldiers jumped from their helicopters onto the open 

terrain near a flock of sheep. The Soviets promptly gunned down the 

unarmed teenage shepherd. The enemy then tried to advance on 

Kanda under the air cover provided by their gunships. But the intensity of fire from my Mujahideen pinned them down in the open. As 

the fire fight continued, more of my Mujahideen rushed into the fray. 

This forced the Soviet troops to withdraw, quickly board their helicopters and fly away. The Soviet raid was a complete failure. 

Haji Sidiqullah and Dr. Abdul Qudus are the narrators of the previous vignette. !Map sheet 

3086, vic grid 1948]. 
Page 234 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

CoMMENTARY: The Mujahideen's prompt reaction to the enemy attack 

saved the day. The Mujahideen had learned that enemy airmobile 

assaults in a guerrilla-controlled area have little chance of success 

when met with coordinated ·fire fro~ multiple directions. Dr. Alkozai 

had planned for enemy air assault and positioned weapons to deal with 

that possibility. 

On the other hand, the Soviet forces paid heavily for their 

attempt to land small units in an area totally dominated by the resistance. A heliborne attack may succeed when it is launched against an 

enemy caught by surprise and unable to respond swiftly. However, 

heavy Mujahideen ground fire should have convinced the Soviet commander to abort his mission. Instead, he relied on gunship fire to 

carry the day and was forced to withdraw from a hot LZ. He was 

lucky not to lose some lift ships, particularly since his landing zone 

was so close to the objective. 

Soviet intelligence about their target appears to have been 

good, but the Soviet commander lacked the complete intelligence 

picture about the strength and location of guerrilla forces. Ifthe Soviet 

commander had inserted some forces to secure the high ground 

overlooking Kanda before landing the bulk of his force, he might 

have been able to suppress guerrilla crew-served weapons and accomplish his raid. 
Page 236 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

MARO 

Map 9-3 

HIGHWAY1 

0 1 2 3 4 5 KM 

N 

f 
Chapter 9, Vignette 3 Page 237 

VIGNETTE 3 

AIR ASSAULT ON MARO STRONGHOLD 

by Toryalai Hemat 

In April1987, the Soviets and DRA launched a combined strike on 

the Mujahideen stronghold in Nangrahar Province, Shinwar District 

near the Nazian Valley. The Nazian Valley was heavily populated, 

although many of the inhabitants had emigrated to Pakistan to avoid 

the Soviet bombing attacks. The Mujahideen stronghold that the 

enemy wanted was at Maro, some 70 kilometers southeast of 

Jalalabad near the Pakistan border. Several Mujahideen groups 

from different factions were located around Maro and there were 

probably some 500 well-armed Mujahideen in the stronghold area. 

The Soviets called this stronghold the Melava fortified region.1 

For 18 days prior to the attack, the Soviets hit the area with 

airstrikes. Then, a mechanized Soviet/DRA column moved east 

from Jalalabad and, when it reached Shinwar Town, it split in two 

(Map 9-3 - Maro). One column moved through Shinwar and up the 

Nazian Valley, while the other column moved further to the east to 

the subdistrict of Dur Baba and then attacked to the southwest. 

Commander Saznur and his men defended on the Dur Baba 

approach. Commander Khaled and I, along with our 10 other 

Mujahideen, defended Ghazgisar-the highest ground in the area 

overlooking Maro. The enemy launched heavy air strikes against us. 

Following the airstrikes, Soviet helicopters landed air assault forces 

on the high ground between the two axes.2 Some 40 or 50 helicopter sorties were involved. One of the landing zones was right in 

front of us. The fighting was fierce. Nine ofmy group were killed by 

the bombing or while fighting the air assault force. Only Khaled, 

Toryalai Hemat was a regiment commander of a mobile force allied with the IUA--Islamic 

Union of Afghanistan of Sayyaf. He fought in many provinces in Afghanistan. [Map sheet 

3185, vic grid 8892]. 

1 A Soviet account of this action is contained in vignette 26 of The Bear Went Over the 

Mountain. The Soviet account mistakenly has the action to the northeast of Jalalabad, a 

mistake that Les Grau made based on a similar name and some vague text. 

2These were two battalions from the 56th Air Assault Brigade in Gardez. The battalions 

drove to Jalalabad and then to Shinwar. They staged the air assault from a field site in 

Shinwar. Why they did not fly to Jalalabad airfield and then stage the air assault from the 

airfield is a mystery. The ground force was most likely from the Soviet 66th Separate 

Motorized Rifle Brigade and the ORA 11th Infantry Division. 
Page 238 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

Abdul Wakil and I survived. The Mujahideen [under Commander 

Saznur] initially stopped the column from Dur Baba, but the column 

coming from the N azian Valley advanced quickly and captured Maro. 

In my ·group, we three survivors were caught between two LZs. We 

snuck out of the area and crossed the border into Pakistan and hiked 

to the nearby village of Bazar. 1 

When the enemy took Maro, many Mujahideen fled across the 

border and assembled at Bazar (Tirah Agency in Pakistan). 

Reinforcements from the HIH and IUA factions poured into the 

area. Arab volunteers along with Talibs from religious schools also 

came for the fighting. We launched a counterattack. The fighting for 

the bases was so fierce that at times it was hand-to-hand combat. I 

personally was so close to some Russians during the fighting that I 

would recognize them today. The enemy left many vehicles behind 

and many dead on the ground. The Soviets did not usually leave 

their dead, but we counted 75 Soviet KIA. I do not know the total 

number of Mujahideen casualties, but I do know of 72 Mujahideen 

killed and wounded. The Soviets only held Maro for three days. They 

burned and destroyed what they could and mined the area before 

they withdrew. 

CoMMENTARY: The Soviet air assault raids on mountain base camps 

usually lasted for one to three days. As in this instance, the Soviets 

preferred to have ground forces involved to link up 'with the air 

assault forces. They tried to seize the area, destroy as much of 

the base as possible, lay down mines and depart. And, they tried to 

avoid getting trapped in the mountains fighting the Mujahideen on 

their turf. As in Zhawar and Magistral, the Mujahideen initially 

retreated, regrouped and reinforced and then launched a punishing 

attack. The close proximity of this base to Pakistan allowed the 

Mujahideen to do this. The Soviet planning and execution of this 

action was well done, but they apparently were late in withdrawing 

and had to fight a running withdrawal. 

The Mujahideen distribution of forces on the two axes was uneven 

and the air assault prevented the Mujahideen from employing a 

reserve against the threatened axis. Part of the maldistribution is 

due to the fact that various factions of various strengths were in the 

area and missions were assigned by faction, not by strength. 
CHAPTER COMMENTARY 

In the early days of the war, Soviet air assault missions were rather 

timid and unimaginative. Later, the Soviets became more confident 

with the air assault concept and struck deeper and more aggressively. 

Ambush forces were delivered by helicopter, and raiding forces 

struck deep at Mujahideen supply bases and staging areas and even 

conducted raids against Mujahideen redoubts such as the one at Maro. 

The Soviets usually sent a ground element to link up with the air 

assault element if the air assault element had to remain in the area for 

any length of time. Soviet air assaults relied on helicopter gunships 

and SU-25 close air support aircraft for fire support, but frequently 

brought their artillery with them by helicopter. 

The Mujahideen learned to counter air assaults with thorough 

planning, immediate action drills, an early warning system and air 

defense ambushes. They learned to mine likely LZs, employ massed 

RPG fire against hovering or landing helicopters, and to try and 

overrun a LZ before the air assault forces had an opportunity to get 

organized and oriented. They also learned to "hug" Soviet forces so 

that helicopter gunships could not fire at them. 
CHAPTER 10 

DEFENDING AGAINST A CORDON AND SEARCH 

The Soviets preferred large cordon and search operations to deal 

with large zones of Mujahideen-dominated territory. They would 

cordon off the area using dominant terrain, roads and . rivers as 

boundaries. Then they would push forces through the area looking 

for weapons, stores and Mujahideen. The Soviets: often used DRA 

forces to do the actual searching. .The DRA usually combined taxation and press-gang conscription ·with the · search. At first, the 

Mujahideen were vulnerable to these large-scale operations but then: 

they learned to build fortifications throughout the zones, coordinate 

their defense, constitute a reserve and exact a toll on the searchers. 

Afghanistan 

Chapter 10 

Incidents 
Page 242 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 
? 

VIGNETTE 1 

BATTLE OF BARAKI BARAK 

by Commander· Qazi Guljan Tayeb 

Baraki Barak District is a very fertile oasis and a major green 

zone located between the two main highways running south and 

southwest from Kabul. One highway runs from Kabul to Gardez in 

Paktia Province and the other runs from Kabul to Gazhni and on to 

Kandahar. The waters of the Wardak River and Wardak Gorge irrigate this fertile area and wheat, corn, and rice fields intersperse with 

vineyards and orchards. This fertile, well-populated valley provided 

a natural base from which the Mujahideen could attack both of these 

main LOCS as well at Muhammad Agha District to the north and 

Gardez in the south. 

In June 1982 there were several Mujahideen bases located in the 

Baraki Barak District. We had brought a number of heavy antiaircraft machine guns into the area, particularly the ZGU-1 14.5mm 

single-barreled machine gun. The enemy was concerned about the 

presence of these air defense weapons. We received information that 

the enemy was preparing an offensive into our area with three major 

objectives: first, to seize our air defense weapons that were becoming 

a hindrance to their air raids in our AO; second, to capture some of 

the leading Mujahideen commanders who continuously harassed and 

attacked Soviet and DRA columns traveling on the two highways 

which bordered our area; and, third, to seize control of the area and 

restore the district government to the DRA. We had overthrown the 

DRA district government in 1979. 

The Soviets and DRA launched their offensive with more than 

20,000 troops involved directly and in support (Map 10-1 - Barak). 

They sent out three columns, one each from Gardez, Kabul and 

Wardak.1 These forces moved to our area, established a cordon 

Commander Qazi Guljan Tayeb was a third year student in Kabul Theological College during the communist takeover in 1978.. He joined Hikmatya.r and later switched to the Sayef 

faction in the mid-1980s. He was the Commander of Baraki Barak District of Logar 

Province. [Map sheets 2784, 2785, 2884, 2885]. 

1 Forces on the Gardez axis were from the Soviet 56th Air Assault Brigade and the ORA 

12th Infantry Division. Forces on the Kabul and Wardak axes were probably from the 

Soviet 103rd Airborne Division al']d 108th Motorized Rifle Division, while ORA forces 

were probably from the 8th Infantry Division, 37th Commando Brigade and 15th Tank 

Brigade. 
Page 244 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

around it, occupied the high ground and began attacking some of the 

Mujahideen positions. The column fro:rn Kabul occupied Pul-e Alam 

and from there sent one detachment to the west around Mir Abdal 

mountain to flank the district from the northwest. The column from 

Gardez moved west of the road to the Alhimur plain and covered the 

southeastern axis to the district. The column from Wardak occupied 

positions on the district's western flank. The enemy blocked practically all major axes out of the area. Since we Mujahideen commanders knew of the upcoming offensive, we had gathered earlier to draw 

up a joint defensive plan. All faction commanders participated and 

we constituted the southeastern and northwestern defensive sectors 

and assigned defensive areas within these sectors to different factions and units. We organized our forces into small groups to insure 

our ability to maneuver and then occupied positions in the perimeter 

villages of our district. We constituted mobile interior reserves and 

kept them available to react to enemy actions. 

I commanded the southeastern sector. I had approximately 800 

Mujahideen, armed and unarmed, under my command. Our weapons 

included ZGU-ls, DShKs, many RPG-7s, PK machine guns, 82mm 

mortars, 82mm and 75mm recoilless rifles, machine guns, and a 

number of .303 bolt-action Enfield rifles. These Enfields were quite 

effective against dismounted Soviets. They had a maximum effective 

range of 800 meters compared to 400 meters for the AK assault rifle. 

Further, the more-powerful .303 round would penetrate Soviet flak 

jackets while the AK round would not. 

The enemy deployed his artillery on the Altamur plain and at 

Pul-e Alam. His column from Wardak occupied the line Dashte 

Delawar-Cheltan hill-and the northern villages to the high 

ground. The enemy initiated their attack with heavy artillery fire 

and air strikes on the villages and suspected Mujahideen positions. 

The artillery fire continued for several hours. They hit the positions 

of the ZGU-ls and set the entire area on fire. The enemy advanced 

from the southwest between Cheltan and the road and entered our 

villages and searched them. They also attacked from the other directions against the perimeter villages that they were facing. Our 

Mujahideen fought them from their forward positions and fell back to 

back-up positions as the enemy entered the villages·. The viilages and 

orchard provided good cover and concealment and, although the 

enemy had the area surrounded, we were able to move freely within 

the 10-kilometer-wide area. We began to launch small-group counterattacks with our scattered groups of Mujahideen. We hit the 
Chapter 10, Vignette 1 Page 245 

enemy from many directions. 

We suffered casualties, but the enemy also got a bloody nose. It 

was an infantry fight at close quarters. Three Mujahideen in my 

immediate group were killed during our local counterattack. Soviet 

forces were encircled a11d the Soviets launched counter-counterattacks to aid their encircled forces. We also reinforced our forces. Our 

forces were intermingled and the Spviet artillery was unable to fire 

into the area of contact for fear of hitting their own troops. Fighting 

continued until dusk. As night fell, fighting slackened and stopped. 

The next morning, the enemy resumed the attack, but this time 

from the east using tanks and infantry. We Mujahideen had mined 

the Khalifa Saheb Ziarat2 approach. The Soviets brought dogs to 

detect the mines. My group in this area were in well-covered positions with three RPGs. As the enemy cleared the minefield and 

moved forward, we opened fire with our RPGs on their tanks standing in the open cultivated areas. The enemy responded by moving 

overwhelming force into the area. The Mujahideen responded by 

moving out of their positions to move through gaps to attack ·the 

enemy on the flanks. Small groups of Mujahideen with RPGs also 

maneuvered through the concealing terrain folds to engage the 

enemy. This totally changed the situation, with the enemy s~opping 

and going to ground in defensive pockets. The enemy's momentum 

was lost as his attack bogged down. The Soviets occupied villages, 

farm buildings and orchards and turned them into defensive positions as the second night fell. The Soviets were scattered in five or 

six pockets and the Mujahideen kept them from linking up. We 

Mujahideen knew the terrain and the local civilians helped us move 

from position to position. We attacked the Soviets from all sides, but 

suffered casualties as well. For the next day and night, the situation 

continued. Both sides were intermingled and the whole area was on 

fire. We saw guns capable of firing in every direction (D30) and saw 

a single-barreled grenade launcher (RPG-18). This was the first time 

we capturedAK-74 assault rifles.3 Flak jackets protected the Soviets 

from AK fire, but our old .303s penetrated them. Mter three days and 

nights, the enemy began to withdraw. Every column returned by the 

direction it had come. 

2 Ziarat means shrine. 

3 The AK-74 Kalashnikov 5.56mm assault rifle was issued only to Soviet troops. ORA 

troops had the older AK-47 Kalashnikov assault rifle. The Mujahideen called the AK-74 the 

"Kalakov". One of the Pashtun songs of the time had a line "A mother should not mourn a 

son killed by a Kalakov" This meant that her son died fighting Soviets. 
Page 246 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

None of the enemy's three objectives were achieved, but our losses 

were very heavy with about 250 KIA. The enemy spread rumors that 

they killed more than 2,000 of us. I don't know what the enemy 

losses were, but we saw blood trails and blood pools all over the 

former enemy positions. The enemy had done very hateful things in 

the villages they occupied. They defecated in the crockery, smashed 

pots and furniture, and destroyed villagers' food by cutting open sacks 

of wheat, flour, salt and sugar and pouring it out on the ground. They 

also pulled down walls, broke doors and ruined houses. 

COMMENTARY: The Soviets and DRA throughly planned this operation. The converging movement of three columns from three directions was a desirable operational maneuver since it left the initiative 

in the Soviets' hands and kept the Mujahideen off balance. However, 

once the Soviet/DRA force entered the green zone, the terrain and 

Mujahideen active defense split the communist force into a series of 

isolated pockets which the Mujahideen were able to contain. The 

Soviet/DRA force lost the momentum of the attack and were unable 

to regain it. The initiative passed to the Mujahideen. 

The Mujahideen planned their defense throughly. They conducted an active defense which incorporated tactical maneuver. They 

maintained a central reserve and had the advantage of interior lines. 

Terrain, well-constructed field fortifications and an aggressive 

defense enabled the Mujahideen to split the Soviet/DRA forces into 

isolated groups and stop their advance. 

The Soviets and DRA did little to win the hearts and minds of the 

populace outside of the areas they controlled. On the other hand, 

Mujahideen activity often endangered the lives and property of the 

populace. During the course of the war, the Soviets never controlled 

Baraki Barak, but they bombed and shelled it continually. Farming was 

disrupted and most of the population migrated to Pakistan or the cities. 
VIGNETTE 2 

DEFENDING AGAINST AN OFFENSIVE IN PAGHMAN 

by Tsaranwal Sher Habib 

In August 1982, the Soviet/DRA forces launched a search and 

destroy operation against Mujahideen bases in Paghman. There were 

two enemy columns. The' main column moved southwest from Kabul 

and then turned northwest onto the main highway to Paghman. Its 

mission was to destroy resistance bases in the center, south and southwest of the Paghman area. The other, smaller column moved north 

from Kabul and then turned northwest. Its mission was to block 

Mujahideen escape routes along the northeastern edge of Paghman 

through Ghaza and Zarshakh villages (Map 10-2- Ghaza).4 

Initially, the movement of the two columns in opposite directions 

deceived the Mujahideen as to their enemy's real intention. 

Nevertheless, when the Mujahideen saw the main column heading 

toward the city of Paghman and its western and southern suburbs, 

they quickly occupied prepared defensive positions and readied themselves for battle. However, the Mujahideen lost track of the northernmost column. It came through the town of Karez-e Mir and moved 

undetected to take up positions on the hills between Somochak and 

Ghaza. From the hill positions, the enemy column commanded the 

main road from Paghman to the Shamali plain north of Kabul. 

The next morning I dispatched two escorts to take one of my 

wounded Mujahideen to Shamali for treatment. As they moved 

through the Somochak Valley, they were ambushed and the escorts 

were killed. The local Mujahideen from Somochak village went to 

investigate and discovered that Soviet troops had occupied the ridge 

overlooking the village. The Somochak Mujahideen attacked the ridge, 

but the Soviets were too strong to be overrun. Other Mujahideen in 

the area began to discover the enemy presence. Mujahideen in the 

village bases of Qala-e Hakim and Isakhel and in the valley base of 

Dara-e Zargar joined together. I took some 30 or 40 Mujahideen onto 

Tsaranwal (Attorney) Sher Habib commanded the lbrahimkhel Front north of the city of 

Paghman. His primary AO extended from Paghman east and northeast to Kabul (some 20 

kilometers). [Map sheet 2786, 2886]. 

4 The forces on the main axis were probably from the Soviet 1 08th Motorized Rifle 

Division, while ORA forces were probably from the 8th Infantry Division, 37th Commando 

Brigade and 15th Tank Brigade. The forces on the northern axis were probably from the 

Soviet 1 03rd Airborne Division. 
Page 248. The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

N 

i 

~ .... · 

/ 

/ 

/ 

GHAZA 

..__ _ _._ 0 _ __._ _ ___, 2KM GHAZA 

Map 10·2 
Chapter 10, Vignette 2 Page 249 

the high ground at Loy Baghal Ghar. The Somochak Mujahideen reinforced their positions near the village. The Zarshakh and .Ghaza 

Mujahideen moved to cut the LOC of the Soviet force east of the 

Torghonday hills. We .had encircled the Soviet force in the northeast 

sector with about 100 Mujahideen. 

The fighting went on against the DRA/Soviet forces throughout 

Paghman. We kept the northern Soviet blocking force pinned down, 

exchanging fire with the Soviet troops for two nights and three days. 

We commanders met and decided to attack and eliminate the Soviet 

force on the afternoon of the third day. .we launched the attack from 

the west while the eastern Mujahideen contained the enemy. Our 

progress was slow, however, since we did not have enough support 

weapons. We had Kalashnikovs, .303 Enfields; a few RPG-7s and some 

60mm mortars with a small stock of ammunition. We needed heavy 

machine guns, 82mm mortars and rockets. As we Mujahideen were 

closing to the Soviet positions, some 14 Soviet helicopters, including 

gunships, arrived over the battlefield and began gun runs against us. 

We sustained heavy casualties and broke off the attack. The transport 

helicopters landed and began lifting off the Soviet troops and flew 

them away to Kabul. We had won the fight, but we suffered 23 KIA 

and many others WIA in the three-day battle. 

CoMMENTARY: The Soviet/DRA force did an effective job initially 

in disguising their objective and managing to move their northern 

column while eluding Mujahideen surveillance. The northern column 

effectively performed a surprise approach march and quietly occupied 

necessary terrain. The northern column was organized to block 

Mujahideen escape routes and so was lightly equipped. It was 

battalion-sized or smaller. It seized and occupied its initial position, 

but made no effort to expand that position so that it could achieve 

its objective of completely blocking Mujahideen escape routes. 

Further, once it disclosed its presence by firing on the litter party, it 

made no attempt to seize the initiative, but remained passively in the 

defense. Coordination between the northern column and the main 

column was lacking since the main column seemed unable or uninterested in aiding the northern column despite their close proximity. 

The Mujahideen reaction was excellent. They quickly took up positions on commanding high ground overlooking the Soviet positions and 

sealed-the area, trapping the Soviet force. However, the Mujahideen 

lacked long-range heavy weapons, so they could not exploit the advantage that their dominant terrain gave them. The Soviets were in range 
Page 250 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

of the bulk of Mujahideen weapons only during the Mujahideen 

assault. The Soviet helicopter strike effectively countered this assault. 

Soviet helicopter gunships were not as effective at night. Perhaps the 

Mujahideen assault would have had a better chance if the attack were 

launched at dusk or before dawn. 

Mujahideen use of battlefield maneuver was commendable. They 

offset much of their disadvantage in fire power, took dominant terrain 

and attack positions, seized the initiative from the Soviets by trapping 

them and forced the Soviets to stage a rescue by hazarding helicopters. 

All of this was due to effective Mujahideen maneuver. If the 

Mujahideen had some anti-aircraft weapons, they could have bloodied 

the Soviet force badly. As it was, Mujahideen maneuver prevented the 

success of the Soviet/DRA offensive and decided the outcome of the 

battle in the Mujahideen's favor. 
VIGNETTE 3 

BATTLE FOR KAMA 

by Abdul Baqi Balots 

The Kama area, located northeast of J alalabad, is approximately 

87 square kilometers in area. It is bordered in the west by the Kunar 

River, in the south by the Kabul River and in the north and east by 

mountains. It is a large, well-irrigated green zone which was densely 

populated before the war. The Mujahideen in the area were all locals 

defending their home turf. In February 1983, I commanded a group of 

35 men in my village of Sarna Garay (one kilometer east of the town of 

Kama). We had Enfield and G35 bolt-action rifles and a few 

Kalashnikovs. We lacked the capability to launch major attacks,. but 

conducted hit and run actions. We did not have a base in the mountains, but lived in the village. There were similar units in the other 

villages in. the area. The Kama District Mujahideen were very fragmented and we had no contact with many groups in the area and so 

we couldn't help each other. The Soviets could deal with us piecemeal. 

We Mujahideen did not have a common contingency plan to deal with 

the Soviets when they came in force to kill us all. And even if we had 

such a plan, at that time our communications were primitive and most 

communications were done with messengers. 

The Soviets were close at hand. The Soviet "Thunder" unit6 was 

stationed in Samarkhel to the east of Jalalabad. They crossed the 

Kunar River and established a base south of the Tirana Ghashe on 

the plain (Map 10-3 - Kama). Then at dawn on 15 February 1983, 20 

to 25 of their helicopters landed troops in the mountains north and 

northeast of Kama.· The helicop~ers landed at Mashingan Ghar, Spinki 

Abdul Baqi Balots was a Hezb-e lslami (HIH) commander in the Kama area east of 

Jalalabad. Before the communist takeover, he was a student in the tenth grade of high 

school.· School authorities were forcing him to join the Communist Youth Organization. His 

father advised him not to join but to fight. He left school and joined the Mujahideen and 

fought through to the end. [Map sheets 3085 and 3185]. · 

5 The US M1917 Springfield Rifle which Springfield Armory produced for the British Army 

in World War I. The Mujahideen called them the G3 rifle. 

6 The ''Thunder'' unit was the 66th Separate Motorized Rifle Brigade. The Mujahideen 

called it the Thunder unit because it was a reinforced unit designed for counterinsurgency . 

. It had three motorized rifle battalions, an air assault battalion, a tank battalion, an artillery 

howitzer battalion, a MRL battalion, a material support battalion, a reconnaissance company and support troops. 
Page 252 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

z.---
Chapter 1 0, Vignette 3 Page 253 

Ghar, Dergi ·Ghar, Wut Ghar, Cokay Baba Ghar, Kacay Ghar, and 

Tirana Ghashe. The troops on the high ground sealed off our escape . 

into the mountains. At the same time, a detachment from the Soviet 

base at Samarkhel crossed the Kabul River to establish the southern 

part of the cordon. The main Soviet ground sweep started from Tirana 

Ghar moving to the east. 

We woke up to the sounds of helicopters and the lights of flares. We 

were facing a large force-possibly bigger than a regiment. I was 

saying my morning prayers when my guard approached and said 

"Commander, things look different this morning." I told him, "Don't 

worry, our lives are in the hand of God, not the Russians. We are 

destined to die on the day that is destined for us. It will not be pushed 

backward or forward." The helicopters· continued to fly over, wave 

after wave. " 

I saw a group of Mujahideen from the village of Mastali running 

away between Wut Ghar and Dergi Ghar. As they moved along the 

road, the Soviets on the high ground began shooting at them. I saw 

two of them go down. Gulrang was one and the son of Ghulam 

Sarwar the driver, was the other. Both were killed. The rest escaped 

into the mountains. 

We were close to the river, so we moved to the south of Kama 

where there is a bushy area and a mosque. We took refuge and hid 

ourselves there. Everything was quiet in our area for hours. My 

Mujahideen came to me and asked what was happening. It was now 

1100 hours. I said that the Russians would come when they would 

come, but we were hungry now. I approached a village for food. 

Someone came out and told me not leave the hideout since enemy 

tanks were five minutes from the village. I returned to the hideout. 

Around 1400 hours, another villager came and told me to leave 

the bushy area since the Russians were going to set it on fire to 

flush us out. He said eight tanks and APCs were approaching the 

area. We moved to the edge of the wooded area where there is a 

natural berm and took up positions there. We had one RPG-7 with 

three rounds, two Kalashnikovs, and some Marko Chinese bolt-action 

rifles. 7 The wooded area was also full of civilians who were hiding 

from the Soviets, so we felt an obligation to defend them and the 

wooded area and prevent the Soviets from setting it on fire. I saw 

BMPs moving toward us. They stopped short of and bypassed the 

wooded area and turned toward Kama. It was now 1500 hours. 

7 Marko is the Chinese copy of the German M-88 Mauser. 
Page 254 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

When we were scattered throughout the wooded area, I received a 

message from the rest of my men who described their location and 

asked me to join them since the air assault troops were moving to 

Mashingan village. I took my 12 men with me and we moved to join 

the rest of my men. The Tawdo Obo highway bridge was close to our 

village. I joined the rest of my men at that bridge which was near the 

village. We decided that the Soviets coming from the high ground 

would cross over this bridge, so we took positions on both sides of the 

road leading to this bridge. As we were taking our positions, a group 

of Soviets moving toward us opened fire on us. 

A bullet hit the butt of the rifle of my cousin, the son of my maternal uncle, and smashed it. "What will I do now?" he asked. "I will 

find you another," I stated. As I approached the road, I saw my friend 

Habib Noor some 30 meters to my right shooting at something. I hit 

the ground and saw that he was shooting at two Soviets. He killed 

them both. "Get their Kalashnikovs, Commander" he yelled at me. I 

sprinted across the road and grabbed a Kalashnikov, but the rifle's 

carrying strap was around the corpse's body and I couldn't get it 

loose. I saw a lot of Soviets coming at me and they were all firing 

(they put ten bullet holes through my baggy trousers). Bullets were 

flying all around me. I kept tugging, but the rifles wouldn't budge, so 

I abandoned trying to get the Kalashnikovs. I had an RPK-3 antitank hand grenade. I wanted to use it, even though there was no 

tank, to make some noise to distract their attention so I could get 

away. I threw the grenade. After four seconds, it exploded and made 

a big noise and I got away to where my friend Habib N oor was. Habib 

Noor told me that, unless we crossed the stream to the north, we 

would not be able to engage the Soviets. He told me that since I am 

short and he is tall, I had a better chance of making it across unobserved and I should cross. I told him " I am your commander, but I 

am under your command now." I ran across and jumped but landed 

directly into the stream. "Oh Allah," I cried "you have killed me without dignity." Then I made a big jump, I don't know'how since even a 

tank can't clear it, but I did and got out of the stream. Even today, 

when I pass that spot, I measure it. I took up a position and fired my 

Kalashnikov. I killed the Soviet facing Habib N oor. Habib shouted 

that Soviets were still in the nearby houses of Shna Kala village. I 

moved down the path from the bridge to get at the Soviets. I 

approached that position, threw hand grenades at it and fired my 

Kalashnikov. Everything was quiet after that. I looked back across 

the road. Habib Noor was standing. I told him to get down. He 
Chapter 10, Vignette 3 Page 255 

remained standing, cursing the Soviets and demanding their surrender in Pashtu. At that moment, I saw a light in his stomach. He was 

hit and fell down. I recrossed the road to get his body. I could see the 

bodies of Soviets in the stream. When I reached Habib, he died. He 

had only five rounds left. He was my good friend and was not even 

from our village. He was from the Ahmadzai tribe, which live away 

from this area. 

Fighting went on all around us. I heard shooting from everywhere, but I only knew what was going on around me. Shaykh 

Bombar from my unit came up to help. He had the only other 

Kalashnikov in my group. He had given his Kalashnikov to another 

guy and taken the RPG and one rocket and moved to my position. 

As he came, I saw tanks moving toward us through the fields 

from the Shna Kala village. The sun was setting. The air assault 

troops had come down from the mountains and were advancing. 

Tanks were coming from the west. We wanted to carry Habib Noor's 

body to Rangin Kala village and from there it would be easier to 

take his body out of the area. I took the RPG and rocket from Shaykh 

Bombar. We wrapped Habib Noor's body in my tsadar-the allpurpose cloth that we all carry and wear. Then I shot the RPG at a 

tank. The tanks were out of range and so the rocket landed among 

the infantry. The tanks and infantry promptly stopped, realizing that 

we had antitank weapons~ Their halt enabled us to break contact and 

take Habib N oor's body out of the area to Gerdab village-about six 

kilometers further to the east. There, I rented a camel and we took 

Habib's body to his family at a refugee camp in Pakistan. We buried 

him in the refugee cemetery in Peshawar, even though his home was 

in Paktia Province. His family is doing okay now since one of his sons 

has a job in Saudi Arabia. 

COMMENTARY: At this point, the Mujahideen effort was uncoordinated 

and put the villagers at direct risk. The Mujahideen were poorly 

trained and their lack of cooperation put the area at risk. Their 

personal bravery and motivation, however, turned the entire area into 

a defensive zone that slowed the Soviet effort. Later, as the 

Mujahideen were better armed, had better communications and began 

to coordinate their actions, they were more effective against the Soviet 

and DRA forces. However, by that time most of the civilians were 

killed or had left the area for refugee camps in Pakistan. 

The Soviet effort was well planned and used air assault forces effectively to seal the area. However, their cordon enclosed a large area 
Page 256 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

which they were unable to effectively sweep. They needed to break the 

cordoned area into manageable segments and sweep those in turn. 

Instead, their sweep was uncoordinated and large sectors of the green 

zone were never checked. This green zone is full of villages and fields 

and requires several days to clear. The Soviets were reluctant to maintain a cordon at night, so they hurried through the sweep and missed 

the bulk of the disorganized Mujahideen. 
VIGNETTE 4 

DEFENDING AGAINST A CORDON AND SEARCH OPERATION IN 

PARWAN 

by Commander Haji Abdul Qader 

In late January 1984, Soviet forces launched a multi-divisional8 

cordon and search operation in Parwan and Kapisa Provinces. The 

aim of the operation was to destroy the Mujahideen forces across 

a wide area stretching from the Charikar-Salang highway in the 

west, to Mahmoud-e Raqi in the east and Bagram in the south 

(Map 10-4 - Parwan). This area is covered with villages and cut by 

irrigation canals to the orchards, vineyards and farms of this fertile 

area. There were dozens of Mujahideen bases in this area that were 

affiliated with major resistance factions. Most of the Mujahideen 

were not in their bases but split up into hundreds of small units 

living in the villages during the winter. 

On 24 January columns of Soviet and DRA tank and motorized 

rifle forces moved from Kabul, Bagram, Jabal-e Seraj and 

Gulbahar (at the mouth of the Punjsher Valley) to establish a wide 

cordon around the green zone on both sides of the Panjsher River. 

The cordon and sweep operation was backed with extensive air 

support. The Soviets and DRA hoped to trap· the· thousands of 

Mujahideen in this area and to destroy their base camps. The 

Mujahideen reinforced their defenses along the major roads in 

the area. The Mujahideen expected enemy advances along these 

axes· of advance and decided to block them to gain time to break 

out from encirclement, 

During the first day, the Soviet/DRA forces deployed and established blocking positions reinforced by tanks, APCs and artillery. At 

dawn on 25 January, they mounted attacks from several points, 

including Charikar, Jabal-e Seraj, Gulbahar, Mahmoud-e Raqi, Qalae N aw and Bagram. 

Haji Abdul Qader was a commander in the Bagram area. The authors have consulted 

other documents to add detail to his account. A former teacher, Abdul Qader hails from the 

Sayghani village just six kilometers northeast of the Bagram air base. His group was initially affiliated with the HIK faction. He later joined Sayyaf's IUA faction. [Map sheets 2886 

and 2887]. / 

8 Most probably the Soviet 1 03rd Airborne Division and the 1 08th Motorized Rifle Diyision 

and the ORA 8th lnfanfantry Division and 37th Commando Brigade. 
Page 258 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

KABUL 

• 

PARWAN 

Map 10-4 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6KM 

I I I I I I 

N 

1 
Chapter 1 0, Vignette 4 Page 259 

The Action Near Bagram · l . 

At that time, HajiAbdul Qader commanded some 200 Mujahideen 

in the Bagram District. His permanent base was co-located with a JIA 

base under Commander Shahin at Deh Babi near Abdullah-e Bu:rj. His 

other base was at Ashrafi near ·charikar. His group was a mobile 

group and spent most of its time fighting around Bagram or combined 

with other Mujahideen units in Parwan and Kapisa Provinces. 

During the Soviet cordon and search operation in Parwan and 

Kapisa Provinces, Haji Abdul Qader's unit, along with a 150 strong 

unit under Commander Sher Mohammad, was to defend a line 

north of the main Bagram-Mahmoud-e Raqi road between Abdullahe Burj and Qala-e Beland. To the west, HIH faction Mujahideen were 

blocking the Bagram-Charikar axis, and on the east flank, JIA 

units were covering the area on the left bank of Panjsher River 

(Map 10-4 - Parwan). 

The night before the attack, Soviet and DRA artillery pounded 

· Mujahideen positions from fire bases that they established around the 

area. They attacked swiftly and engaged the Mujahideen on all axes 

with infantry and armor or pinned them down with heavy artillery and 

air strikes. Their air force intensified the pressure on the second day 

as ground attack aircraft and helicopter gunships supported the attacking columns. Mujahideen communications were seriously disrupted 

and their tactical coordination dropped off dramatically. 

Haji Qader ordered his men to occupy prepared blocking positions. 

They were armed with Kalashnikovs, some 15 RPG-7 anti-tank 

grenade launchers, three 82mm and one 75mm recoilless rifles, three 

82mm mortars, two DShK machine guns and one ZGU-1 heavy 

machine gun. They also had a few 107mm surface-to-surface rockets. 

Haji Qader deployed all his anti-tank weapons ·forward and emplaced 

his heavy machine guns on the high ground behind the front line. Haji 

Qader split his force and rotated them in the defensive positions. The 

Mujahideen who were not manning the positions constituted the 

reserve and concentrated in Baltukhel and Sayadan, some two to three 

kilometers to the northwest. Qa:der's supplies and aid station were 

also located in this area. 

At dawn on January 25, opposing artillery pounded Mujahideen 

positions for about two hours. The intensity of fire kept the resistance 

fighters down inside their bunkers. Some Mujahideen took cover in 

the ruins and terrain folds and ditches. The artillery fire was accompanied by air strikes and gun runs by helicopter gunships. The 

Mujahideen did not expose themselves during the fire strikes. A little 
Page 260 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

after sunrise, opposing infantry, backed by tanks and BMPs, launched 

the attack. The attacking columns moved confidently, assuming that 

the artillery fire and air strikes had destroyed the Mujahideen resistance. However, as they came within range, Mujahideen anti-tank 

weapons and machine guns opened up. They caught the attackers by 

surprise and forced the infantry and tanks to fall back. The attackers 

were not very aggressive, probably as a result of their fear of mines 

and anti-tank weapons. 

During the first two days, the Soviets repeated their attack several times following the same scenario: artillery fire and air strikes 

would hammer Mujahideen positions. Then the infantry and tanks 

would advance until they were stopped with withering fire at close 

quarter. They would then fall back. The tanks that were following the 

infantry were very slow to advance, particularly when some tanks 

were hit and the infantry suffered casualties. At the same time, the 

infantry would lose heart after being hit by withering defensive fire 

and would fall back to take cover behind the tanks. 

As the operation continued, two factors worked against the 

Mujahideen. First, the enemy penetrated Mujahideen positions to considerable depth on some axes. This raised the fear of being encircled 

by flanking units. Second, as the Mujahideen began to understand the 

scope and intent of the enemy operation, they began to escape out of 

the enemy cordon. This weakened the Mujahideen positions and aided 

the attacker. Some adjacent units left their forward positions at the 

Qala-e Belend sector and fell back. This forced Haji Abdul Qader to 

withdraw his force on the third day to his planned second line of 

defense on high ground about one kilometer north of the forward 

defensive positions. For the next three days, the Soviets tried to break 

·through Qader's positions on the high ground. It was even tougher 

going for them. They used the same method of assault with the 

infantry leading and the tanks following-and with the same results; 

Toward the end of the week, hundreds of Mujahideen used the 

Qala-e Beland sector as an escape route to their mountain bases in 

Koh-e Safi in the south. The Mujahideen used a covered irrigation 

canal to sneak out of the area. Just north of the road near the Qala-e 

Naw bazaar, there is an east-west irrigation canal. Several northsouth feeder canals intersect this main canal. At several points, the 

canal is bridged and covered to allow vehicles to cross. At these points, 

the main and feeder canals are covered. In winter, the irrigation system is dry and provided suitable escape passages. During the last 

nights of the operation, hundreds of Mujahideen escaped through the 
Chapter 1 0, Vignette 4 Page 261 

canals to Koh-e Safi. The attackers detected this exodus only toward 

the end of the operation and opened fire on some escapees. Haji Abdul 

Qader's men provided the rear guard and were the last to move out of 

the area after blocking the Q::1la-e Beland sector for one week. 

When the Soviets and DRA finally entered the area, thousands of 

Mujahideen had escaped. Haji Qader claims that the Soviets only captured about 20 armed Mujahideen and that the Soviet commander in 

. charge of the operation was reprimanded for his failure. He states that 

the Soviets used several divisions, made elaborate plans and fired 

thousands of artillery shells and flew hundreds of combat missions 

without achieving much. Haji Abdul Qader's group destroyed 11 tanks 

and APCs and inflicted dozens of casualties on the enemy. His losses 

included seven KIA and 18 WIA. Most of his casualties came from helicopter gunships. 

CoMMENTARY: Although the Soviet/DRA forces overran many 

Mujahideen bases in Parwan and Kapisa Provinces, they failed to 

destroy the Mujahideen forces which slipped out of the cordon or went 

underground. The Mujahideen enjoyed freedom of movement and 

maneuver in a large area until the Soviets and DRA finally penetrated. The Soviet/DRA encirclement was very porous-as was the case 

with so many large-scale cordon and search operations of the warmaking it impos·sible to trap Mujahideen forces. The poor performance 

by the Soviet infantry and tanks against a determined enemy cost 

them dearly. Instead of mounting coordinated infantry-tank assaults, 

the Soviet forces seemed to use each element separately. While a combined action could minimize the vUlnerabilities of each element, a disjointed action maximized the vulnerability of both elements in the face 

of a resolute defense. 

The Mujahideen built a series of covered bunkers near their prepared fighting positions and these bunkers enabled them to survive air 

strikes and intense artillery barrages. Most ofthis massive Soviet fire 

destroyed civilians, houses and the agricultural system. 

Lack of operational coordination among the Mujahideen groups 

cost the resistance some major operational achievements. While the 

Soviets failed to capture large numbers of Mujahideen or to destroy a 

major Mujahideen grouping, the resistance missed a major opportunity to inflict heavy losses on the Soviets. The Mujahideen focused on 

escape, when they had many chances to bloody their enemy by resisting on consecutive defensive positions in the area and by cutting the 

Soviet withdrawal routes once they were inside Mujahideen territory. 
Page 262 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

However, this was not the first nor the last battle for the resistance. 

They were fighting a war of attrition and refused to become decisively 

engaged in their home area where the civilians and villages would bear 

the brunt ofthe damage. In this area, the civilian population remained 

in their homes throughout the·war. 

Tactically, the Mujahideen massed the fires of their light anti-tank 

weapons at close range. Several anti-tank gunners would fire at the 

same target simultaneously. This greatly increased their probability of 

hit, prevented effective counter fires, demoralized vehicle crews, created confusion among their enemy's tank and motorized columns and 

prevented the employment of accurate, Soviet indirect artillery fire 

into the area. Heavy machine guns usually backed up the anti-tank 

gu~ners to separate the dismounted infantry from the armored vehicles, keep the vehicle crews buttoned up so that their vision was 

obscured, and provided covering fire should the anti-tank gunners 

need to leave their positions. 
VIGNETIE 5 

LAST STAND ON THE ISLANDS OPPOSITE GERDI KATS 

by Mawlawi Shukur Yasini 

On 24 March 1984, the Soviets sent a large force into Kama 

District. I was in Peshawar, Pakistan at that time. The Soviet force 

was not just the 66th Brigade, but also included a force which came 

from fighting in Laghman Province. The entire force had some 200-

300 tanks and APCs in it. I had two groups of Mujahideen in the 

village of Merzakhel. One group was commanded by Baz Mohammad 

and the ·other. by my nephew Shapur. Baz Mohammad's group 

managed to get out of Merzakhel before the Soviets arrived but 

Shapur's group of 25 was trapped. The Soviets landed troops on the 

high ground overlooking Merzakhel and their tanks were moving in 

from the west (Map;l0-5- Gerdi). Across the river, Soviet tanks were 

moving. through Gerdi Kats. The Mujahideen moved south from 

Merzakhel to the low, flat islands of the Kabul River between Gerdi 

Kats and Merzakhel. These islands are covered with a low-scrub 

which offers some concealment but not cover. As they reached the 

islands, the Soviet infantry in Gerdi Kats began to cross the river 

with inflatable rubber rafts. The Soviets also moved a tank into the 

river to cross over, but it quickly became stuck. Fairoz, a Mujahideen 

machine gunner, sunk the rafts with PK machine gun fire. The 

Soviet infantry sunk into the river and several drowned~ The Soviets 

also had two dogs on the rafts. The dogs swam back to Gerdi Kats. 

Mujahideen fire from the islands pinned down the Soviets and defeated their crossing attempt. 

However, at the same time, the enemy brought pressure on my 

group from both sides and only a few of my men managed to slip 

away. They were exposed on the low-scrub islands and I lost 11 KIA, 

two WIA and two captured. The two captured were Awozubellah and 

Mawlawi Shukur Yasini is a prominent religious leader in Nangrahar Province. He is from 

the village of Gerdab in Kama District northeast of Jalalabad. During the war, he was a 

major commander of the Khalis group (HIK). Later, he joined NIFA. During the war, he 

took television journalist Dan Rather to his base in Afghanistan. He also accompanied 

Congressman Charles Wilson of Texas into Afghanistan several times. During most of the 

war he was active in his own area fighting the ORA in Jalalabad and the Soviet 66th 

Separate Motorized Rifle Brigade at Samarkhel. He became a member of the Nangrahar 

governing council after collapse of the communist regime--a position he held until the 

Taliban advance in September 1996. [Map sheet 3185]. 
Page 264 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

N 

0 

-II) 

cc, a:.,.... 

we. 

e,:,~ 
Chapter 10, Vignette 5 Page 265 

Nazar Mohammad. The Soviets tortured them, but they did not 

break. They continually claimed that crazy Mawlawi Shukur forced 

them to fight. Eventually, they were released. ·shapur and Fairoz 

were wounded. Villagers took them to safe houses and kept moving 

them to hide them from the Soviets, who searched the area for 

six days. We could not retrieve our Mujahideen dead due to enemy 

pressure. Many of their remains were torn apart by foxes and jackals. Mter a week or so, we buried what remains we could find. The 

Soviets paid a 20,000 Mghanis reward for recovering their dead from 

the river. When I saw the condition of my dead, I banned Mghans 

from helping the Soviets recover their dead. "Let the crows of this 

country have their fair share." 

CoMMENTARY: The Kama Mujahideen usually tried to avoid the 

Soviet cordon and search of their district by fleeing 'into the mountains, but the Soviets habitually used heliborne forces to block their 

escape routes. This meant that the Kama Mujahideen fought the 

Soviets within the green zone. However, the Kama green zone had a 

road network within it and the Soviets could bring their combat vehicles into the green zone where their firepower gave the Soviets a 

tremendous advantage. The Soviets used the same mountain LZs 

over and over again, but the Mujahideen made no attempt to mine 

the LZs or post antiaircraft weapons overlooking these sites on a 

permanent basis. In this action, the Mujahideen were surprised and 

unable to escape into the mountains and forced to fight an uneven 

battle. If they had contested the known LZs, the outcome should 

have been less costly for the Mujahideen. 

Crossing shallow desert rivers looks fairly safe, but can be treacherous. On the 31st of March 1879, the British Army lost 47 men, 

effectively a squadron of the lOth Hussars, crossing the Kabul River 

some 35 kilometers to the west of this Soviet crossing attempt. The 

Kabul River looks shallow and slow-moving, but it has fast, strong 

undercurrents that can quic~ly overpower the unwary soldier. 

9 Colonel H. B. Hanna, The Second Afghan War, 1878-79-80, Its Causes, Its Conduct, 

and Its Consequences, Volume II, Westminister: Archibald Constable and Co., Ltd., 1904, 

282-287. . 
Page 266 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

CHAPTER COMMENTARY 

The Soviet/DRA cordon and search usually involved a number of 

forces in a combined arms battle or operation. The Mujahideen who 

had the best success surviving these did so because their actions 

were centrally. coordinated, they had developed contingency plans to 

deal with them and they had built redundant field fortifications to 

slow the Soviet/DRA advance and fragment their efforts. The betterprepared Mujahideen always retained a central reserve and were 

adept at counterattacking the flanks of the attacker. The Mujahideen who had the most difficulty with cordon and search operations 

were usually separate groups who had little or no ties to a central 

Mujahideen planning authority, had worked out no contingency 

plans and had taken no steps to fortify the area. 
CHAPTER 11 

DEFENDING BASE CAMPS 

Although guerrilla forces' would like to retain the initiative and 

never have to defend, there are times when the guerrilla force must 

defend. The guerrilla can conduct a mobile defense or a positional 

defense. Guerrilla mobile defenses are usually rear-guard actions 

designed to preserve the main force or draw the attacker into a 

prepared ambush. Guerrilla positional defenses are normally associated with the defense of a pass, bridge, populated area, base camp or 

supply depot. The odds are stacked against the defending guerrilla. 

The attacker has the initiative, armored vehicles, air power, the 

preponderance of artillery and overwhelming firepower. The guerrilla 

tries to match this through use of terrain and prepared defenses. 

In the Soviet-Mghan war, the Mujahideen spent a great deal of 

time and energy in the defense. Mujahideen defense was associated 

with Mujahideen logistics. Early in the war, Mujahideen logistics 

requirements were primarily concerned with ammunition resupply 

and medical evacuation of the wounded. The rural population willingly provided food and shelter to the Mujahideen, since the 

Mujahideen were mostly local residents. The Soviets decided to attack 

Mujahideen logistics by forcing the rural population off of their farms 

into refugee camps in Pakistan and Iran or into the cities of 

Mghanistan. They did this by bombing and attacking villages, scattering mines across the countryside, destroying crops, killing livestock, poisoning wells and destroying irrigation systems. The 

Mujahideen, accustomed to living off the good will of the rural population, were now forced to transport rations as well as ammunition 

from Pakistan and Iran into Mghanistan. The Mujahideen created a 

series of supply depots and forward supply points to provision their 

forces. These depots and supply points had to be defended. The 

Mujahideen also controlled key passes, which forced the Soviets and 

DRA to either withdraw cut-off forces or resupply them by air. The 

Mujahideen defended these key passes zealously. 
Page 268 The Other Side ofthe Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

The rugged terrain of Mghanistan aided Mujahideen defenses. 

Defensive positions were another key component of the Mujahideen 

defens. Mujahideen built rugged, roofed bunkers which could withstand artillery and airstrikes. The Mujahideen built elaborate 

camouflaged defensive shelters and fighting positions connected 

with interlocking fields .of fire, communications trenches, and redundant firing positions. The Mujahideen learned to rotate defensive 

· forces through a position to lessen the effects of combat fatigue and 

psychological stress. 

What follows are examples of successful and unsuccessful 

Mujahideen base camp defenses against ground attack or a combination of ground and air assault. 

\ 

Afghanistan 

Chapter 11 

Incidents 
VIGNETTE 1 

SOVIET OFFENSIVE THROUGH SURKH Ruo 

by Commander Mohammad Asef 

During 1978-1979, the heavily-populated Surkh Rud District 

was a hotbed of resistance against the communist regime and a 

base for Mujahideen actions in Nangrahar Province. Following the 

Soviet invasion, one of the early major Soviet operations was 

conducted against Mujahideen bases in Surkh Rud. There are two 

main roads running northeast to southwest in Surkh Rud Valley 

(Map 11-1 - Chaharbagh). Highway 134 runs through Chaharbagh, 

Watapur, Surkh Rud (the district headquarters), Khayrabad, and 

Fatehabad. The other road runs along the bottom of Tor Ghar 

mountain. It passes through Darunta, Katapur, Balabagh, and then 

follows the Surkh Rud River to the west. Most of the Mujahideen 

bases were located along these two roads and most Mujahideen bases 

also maintained hideouts in the canyons of the Tor Ghar mountain. 

My home town of Bazetkhel was located between the two roads, but 

my base was just to the east of Highway 134. 

The Soviet forces concentrated in Jalalabad in May 1980. We were 

tipped off that the Soviets planned to advance along the two roads, 

destroying Mujahideen bases as they went. Their southern column 

would swing north at Fatehabad to seal the pocket. I left my base at 

Chaharbagh and went to my village at Bazetkhel, where I had 80 men. 

I took 50 of these men north into a Tor Ghar mountain canyon. We 

intended to stop the Soviet column on the northern route before they 

reached the main Mujahideen base at Katapur. ·We also hoped to buy 

enough time to allow the civilians to escape into the mountains. When 

the column approached, my force engaged them and we stopped the 

column. The Soviets dismounted and began moving aggressively into 

the mountains. They were a bit too aggressive and our fire cut them 

down. The Soviets were badly bloodied. The Soviets responded by calling in massive artillery fire on my positions. When night fell, I pulled 

my force further up the canyon to the mountain ridge and then crossed 

over into the next canyon to the west. We moved down the canyon and 

into the town of Katapur. 

Mohammad Asef was initially a Hezbi-lslami (HIH) commander until1984 when he joined 

NIFA. He was in high school when the communists came to power. He graduated from 

school and then joined the resistance. He is from Bazetkhel in Surkh Rud District southwest of Jalalabad in Nangrahar Province. [Map sheet 3085]. 
Page 270 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

<0 

:I: U') 

z.-- ~ T"" .... aJ . 

T"" a: T"" 

c:( c.. ... :I: as 

c:( :::!!: N 

:I: 

0 

0 
Chapter 11, Vignette 1 Page 271 

At Katapur, the local Mujahideen told us that Soviet troops 

had chased the civilians into the mountains just north of Katapur 

and killed many of them. During the fighting near Katapur, the 

Soviets had left two of their dead behind. The Mujahideen expected 

that the Soviets would return for their dead. My Mujahideen joined 

other Mujahideen and we went to defend a canyon to the north of 

Katapur. We laid an ambush on the high ground. Soon, a Soviet 

detachment appeared looking for their dead. We opened up on the 

Soviets and they left seven more dead behind. However, they retaliated on the villagers and massacred civilians and even animals in 

Balabagh and Katapur arid then moved on to Fatehabad. The Soviets 

could not dislodge the Mujahideen from the mountains and could not 

find us in the valley, so they killed everything in sight. They established three bases-at Balabagh, Fatehabad and Sultan Pur. The 

Soviets launched search-and-destroy missions from these bases 

against the adjacent villages. Many civilians had to flee west while 

Mujahideen detachments went to their hideouts in the Tor Ghar 

mountain. Mujahideen commanders calculate that the Soviets 

massacred some 1,800 people during 12 days in the Surkh Rud. Most 

of these were innocent civilians. The Soviets expected that they could 

readily flush out the Mujahideen. Their lack of success led to frustration and the Soviet soldiers ran amok-killing and looting. It was 

the first Soviet o'peration in the area. They came looking for U.S. and 

Chinese mercenaries and instead found frustration and an opportunity to murder and loot. 

CoMMENTARY: During this stage of the war, the Mujahideen lived in 

their own houses in the midst of the population. Their food, water and 

shelter was willingly supplied by the populace. As a result, many civilians died when the Soviets launched their operation. The large 

number of reported civilian deaths could be a result of lack of officers' 

control and unit discipline or deliberate policy. The apparent Soviet 

plan was to separate the guerrilla from the populace by forcing the 

populace out of the countryside. Later, most of the populace deserted 

their homes in this area and fled to refugee camps in Pakistan. 

This is too large an area to block and sweep as a single action and 

the Soviets failed to segment the area and clear it a piece at a time. 

This allowed many of the Mujahideen and civilians to escape the 

cordon. The Soviet emphasis on the primacy of the large operation 

instead of the well-executed tactical action worked to the Mujahideen 

advantage. Mujahideen command and control was fragmented and 
Page 272 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

worked through happenstance and chance encounters. Without 

advanced warning, the Mujahideen would probably have suffered 

much more in this sweep. 
VIGNETTE 2 

DEFENDING SURKHAB BASE CAMP 

by Haji Sayed Mohammad Hanif 

In 1980, the Mujahideen began establishing bases in the mountains near the village of Surkhab in Lowgar Province. There were 

perhaps 150 Mujahideen in the area belonging to several factions. 

Mawlawi Mohammad Yusuf of the ANLF, Mawlawi Mohammadin of 

the IRMA and small groups from JIA and IUA established bases 

there. My base was in the mountains east of Surkhab in a canyon 

called Durow. We had 82mm mortars, DShKs and RPG-7s. Early in 

the morning of the 5th of June 1980, a mixed DRNSoviet column 

came from Kabul and exited highway 157 at Pule-e Kandahari 

heading east. They were coming for us. They deployed their artillery 

and began shelling our bases. Most of the Mujahideen were in 

their villages at that time. They came out of their villages and occupied defensive positions while other Mujahideen joined them from 

their mountain bases. 

In order to block the advance of the enemy into our mountain 

bases, we occupied blocking positions on Spin Ghar mountain overlooking Dara village (Map 11-2 - Surkhab). Other Mujahideen occupied positions south ofDurow Canyon on Lakay Ghar mountain. Our 

original plan was to defend the forward slopes of Spin Ghar and 

Lakay Ghar. We set an ambush forward of our main defenses. It 

inflicted casualties but was eventually overwhelmed. Mter their 

artillery preparation, enemy tanks and infantry moved along the 

valley road from Korek and attacked Mujahideen positions at the 

canyon's western mouth. Fighting was heavy. This was our first 

experience fighting the Soviets. Their helicopters came in to evacu-. 

ate their dead and wounded. Our civilians suffered horribly. The 

people began leaving their homes and fleeing to the mountains. 

Fighting continued all day long, but the enemy was unable to break 

through the Mujahideen positions. · 

On the second day, there were fewer Mujahideen fighting, as 

some had left the area overnight. The enemy firing kept tremendous 

pressure on the remaining Mujahideen and many had to withdraw 

from their fighting positions. There is a covered approach to Spin 

Ghar mountain from the north using the Tobagi plain. This plain is 

Haji Sayed Mohammad Hanif is from Logar Province. [Map sheet 2885, vic grid 2577]. 
Page 274 Th e Other Side of th e M ountain· M · . ------- . UJahldeen Tactics in the S . . OVIet-Afghan . W ar 
Chapter 11, Vignette 2 Page 275 

higher than Surkhab village and it is easier to climb Spin Ghar 

mountain from the Tobagi plain than from the Surkhab Valley. I 

was climbing the mountain with two others carrying ammunition. I 

intended to climb over the mountain to ·the north face. As we 

reached halfway up the ridge, enemy aircraft flew over the area. The 

enemy usually marked their infantry positions for the aircraft by 

firing smoke or signal rockets. We saw rockets being fired. on the 

other side of the mountain. This meant that enemy infantry were on 

the other side of the mountain and were trying to encircle the 

Mujahideen bases by a flanking movement from the Tobagi plain. I 

had all our spare·ammunition with me and at that time ammunition 

was as precious to me as my faith. We climbed back down the mountain and saw that the other Mujahideen were retreatinginto their 

bases. The people of Surkhab came to the Mujahideen and demand- · 

ed that we move our bases lest Surkhab be invaded everyday. The 

Mullas had refused to move the bases earlier, but now they were 

panicked and hiding in caves. The people taunted them' with "You 

told us this was Jihad, but now you are trying to flee." Some of the 

Mullas came out, but everyone was still panicked. I had all of this 

ammunition and no one to help me move it. I thought of abandoning 

the ammunition and saving my skin, but then I thought how vital 

the ammunition was and what would happen if I was later called to 

account for my actions. 

Finally, a group of us decided to make a suicidal last stand and 

called for volunteers. Lieutenant Sharab, a DRA deserter, volunteered. We had suspected him earlier, but he proved himself now. 

Lieutenant Sharab said, "They are not used to mountains. It will take 

them a long time to climb them and they are afraid of these mountains. 

If you fire at them from one position, they will stop and return fire for 

a long time at that position." We fired mortars at the north slope and 

positioned some Mujahideen on the top of Spin Ghar mountain to draw 

fire. This was the turning point. All of a sudden, helicopter activity 

fell off and firing tapered off in the valley. We thought that it was a 

trick to make us believe that the fighting was over so the Mujahideen 

would come out of their hideouts and then they would take us. from 

behind. We did not expect that such a powerful enemy would abandon 

an almost certain victory and retire empty-handed. It was late afternoon when I saw civilians coming from Surkhab. They told us that the 

enemy had withdrawn. The enemy evidently did not want to have to 

fight to take the mountain. This was not our doing, but the hand of 

God. We lost 10 KIA and six WIA in my group. I do not know the casu-
Page 276 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

alties in other groups. All the wounded who could walk, walked to 

Pakistan for treatment. The other wounded were treated by local 

doctors. Doctors from Kabul hospitals would come to help us also. Dr. 

Abdur Rahman from a hospital in Kabul would often treat our wounded. I do not know what the enemy losses were, but they must have 

suffered a lot to quit on the brink of victory. 

COMMENTARY: The DRA/Soviets had the opportunity to attack· the 

eastern and western canyon mouths simultaneously. The Mujahideen 

defenses were oriented to the west. Even on the' second day, when the 

DRA/Soviets tried to envelop the Mujahideen position from the Tobagi 

plain, they did riot hook around the mountain, but tried to go over the 

mountain. The Mujahideen were used to the mountains, whereas the 

Soviets were not and their equipment was not designed for climbing in 

mountains. Later in the war, the Soviets issued better equipment for 

fighting in the mountains and began training their soldiers at mountain warfare sites. At this point, the non-nimble Soviets and the reluctant DRA were no match for the Mujahideen in mountain maneuver. 

They should have taken the canyon from both ends.. Further, if the 

DRA or Soviets had covertly moved some artillery spotters onto high 

ground before the offensive, they could have unhinged the Mujahideen 

defenses before they were established. 

The Soviets had not yet developed their air assault tactics for counterinsurgency. The mountain tops of Spin Ghar and Lakay Ghar can 

handle heliborne landings and the Mujahideen air defense posture was 

negligible at this point. A small Soviet force, reinforced with mortars, 

artillery spotters and forward air controllers and machine guns could 

have created havoc from the mountain tops. 
VIGNETTE 3 

FALL OF SURKHAB BASE CAMP 

by Haji Sayed Mohammad Hanif 

In early September 1983, we laid an ambush at Pul-e Khandari on 

Highway 157, the major road between Kabul and Gardez. At that 

time, Mujahideen ambushes were hurting the DRA/Soviet efforts to 

keep Gardez supplied. The enemy convoys always left Kabul in the 

morning. We would get into position in the morning and wait until 

afternoon. If no convoys had shown by afternoon, we would quit and 

go back to base or go take a nap in the villages. The enemy finally 

figured out that we were reacting to their pattern and changed their 

pattern. They started moving their convoys in the afternoon on the 

assumption that we Mujahideen would have abandoned the ambush 

sites, since it was long past time for the convoy to arrive. As usual, 

we set up our ambush in the morning and waited. No convoy came. 

We left the ambush site and, by "late afternoon, most of the 

Mujahideen had left the area. Then the column of some 180 trucks 

arrived. What Mujahideen were left in the village ran to the road and 

engaged the supply convoy which was hauling ammunition, fuel and 

food. We got part of the convoy and divided the booty among the 

Mujahideen groups that had representatives at the ambush. My 

group managed to capture some ammunition trucks, which we drove 

to our base near Surkhab in Durow Canyon. 

A few days later, a major enemy force moved against our base 

camps to retaliate for this attack. They kept the area under seige 

for eight days. We had a total of about 300 Mujahideen-from various 

groups in the area at this time. Our heavy weapons were DShK 

machine guns and mortars. We had expected some retaliation, so 

we had prepared defensive positions on the ridges on both sides 

of the canyon mouth and laid some antitank mines in the area. We 

also laid an antitank minefield on the trail to· the· Tobagi plain 

(Map 11-3 - Surkhab2). The enemy column came through Pule-e 

Kandahari. They attacked and lost some Soviet armored vehicles to 

mines on the northern and southern approaches to the canyon. 

Mujahideen fighting positions on the high ground overlooked these 

minefields, so we could fire on the advancing enemy as they tried to 

Haji Sayed Mohammad Hanif provided the previous vignette, [Mapsheet 2885, vic grid 

2577]. -
Page 278 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 
Chapter 11 , Vignette 3 Page 279 

get through the mines. This slowed the enemy, but we also took 

losses from their aerial bombardment. We held on and managed to 

stop the enemy advance. The enemy evacuated their damaged tanks 

and armored vehicles. 

Mter one week of fighting, the enemy reinforced his effort. Some 

of the Mujahideen had left since the enemy was stopped and 

they had to take care of their families. The enemy employed air 

assault forces, which they landed on the Tobagi plain and at 

Chinosar at the eastern mouth to our canyon. They had outflanked 

us. Now the enemy renewed his offensive with an attack against 

the western and eastern mouths of the canyon and over the Spin 

Ghar mountain. We could not hold and withdrew from our western 

positions on Spin Ghar and Lakay Ghar mountains. We torched the 

trucks that we had captured to prevent their recapture. The enemy 

reached our canyon village of Durow and found the burnt-out hulks. 

We moved east into the mountains and harrassed the enemy with 

mortar fire, but they now controlled our base camps. They destroyed 

what they could and left. As they left, they scattered mines in 

some areas. 

CoMMENTARY: By 1983, tp.e Soviets were using their air assault 

forces more aggressively, but still not landing them directly on the 

objeCtive. In this case, Soviet air assault forces landed on Tobagi 

plain and then climbed to the top of Spin Ghar mountain. By 1986, 

Soviet air assault forces would be landing directly on the objectives. 

The Mujahideen were tied to their bases and had to defend them. 

This logistic imperative provided some advantages· to the DRA and 

Soviets, who knew that the one way to get the Mujahideen to stay in 

an area where they could concentrate air power and artillery against 

them was to locate the Mujahideen logistics base and attack it. Still, 

the Soviets and DRA seldom did anything to "close the back door" to 

the base while they attacked it. Consequently, many Mujahideen 

lived to fight another day. Long range reconnaissance patrols, 

scatterable mines, helicopter-landed ambush forces and conventional 

forces in backstop positions are ways to prevent the escape of 

. guerrilla forces .. 

The Mujahideen appear to have done little to improve their 

defenses since this same base camp was almost' overrun in June of 

1980. The DRAand Soviets knew where this base camp was and how 

it was defended, yet the Mujahideen established no eastern defenses. 

The Mujahideen's one improvement appears to be mining the 
Page 280 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

approach to the Tobagi plain, but they had no force guarding that 

minefield. The Soviets flew over that minefield anyway. 
VIGNETTE 4 

LOSS OF THE TOR GHAR BASE CAMP 

by Commander Sher Padshah 

Tor Ghar mountain lies eight kilometers northwest of J alalabad. 

Adam Khan and Rasul Khan established the Tor Ghar Mujahideen 

base but were killed in early fighting. In 1980, the overall commander of the base was Qari Alagul. The base held some 200 Mujahideen 

from four or five factions. I was a subgroup commander under 

Commander Abdullah at the time. We had bases at both Chaharbagh 

.and Tor Ghar and regularly launched attacks against the Soviets from 

Tor Ghar. Our contacts in the DRA had told us that the Soviets would 

soon attack Tor Ghar in retaliation. Late one afternoon in July 1980, 

our DRA contacts told us that the Soviets were coming that night. I 

was with my ~oup in Chaharbagh on the southeast side of the mountain. Commander Abdullah was at the Tor Ghar base. We immediately sent him a note to warn him and asked him to bury the ammunition and everything else since the Soviets would come in strength 

and Abdullah's force could not expect to hold them. Abdullah sent a 

note back to us. "As long as you hear my 20-shooters, 1 you know that 

we are holding. We will swear on the Koran not to leave our position." 

Abdullah had 25 men armed with RPGs, Kalashnikovs, Bernaus and 

bolt-action rifles. 

The Soviets attacked from several directions (Map 11-4- Tor Ghar) 

launching advances from Sorkh Rud, Jalalabad and Darunta. I withdrew my group from Chaharbagh. Soviet tanks deployed along the 

road on the north-west side of the mountain and fired on the base. 

BM-21s fired from Jalalabad. Artillery and BM-218 fired from multiple artillery sites. Helicopters strafed the area. They set the mountain 

on fire. Then the Soviets climbed the mountain, reached the base and 

fought for three days. In places, it was hand-to-hand combat. We 

could not break into the area to help, since the Soviets had sealed the 

area. Our Mujahideen fought until their ammunition was gone and 

died to the last man. The Soviets destroyed the bases and infested that 

mountain with mines. 

COMMENTARY: Mujahideen insistence on holding base camps cost them 

Commander Sher Padshah is from Laghman Province. Map sheet 3085. 

1 Bernau M26 Czechoslovak light machine' guns. 
Page 282 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 
·Chapter 11 , Vignette 4 Page 283 

dearly. At this point in the war, base camps were not essential to 

Mujahideen logistics and Abdullah's base camp was not the only one 

which the Soviets overran. It was a pointless battle which could have 

been avoided by the Mujahideen. When the Mujahideen· held real . 

estate, it allowed the Soviets to concentrate their superior firepower on 

the Mujahideen. 
Page 284 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

-4-FARAH 

SHARAFAT 

Map 11·5 

0 1 2 3 4 SKM 

KALE-E 

AM ANI 

N 

i 
VIGNETTE 5 

BATTLES FOR SHARAFAT KOH MOUNTAIN FORTRESS 

. by Engineer Mohammad Ibrahim 

Sharafat Koh is a large mountain southeast of the city of Farah. 

It is located between the paved road running between Kandahar 

and Herat (Highway 1) and the Daulatabad-Farah road (Highway 

517). The real name of the mountain is Lor Koh, but we Mujahideen 

renamed it Sharafat Koh (Honor Mountain).2 The mountain is a 

roughly rectangular-shaped massif with a plateau on top. It rises 

some 1,500 meters above the surrounding desert and its sides are 

steep. It covers over 256 square kilometers and is often snow capped. 

Many large and small canyons (kals) cut into the mountain. On the 

. north side is the Shaykh Razi Baba Canyon (Map 11-5- Sharafatred and blue graphics apply to last battle). To the northwest is the 

Kale-e Amani Canyon. This canyon was populated by ancient peoples 

and you can see their drawings of hunters with bows and arrows 

on the rocks. To the west is the Kale-e· Kaneske Canyon. The J are-e 

Ab Canyon faces southwest and l~nks with the KaJ-e Kaneske 

Canyon at the top. To the south is the Tangira Canyon which had the 

most water, but which the Mujahideen usually avoided since it was 

the only canyon wide enough for armored vehicles to enter. Facing 

south, and further to the east is the Khwaja Morad Canyon near the 

Khwaja Morad shrine. There is access to all the canyons from the 

mountain plateau. 

The Kal-e Kaneske Canyon was the strongest base at Sharafat 

Koh. It takes 35-40 minutes to walk from its entrance to the end. 

The canyon mouth is an opening in solid rock and is only two or 

three meters wide. When you walk into the canyon, you cannot see 

· the sky above you, but later it widens into a three or four hectare 

area at the end of the canyon where there are trees. A stream runs 

intermittently through the canyon. There is even a water fall with 

Engineer Mohammad Ibrahim is a graduate of Kabul University in the College of 

Agriculture. He was a group commander in ·Farah Province and doubled as medical officer find facilitator. Initially he was with Mawlawi Mohammad Shah but left in 1985 when 

his Barakzai tribe had a falling out with the Achakzai tribe of Mawlawi Mohammad Shah. 

He then fought for Haji Ghulam Rasul Shiwani. He now works with the UNHCR. [Map 

sheets 1581 and 1582]. 

2 The communists called it Mordar Koh (Filthy Mountain) after the Mujahideen moved their 

bases there in 1979. 
Page 286 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

a 40 meter drop. The canyon had a water reservoir, a supply dump 

and 16 caves holding 60 people. We defended the canyon with DShK 

machine guns on the high ground on both sides of the canyon. 

In the early days of the war, the Mujahideen had very strong 

bases around the province centers of Farah and Niniruz, but later 

on Soviet/DRA pressure forced them outward from Farah to Sharafat Koh. The Mujahideen had their first base at Sharafat Koh in the 

Tangira Canyon in 1979. The Mujahideen were organized into tribal 

groups and initially the Achakzai, Norzai, Barakzai and Alizai all 

joined together and moved to a new base in J are-e Ab Canyon. The 

Soviets attacked this base in 1980 and the Mujahideen then moved. 

to Kal·e Kaneske Canyon. The Mujahideen had bases within the 

city of Farah until 1982. As the DRA and Soviets tightened their 

security around Farah, these Mujahideen moved out and some fell 

back on Sharafat Koh. After the Mujahideen left Farah, they lost 

their contact with the city population. The city population was not 

tribal and looked down on the Mujahideen as rustics. In turn, the 

Mujahideen looked down on the city dwellers for their easy life. 

Sharafat Koh lies about 12 kilometers from Highway 1 and 20 kilometers from Highway 517. We attacked convoys near Karvangah, 

Charah and Shivan and the Soviets manned posts at Karvangah, 

Charah and Velamekh to protect the convoys. 

SKY WARRIORS STRIKE THE CANYON 

In 1982, the Kal-e Kaneske Canyon was our primary base. Our 

leader was Mawlawi Mohammad Shah from the Achakzai tribe.3 

Mohammad Shah liked to brag about his base and would often escort 

visitors through the canyon. Once he brought a DRA officer into the 

canyon and gave him a tour. The DRA officer was also an Achakzai 

and he told Mohammad Shah that he was stationed·in Shindand and 

wanted to establish secret contact with Mohammad Shah and work 

with him. Evidently, while the DRA officer was in pur canyon, he 

managed to steal a map showing our base defenses. 

At noon in July, about a month after the DRA officer's visit, three 

Soviet helicopter gunships suddenly flew down the canyon and fired 

at the caves and structures of our base. Our DShK machine guns 

were all positioned ~n the high ground and could not engage aircraft 

flying below them in the canyon. The gunships were severely damag~ 

3 Mawlawi Mohammad Shah was one of the famous commanders of the war. He was a 

member of the Islamic Revolutionary Movement (IRMA) of Mohammad Nabi Mohammadi. 
Chapter 11 , Vignette 5 Page 287 

ing our base. Khodai-Rahm was one of the DShK gunners. Physically, 

he was a weak person, but he took the 34 kilogram (75 pound) weapon 

off the mount, hoisted it on his shoulder and fired down into the 

canyon. He hit two of the helicopters, one of them in the rotors. That 

helicopter gunship climbed to the top of the mountain and then the· 

rotors quit turning. The pilot bailed out, but he was only 50 meters 

above the mountain and he and the helicopter crashed onto the mountain southern wall near the interior mouth of the canyon. The second 

damaged helicopter managed to escape, while the third helicopter 

attacked the Mujahideen DShK gunners. Khodai-Rahm was killed 

by the third helicopter. 

The cheering Mujahideen rushed to the helicopter. There were 

five dead Soviets-the pilot, two crew members and two passengers. 

One of the passengers was a woman. One of the Mujahideen cut off 

the pilot's head and brought it to Mohammad Shah. Suddenly Soviet 

fighter-bombers flew over our base and began bombing us. Toward 

late afternoon,· Soviet transport helicopters flew in and landed 

some three kilometers from the canyon mouth. Soviet troops dismounted and took up blocking positions-presumably to prevent us 

from taking the downed crew out. Early the next morning, Soviet 

armored vehicles arrived and surrounded the area. (Map 11-6 -. 

Kaneske 1) Soviet infantry pushed forward, supported by armor. 

The Soviet infantry moved on the high ground along the Tora Para4 

toward the crash site. Some Soviets moved along the canyon floor 

and the opposite canyon wall, supported by troops on the high ground 

of Tora Para. As the Soviets advanced, they marked boulders and 

rocks with numbers for orientation. After seven days of fighting, they 

reached the helicopter crash site. We retreated to higher ground by 

the waterfall. On the eighth day, the Soviets left, taking their dead, 

including the headless torso, with them. They left the hulk of the 

helicopter behind. 

CoMMENTARY: One of the more successful Mujahideen air defense 

ambushes involved digging in heavy machine guns into caves in 

canyon walls. When the Soviet/DRA helicopters flew down the 

canyon, the machine gu~s would fire across the canyon filling the air 

with bullets. The helicopters could not attack the machine guns and 

were hard pressed to avoid the bullets. This ambush would have 

worked well in Kaneske Canyon. 

4 Para means ridge. 
Page 288 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

KANESKI1 

MAP 11·6 

NOTTOSCALE 
Chapter 11, Vignette 5 Page 289 

The Soviets painted numbers on boulders and rocks to provide 

reference points during their attack. This is a good technique as it aids 

adjusting air and artillery fire and keeping track of the progress of 

units as they advance. Still, the Soviet attack was a frontal attack 

which allowed the Mujahideen to concentrate their fires against the 

Soviet advance. 

A SUCCESSFUL DEFENSE 

In March 1983, our group leader, Mawlawi Mohammad Shah, 

took the bulk of our Mujahideen to Nimruz Province. Iran had 

·supplied him with weapons and encouraged him to join the 

· Mujahideen in Nimruz Province in attacking the DRA 4th Border 

Guards Brigade at Kang Wolowali (District) near the Iranian border. 

Along with the Iranian weapons, Mohammad Shah took most of our 

DShK machine guns. The attack on the border post failed and 

Mohammad Shah lost 35 men. His own son lost a leg in the fighting. 

It was a heavy blow to our group and we felt that Iran had conspired 

in our defeat. At the time, Mohammad Shah was about to form an 

alliance with the Maoist Gul Mohammad and Parviz Shahriyari. 

Both were from Harakat (IRMA) and receiving arms from Iran. 

Under the alliance, we would leave Sharafat Koh and move to 

Chahar Burjak. This would have strengthened the Mujahideen and 

Iran wanted to weaken us and make us dependent on Iran. As a 

result of the disastrous attack, the Sharafat Koh Front was now 

weakened and we only had 25 men in our base. Mter the disaster, I 

was preparing to leave the base and visit my home, but as I moved 

out I saw that the Soviets were fighting in Shiwan, so I returned to 

the base where I made radio transmissions supposedly sending 50 

men to this ridge and 40 men to that ridge. This radio deception was 

supposed to keep the Soviets at bay. 

I was sleeping at Nizam Qarawol, the gate security post at the 

mouth of the canyon, wheh, early in the morning, we heard a helicopter flying over. (Map 11-7 - Kaneske 2) We put our ears to the 

ground and heard the noise of tanks approaching. We quickly moved 

through the darkness to our base, pausing only to lay some antitank 

mines. Mohammad Shah's deputy, Haji Nur Ahmad Khairkhaw, was 

in charge. We had gathered in the darkness discussing what to do 

when Malek Ghulam Haidar and his Mujahideen from Shiwan 

joined us. They had noted the Soviet preparations and guessed that 

we were the target, so they came across the desert to join us. They 
Page 290 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

N 

t 

KANESKI2 

Map 11·7 NOT TO SCALE 
Chapter 11, Vignette 5 Page 291 

arrived hours before the Soviets. We vowed to resist and to kill anyone who tried to flee. We took up positions on the high ground on 

both sides of the canyon on the ridges of Tora Para, Shna Para and 

Spina Para. We also put five men on the rear approach to the canyon 

and put some men on Tor Tsalay to watch the approach from Jar-e Ab 

Canyon. It was raining, but not enough to stop the Soviet aircraft. 

Observation aircraft flew over and then fighter-bombers flew over in 

groups of three. They made bombing runs on us. We only had two 

DShK machine guns left and they were not enough to keep the aircraft away. The enemy intensified his bombing. They also began firing artillery at us and kept it up all night, depriving us of sleep. 

Before sunrise on the second day, the enemy ground attack 

began. There were probably two battalions in the attack. One battalion attacked Tora Para and the other attacked Spina Para. Tanks 

supported the dismounted infantry, who tried to approach the canyon 

but failed. During the afternoon of the second day, Malek Ghulam 

Haidar was killed deep inside the base area. We had several Mghan 

prisoners in our base, who we detained for disputes and crimes 

committed in the area controlled by the Mujahideen. A Haji from Zir 

Koh was one of our prisoners. He described how a lone Soviet came 

into the camp and pointed his rifle at the prisoners. Through sign 

language, they indicated that they were prisoners, so the Soviet 

herded them into the prison cave and stood outside for awhile. Then 

he disappeared. Nabi, who was carrying food to our front lines 

returned to the camp and saw the Soviet. Since he was unarmed, he 

ran and the Soviet followed him. N abi ran to the arms depot where 

Malek Haidar was. Nabi told him that Soviets had penetrated the 

base from the mountain top. Malek took his American G3 rifle and 

his Soviet TT pistol and walked out of the depot cave. The Soviet was 

waiting behind a rock. He fired two shots and killed Haidar. Then 

he took Haidar's G3 and pistol and left. I was sitting at the first aid 

station near the front lines when I heard Abdul Hai yell "Who are 

you? Who are you? Stop!" at the Soviet. Another Mujahideen was 

.going to shoot him, but didn't since the Soviet was far away and they 

thought that he might be a prisoner carrying supplies to the forward 

positions. The Soviet was in uniform, but he was down in the canyon 

and we were high above him on the canyon walls and couldn't really 

tell. Since the Soviet aircraft were still bombing us, we did not 

believe that a single Soviet had snuck into our base and was now 

leaving. Timurshah Khan Mu'alim, who was at Shna Para, also 

aimed at the Soviet, but Bashar, M.ohammad Shah's nephew, talked 
Page 292 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

him out of it, convinced that the stranger was one of our own. Later, 

we learned that the Soviets had invited some local elders to the 

attack site to impress them with their strength. The elders later 

described how the Soviet soldier came running into the site proudly 

holding his trophy weapons over his head. The Soviets again fired 

artillery at us all night. 

Early on the morning of the third day, the Soviets again attacked. 

They figured that we had no forces on the canyon floor, so they fired 

smoke rounds into the canyon. We thought they were using poison 

gas and tied handkerchiefs over our faces. The Soviets moved into 

the canyon under the cover of the smoke. At first, we fired blindly 

into the smoke from the high ground until we saw them signaling 

each other with flares. We fired at the flares and then realized, from 

the flares' positions, that they had penetrated far into the base. The 

Mujahideen in the base were shouting "The Russians are here!" and 

firing at close range. We abandoned our positions in the heights and 

charged down the canyon walls. The fighting was heavy. The Soviets 

withdrew in the late afternoon, taking their dead and wounded 

with them. They left blood trails, bloody bandages and m:any RPG18s behind. Again, Soviet artillery fired at us all night. 

On the fourth day, the Soviets advanced with tanks leading and 

the infantry sheltering behind the tanks. The infantry was reluctant 

to leave the shelter of the tanks, but they finally moved into some 

folds on the canyon wall and sheltered there while the tanks withdrew. The infantry would not move out from the protection of the 

folds and finally the tanks came forward again and the infantry 

retreated behind the tanks. At noon, they quit firing and the Soviets 

broke camp and moved out in the afternoon. We lit bonfires and 

cheered from the heights. The bonfires were welcome since it had 

rained throughout the battle and we couldn't light fires earlier as 

that would have disclosed our positions. 

COMMENTARY: Again the Soviets conducted a frontal attack, but this 

time relied on a smoke screen to aid their advance. The advance was 

initially successful, but the Soviets failed to clear their flanks as they 

advanced. Once the Soviets began to take casualties, they withdrew, 

abandoning ground they would unsuccessfully try to retake the following day. The Mujahideen, who lacked communications, were hard 

pressed to control the battle. 
Chapter 11, Vignette 5 Page 293 

AN UNSUCCESSFUL DEFENSE 

In 1985 we had disputes over leadership and distribution of spoils 

and the Mujahideen split into tribal units and moved into the various 

canyons. Haji Abdul Kheleq and his Mujahideen from the Noorzai 

tribe moved to the Shaykh Razi Baba Canyon. Haji Ghulan Rasul 

Shiwani Rasul Akhundzada and the Mujahideen from the Alizai and 

Barakzai tribes moved to the Kale-e Amani Canyon. I went with this 

group. Mawlawi Mohammad Shah and his Mujahideen from the 

. Achakzai tribe stayed in the Kale-e Kaneske Canyon. 

Mter the groups had moved to the different canyons, the Soviets . 

returned. The Soviets concentrated on Mohammad Shah and his 

Mujahideen in the Kal-e Kaneske Canyon. He had six DShK 

machine guns, one ZGU-1 machine gun, three 82mm recoilless 

rifles, 25 RPG-7s and some medium machine guns. Soviet troop 

columns with up to 200 tanks and APCs moved from Shindand to 

Farah and surrounded the area.s Soviet aircraft flew from Shindand 

airbase and bombed the base from high and low altitudes. Soviet 

artillery moved into position and hammered his positions for several 

hours with heavy fire (Map 11-8- Kaneske 3). The Soviets spent the 

first day with artillery and air preparations. On the second day, they 

·launched an attack against the canyon with infantry supported by 

tanks. Mohammad Shah's force repulsed the attack. On the third 

day, the Soviets attacked the canyon mouth again, but they also 

snuck a force up the Jar-e Ab Canyon and then landed air assault 

forces on the mountain top. These forces crossed over into the Kal-e 

Kaneske Canyon and took Mohammad Shah's force from the rear. 

Mohammad Shah's son w~ killed while firing his ZGU-1. 

Mohammad Shah's force was pinned between the two Soviet forces as 

night fell. Mohammad Shah gathered his force and said "Either we 

stand and die here to the last man or we take a risk and charge the 

attackers and try to break out. We should break out' as a group. If 

they see us, we will have enough firepower to fight them. · If they 

don't see us, we will all leave together." All his Mujahideen agreed. 

Some 70 Mujahideen slipped out between the Soviet forces, up the 

canyon and into the mountain. Only a few old men remained. The 

next day, the Soviets continued to pound the canyon with air and 

5 Troops were from the Soviet 5th Motorized Rifle Division. If the number of tanks and 

APCs is correct, this was a re·giment (probably the 371 st Motorized Rifle Regiment) reinforced with air assault forces. 
Page 294 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

N 

t 

KANESKI3 

Map 11·8 NOT TO SCALE 
Chapter 11, Vignette 5 Page 295 

artillery, not knowing that the Mujahideen had escaped. On the fifth 

day, they entered the base, mined the caves, looted what they could 

and left. 

The Soviets then turned their attention to Kal-e Amani Canyon. 

They came across the high ground from Kal-e Kaneske and air 

assault troops attacked down into the canyon from the high ground. 

Most of us were unable to escape and we lost some 50 Mujahideen 

there. The Soviets then turned their attention to Shaykh Razi Baba 

Canyon, but these Mujahideen had already left. This was the end of 

the Mujahideen stronghold of Sharafat Koh. We now knew that we 

could not hold these large bases in Mghanistan indefinitely against 

the Soviets, so we moved our bases, staging areas and rest areas 

across the border into Iran. 

CoMMENTARY: The Mujahideen maintained bases at Sharafat Koh 

from 1979-1985. It was no secret that they were there and the 

Soviets and DRA had ample opportunity to work against the base. 

The Mujahideen were tied to these bases and had to maintain 

sufficient defenders at Sharafat Koh at all times. This limited the 

number of Mujahideen who could strike at the Soviets and DRA. 

Once the Mujahideen split up into several canyons, they lacked 

communications between the canyons and were unable to provide 

warning or coordinate ·actions against the Soviets. The Soviets were 

able to defeat each group piecemeal. 

However, the Soviets were not successful in attacking Sharafat Koh 

from the desert floor up. It took the Soviets a good deal of time before 

they would land air assault forces on mountain tops far from link-up 

forces. Once they started doing so, they were often successful. 

However, some heliborne forces were isolated and destroyed in the 

mountains by the Mujahideen. In this case, the Soviets were successful when they used helicopters to land troops on the heights and attack 

. down to link up with ascending forces. 
Page 296 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

• 

z ... ,.t---
VIGNETTE 6 

QALA·E NAW BASE CAMP DEFENSE 

by Mawlawi Mohayddin Baloch 

Nimroz Province lies in the southwest corner of Afghanistan. It is 

fairly flat, lightly populated and mostly desert. The population lives 

.in the green zones along the river banks. The Khash Rud is one of 

three rivers which run through the province. It runs northeast to 

southwest. My base was 10 kilometers southwest of the Lowkhai 

District capital in Khash Rud District. (Map 11-9 - Khash) It is a 

wooded area at the village ofQala-e Naw near the banks of the Khash 

Rud River. Highway 606 runs from Delatam and Zaranj-the provincial capital. It parallels the river and used to run through the 

green zone. We would often block the highway imd intercept convoys 

traveling on it. Sometimes we would attack the provincial capital. I 

had about 200. men in my main base at Qala-e Naw and had a forward base at the Pul-e Ghurghori bridge, where the highway crossed 

over the Khash Rud. I often mined and destroyed that bridge to deny 

passage to columns going to Zaranj. My main base on the river was 

split between the southeastern and northwestern banks. During 

flood stage, it was impossible to cross the river and the Mujahideen 

on each bank fought in different regions throughout the year. Later 

in the mid-1980s, when our resistance became very costly to the 

enemy, they built a detour route on the plain between Zaranj and 

Delaram. This detour arched about nine kilometers away from my 

base. When the detour route was built, I could only field reduced 

groups of 15-20 men against small enemy columns since the area is 

very arid, very open and water supply is a major problem. We had to 

let the big convoys pass unmolested. The new road rejoins the old at 

the village of Radzay. This is about 17 kilometers to the southwest. 

I started moving our ambushes to the Radzay area. There is a mountain to the east of Radzay with the same name. The road crosses 

behind the mountain on the southeast side. This is an excellent 

ambush site since there are also hills which restrict movement to the 

road as it goes between the hills and the mountain. 

Mawlawi Mohayddin Baloch is from Nimroz Province. His base was at Lowkhai, the district capital of Khash Rud District on the Khash Rud River. He was initially with Mawlawi 

Mohammad Nabi Mohammadi of the Harakat-e lnqelab-e lslami (HAR). Later on he 

switched to HIK (Khalis). [Map sheet 1579 and 1580]. 
Page 298 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

In the fall of 1984, Khan Mohammad (my deputy) and I were both· 

away from our base at the same time. I was in Iran. Informants told 

the government that we were both away and so the government 

attacked our base in our absence. However, the day that the enemy 

forces attacked our base, Khan Mohammad returned to our base.· It 

was five days before the feast of sacrifice (Eid-al-Adha). The enemy 

moved from Delaram to the plain some 15 kilometers north of usjust north of the main road. They established a base there. Since it 

is desert, they could move in any direction. They attacked our base 

the next day. There were only 70 or 80 Mujahideen in base at the 

time. Our SOP for defense against an attack was to spread the forces 

over a large area at strong points in some 20 villages. The enemy· 

would usually attack from the northeast to the southwest through 

the green zone to the base area. He would also send a flanking 

detachment to the Pul-e Ghurghori bridge and lodge in the Radzay 

Mountain to encircle my force and pin us in the green zone. My 

force had to fight in the green zone because the surrounding desert 

was too flat and exposed for combat. We fought the enemy in the 

green zone by confronting him with multiple pockets of resistance 

anchored in fortified fighting positions. When the enemy tried to 

concentrate against one pocket, Mujahideen from the other pockets 

would take him in the flanks and rear. The enemy could not fragment his force to deal with all the pockets, but had to stay together 

for security. We would let the enemy chase us from strongpoint to 

strongpoint and attack him whenever we could. Eventually, the 

enemy force would become exhausted. When their water and supplies ran out, they would break contact and go home. 

The enemy attack developed as usual and, by the end of the day, 

the enemy force retired. Unfortunately, my deputy was killed during 

the fighting. In Iran, I heard about the enemy attack, gathered what 

Mujahideen were available and started back to our .base. The 

Mujahideen at the base evacuated their casualties to Qala-e Naw, 

Sheshaveh and Radzay. Informants told the enemy that the base 

commander was killed. They thought that I was dead and decided 

that it was the time to destroy all the Mujahideen in the green 

zone. I arrived on the third day after the opening battle. That night, 

another enemy column arrived and deployed in the desert north of 

us. I realized that they were going to attack us. We had one BM-12, 

one single-barreled 107mm rocket launcher, six 82mm recoilless 

rifles, five DShKs, three ZGU-1s, and 15 RPG-7s. I now had 120 

men. In addition to my Mujahideen, there were HIH Mujahideen in 
Chapter 11 , Vignette 6 Page 299 

the area and they helped defend the base camp area. I sent 20 of 

my men to the Ghurghori bridge with four RPG-7s and Kalashnikovs. 

I told their commander to put 10 men on each bank to block the 

enemy tanks which would make the encircling sweep. However, that 

group didn't reach the bridge on time. They stopped short of the 

bridge to avoid falling into an ambush. The enemy seized control of 

the bridge at dawn. His other groups deployed at Qala-e Naw, 

Radzay, Sheshaveh and other points in the area. 

The enemy attacked, as usual, from the northeast and southwest. 

The main attack was from the northeast and involved some 150-200 

vehicles. My bridge group attacked the enemy group at the bridge, 

but the enemy pushed them back and began advancing toward the 

northeast from Radzay. Six enemy jet aircraft were attacking our 

positions, while four helicopters adjusted their strikes for them. The 

helicopters fired smoke rockets to mark the strikes. The fighting 

continued for two days. Then they broke contact and withdrew. 

During the fighting, 16 DRA soldiers defected to us. They were 

soldiers drafted from Farah and Nimroz Provinces. They were from 

the 21st Mechanized Brigade in Farah and the Sarandoy regiment in 

Nimroz. There were also DRA deserters from the 4th Border Guards 

Brigade. Mujahideen casualties were three KIA and several wounded. Enemy losses are unknown except for the 16 deserters. 

CoMMENTARY: When asked what made him successful Commander 

Baloch said, "We intended to fight to the last man and they didn't. 

This is a wide area and we were widely dispersed, which reduced 

the impact of the enemy air force. Air power was fairly ineffective in 

this desert. Many of their bombs failed to explode, but buried themselves in the sand. We had covered shelters and covered fighting 

. positions in each vill~ge. The enemy was very stylized and never 

did anything different. We knew from where they would come, how 

they would act and how long they could stay. Our defensive positions 

were connected with communications trenches while the enemy 

was always in the open. We had two kinds of maneuver. One was the 

dispersal maneuver forcing the enemy to chase all over to find us. 

The second was internal maneuver within a strong point where we 

could shift between positions without being observed. We had these 

positions in all the villages and throughout the area. There are also 

many canals and ditches in the area, which we improved into 

fighting positions." 

"Once the enemy offered me a deal. 'Don't attack us and we will 
Page 300 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

pay you a toll of 50,000 Mghanis ($250) per vehicle passing through 

the area.' I turned the deal down with the words 'As long as Soviets 

are here, we make no deals.' The enemy infantry was the weakest 

part of their armies-DRA and Soviet. Their sequence of attack .was 

very predictable. They would start with an artillery and air preparation, then they would lay a smoke screen and then their infantry 

would attack. Their tanks would support the infantry, but as soon as 

they sustained casualties, they would stop. Their tanks were very 

wary of antitank weapons. The mere presence of RPGs and recoilless 

rifles in an area would keep the tanks at bay. We would wait until 

tanks came within 20 or 30 meters of our antitank weapons before 

opening fire. I would not allow my people to try long-range shots. 

They would hold steady in their positions with patience and courage. 

The tanks could not see us at long range so they couldn't hit us. We 

could see them and hit them at close range. Most of the time we were 

fighting an enemy strong in fire power and very weak in the assault. 

During the two days of fighting, the enemy seldom came withjn 

Kalashnikov range. The only innovation that the enemy showed 

during this attack was that they launched it during the Festival of 

Sacrifice, when they expected that the Mujahideen would be at home 

instead of the base. Second; they returned sooner to the area than 

usual. This broke their pattern. I did not really fight a guerrilla 

· war-I knew the enemy's position and he knew mine. A guerrilla is 

evasive and attacks from an unexpected direction and time. Here, 

. the enemy kept attacking me at the same place and in the same fashion. Is this guerrilla war?" 

"Our ambulance was two sticks and a piece of cloth. Theirs was a 

helicopter. The secret of our success was that it was a popular cause. 

Everybody kllew that we were hurting the occupiers. This was not a 

war but an uprising .. Therefore, it was not a guerrilla war. We never 

bothered about the food supply. The locals supplied us with whatever 

they had. I had two pickup trucks-the enemy had two hundred vehicles. I used the pickups for ammunition and food resupply. We moved 

them secretly along the river in the wooded area to supply the fighting 

positions in the evening. Their rations would sustain them until the 

next night. We basically had a mutton and nan6 diet that the local 

populace furnished us free. A normal full day's ration was .a portion of 

cooked mutton wrapped in nan. Water supply was simple since our 

fighting positions were near the river and my men all had canteens." 

6 Nan is flat Afghan unleavened bread. It is oval-shaped and about the thickness and size 

of a small or medium pizza. 
VIGNETTE 7 

DEFENDING THE SUBURBS OF KANDAHAR 

by Sultan Mohammad of Topkhana 

The supporters of the HI faction, mostly Shia, were located 

primarily in the southwest of Mghanistan. The HI's main base was in 

the Khakrez southern mountains. This base was near the HIK base of 

Islam Dara. 7 This was about seven hours on foot from Khakrez, which 

is some 60 kilometers north of Kandahar. The HI fought in Khakrez, 

Girishk, Uruzgan and Kandahar. The HI faction had four units in the 

Kandahar area. We had about 300 Mujahideen. Our overall commander was Ali Yawar who was killed by a mine later in the war. We had 

two bases in the Kandahar area-Char Dewal in the Malajat suburbs 

south of Kandahar and Char Bagh in the Arghandab River Valley 

northwest of Kandahar. I commanded a group at Char Dewal as did 

Ghulam Shah and Shah Mohammad. Gul Mohammad commanded at 

Char Bagh. We used to harass convoys and block Highway 1 near the 

Kandahar prison at Pashtoon Bagh-about a half kilometer from the 

Sarpooza ridge. Unlike some other areas in Mghanistan, all the 

Mujahideen factions cooperated with each other in the Kandahar 

area. Whenever there was any fighting, all the Mujahideen would 

move to the area to help out. All large Mujahideen operations were 

combined and were coordinated by the Mujahideen Council. 

The Malajat area lies to the south of Kandahar. It is a wellirrigated suburb of the city full of villages, irrigation canals, 

orchards, farms and vineyards. The Mujahideen moved freely 

throughout this area despite the best efforts of the DRA and the 

Soviet forces in the area.a Frequently, the DRA and Soviets would 

throw a cordon around the Malajat area and try to enter it to destroy 

Sultan Mohammad of Topkhana is a member of the minority Shia religious community in 

Afghanistan. He belonged to the moderate Harakat-1 lslami (HI) faction founded by 

Ayatollah Asef Muhsini in neighboring Iran. He fought from the communist overthrow of the 

. government until the withdrawal of Soviet forces. [Map sheet 2180]. 

7 Islam Dara was the Mujahideen name for their base behind Shawadan mountain. The 

Soviet 1 03rd Airborne Division launched an attack on this base in 1985 and this is 

described in Vignette 25 of The f3ear Went Over the Mountain. The site location in The 

Bear Went Over the Mountain is wrong. 

8 The Kandahar area was heavily garrisoned by the ORA 2nd Corps Headquarters, the 

15th Infantry Division, the 7th Tank Brigade, the 3rd Border Guards Brigade, the 366th 

Fighter-Bomber Regiment and the 379th Separate Bomber Squadron. Soviet forces 

included the 70th Separate Motorized Rifle Brigade and a Spetsnatz battalion. 
Page 302 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

=·=·· ZALAKHAN 

MALAJAT 

MAP 11·10 

..... , --
Chapter 11 , Vignette 7 Page 303 

the Mujahideen and their bases. Throughout the war, these efforts 

never succeeded; There were always. at least 1,000-1,500 Mujahideen 

in Malajat from the various factions. These Mujahideen were all 

from mobile groups and none were stationed permanently in Malajat. 

Mujahideen forces would rotate in and out of the Malajat area and 

thus maintained a high state of readiness. The Malajat mujahideen 

·were well prepared with supply bases and well-fortified bunkers and 

fighting positions (Map 11-10- Malajat). 

In the fall of 1984, the enemy threw a wide cordon around the 

Malajat occupying their normal southern positions from Zaker Ghar 

in the east to Qaitul in the west. Thus they surrounded the· Malajat 

with Kandahar to the north and Highway 4 to the east and a .ridge of 

hills to the west. This encompasses a lot of space and the Mujahideen 

were still able to maneuver freely within the Malajat area. At 0700 

hours, an enemy mechanized column of 30-35 tanks and APCs moved 

from Sarpooza while another column of 15-16 tanks and APCs moved 

from the 15th Division headquarters past the Governor's house along 

the Mahkama road near Poolan toward our defensive position. Our 

defensive position stretched some three kilometers from Char Dewal 

to Spin Ziarat and we could always see the enemy defenses from here. 

We held this position with some 450 Mujahideen from various factions. There were HIK units from Sarkateb, the Gulagha Son of Haji 

Latif's unit and two of our HI groups. The enemy columns were 

covered by helicopter gunships who fired at our positions. However, 

the enemy was unable to advance because we were well-protected by 

our defensive positions. The enemy would not dismount from his 

armored vehicles, but deployed his vehicles in a firing line and fired 

at us for two or three hours. Even the green trees caught on fire. Our 

defensive positions were three meter by two meter pits which held 

two-to-three men. They were roofed with heavy wooden beams which 

had 1.5 meters of dirt and rock tamped down on top of it. During lulls 

in the enemy firing, our men would pop out of the shelters and fire 

RPG-7s and recoilless rifles at them. The enemy would promptly 

start shooting again. 

I said that the Soviets surrounded us, but that isn't completely 

true. Throughout the war, the Soviets always left one side unguarded. 

At around noon, 100 to 120 Mujahideen reinforcements arrived from 

Zalakhan and Walakan, which are south and southeast of Spin Zirat. 

These villages were in the sector that the Soviets left unguarded. The 

arrival of the reinforcements turned the tide and eventually prompted 

the Soviets to withdraw about 1800 hours. We destroyed three armored 
Page 304 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

vehicles on the Sarpooza front and two on the Mahkama front. 

Sometimes the bombs and artillery fire would block the exits to 

our bunkers. We would have to go out at night to dig them out. This 

happened often to our positions near the Panjao Pul bridge. Three 

times I had to go out at midnight to locate the bunkers and unearth 

our men. Sometimes they would be trapped in these bunkers from 

0500 hours until past midnight, but these bunkers were essential to 

stopping the enemy in the Malajat. 

COMMENTARY: Soviet cordon and search operations usually involved 

a large force surrounding a large area. The area contain:ed within 

the cordon was usually large enough to allow the surrounded 

Mujahideen freedom of maneuver. Once the cordon was established, · ' 

the Soviets seldom split it up into manageable areas, but pushed 

through the entire cordoned area if possible. This failure to fragment 

the area allowed the Mujahideen to move and maneuver against the 

Soviets. In this case, the Mujahideen were able to reinforce during a 

hotly contested fight. 

Many Soviet combat examples show an unguarded flank in a 

cordon and search.9 This might work if an ambush were set along the 

escape route, but this did not seem to be the case. This might also be 

a time-honored act to allow their enemy to escape and minimize the 

casualties on both sides. 

Finally, there was an apparent reluctance by the Soviets and DRA 

to stay in the Malajat area at night. If they would not dismount from 

their armored vehicles during the day, they would have to dismount at 

night to secure the vehicles. The arrival of the Mujahideen reinforcements may have kept the Mujahideen in the fight, but may not have 

been the prime reason that the Soviets withdrew at 1800 hours. 

9 As an example, see vignette 5 in The Bear Went Over the Mountain. 
VIGNETTE 8 

DEFENDING THE MALAJAT 

by Mohammad Shah Kako and Abdul Ghani 

The Malajat, the southern suburb of Kandahar, was a continuous 

battlefield. The Malajat is a large green zone full of orchards, 

villages, irrigation canals, and vineyards. The Mujahideen deployed 

mobile bases throughout it. Many Mujahideen commanders with 

bases elsewhere would maintain mobile bases in the Malajat as their 

forward elements in the Kandahar area. Despite belonging to different factions, there was an exemplary cooperation among these mobile 

groups. The DRA/Soviets tried to force the Mujahideen out by cordon 

and search operations of the Malajat area. They would occupy the 

high ground and villages north of ~he Tarnak River-Shorandam, 

Zaker-e Sharif, Loy Karazak, Anguryan, and Bala Deh which /are 

north and west of the airfield. Then they would establish the western blocking positions on the Girowal Ghar, Suf Ghar, Zarah Ghar 

and Chehelzena Ghar mountains (Map 11-11- Mala). They used the 

city of Kandahar as the northern blocking position. Kandahar was 

occupied by DRA forces. Then the Soviets and DRA would push 

inward into the Malajat area from these blocking positions search for 

the Mujahideen. They were usually unsuccessful, but they continued 

to do it over and over again. The blocking positions were also part of 

the Kandahar security belt, but it was well-penetrated by the 

Mujahideen. We would fight them initially in the Malajat area and 

then exit to the south in the Loy Karazak area and Anguryan and in: 

the southwest in the Hendu Kalacha area. The Soviets had trouble 

controlling these areas. 

The Mujahideen prepared blocking positions along major axes and 

turned this area into an impregnable stronghold. A typical blocking 

position would be built near a mobile base and include several buildings in a village or orchard, where the mobile group would live. The 

personnel in the mobile group would be relieved and replaced from 

· time to time from their main bases. Some Mujahideen would stay 

permanently in the Malajat area. Mobile bases and blocking positions 

were connected by communications trenches. The blocking positions 

were dug into the ground and had firing positions for machine guns, 

Mohammad Shah Kako initially fought with HIK and then switched to IUA. Abdul Ghani 

fought with the ANLF. [Map sheet 2180]. 
MALA 

Map 11-11 

N 

r 

""C 

~ (1) 

(..) 

C> 

0') 

:;! 

(1) 

Q 

::r 

~ 

(/) 

a: 

(1) 

9.. 

~ (1) 

:s:: 

0 

c 

::J 

jl) 

s· 

:s:: 

c 

1i>" 

::r 

a: 

(1) 

(1) 

::J 

~ n. g· 

s· 

~ (1) 

(/) 

~ 

~-

;e: 

c.c 

::r 

Ill 

::J 

~· 
Chapter 11, Vignette 8 Page 307 

recoilless rifles, and RPGs. We covered the fighting positions with 

berry-tree branches which we then covered with earth and packed it 

down hard. The bases had covered bunkers to protect our Mujahideen 

from artillery fire and air strikes. These bunkers were two-three 

meters in width and six to eight meters long and were covered with 

timber and a meter-thick layer of well-packed earth which resisted 

artillery fire and most air strikes. Whenever the enemy would cordon 

off the Malajat area and launch infantry attacks into 'the green zone, 

the Mujahideen would occupy their blocking positions. Most fighting 

positions were redundant so that the loss of a fighting position would 

not adversely affect the defense. 

In the beginning, the Mujahideen were unprepared and unable to 

resist beyond two or three days but, after they developed their fortifications, they could withstand· and push back the Soviets and DRA. 

Once the area was cordoned, the Soviets usually launched their attack 

along the main road from Zaker-e Sharif and further south from Loy 

Karazak. In the north, the usual line of contact was Hokomati Dand, 

Pakha Polan, Yakh Karez and Deh Khwaja. This was just outside the 

built-up area. Later on, the Soviet and DRA forces established permanent, well-fortified and well-protected security outposts. The Soviets 

had Shorandam hill, Zak~r-e Sharif hill and Mala Kala hill. The DRA 

had Suf Ghar, Zarah Shar Ghar and Chehelzena Ghar mountain sites. 

Once every two months, the Soviets would launch a major cordon and 

search against the Malajat area in order to keep it contained. 

In November 1987, the Soviets launched an 18-day cordon and 

search operation. In the cold dawn, the Soviet and DRA troops moved 

from their garrisons and, by 0800 hours, had occupied their normal 

blocking positions. Mohammad Shah Kako's base was at Sher-e Surkh 

where he commanded some 30 men. There were some 350 Mujahideen 

in the Malajat area from his party. The Mujahideen divided the front 

line facing western Kandahar into four sectors. Each sector had about 

50 men. The northwest sector was a Hizbe-Islami sector. The Pakha 

Polan area was held by Mujahideen from Sher-e Surkh, Zaker-e Sharif 

and Kukhabad. This meant that Mohammad Shah Kako's sector had 

three commanders since there were three factions involved, but cooperation among the commanders was easy since they were all local and 

knew each other. Regi was the third sector and Abdul Razak commanded this sector. Yakh Karez was the fourth sector and Saranwal 

commanded it.· Ghafur Jan coordinated the four sectors. The DRA 

attacked from the city, but this time the Soviets did not move from 

their blocking positions. The DRA infantry were accompanied by 
Page 308 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

troops carrying chain saws. They planned to cut their way through the 

orchards, destroy them and deny this refuge to the Mujahideen. We 

had planted mines in front of our positions which deterred the poorlytrained DRA soldiers. We maintained a steady fire from well-situated 

positions. We kept a reserve of 160-200 men in reserve resting. Every 

evening, the relief group would move forward, carrying rations and 

relieve the force who would go back and rest for two days. Then they 

would rotate forward again. It was usually calm at night when we carried out the relief. In this manner, we kept up the defense for 18 days. 

We did not resupply during the day, but brought food, water and 

ammunition forward only at night. The DRA could not break through, 

but they did cut some trees before we shot them down. It was winter 

and it was cold. Our positions were good, although resupply was 

tough. Throughout the fighting, the enemy bombed and shelled all 

suspected bases in the area. One bomb, intended for our position in 

Pakha Polan, missed the target and hit the western city gate, killing 

many civilians. They could not hit us at the front line positions 

because. we were so close to their line and so our front line was safe 

from air and artillery attack. 

CoMMENTARY: Throughout the war, the Soviets and DRA were never 

able to bring Kandahar under complete control. Mujahideen urban 

groups fought sporadic battles within the city walls and Mujahideen 

mobile groups maintained control over the suburbs. Unlike other 

areas of Mghanistan, there was little in-fighting among the factions 

involved in the fighting around Kandahar and the Mujahideen ran the 

fight cooperatively through regular meetings of a coordination council. 

This cooperation provided tactical flexibility to the Mujahideen and 

their redundant fortifications ensured that Soviet/DRA offensives 

would never progress far. Most notable is the regular rotation of 

Mujahidee:ri from the forward positions. A relief in place is a difficult 

procedure for the best-trained troops. The Mujahideen routinely 

relieved front-line forces without a loss in combat effectiveness. This 

is very impressive for any force, and even more so for a force that is in 

direct contact and is heavily outgunned and poorly supplied. 

There was a significant DRNSoviet force garrisoned in the area. 

The DRA 2nd Corps, 15th Infantry Division, 7th Tank Brigade, 3rd 

·Border Guard Brigade garrisoned Kandahar city. The Soviet 70th 

Separate Motorized Rifle Brigade, the DRA 366th Fighter Regiment, 

the DRA 379th Separate Bombing Squadron and a Soviet Spetsnaz 

battalion garrisoned the Kandahar international airport. The 
Chapter 11, Vignette 8 Page 309 

DRNSoviet operations in the Malajat area were very predictable by 

time and location. They continually tried to penetrate and sweep the 

entire area instead of cordoning off and sweeping a smaller section 

thoroughly. Although the combat in the Malajat area was a fight 

through a fortified area, the DRNSoviets continued to treat it . as a 

penetration and exploitation rather than a systematic reduction. 

DRNSoviet tactical intelligence apparently did not pick up the pattern 

in Mujahideen resupply and relief activities to exploit it. 
CHAHAR 

Map 11-12 

0 1 2 3 4KM 

ZHARE 

DASHTA 

PLAIN 

HIGHWAY1 

®(#) 

cP 

& 

/) 

"'U 

Ill 

<0 

CD 

~ 

0 

-1 

:::r 

CD 

Q 

:::r 

~ 

(J) 

a: 

CD 

9.. 

::r 

CD 

:s:::: 

0 

c:: 

::t 

N ~-

:=! i :s:::: 

.!:. 

Ill 

:::r 

a: 

CD 

CD 

::J 

iii' 

g 

0 

en 

s· 

::r 

CD 

(J) 

~-m. 

::i> 

cO 

:::r 

Ill 

::J 

:E 

~ 
VIGNETTE 9 

BATTLE FOR CHAHARQULBA VILLAGE 

by Commander Akhtarjhan 

During the Soviet occupation, the eastern bank of the Arghandab 

River near Kandahar city was a safe haven and the Mujahideen would 

not fight in this area. The west bank was Mujahideen territory. I had 

my base in Babur village in the orchards of the west bank (later, after 

the Soviets withdrew, I established east bank bases in Baba Valisaheb 

village, Pir-e Paymal and in the western suburbs of Kandahar). My 

senior commander was Mulla Naqib. During the Soviet occupation, he 

had a remote base in Khakrez mountain, but his main base was in 

Chaharqulba village. My eldest brother was· killed in fighting at this 

village base. My next oldest brother fought out of the Babur base 

and became a commander when my oldest brother was killed. 

Commanders were selected based on the social position of the family, 

education, and personal leadership talents. Family ties were important. A commander brought his relatives into the group and a prestigious family could raise a large group. Since my brother established 

the group, it was natural that my brother, and, subsequently, I should 

succeed to the command. In fundamentalist Mujahideen groups, 

commanders were picked for ideological commitment and not for 

family ties. Many teenagers joined the Mujahideen because the DRA 

would press-gang youth into the army and Mujahideen bases were a 

good place to avoid the draft. 

In June 1987, during the month of Ramadan, the DRA/Soviets 

launched a major operation in the Arghandab (Map 11-12- Chahar). 

During the operation, the enemy concentrated in Nagahan and then 

moved northeast along the western bank of the Arghandab River. 

Another column crossed the Arghandab River from Baba Valisaheb. 

Tp.ey began with a heavy air attack against suspected Mujahideen 

bases. We moved to our bunkers. The west bank was actually a 

. Mujahideen fortified zone, which we laced with bunkers, fighting positions and trenches. Further, since the green zone was full of orchards, 

Commander Akhtarjhan was a Jamiat-1-lslami (JIA) commander in Arghandab District 

northwest of Kandahar. He was an elementary school student when he joined the Jihad 

at the age of 12. At the end of the war he was 25 years old and a commander. He joined 

the Jihad because he had had two brothers in the Jihad and they were both killed. He took 

their place as family tradition clictated. He served under Mulla Naqib, the most powerful 

Jamiat commander in the area. [Map sheet 2180]. 
Page 312 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

it was already cut up by irrigation ditches, so there was always a 

place to fight from. We did not leave the bunkers since we were pinned 

by all the aviation ordnance. Usually, the Soviets would deploy tanks 

along the edge of the green zone and, after the heavy artillery 

bombardment and tank fires, they would send infantry (usually 

DRA) into the green zone with instructions to collect our weapons 

since everyone in the impact area would be dead. The infantry would 

move out confidently and the Mujahideen would come out of their 

bunkers. The Mujahideen would inflict heavy losses on the infantry 

and capture many of these ill-trained DRA recruits. We sent the prisoners· north through the mountains and then, by circuitous routes, 

south into Pakistan. We had built a veritable fortress around the base 

at Chaharqulba. Some Mujahideen would defend the bases, while 

others would range further afield to provide maneuver and depth to 

the battlefield. It was very hard to move tanks into the green zone. 

The Soviets would try to push tanks into the area to get close to the 

Mujahideen, but the terrain channelized their movement and. made 

them vulnerable. 

The Soviets and DRA moved from two directions against the 

Mujahideen but were met with constant resistance from Mujahideen 

fighting positions. Soviet tanks came from the Zhare Dashta and 

stayed on the plain west of the green zone as they crept toward our 

base at Chaharqulba. It took them a week of fighting to cover the six 

kilometers to our base: All of their tanks were sandbagged against 

our RPGs, so we were having difficulty stopping them. Finally, we 

Mujahideen commanders went to N aqib and said that we are outnumbered and should leave the base. N aqib said that this is their 

last battle and will decide the contest between them and us. They've 

tried to conquer the base for years and this is their last throw. If we 

leave, we will never get in again. If we stop them, then they will not 

return. We replied that the RPGs were not working against sandbagged tanks. N aqib took an RPG and strode out to the forward 

positions to kill a tank. We commanders stopped him and promised 

to fight to the end. · 

Heavy fighting continued throughout that day, but we stopped the 

enemy and they withdrew to Ta'bils-some kilometers to the south. 

We pursued them to Ta'bils, engaging the enemy in the streets, 

killing many of them. The Mujahideen then withdrew to 

Chaharqulba before dawn. The following days, the enemy mounted a 

three-pronged attack from Ta'bils in southwest, from Baba Valisaheb 

in the southeast and from Jelawor in the northwest. They employed 
Chapter 11, Vignette 9 Page 313 

tanks and artillery on the plain of Zhare Dashta in support. Since 

the orchards were impenetrable to their tanks, their tanks supported 

their infantry like naval gunfire from ships .. Their tanks would wait 

until their infantry closed with our base and then would edge into the 

channelized approaches. As soon as their infantry fell back, the 

· tanks would fall back. Tanks are of little value in the green zone and 

would seldom advance there. APCs, however, would advance in 

infantry support. However, their movement was also very channelized and they were easy to attack on the flank. 

The enemy would precede his attack with heavy air and artillery 

bombardment. The Mujahideen would stay in their bunkers to survive 

and only leave a few observers in the fighting positions. As soon as the 

observers saw the enemy approach, the Mujahideen would come out of 

their bunkers and man the fighting positions. The enemy infantry 

would suffer casualties and then fall back. Many of the DRA soldiers 

defected. We would broadcast over megaphones "We are not your 

enemy. We are your brothers. Join us." Still, the enemy infantry eventually gathered strength and returned to attack our base from the 

south and southeast and then closed from Jelawor. 

Our defenses were vulnerable in the northwest. Mter continuous 

fighting, our Mujahideen were having trouble' staying awake. At one 

fighting position, a DRA patrol penetrated the position and stole a 

recoilless rifle. The gunner was asleep. Commander Ahmadullah 

Jan saw them taking the recoilless rifle and followed them. Some 25-

30 meters away, two APCs were waiting for the DRA patrol. Before 

they reached their APCs, Ahmadullah Jan and his men, plus another 

Mujahideen group, intercepted them and fought a fire fight. They 

destroyed one APC, recovered the recoilless rifle, captured the patrol . 

. and captured the remaining APC. They brought the patrol leader, a 

DRA lieutenant, to Mulla Naqib. Naqib told him "We don't want to 

kill you, but tell your fellows that we will not leave and this will 

mean death for more of you. Stop your attacks and return to your 

barracks." The lieutemint replied, "I can't do this because my 

family is in Kabul." We let him go anyway that evening. 

The fighting continued for 34 days. During the 34 days, a routine 

emerged. The enemy would begin the morning with an aircraft and 

artillery bombardment from the south and southeast. Usually, they 

would then send eight helicopter gunships to work over the area. 

Then, they would launch infantry attacks. The Mujahideen would 

emerge from their bunkers, occupy fighting positions and wait for the 

approa<;:hing infantry. We were hard to see since we had excellent 
Page 314 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

fighting positions and wore garlands of grapevines as camouflage. We 

let the enemy get closer than ten meters to us before opening fire. We 

let them get this close for two reasons. First, we wanted to be sure to 

get them with the first shot. · Second, we wanted to prevent their 

escape. We laid thousands of PMN mines10 in the area-particularly 

on the infantry approaches from Jelawor. Mter DRA attacks failed, 

they would often run into the mines as they tried to escape. The enemy 

would retreat and we would go out and collect their weapons, rations 

and ammunition. If the enemy was not attacking us, we would. 

send out ambush parties to hit his columns on the main road. It was 

usually quiet at night. Sometimes the enemy would fire artillery and 

bomb us at night but would never attack at night. They did not know 

their way around the area in the dark, so they did not attempt any 

night combat. 

The DRA had a district government post and local militia on the 

east bank. We Mujahideen had our families and R&R11 facilities on 

the east bank since the government would not bomb that area. 

Supplies came from our homes on the other side of the river, but 

during heavy fighting, they could not supply us and we were on our 

own. We could not cook since the enemy would shell any smoke they 

saw. We had plenty of ammunition since the base was well-supplied 

and we could resupply ammunition to our positions readily. Food, 

however, was a serious problem although the number of combatants 

at the Chaharqulba base did not exceed 500 Mujahideen at any time. 

The intensity of fire sometimes prevented us from eating during the 

day-and sometimes even during the night. Sometimes we would 

salvage rati(}ns left behind by the Soviets and DRA. The Soviets 

would leave lots of food behind, particularly bread. Often our sole 

rations would be Soviet bread soaked in water. 

We also had a problem with treating the wounded. We had medics 

who had graduated from a short course in Pakistan and were qualified 

to perform basic first aid. We normally evacuated our wounded to 

Pakistan for treatment and recovery. During the siege, however, we 

could not send our wounded to Pakistan. We could not remove the 

shrapnel and so many of our seriously wounded died of their wounds. 

We had a few Arabs in our base at this time. They were there for Jihad 

credit and to see the fighting. "If you are Muslims, help us collect the 

10 The PMN mine is a small, plastic antipersonnel mine manufactured by the Soviet 

Union. It is pressure activated. The Mujahideen called them Kandani (sugar pots) due to 

their similarity in size and shape. 

11 Rest and relaxation. 
Chapter 11, Vignette 9 Page 315 

wounded," we would tell them. They would refuse. 

Except for the Ta'bils offensive and ambushes, we were defending. 

The Soviets were there in st~ength, but they stayed on the plain with 

their tanks and artillery and seldom committed their own infantry. 

Their tanks and artillery blackened the plain. It seemed that they 

must have had a thousand of them, but they just stayed there. The 

DRA infantry was doing most of the attacking and dying. The fight 

bled the DRA to the point where they could not take any more casualties. Finally, after 34 days of fighting, the enemy forces broke contact 

at 1100 hours and withdrew. In the past, the enemy had tried to take 

us, but never had he come in such force or stayed for so long. 

We lost up to 60 Mujahideen and commanders KIA in the base and 

many others in areas around the base. DRA and Soviet casualties are 

unknown, but we were always catching the enemy in surprise attacks, 

so his casualties must have been much higher than ours. DRAcasualties were definitely higher than SoViet casualties. I feel that the 

enemy finally quit due to his casualties.12 

CoMMENTARY: The Soviets used the conscript DRA infantry extensively and supported them with artillery and air power. The DRA infantry 

was poorly trained and equipped and had serious morale problems. 

The use ofDRAforces as "throw-away" infantry did nothing to increase 

morale. DRA forces had a reputation for passivity on the battlefield 

and desertinga:t the first opportunity. 

The Mujahideen defenses were relatively weak from the Jelawor 

· ·direction, but the Soviets apparently did not push hard enough on this 

axis to discover this. Soviet and DRA tactical intelligence efforts 

appear inadequate. 

· The Soviet/DRA willingness to drag combat out for 34 days and 

then break contact and withdraw is remarkable. Their refusal to 

push for quicker resolution strengthened the Mujahideen hand and 

gradually created a qualitative change in the situation to the 

Mujahideen advantage. On th,e other hand, the fragmented ~ature of 

the Mujahideen resistance meant that the Mujahideen in 

12 Page 6, Afghanistan Report #40, July 1987, published by the Crisis & Conflict Analysis 

Team of the lhstitute of Strategic Studies in Islamabad, Pakistan: "It was reported that over 

a period of one and a half month (sic) ending June, 1987, the Soviet-Kabul troops had suffered about 250 soldiers killed and 800 injured in Qandahar city and its suburbs. They lost 

more than 1 00 vehicles, tanks, and jeeps, besides 13 aircraft/helicopters. About 2,500 

Afghan government soldiers joined the Mujahideen during this what seemed to be the 

longest Soviet-Kabul operation against the Mujahideen for several years. The offensive 

apparently spilled over into July 1987." 
Page 316 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

Chaharqulba fought in isolation, bearing the full force of whatever 

the Soviets and DRA could muster. Outside Mujahideen assistance 

in the form of ambushes against supply convoys and raids on the 

forces in N agahan and on the Zhare Dashte plain would have clearly 

eased the pressure on the Chaharqulba Mujahideen, but there was 

little operational and strategic cooperation and coordination among 

the various Mujahideen factions. The Mujahideen factions in 

Kandahar cooperated better than elsewhere, but as 'this vignette 

shows, this cooperation was still limited. 

The Mujahideen were quick to pursue a retreating enemy and their 

offensive into Ta'bils is a good example. Unless a force has established 

a strong, cohesive rear guard, it is disorganized during withdrawal and 

unable to concentrate combat power. This instant transition to pursuit 

was characteristic of the Mghans when fighting the British earlier this 

century and last. 
VIGNETTE 10 

ZHAWAR ONE 

by Lieutenant Omar and Mawlawi Nezamuddin Haqani 

Zhawar was a Mujahideen base in Paktia Province located some 

four kilometers from the Pakistan border. A 15-kilometer road goes 

from Zhawar to the major Pakistani forward supply base at Miram 

Shah. Zhawar began as a Mujahideen training center and expanded 

into a major Mujahideen combat base for supply, training and staging. As the base expanded, Mujahideen used bulldozers and explosives to dig at least 11 tunnels into the south-east facing ridge of 

Sodyaki Ghar Mountain. These huge tunnels stretched to 500 meters 

and contained a hotel, a mosque, arms depots and repair shops, a 

garage, a medical point, a radio center and a kitchen. A gasoline 

generator even provided power to the tunnels and the hotel's video 

player! This impressive base became a mandatory stop for visiting 

journalists, congressmen and other "war tourists." Apparently, this 

construction effort also often interfered with basic construction of 

fighting positions and field fortifications. The Mujahideen "Zhawar 

Regiment," some 500 strong, was permanently based there. This 

regiment was primarily responsible for logistics support of the mobile 

groups fighting in the area and for supplying the Islamic Party (HIK) 

g:roups in other provinces of Mghanistan. Due to the primary logistics function, the regiment was not fully equipped for combat, but was 

a credible combat force. The regiment was responsible for local 

defense and for blocking infiltration of Khad and KGB agents 

between Mghanistan and Pakistan. They manned checkpoints along 

the road to screen identification papers. The regiment had a Soviet 

Lieutenant Omar (Zabit Omar) graduated from the Kabul Military Academy in the 1970s. 

After the communist coup and the Soviet invasion, Lieutenant Omar joined the Mujahideen 

of the fundamentalist Islamic Party (HIK) founded by Mawlawi Mohammed Yunis Khalis. 

He was a close aide to Jalaluddin Haqani and fought with him throughout the war. Haqani 

ran the Mujahideen effort in the crucial Paktia Province. Lieutenant Omar also served as 

a group commander in Paktia Province throughout the war. [Map sheet 2983, vic grid 

8267]. 

Mawlawi Nezamuddin Haqani was a group commarJder and a deputy to Jalaluddin Haqani. 

He was a member of the fundamentalist Islamic Party (HIK) founded by Mawlawi 

Mohammed Yunis Khalis. He joined the Mujahideen following the communist coup in 1978 

and fought in the Paktia area. Prior to the Soviet invasion, his group had liberated the area 

surrounding Khost and only the city of Khost remained under government control. 
Page 318 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

-. ·~--- ., .. """ , PAKISTAN • • ""-• • 

I 

I 

I N 

\ i 

I 

• : ~~ORIKHEL 

• I \ 

I 

{ 

' ' 

/ 

,. / ' ... -.. / / .... ~ .. ~ ' 

( - ( ··-··-

. 2, 3 4KM 

ZHAWAR 1 

Map 11-13 
Chapter 11, Vignette 10 Page 319 

D30 122mm howitzer, two tanks (captured from the DRApost at Bari 

in 1983), some six-barrel Chinese-manufactured BM-12 MRL and 

some machine guns and small arms. A Mujahideen air defense 

company also defended Zhawar with five ZPU-1 and four ZPU-2 antiaircraft heavy machine guns. The air defense machine guns were 

positioned on high ground around the base. Defense. of the approaches to the base was the responsibility of other Mujahideen groups. 

In September 1985, the DRA moved elements of the DRA 12th 

Infantry Division from Gardez, with elements of the 37th and 38th 

Commando Brigades. They moved froin Gardez circuitously through 

Jaji Maidan to Khost since the direct route through the Satakadow 

pass had been under Mujahideen control since 1981. This force 

joined elements of the 25th Infantry Division which was garrisoned 

in Khost. Shahnawaz Tani13 commanded this mixed force. The DRA 

military units had their full complement of weapons and equipment, 

but desertion, security details and other duties kept their units 

chronically understrength. Since the DRA could not mobilize sufficient force from one regiment or division, they practiced "tactical 

cannibalism" and formed composite forces for these missions. 

Late one September afternoon, the DRA force began an infantry 

attack supported by heavy artillery fire and air strikes on Bari, 

which is northeast of Zhawar (Map 11-13- Zhawar 1). Zhawar was 

not prepared for this attack since most of its major commanders, 

including Haqani, were on the pilgrimage to Mecca (the Haj). The 

DRA recaptured Bari and drove on to Zhawar. The Mujahideen reacted by positioning an 80-man group to block the ridge on the eastern 

slope of the Moghulgai mountains which form the eastern wall of the 

Zhawar base. The DRA force arrived at night and during the night 

fighting lost two APCs and four trucks. Eventually, the DRA became 

discouraged, withdrew and returned to Khost.14 Mujahideen from 

the nomad Kochi tribe, led by Malang Kochi, Dadmir Kochi and 

Gorbez Mujahideen, recaptured Bari. 

The DRA then launched its next attempt from the town of 

Tani. They recaptured the town of Lezhi from the Mujahideen 

and killed Commander Mawlawi Ahmad Gul. The major commanders returned to Pakistan from the Haj on that day (4 September) 

13 General Shahnawaz Tani was from the neighboring town of Tani and enjoyed some 

popular support in the area. He later became DRA Defense Minister. On 6 March 1990, 

he joined forces with Mujahideen faction leader Gulbuddin Hikmatyar in an attempted coup 

against communist President Najibullah. When the coup failed, he fled to Pakistan. 

14 Perhaps this was a reconnaissance in force. 
Page 320 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

and hurried north to Zhawar to take command. The Mujahideen 

from Lezhi retreated south while a 20-man Mujahideen force blocked 

the Manay Kandow pass. 

The pass is dominated by a high peak which is capped with a 

thick rock slab. Under the slab was a natural cave which the 

Mujahideen improved. The cave could accommodate the 20 Mujahideen during artillery and air strikes. The Mujahideen also dug 

communications trenches so that they could quickly reoccupy their 

fighting positions once the firing stopped. The firing positions dominated the Tani plain and were well positioned to stop any infantry 

attack. The DRA repeatedly attacked the pass but could make no 

headway. The infantry would attack, meet withePing Mujahideen fire 

and stop. Then massed air and artillery would pound the area. The 

infantry would again try to attack, but would again be stopped immediately. The procedure would then repeat itself, but the DRA made 

no headway during its 10-day attack. Mter 10 days, the DRA called 

in heavy Soviet airstrikes which continuously hit the mountain top. 

The thick rock slab began to sway and rock. The Mujahideen were 

afraid that the rock slab might shift and crush their cave, so they 

finally withdrew. It was 14 September 1985. 

As the Mujahideen fell back, the DRA established OPs on high 

ground and started adjusting air and artillery strikes. This gave 

the tactical advantage to the DRA and their infantry moved through 

the pass. The Mujahideen rear guard desperately engaged the DRA 

infantry with machine gun fire, and aircraft with ZGU machine 

guns. The DRA continued to advance and seized the high ground of 

Tor Kamar. 

Tor Kamar is within a kilometer of Zhawar base and well within the range of machine gun fire. The DRA thought that the 

Mujahideen did not have any heavy weapons and became careless 

and bunched their forces on the high ground. Two Mujahideen, Alam 

Jam and Muhammad Salim, were former tank commanders in the 

DRA. In the late afternoon, they moved their tanks out of the caves 

and swung north into firing positions. They opened fire afld their 

first rounds destroyed a DRA OP sending an artillery OP scope and 

soldiers flying. The Mujahideen tankers then traversed to the second 

OP and destroyed it with their next rounds. Then they opened up on 

the other DRA soldiers. 

The mauled DRA force fell back and maneuvered through the 

15 Local name for the chalk layers in the rock which mark this saddle. 
Chapter 11, Vignette 10 Page 321 

"bird droppings" saddle15 to the east side of Tamberi Ghar. The 

Mujahideen countered with blocking positions which they held for 

five days. Haji Amanullah Khan and Ismail Khan played major roles 

in the fighting at this stage. 

The DRA Commander, General Tani moved his CP into the Manay 

Kandow pass and tried to reinvigorate the DRA assault, but the 

Mujahideen held. During the fighting, the Mujahideen shot down a 

helicopter, but lost a major commander-Mawlawi Fathullah. 

Mujahideen reinforcements arrived from Pakistan and as far away 

as Jalalabad and Urgun. Commander Mawlawi Arsalah arrived. 

The DRA were getting chronically low on men and supplies and, after 

42 days of fighting, General Tani broke contact and conducted a 

night withdrawal. 

Mujahideen casualties were 106 KIA and 321 WIA. DRA and 

Soviet losses were heavy, but their numbers are unknown because they 

evacuated their dead and wounded. 

CoMMENTARY: Zhawar was a symbol of Mujahideen invincibility 

in the border area and the Soviets and DRA felt that they had to 

destroy this myth. The Mujahideen were convinced that Zhawar was 

impregnable and failed to take some basic security precautions. 

September-October and March-April are historically the best months 

in Mghanistan for campaigning, since the weather is reasonable 

and the roads are dry. August-September that year was also the time 

of the Raj and the senior leadership of the area all made this 

religious pilgrimage together. Consequently, the senior leadership 

was absent when the battle started and other Mujahideen commanders had to take command of the battle. Field fortifications around 

Zhawar were neglected and incomplete. The excellent field fortifications at the mouth of the Manay Kandow pass bought time to 

improve the other fortifications The complacent attitude almost cost 

the Mujahideen their base. Only the unexpected appearance of 

Mujahideen armor at a crucial minute prevented a DRA victory. 

The Mujahideen were able to move men and supplies from 

Miram Shah in Pakistan throughout the battle. The DRA apparently made no attempt to impede access by deploying scatterable 

mines against the route. 
Page 322 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

I 

I 

I 

) 

·I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I' 

I ', 

I \ 

0 

N 

f 

2 

ZHAWAR2 

Map 11-14 

4KM 
VIGNETTE 11 

ZHAWAR Two 

by Lieutenant Omar, Mawlawi Nezamuddin Haqani and Mawlawi AbdulRahman 

On 2 April 1986, Mawlawi Nezamuddin Haqani was in the Zadran 

area when he saw approximately 20 transport helicopters flying over. 

He radioed the commanders at Zhawar and warned them. He expected that the helicopters would land at Lezhi or Darakai. Mter his radio 

message, he saw another group of helicopters, including some heavy 

transport helicopters, flying the same direction. These were escorted 

by jet fighters. He again radioed this information to Zhawar. Zhawar 

had 700-800 Mujahideen combatants, plus air defense forces, at the 

time. However Jalaluddin Haqani, the Zhawar Commander, was at 

Miram Shah. Mawlawi Haqani also radioed this information separately to Jalaluddin Haqani, who set out immediately for Zhawar. 

The usual Soviet/DRA pattern for an attack on a Mujahideen base 

was to pound the area heavily with air strikes and then follow the air 

strikes with air assault landings, artillery fire and a ground advance 

to link up with the air assault forces. The air strike gave the 

Mujahideen commanders warning, reaction time and a solid indicator where the attack would go. In this case, the Mujahideen were 

caught by surprise. .Their intelligence agents within the DRA failed 

to tip them off and the helicopters landed the DRA 38th Commando 

Brigade on seven dispersed landing zones around Zhawar. There 

were 15. helicopters in the first lift which landed at 0700 hours. 

More lifts followed to get the entire brigade on the ground. The first 

two helicopters landed on Spin Khwara plain. Some of the landing 

zones were within a kilometer of the Pakistani border (Map 11-14 -

Zhawar 2). Most of the helicopters landed on the high ground to the 

west of Zhawar. Mujahideen gunners destroyed two helicopters while 

they were on the ground. Following the air assault, Soviet jet aircraft 

Lieutenant Omar contributed to the previous vignette. 

Mawlawi Nezamuddin Haqani contributed to the previous vignette. 

Mawlawi Abdul-Rahman was a group commander from the Zadran tribe in Paktia Province. 

His brother was killed in this action. Mohammad Yousaf and Mark Adkin, The Bear Trap, 

London: Leo Cooper, 1992, 166-173 and ljaz S. Gilani and Fazai-Ru-Rahman, Afghanistan 

Report, Islamabad: The Institute of Strategic Studies, Number 25, April 1986, 2-5 also · 

consulted for this vignette. 
Page 324 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

bombed and strafed Mujahideen positions. Mujahideen air defense 

was not very effective against these aircraft. 

Instead of defending in positions being pounded by fighter-bombers 

and close-air support aircraft, the Mujahideen went on the offensive 

and attacked the landing zones. They quickly overran four landing 

zones and captured many of the DRA commandos. Mujahideen reinforcements moved from Miram Shah in Pakistan to Zhawar ·and took 

the commandos from the rear. The commandos were trapped between 

two forces and were killed or captured. By the end of the day, the 

Mujahideen captured 530 commandos from the 38th Brigade.16 

Meanwhile, Soviet aircraft with smart munitions made ordnance 

runs on the caves. Since the caves faced southeast toward Pakistan, 

the Soviet aircraft overflew Pakistan in order to turn and fly at the 

southern face with the smart weapons. Smart missiles hit the first 

western cave and killed 18 Mujahideen outright. Smart missiles hit 

the second western cave and collapsed the cave opening trapping some 

150 Mujahideen inside. This second cave was 150-meters long and 

used as the radio transmission bunker. The commander, Jalaluddin 

Haqani, who had just arrived from Miram Shah, was among those 

trapped the second cave. 

Soviet bombers followed the attack of the aircraft with the smart 

ordnance. They dropped tons of bombs and, in so doing, blasted away 

the rubble blocking the cave entrances. The trapped Mujahideen 

escaped. The battle for the remaining landing zones continued. There 

was one group of commandos on high ground who held out for three 

days before they were finally overrun. 

The DRA had regarrisoned Lezhi since Zhawar One and had 

fought for the possession of the Manay Kandow Pass to Zhawar for 

some 10 days following the air landing. Mujahideen attacked their 

LOCs and the airfield at Khost while the Mujahideen holding the 

Manay Kandow checked their advance. In first battle for Zhawar, 

DRNSoviet artillery and air strikes stopped at night, but this time 

they were conducted around the clock. At night, they dropped aerial 

flares for illumination. This heavy fire support continued for 12 days. 

Finally, more DRA and Soviet forces came from Khost, through Tani, 

to reinforce the effort at Lezhi. The Mujahideen fell back from the 

Lezhi area into the higher mountains and slowly the DRNSoviet 

force moved through the Manay Kandow. At the same time, the 

16 Following Zhawar Two, the remnants of the 38th Commando Brigade became the base 

of the newly-formed 2nd Division. 
Chapter 11, Vignette 11 Page 325 

DRA/Soviet force launched a flanking column from the Lezhi area 

that moved to the east. This column moved toward Moghulgai mountain on the east flank of Zhawar. There, a regiment of HIH 

Mujahideen waited in defense. However, as the DRA column neared, 

the HIH regiment withdrew without a fight. At the same time, 

Jalaluddin Haqani was wounded by attacking aircraft. He had head 

and facial wounds, but rumors spread among the Mujahideen that 

Haqani was dead. The Mujahideen evacuated Zhawar and moved 

high into the surrounding mountains as the two ground columns 

closed into Zhawar after 12 days of combat. 

The DRA held Zhawar for only five hours. Mujahideen had moved 

MRL up on the Pakistan border and fired on the communists. The 

DRA hurriedly tried to destroy the caves with explosives and boobytrapped the area. They also planted seismic-detonated mines in the · 

area and sprinkled aerial-delivered butterfly bombs over the area. 

The DRA took pictures for their propaganda victory and withdrew 

to their base camps. The Mujahideen returned to Zhawar on the 

following day. The first Mujahideen to enter the area were killed by 

seismic mines. The Mujahideen withdrew and fired mortars, BM12 

and machine guns into the area to set off the seismic mines. Then 

they began the slow process of finding the rest of the mines manually. The Mujahideen pushed forward from Zhawar to retake Lezhi and 

other areas. Since the DRA was only in Zhawar for five hours, the 

DRA did not manage to destroy the caves, but just collapsed some 

entrances. Weapons that were stored in the caves were still intact 

and useable inside. From this experience, the Mujahideen learned to 

make connecting tunnels between caves. They reopened the caves , 

and built connecting tunnels. The caves were improved and lengthened to 400-500 meters long.17 

Mujahideen casualties were 281 KIA and 363 WIA. DRA and 

Soviet losses were unknown, but the Mujahideen destroyed two 

helicopters on the ground, shot down two jets and captured 530 

personnel of the 38th Commando Brigade. The Mujabideen held a 

field tribunal. Yunis Khalis and others were the judges. They tried 

and executed Colonel Qalandar Shah, the commander of the Brigade 

and another colonel who landed with the brigade to adjust artillery 

fire. There were 78 other officers among the prisoners. They were 

given a chance to confess to their crimes from different battles and 

17 Veterans of Zhawar have proposed to Haqani that the caves be restored and kept as 

a museum so that 200 years from now, people can visit them and reflect on their heritage. 
Page 326 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

then all the officers were executed. All the soldiers were given 

amnesty since they were conscripts who were forced to fight. lfhe 

amnestied soldiers were asked to perform two years of labor service 

in exchange for the amnesty. They did their service in logistics, were 

reeducated and released after two years. 

COMMENTARY: The withdrawal of the HIH regiment, coupled with the 

rumors of Haqani's death, greatly aided the DRA victory. Haqani's 

loss, besides affecting Mujahideen morale, cost the Mujahideen what 

little command and control they had left at this juncture of the battle. 

The DRA failed to throw a blocking force on the Miram Shah road, 

although they knew that Mujahideen reinforcements were moving 

along this route. As a minimum, they could have employed scatterable 

mines on the road, but they left the route open. 

Pakistan was clearly concerned with the major battle raging on 

her border and reportedly transported Mujahideen to the border and 

supplied MRL to the Mujahideen who fired them across the border 

into Zhawar. The Mujahideen lacked effective air defense against 

helicopter gunships, and the strafing and bombing attacks of highperformance aircraft.· The Mujahideen had some British Blowpipe 

shoulder-fired air defense missiles, but they were not effective. 

Pakistan sent some officers into Zhawar during the fighting to take out 

attacking aircraft with the British Blowpipe shoulder-fired missiles 

and show the Mujahideen how it was done. After climbing a mountain 

and firing 13 Blowpipe missiles to no avail, a Pakistani captain and his 

NCO were severely wounded by the attacking aircraft.18 

The DRA celebrated the fall of Zhawar as a major victory, but 

Zhawar was back in full operation within weeks of the attack. 

18 Mohammad Yousaf and Mark Adkin, The Bear Trap, London: Leo Cooper, 1992, 171. 
VIGNETTE 12 

KRER ONE 

by Commander Assadullah 

In late March 1986, the Soviet and DRA forces launched a major 

offensive against Mujahideen bases at Krer on the Pakistani border 

(Map 11~15 - Krer 1). Krer is located east of the Sarkani District 

center in Kunar Province. The Mujahideen maintained two bases in 

' the mountain valley named "Shahid Abdul Latif' and "Fatha." The 

Mujahideen could reach the Bajuar area in Pakistan from the two 

bases. The bases served as border supply depots and staging areas 

for Mujahideen attacks against the Soviet/DRA forces in Kunar 

Province. My Asama Ben Zaid Regiment manned both of the Krer 

bases. The regiment's manpower fluctuated depending on the 

r~quirements and situation. The proximity of the bases to Mujahideen camps across the border in Pakistan made it easier to reinforce 

the Krer regiment at short notice. In March 1986, prior to the enemy 

offensive, my regiment was under-strength. Later in the battle, 

when reinforcements arrived from Bajuar in Pakistan, the number of 

Mujahideen reached nearly 400. 

We had many indications that the Soviets and DRA were planning 

an attack, but we did not know when it would be launched. During 

the last week of March, when the weather was still cold and the 

mountaintops were still covered with snow, we detected enemy move-

. ment from the Sarkani direction across the Nawabad bridge. The 

enemy made no attempt to conceal or camou,flage his action and 

apparently wanted to draw our attention to his movement. We later 

found out that the enemy's show of force was part of a deception plan 

to cover another attack that the enemy launched.from Pashad-about 

20 kilometers southwest of Sarkani. We did not expect an attack on 

Krer from Pashad. We prepared for an enemy attacking from 

Commander Assadullah is from Charquala village in Narang Subdistrict of Kunar Province. 

He is the son of Mawlawi Mohammad Amin. He graduated from high school and emigrated to Pakistan in 1978 and later entered the Jamiat lslami faction's (JIA) military academy 

and completed the year-long course. He became a Mujahideen regimental commander of 

the Krer-based regiment. This was the Asama Ben Zaid Regiment of Sarkani District 

(Asama Ben Zaid was a close companion of the Prophet Mohammad and one of the 

Prophet's military leaders. At one point, Asama ben Zaid fought the Byzantines). The 

Regiment belonged to the Sayyaf faction (IUA) and so Commander Assadullah switched 

factions. [Map sheets 3287 and 3387]. 
Page 328 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

0 
Chapter 11, Vignette 12 Page 329 

Sarkani and deployed the bulk of the force to the valley entrance 

facing the Sarkani District center. This was the main avenue of 

approach to Krer and I expected the enemy to use it. 

A mixed Soviet/DRA column, led by local guides, crossed the 

Kunar River at N awabad bridge, northeast of Sarkani, and attacked 

my forward positions in the late afternoon (Map 11-14- Krerl). This 

was where I expected them and heavy fighting ensued as enemy 

infantry and armored vehicles fought with my resistance fighters 

at the valley entrance. Both sides had heavy losses. While the 

enemy tied my forces down, he launched another attack from Pashad 

along the mountain paths to outflank my force. This attacking 

column consisted of Soviet infantry (possibly a Spetsnaz detachment) 

and it moved undetected to the rear of my force and seized the 

undefended high ground on the Spina Tsoka mountains. From there, 

the Soviet detachment attacked us from the rear and overran both 

Mujahideen valley bases, including our main supply depot. By next 

morning, we had lost all our installations and were surrounded by 

the enemy forces. The enemy was pounding our positions from the 

high ground to our rear. 

I had crossed the border and mobilized a Mujahideen force in the 

Bajuar camps and, as the enemy fought for Krer, the reinforcing 

Mujahideen force moved toward Krer to help the embattled defenders. My reinforcements moved early in the morning to the border and 

infiltrated through concealed approaches to Krer since the enemy 

dominated the main road from the high ground. Around noon, I was 

moving with a six-man group when we stumbled on a group of 

Soviets. Apparently, they were a command group. We attacked the 

group and after a brief but fierce clash, in which both sides threw 

hand grenades at each other, we killed a senior Soviet officer. This 

apparently lead to the withdrawal of the Soviets. With the arrival of 

the Mujahideen reinforcements, the Soviet position was threatened 

from the rear. Fragmented fighting broke out in separate areas 

throughout the valley. The enemy began to pull out in the afternoon 

and by the evening we Mujahideen recaptured the valley and our 

bases. The bases were mostly destroyed by the enemy. 

We caught a group of Soviet soldiers in one of our supply caves at 

the depot. We attempted to flush them out and lost several 

Mujahideen killed and wounded to AK-74 fire. Finally, we fired an 

RPG into the cave and then threw hand grenades into it silencing the 

enemy. The next morning we found several dead Soviets in the cave. 

We buried our dead and evacuated our wounded. I had roughly 25% 
Page 330 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

casualties (33 KIA and 40 WIA). I think that enemy losses were 

higher because we captured some 60 enemy small arms.19 

CoMMENTARY: By drawing the bulk of the Mujahideen forces away 

from their base and attacking the base from the rear, the Soviets 

achieved a major surprise through deception and good planning. This 

enabled them to overrun and destroy the Mujahideen bases without 

facing any resistance. But Soviet failure to block the Mujahideen reinforcement routes resulted in apparent heavy Soviet losses and forced 

them to withdraw from the areas they had so easily captured. 

Mujahideen rapid reinforcement changed the course of the battle. 

Seizing and retaining the initiative is crucial to any tactical scheme. 

The Mujahideen lost the initiative to the enemy at the beginning of the 

battle. But, the Soviets failed to retain the initiative and lost it to the 

Mujahideen maneuver of reserves from the rear. This decided the final 

outcome of the battle. Guerrilla warfare is no different from conventional warfare in that a reserve can drastically change the situation 

through quick and effective commitment before the opponent consolidates his tactical success. · 

19 Pakistani Strategic Studies Review, April1986 notes: "Soviet forces launched air-cumground attack on Mujahideen base in Krer area killed 26 Mujahideen destroyed their entire 

armament and lost 42 men after 15 hours fighting March 26. Mujahideen killed 70 Kabul 

and '50 Soviet troops and lost 42 men in their bid to break Soviet-Kabul encirclement of 

Saran base in Krer area of Sarkani District March 28-~.1. Mujahideen repulsed Soviet 

attack after hours of occupation of their base in Krer after inflicting heavy losses and 

capturing three Soviet troops during 48 hours fighting March 30-31." 
VIGNETTE 13 

· KRER Two 

by Commander Assadullah 

At the end of 1987, when the Soviet forces were preparing to begin 

their negotiated withdrawal from Mghanistan, they launched a 

number of high-visibility offensives, which served their propaganda 

campaign which claimed that the Soviet Army was able to defeat any 

Mujahideen force anywhere. To this end, the Soviets conducted operation Magistral in Paktia Province to open the "unopenable" GardezKhowst highway. At the same time, the Soviets attacked major 

Mujahideen border bases. In Kunar Province, the Soviet/DRA forces 

targeted the Mujahideen bases at Krer for destruction. Apparently, 

they intended to establish a border security outpost at the Spina 

Tsoka Mountain on the border with Pakistan to control several infiltration routes connecting the Nawa Pass, Gonjgal and other valleys 

in Pakistan with the road to Sarkani and the valleys of Shonkray, 

Shalay, and Olay in Mghanistan. 

In late December 1987, I received intelligence reports that a 

Soviet-led DRA column would attack the Krer bases. The intelligence 

agents did not know when the attack would come. There were only 

170 men in my regiment at that time. I established security posts 

and conducted reconnaissance along the routes over which I expected 

the attack. Based on past enemy behavior, I expected him to avoid 

night combat and night maneuver. I expected him to attack at dawn 

or later and to use the valley approach. The enemy surprised me. He 

chose to move and fight at night and, instead of using the valley 

approach, he moved to the north flank of the mountain and attacked 

over it. He did this to get behind my forward defenses and unhinge 

my defense (Map 11-16- Krer 2). 

The enemy moved from Sarkani at night in two columns. One 

column moved against the Mujahideen "Fatha" base and the other 

moved deeper in a flanking maneuver to the rear of my defenses and 

tried to climb the heights of Spina Tsoka mountain. The column heading toward the "Fatha" base climbed the ridge from the east. There 

was a security outpost there consisting of 10-12 men sleeping in a tent 

and a small hut. The enemy soldiers silently approached the guard 

and killed him without making any noise. ~he other Mujahideen at the 

Commander Assadullah is the source of the previous vignette. 
Page 332 The _Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 
Chapter 11, Vignette 13 Page 333 

outpost were fast asleep and were caught by surprise .. The enemy was 

killing them when some of them woke up and a shoot-out ensued. The 

Mujahideen at "Fatha" died to the last man. 

The noise from the gilnfire alerted the rest of my Mujahideen. The 

second enemy column had not yet re~ched the crest of Spina Tsoka 

mountain. My Mujahideen occupied fighting positions and met the 

approaching enemy with heavy fire. A fierce battle continued throughout the night. The enemy column was deep in our positions, but we 

had cut off his withdrawal routes. We expected to bloody the enemy as 

he fought to reopen his withdrawal routes. Instead, the enemy column 

continued over the mountain path all the way to Pashad, some 20 kilometers southwest of Sarkani. We did not expect the enemy to withdraw in that direction. 

Meanwhile, my Mujahideen directed heavy fire on the enemy at the 

"Fatha" base and it began a fighting retreat back to Sarkani. By dawn, 

the enemy had withdrawn from the Krer base and taken his dead and 

wounded with him. Mujahideen losses included 18 killed and 20 

wounded (again about 25% casualties). 

COMMENTARY: The Soviet/DRA commander did a good job ·on analyzing the pattern set by his forces in the area. ·Using this stereotype, the 

DRA commander caught the Mujahideen commander by surprise, even 

though he had been warned. The Soviet/DRA commander knew that 

the Mujahideen considered the Soviets and DRAreluctan:t to move and 

fight at night and reliant on readily identifiable terrain for night movement. Therefore, he advanced stealthily at night over unexpected 

approaches. This gave him tactical surprise and allowed him to wipe 

out a critical Mujahideen outpost virtually without resistance. 

However, his apparent lack of coordination between the two columns 

disclosed his attack prematurely and denied victory the second 

column. Had both columns been in position and launched their attacks 

si:multaneously, they might have achieved better results. 

The Mujahideen were asleep despite sufficient warnings because 

they reacted to· a stereotype and pattern. Mujahideen actions, once 

alerted, were commendable, particularly in cutting off the obvious 

Soviet/DRA route of withdrawal. Whether the Soviet/DRA commander's original plan included withdrawal over the Pashad mountain 

route or whether it was a decision that he made on the spot, it clearly 

saved the force from some heavy casualties. Had the Mujahideen also 

blocked the Pashad route, the Soviet/DRA force might have been in 

very serious trouble and faced possible annihilation. 
Page 334 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

c 
VIGNETTE 14 

THE FALL OF CHAGHNI BASE CAMP 

by Commander Abdul Razek, 

Haji Pir Mohammad, and Amir Mohammad 

Chaghni base camp is in Shahr-e Safa District about 10 kilometers from Highway 1-the main highway from Kabul to Kandahar. 

We normally set ambushes on the south side of the road, since the 

north side is open between Shahr-e Safa and Kalat. There was only 

one place optimum for ambush-a six-kilometer stretch where a 

dry river bed parallels the road way. We could hide many Mujahideen in the high ground overlooking the road and escort vehicles 

could not cross the river bed to get up into our ambush positions, 

since the dry river banks were like sheer walls. Although no APC or 

tank could get across, we mined the area between the road and 

the river bed anyway. The high ground of Sher Alikhan Mountain 

protected our withdrawal. Further, there were no villages or villagers nearby to provide warning to the enemy. We built permanent 

fighting positions at this site and we ambushed the enemy at this 

site continually, but they always seemed surprised. The enemy 

convoy would usually reach our ambush site in the late afternoon 

since they left Kabul about 0800. The enemy usually sent tanks, 

BMPs and APCs to escort their convoys. We normally positioned our 

heavy weapons on favorable ground higher up and positioned our 

small arms forward. 

At the point that we usually laid our ambushes, there was one 

road that intersected our area. It had to cross the river bed, but we 

usually mined that road as well for good measure. The normal reaction of the enemy convoy, when ambushed, was to drive off the road 

to the north to get out of range of our weapons. They never tried to 

attack us. Their trucks would be burning and destroyed, everything 

would be in chaos and everyone was looking to his own survival. 

There was no coordinated response. Escort tanks and APCs would 

Abdul Razek was a major commander in the Kandahar area. Several of the current Tali ban 

· leaders once worked for him. His command included Shahr-e Safa District northeast of 

Kandahar. [Map sheet 2280, vic grid 6016]. 

Haji Pir Mohammad was a subgroup commander for Abdul Razek in the Kandahar area: 

Amir Mohammad was a combatant in Abdul Razek's group. 
Page 336 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

fire at random, but they would never dismount troops and push them 

forward. Then enemy aircraft would" arrive and make strafing runs, 

but it would be too late because darkness would be falling. Our 

group and Chaghni base camp was a real thorn in the side of the 

enemy. 

It was in the year of Islam Dara (October 1986) that the Soviets 

captured our base at Chaghni. Our commander, Abdul Razek, was 

not at the base but was visiting other Mujahideen in Kandahar and 

Helmand with a representative of our faction headquartered in 

Peshawar. At 0400 hours, the enemy dropped illumination flares 

that lit up the area like it was day. Everybody was sleeping at 

Chaghni except for the sentries. The enemy followed this with an air 

and MRL bombardment. Early in the morning, helicopters came and 

landed troops at four LZs (Map 11-17 - Chaghni). Some 45 helicopters were involved. These four LZs were located. on the high 

ground to secure the flanks for their advancing tanks and infantry. 

When the air assault forces reported that the way was clear, the 

tanks and mechanized infantry moved from Shahr-e Safa. The 

artillery fire and airstrikes were so heavy that they probably 

assumed that no one was left alive. 

The Soviets had moved earlier from Kandahar to Shahr-e Safa. 

Now, the enemy ground column came from Shahr-e Safa south to 

Kadu, where they turned east in the canyon between Mayantak 

Ghar and Kharwari Ghar mountains. Air assault forces on these 

heights safeguarded their passage. The movement of the enemy was 

very slow since they waited as the air assault forces moved along . 

the high ground to secure passage for them. They reached Kadu in 

the morning.· It took them from 0800-1600 hours to travel the 

remaining 11 kilometers from Kadu to our base. At the end of the 

canyon was the village ofMayu. There, the ground column split. The 

main body continued east toward the village of Bandaki. 

Our base camp was to the east of Bandaki, located in a saddle 

between the Caki Ghar and Dumunaray Ghar mountains. Again, air 

assault forces on the heights safeguarded their passage. The other 

part of their column was a flanking detachment. It turned south at 

Mayu through the village of Shahbed and then to the south of 

Dumunaray Ghar mountain to block our escape and to shoot at our 

base. Their tanks reached our base in the afternoon. As they neared 

our position, they put in the fifth and sixth LZ to not only secure their 

advance but also to attack down from the high ground. . Haji Pir 

Mohammad was using a ZGU on hill 1722. Amir Mohammad 
Chapter 11, Vignette 14 Page 337 

engaged a helicopter coming toward them, but missed. The helicopter went over the crest of the hill where Abdul Ghani was waiting 

with a RPG. Abdul yelled that the helicopter was landing infantry 

and he would get it. He shot it with his RPG. Only four or five personnel had gotten out of the helicopter when he hit it. The remains 

of that helicopter were there for more than year. 

We had deployed our forces to maximize the fire power of our 

seven ~2mm recoilless rifles, five ZGU-1 machine guns, six DShK 

machine guns and many RPG-7s. We also had some mortars, but we 

could not use the mortars very well. A mortar is good against a 

stationary target, but is hard to use against a moving target. Most of 

the fighting was between their armored vehicles and our recoilless 

rifles and RPGs. They were so close that we could hear their Russian 

voices. They were also using loudspeakers telling us to surrender 

since our plight was hopeless and we would be killed. That language 

was Pushto from their Mghans. We answered these broadcasts with 

fire and destroyed seven tanks and APCS. We shot down orie jet and 

they intensified their fire. As they launched their attacks against us, 

they would show their location to the supporting aircraft with red 

smoke. This kept their own aircraft from attacking them. 

Night fell and everything was confused and chaotic as we lost 

command and control. No one knew where the Soviets were and'where 

the Mujahideen were. We Mujahideen fought on until 0200 or 0300 

hours in the morning. Then, as we ran out of ammunition, we began 

to slip away to the northeast. A close friend of Pir Mohammad's was 

standing close to him when he was killed. Pir Mohammad carried his 

body to high ground, where he left the body in a safe place and left the 

area. There were 220 Mujahideen in the base. We had 22 KIA-21 of 

our Mujahideen and one guest who was spending the night at our 

base. Most of the 198 survivors escaped to the northeast. The Soviets 

now owned . the base. They spent 24 hours there, looted it, and 

destroyed as much of our installation as they could. 

Before Commander Razek had left Chaghni, he had sent groups out 

to scout the road. They reported that the roads from Kandahar and 

Arghestan were closed. He sent out scouts again the next night and 

they reported that the roads were still blocked. The next day, toward 

late afternoon, he went to Shahr-e Safa by tractor and then north into 

the mountains and then turned and followed the Arghandab River 

Valley down to Kandahar. The trip took five days. At Kandahar, he 

discovered that the airport was very busy as waves of aircraft flew 

in and out. He was told that the ground detachment had also left 
Page 338 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

and was headed northeast. He did not have much communications at 

that time. In the late afternoon, he learned that the fighting was 

focused at his base. He went to his other bases in Kandahar and 

gathered Mujahideen and MRL. He then took the same circuitous 

route back to his base. As they reached Shahr-e Safa, the Soviets had 

already gone, so he sent his Kandahar reinforcements back and 

went on to Chaghni. The survivors were gone and those left were all 

dead. It was a mess. Everything destroyed or damaged. Booby traps 

and mines were all over the area. Gradually the surviving Mujahideen returned. Commander Razek decided that this was no longer a 

safe place for a permanent base and converted it to a mobile base for 

50 Mujahideen. Five days after we buried our dead, we packed 150 

rockets and went to exact revenge on the Kandahar airport. 

One night, some two weeks later, we buried our rockets or put 

them in hideouts or safe-houses near Khoshab to the north of the 

airfield. We had to do this very secretly, as we did not want the locals 

to know. The next night, we set up our 150 rockets with remotecontrol firing devices aimed at the airfield. The remote control firing 

devices were essential because it is impossible to stay in the 

open area after firing. The first salvo of 50 rockets fired at night. 

After the first salvo, planes took off and hit the area at random. The 

next salvo fired at sunrise a:rid the third salvo at 0700 hoursabout one hour later. After each salvo of 50 rockets, planes would 

fly over and shoot at random, but there were no Mujahideen in the 

area. After the third salvo, the enemy sent armored vehicles into 

the area to search. They encircled the area and sent dismounted 

infantry into the cordon. They found the spent launchers. 

Most of the Soviet aircraft losses were from rocket attacks on 

planes parked on the ground, not from air defense. This attack reportedly damaged many aircraft. Before Stingers, Soviet and Chinese 

SA-7s proved very ineffective. We only brought down two aircraft in 

the Kandahar area with SA-7s. 

CoMMENTARY: · The Soviet advance on Chaghni was slow, but the 

Soviets were finally learning to dominate the high ground before 

they moved their ground force. Apparently the Soviets had good 

intelligence to support this attack. However, the Soviets did not 

block all escape routes and the bulk of the Mujahideen force escaped. 

Mujahideen reconnaissance, on the other hand, was lacking and 

they were surprised. Still, the Mujahideen had plenty of time to hit 

the Soviets or evacuate their base during the slow Soviet advance. 
Chapter 11, Vignette 14 Page 339 

They took few precautions and were not aggressive in contesting 

the Soviet advance. The Mujahideen showed a lack of command 

and control-reflecting the absence of their leader and a working 

chain 'of command. Further, the commander had not trained his 

mortar crews in engaging moving targets. 

CHAPTER COMMENTARY 

The Mujahideen safe-havens in Pakistan and Iran were absolutely essential for the survival of their force. Pakistan was particularly 

important since most of the external aid carrie through Pakistan. 

These safe havens allowed the Mujahideen a place to shelter their 

families, resupply, treat their wounded, train, sell war booty to 

support their families, rest and exchange tactical information and 

intelligence. Pakistan provided forward supply depots near the 

border and the Mujahideen built most of their major supply depots 

near the Pakistan border. These Mujahideen major supply depots 

·were a constant target of the Soviets and DRA. In some areas, the 

Mujahideen developed forward supply depots and tried to move 

most of the. supplies forward. In contested areas, the Mujahideen 

moved their forward supply depots about to avoid capture. The major 

supply depots, however, were stationary and vulnerable. A dictum of 

guerrilla warfare is that the guerrilla should not hold ground. 

Mujahideen logistics forced the Mujahideen to hold ground. 

Mujahideen defenses were built around heavy crew-served 

weapons. The popular image of the guerrilla is a small force carrying 

an assortment of small arms. Most insurgencies start that way, but 

successful insurgencies need heavy weapons. The problem with 

heavy weapons is that they and their ammunition are hard to transport. The Mujahideen became very adept at field fortifications and 

developed shelters which protected them from intense air and 

· artillery attack. On the other hand, throughout the war, the 

Mujahideen had difficulty fighting air and artillery systems and had 

to learn how to survive them-particularly when defending. The 

introduction of the Stinger man-portable air defense missile in 1986 

provided upgraded.Mujahideen air defense and forced the Soviets to 

change their aerial tactics to avoid losing aircraft. 

Soviet assaults on Mujahideen defenses were initially hampered 

by their reluctance to fight at night, their over-reliance on firepower 

at the expense of maneuver, and their reluctance to operate far from 

their armored vehicles. As the war progressed, the Soviets developed 
Page 340 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

better light infantry, began conducting more night combat and.moreskillfully employed air assault and ground combat tactical elements 

together. Still, throughout the war, the Soviets were hampered by 

lack of sufficient infantry forces. 
CHAPTER 12 

COUNTERAMBUSH 

Counterambush is a tedious, time-consuming effort reqmrmg 

route planning, patrols, timely intelligence, counterambush drills 

and flank security. Planning should ensure that alternate routes and 

times of travel are used, that potential ambush sites are cleared and 

that movement through areas is coordinated with local forces. 

Movement details need to be safeguarded and deception measures 

taken to prevent ambush. 

Afghanistan 

Chapter 12 

Incidents 
Page 342 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

N 

t 

KOTOLAK 

Map 12-1 4KM '-----L-......L.-...a.......---1 
VIGNETTE 1 

CAUGHT IN A SOVIET AMBUSH 

by Mawlawi Mohayddin Baloch 

In 1983, we had one GMC pickup truck to support my force. We 

called GMC pickups ahu (deer), since they were fleet and nimble. It 

was the month of Ramadan and we were going from our base in Qalae N aw to Kotalak to get some gasoline. Soviet soldiers were the main 

source of our gasoline. We would buy it from them. Our rendezvous 

point for gasoline was north of Kotolak. We left early in the afternoon 

and drove along the river avoiding the main roads (Map 12-1 -

Kotolak). There was a Kochi1 in our truck who had visited our base 

and we were giving him a ride back to his village camp. As we got 

about 10 kilometers south of Kotolak, we saw the Kochi's camp near 

the river. We stopped, both to let our. passenger off and to wait for 

dark, since we were now within 50 kilometers of the Soviet base at 

Delaram and should not travel any further in the day light. We 

watched as the Kochi entered the woods some 500-600 meters away 

on his way to his camp. We saw some people attack him and drag him 

. to the side. We didn't know what was going on and thought that it 

was a fight between Kochis. "What's going on?" we yelled. They did 

not answer so we fired some shots into the ·air. The people who 

grabbed the Kochi realized that they had been seen and started firing 

at us. We exchanged fire for about a half hour until helicopters landed behind the wooded area. The other group boarded the helicopters 

and left. It was late afternoon. 

We had prematurely and inadvertently triggered a Soviet 

ambush. We were on the western bank of the Khash Rud river and 

the ambush force was on the eastern bank. Soviet ambushes were 

always better planned and prepared than those of the DRA. The 

Soviets would drop their ambush party by helicopter at night and the 

party would walk into position so that their ambush could not be 

detected. This ambush party was probably from Delaram2 and had 

Mawlawi Mohayddin Baloch is from Nimroz province. His base was at Lowkhai, the Khash 

Rud district capitol on the Khash Rud river. He was initially with Malawi Mohammad Nabi 

Mohammadi of the Harakat-e lnqelab-i lslami (HAR). Later, on he switched to HIK (Khalis). 

[Map sheet 1680]. 

1 Kochi are nomadic tribesmen of Afghanistan. They live primarily by herding and trading 

sheep, goats and camels. 

2 More probably, these were Spetsnaz from Lashkar Gah. 
Page 344 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

probably moved into their wooded position the previous night. The 

Soviets suffocated the Kochi who had been our passenger and had 

killed another Kochi earlier in the same fashion. The river was fordable, so after the helicopters left, we forded the river to look at the 

ambush sight. Villagers found the bodies of the two murdered Kochi. 

We crossed back to the west side, got in our truck and began driving 

on the road to Kotolak since it was now night. 

About two kilometers south of Kotolak the Soviets had set another 

ambush in some hills straddling the road. We were moving in enemy 

territory and I considered the route dangerous so we stopped short of 

the hills and I had seven of my men dismount and walk the road to the 

other side of the hills checking for ambushers. If they saw nothing, 

then we would move the truck forward. This left eight Mujahideen 

with the truck-three in the cab and five in the pickup bed. My seven 

walkers walked past the hills, checked for ambush and gave us an allclear sign-a signal rocket. 

The ambush party let my walkers pass through unmolested. When 

we saw the rocket, we moved out confidently. Suddenly, I thought that 

someone had set us on fire. We were in an ambush kill zone and bullets were flying all around us. Two men in the truck bed and the man 

next to me in the cab were killed. The driver was wounded in the 

shoulder. One tire was hit. The driver slammed the truck into reverse 

gear and tried to drive out of the kill zone. He drove the truck behind 

a sheltering hillock and stopped it. I had three KIA and two WIA. We 

changed the tire and left the area in the dark. My walkers continued 

to Kotolak. Later on, the walkers returned individually to my base 

camp. As we were reversing the truck out of the kill zone, the body of 

one of my dead Mujahideen fell out of the truck bed. The next day 

when we returned to recover his body, we discovered that it was booby 

trapped. We had to tie a rope to our dead comrade and drag him for a 

distance, before it was safe to carry him home for burial. 

COMMENTARY: At the first ambush site, the Soviets failed to put out 

flank observers and consequently were surprised by the Mujahideen in 

their stationary truck. This failure compromised their ambush. 

At the second ambush site, the Mujahideen walkers walked around 

the hills, not along the military crest where the ambushers should be.· 

The ambushers wisely let the patrol pass to concentrate on the vehicle. 

However, the Soviets failed to employ directional, command-detonated 

mines or an RPG to effectively stop the truck in the kill zone. Further, 

the ambush commander did not know the size of the Mujahideen force 
Chapter 12, Vignette 1 Page 345 

and, following the ambush, did not pursue the Mujahideen or pushout 

a patrol to determine the Mujahideen's position and status. 

Mter the first ambush, the Soviets knew that the Mujahideen 

intended to move north. It was also clear that the Soviets were in the 

area, yet the Mujahideen did not contact other local Mujahideen 

groups to check on Soviet and DRA activities in the area. The factionalized nature of the resistance prevented the spread of tactical intelligence which may have saved the Mujahideen from disaster. 
Page 346 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

FARZA 

Map 12-2 

N 

l 

o,__ _ ___....__ _ ___.2 KM 
VIGNETTE 2 

AMBUSHED AT FARZA 

by Commander Sofi Lal Gul 

In April 1984, the regional Mujahideen called for a shura (local 

council) to discuss local issues and decide on common approaches. Sofi 

Rasul and myself were to attend as the local Mujahideen com~anders 

from Farza. · The meeting would be held five kilometers to our north in 

Estalif. We were accompanied by 28 Mujahideen armed with.AK47s 

and two RPG-7s. Someone must have been working for DRA intelligence in our area, since the DRA knew about our plans and set an 

ambush on the trail near Farza. 

We left Farza while it was still dark so that the enemy would not 

see us. Our route took us between two hills near a DRA air defense 

battery position (Map 12-2- Farza). We were about halfway to Estalif 

at a point which we call Wotaq, when the enemy opened fire on us from 

the surrounding hills. A DRA force had set up the ambush during the 

night. There is no doubt that they knew the exact route we would take. 

We went to ground in the kill zone and tried to find good fighting positions. The firing was fierce, we were totally surprised and we did not 

know the enemy strength and exact positions. Our return fire was 

· ineffective and uncontrolled. 

As dawn broke, our situation improved slightly, but we were still in 

shock. I had no command or control over my men imd they acted as· 

individuals trying to break contact and leave the kill zone. Enemy fire 

was still heavy. During a lull in the fighting, I managed to find a few 

Mujahideen sheltering in a ditch. I led them to the safety of the mountains in the west. Twelve Mujahideen eventually reached the safety of 

the terrain folds and mountain valleys in the west. Two others and 

myself were wounded. We remained hidden in the valley until we saw 

the ambush force leave that afternoon. Then we returned to the 

ambush site where we discovered that 18 of our comrades were killed. 

Some of their bodies were mutilated by the enemy and most had their 

clothing shredded. Late that afternoon1 we moved their bodies for 

burial. I do not know if there were any enemy casualties, but during 

Commander Sofi Lal Gul is from Farza village of Mir Bacha Kot District. This is about 

25 kilometers north of Kabul. He was affiliated with Mojaddedi's Afghanistan National 

Liberation Front of Afghanistan (ANLF) during the war with the Soviets. Commander Sofi 

Lal Gul concentrated his efforts on the Kabui-Charikar highway. [Map sheet 2886, vic 

grid 0350]. 

\ 
Page 348 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

the fighting, I saw helicopters landing and taking off. They may have 

come to evacuate dead and wounded. 

COMMENTARY: This successful DRA ambush inflicted more than 60 

percent loss ori the Mujahideen force. Soviet/DRA recruitment of local 

agents and informants gradually expanded their intelligence network 

in the Mghan rural areas. Often, agent/informant information was not 

timely, but when it was, the Soviet/DRA planners reacted to it. 

Intelligence was central to Soviet/DRA ambush planning and attempts 

to assassinate Mujahideen commanders. The Soviets/DRA usually 

conducted ambushes based on hard information and seldom placed 

random ambushes onthe hope that a force might stumble into it. 

If the Mujahideen felt that they were moving through uncontested 

territory, they often failed to post route security or send a forward and 

flanking patrols. This lack of attention to tactical security stemmed 

from the notion that they completely controlled the countryside and 

that the DRA/Soviet forces were unable to operate covertly in the countryside for long. This over-confidence cost the Mujahideen ·dearly. The 

Soviet/DRA forces exploited this Mujahideen hubris by setting 

ambushes even in areas located deep inside Mujahideen-controlled 

territory. 

When ambushed, the Mujahideen had difficulty maintaining com-

. mand and control. This exacerbated the situation and increased their 

casualties. Mujahideen commanders often failed to train their personnel in drills and counter-ambush procedures. In this example, the 

commander lost control immediately and failed to regain it. This was 

a contributing factor to the very-high Mujahideen losses. Further, the 

middle of a kill zone is no place to establish a defense. If the commander had a counterambush battle drill where his men immediately 

assaulted into the teeth of the ambush, more of his force might have 

survived. 
VIGNETTE 3 

BLASTING OUT OF AN AMBUSH 

by Amir Mohammad 

It was in 1985. We had a large truck that we were hauling 

weapons, rockets and ammunition in from Pakistan to our base camp 

in the Argandab river valley (No map). We were taking a circuitous 

route. We neared Lora near sunset when we saw a helicopter .. There 

was nowhere to hide since we were on an open plain. The helicopter 

landed and Soviet soldiers jumped out of it and took up positions all 

around us. We stopped the truck, jumped out and took up positions all 

around the truck. We had 13 Mujahideen and there were 10-12 

Soviets. The Soviets had the advantage of better weapons, position 

and fire power. We started firing at each other. The Soviets started to 

advance on us. The driver was afraid that we would be captured, so he 

took a jerry can of gasoline, poured the gasoline onto the truck and set 

it on fire. He yelled at us to take cover. Despite the Soviet small-arms 

fire, we scurried to new positions for cover. Soon, the fire reachedthe 

ammunition and rockets and the truck exploded with a tremendous 

roar. The rockets and rounds were not stacked neatly, but were 

stacked in every possible direction. Consequently, the rockets and bullets were exploding and streaking off in every possible direction. It 

was spectacular. The explosion and flying rounds frightened the 

Soviets. They ran back to their helicopter and took off. After the helicopter left and things stopped exploding, we walked to a nearby village. Neither side had any casualties, but we lost a good truck and lots 

of ammunition and we had to walk back to our base camp. 

CoMMENTARY: The Mujahideen felt that they were in a secure area 

and were driving during the day. Usually, Mujahideen trucks moved 

at night. Evidently the Soviets hoped to capture the truck or they 

would have shot it up and created the same explosion that the 

Mujahideen did. 

Amir Mohammad was a combatant in Abdul Razik's group in the Shahr-e Safa district 

northeast of Kandahar. There is no map with this vignette. 
VIGNETTE 4 

CAUGHT IN A ORA AMBUSH 

by Mawlawi Mohayddin Baloch 

In 1986, we were moving three pickup trucks full of ammunition 

from Iran to our base. We had two motorcyclists patrolling five kilometers in front of the pickup trucks. We were near the border of Iran 

at Shand near Helmond lake. There is a point where two hills constrict 

the road and limit maneuver. The DRA border guard set up an ambush 

there (No map). Our two motorcyclists rode through the ambush zone 

and the DRA let them pass. As the motorcyclists cleared the ambush 

zone, they saw the DRA. They dismounted their motorcycles and took 

up firing positions on an adjacent hill. Our trucks rolled into the kill 

zone. The motorcyclists opened fire on the ambushers to warn the 

pickup trucks and to distract the ambushers. The DRA opened fire and 

hit the middle truck. The first pickup truck drove out of the kill zone 

while the Mujahideen in the last truck dismounted and attacked the 

ambushers. The DRA fled. We lost two Mujahideen KIA and one truck 

was damaged. There were no known DRA casualties. 

CoMMENTARY: When Mujahideen felt that they were in a secure area, 

they would move supplies during the day. The Mujahideen felt secure 

in this area since they were moving in the daylight. Still, they had a 

forward patrol checking for ambush. The patrol, however, seems road 

bound and did not get off the road to check likely ambush sites carefully. The patrol had no communication with the main body, so when 

the motorcyclists finally detected the ambush, they were unable. to 

immediately contact them. Consequently, two of the three trucks were 

in the kill zone by the time the motorcyclists opened fire. Still, there 

was enough spacing between trucks which prevented the entire force 

from being in the kill zone simultaneously. 

The Mujahideen showed aggressive spirit and resolve by immediately assaulting the ambushers and driving them from the scene. The DRA 

controlled the dominant terrain and had the opportunity to prepare 

fighting positions. They should have been able to stand, yet they fled in 

the face of Mujahideen resolve. ·The immediate assault into the ambush 

probably saved the Mujahideen convoy. 

Mawlawi Mohayddin Baloch is from Nimroz province. His base was at Lowkhai, the capitol of Khash Rud district on the Khash Rud river. He was initially with Mawlawi Mohammad 

Nabi Mohammadi of the Harakat-e lnqelab-i lslami (HAR). Later, on he switched to HIK 

(Khalis). There is no map with this vignette. 
VIGNETTE 5 

AMBUSHED ON THE HIGH PLAIN 

by Commander Haji Aaquelshah Sahak 

In May 1987, we were moving supplies from Peshawar, Pakistan to 

our base west of Kabul. We followed the Logar route from Parachinar, 

Pakistan across the Afghanistan border to J aji in Paktiya Province. 

From there, we followed mountain canyons to Dobandi. Past Dobandi, 

the mountains ended and we had a broad plain to cross before we 

reached the mountains near our base. We finally reached Dobandi and 

stayed there for three days (Map 12-3 - Dobandi). We waited there 

while I made sure that the way was clear because the Soviets would set 

ambushes to interdict our supplies. I went from Dobandi to Kafar 

Dara canyon for information on Soviet activity. The Mujahideen at 

Kafar Dara did not have any information either, so I went on to Sepets 

where there were several Mujahideen bases belonging to HAR and 

Hezb-e Islami. These Mujahideen gave us two guides-Akhunzada of 

HAR and Mulla Nawab. We brought up all our supplies to Sepets in 

the late afternoon. Including the guides, I had 31 Mujahideen with 

me. I planned to go forward, clear the route, establish security positions on key terrain and likely ambush sites and then bring the supplies forward. I moved in the middle of the column. · 

We moved across the open plain from Sepets. There is a place 

called the Childrens' cemetery where we stopped to offer our late afternoon prayers. Since it was still daylight, we moved well spread out 

with a distance between every Mujahideen. This was a precaution 

against air attacks. I told the guide, Mulla Nawab, to stay with us 

until we passed through this area and reached the Gardez highway. 

We followed a stream bed through a brush-covered area. We neared 

the water mill midpoint between Sepets and Khato Kalay at 1920 

hours, when I looked at my watch to see if it was time for evening 

prayer. There was high ground on both sides of us. Suddenly machinegun fire opened up in front of me. At first, I thought that it was my 

Mujahideen firing, but then I saw Soviets to the north firing on us. My 

Mujahideen immediately scattered and crouched behind bushes. The 

Soviets fired at the bushes, but my Mujahideen held their fire. The 

Soviets assumed that they had killed all my Mujahideen and jumped 

Commander Haji Aaquelshah Sahak is from the Chardehi district of Kabul ( a southern suburb). He was affiliated with NIFA. [Map sheet 2884, vic grid 3058]. · 
DOBANDI 

Map 12·3 

p 1 ? ~ 1 pKM 

t 

""C 

~ CD 

w 

CJ1 

N 

-1 

::::r 

CD 

Q 

::::r 

~ 

en 

a: 

CD 

a 

...... 

::::r 

CD 

s::: 

0 

c: 

:::l 

S" s· 

s::: 

.!:. 

!l> 

::::r 

a: 

CD 

CD 

:::l 

~ 

S4. 

(')" 

fJ) 

s· 

stCD 

en 

0 

< 

~ 

~ ::::r 

!l> 

:::l 

~ 
Chapter 12, Vignette 5 Page 353 

up from their positions. As I saw the Soviets jump up, I yelled "Allah 

Akbar"(God is the greatest) and we opened fire on them. This led to a 

prolonged fire fight. My Mujahideen were spread in a single file and I 

was the 16th person in the column. Dadgul was next to me, but we did 

not really know exactly where the Soviets were and they did not know 

exactly where we were. We fired at each other off and on. At approximately 2200 hours, we heard the sound of armored vehicle engines 

m.oving toward us. They had come from the northwest at Pul-e Alam. 

. Mamur Abdul Ali began firing rockets in our support from his base in 

Sepets. One landed close to us and the next went further on. The fifth 

rocket landed in the ehemy column.· This slowed down the enemy column. Akhunzada also started firing rockets at the enemy column from 

his base. I instructed my Mujahideen to fall back to the mountains 

near Abchakan and then move south of Sepets to the mountain valley 

where the Mujahideen bases were located. It was 0200 when we 

reached Akhunzada base. Sixteen of my Mujahideen were missingthose who were in front of me in the column. The next morning at 1000 

hours, we went forward and found Mohammaday, who was wounded 

and my RPG-7 man who was killed. The rest of my Mujahideen had 

gone on to Logar. I do not know what the Soviet losses were, but there 

were reports that they had casualties. The Soviets never used that 

particular ambush site again. 

COMMENTARY: The Soviet ambush party probably came from the 108th 

Motorized Rifle Division or the 103rd Airborne Division. Both were 

garrisoned in Kabul. The 56th Air Assault Brigade at Gardez was 

closer to the site, but the relief element came from the Kabul direction. 

The Soviet ambush site was not well laid out. There was no attempt . 

to seal the kill zone. There were no firing lanes cleared, no aiming 

stakes emplaced, no directional mines employed and no indirect fire 

planned on the kill zone. The Soviet ambush was triggered by a lone 

gunner and not by massed fire directed by the ambush commander. 

The Soviet commander evidently did not know that he had a strungout Mujahideen column, which could not mass fires, to his front. Once 

night fell, the Mujahideen did not break contact and the ambush 

commander thEm evidently felt that he was in contact with a large force 

and called for an armored column to rescue him. 

The Mujahideen movement plan was commendable. The commander did not hazard his supplies until he had cleared the route and posted security at key points. He coordinated with other factions to obtain 

information and tactical intelligence. He moved spread out on open 
Page 354 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

terrain so he did not present an air target and moved in the middle of 

the column where he could best exert control. He gets low marks for 

following the guide down a stream bed without sending flankers to 

sweep the high ground. But, when his force was hit, the commander 

was able to ascertain that his column was not in immediate danger of 

annihilation and shut down return fire. This allowed his men to determine where their ambushers were and to draw them out of position. 

The commander ordered an escape to the northeast and then· a move 

south in the safety of the mountains rather than retracing their route 

and risking another ambush or drawing the relief column into the 

Sepets area. 

CHAPTER COMMENTARY 

Successful counterambush is the result of careful planning, battle 

drills, rehearsals, information security, patrolling, current tactical 

intelligence, and deception measures. Movement of supplies needs to 

vary by route, time and composition of the supply column. 

Mujahideen supplies were rrioved on mule, horse, donkey, camel, 

truck and human porter. While some factions had their own transport, the bulk of Mujahideen supplies were carried by contracted 

teamsters and muleteers. The cost of transport was high and a group 

with a reputation of getting ambushed would be hard put to find willing teamsters. 

In some areas, the Mujahideen only had to transport ammunition, 

but in other areas they had to transport food, clothing, and forage as 

well. Ammunition requirements for a small ambush by a 20-man 

group armed with Enfields, Kalashnikovs, an RPG-7, a PK medium 

machine gun, and five antitank mines, might exceed 375 pounds. The 

· weight of required ammunition shoots up dramatically as mortars, 

recoilless rifles and heavy machineguns are added. 3 Even if the ammunition was furnished free, the cost of getting it to where it was needed 

was considerable and the wise Mujahideen commander carefully 

protected his supplies against interdiction. t 

3 ''The Logistics System of the Mujahideen", page 55, unpublished government contract 

study written in 1987. 
CHAPTER 13 

ENClRCLEMENT 

The Soviets developed their encirclement technique to deal with 

opposing mechanized forces. If enemy soldiers abandoned their vehicles to escape the encirclement, the result was still the same-the 

mechanized force was defeated. The Mujahideen were not mechanized 

and they discovered that the Soviet encirclement was usually porous 

and that the · Soviet/DRA force did not have enough dismounted 

infantry to hold them in the pocket, particularly when it got dark. 

However, the Soviets and DRA routinely conducted large-scale encirclements, as part of cordon and search operations, and occasional 

smaller tactical encirclements of marauding bands. 

Afghanistan 

Chapter 13 

Incidents 
VIGNETTE 1 

A TRIP TO THE "GOVERNOR'S HOUSE" GOES BAD 

BY COMMANDER SARSHAR 

The governor of Parwan Province had his residence in the city of 

Charikar. It was located next to the Numan High School. There was 

also a security post in an enclosed house next to the governor's residence and the high school.· This post was called the Wali house and 

there were normally 30 soldiers in it. Everyone called the security post 

"the Governor's House", although it was not. In January 1983, we 

planned a raid on this security post (No map). I had about 200 

Mujahideen armed with a 76mm mountain gun, five 82mm mortars, 

two 82mm recoilless rifles, 20 RPG-7s, Goryunov heavy machine guns, 

PK medium machine guns and Kalashnikov rifles. This was a severe 

winter and we moved across the mountains at night in the bitter cold. 

We came to the village of Ofian-e Sharif where we spent the day and 

planned our raid. I constituted a heavy weapons support team serving 

the 76mm gun, the mortars and the recoilless rifles. I constituted two 

security groups-one of which would secure the area to the north 

behind the heavy weapons support team and one to the south which 

would secure the approaches to Numan High School. !constituted an 

assault team to seize the outpost. 

At night, we moved from Ofian-e Sharif onto the Ofian plain outside another security post at Qal-e Maqbul, which is just north of the 

target in Charikar. I launched the attack at night, but right as the 

assault group was moving forward in the attack, the mortar and recoilless rifle rounds landed in the middle of the assault group. I had 18 

KIA and WIA. I aborted the attack and began evacuating the dead and 

wounded. Coincidently, the enemy had planned a major cordon and 

search operation which began the next morning. Early the next morning, the enemy moved through the. area and cordoned it off with hundreds of tanks and APCs. They encircled hundreds of Mujahideen in 

the Bagram, Kohistan and Charikar area. We were trapped in our 

Commander Sarshar was a police officer in Parwan and worked clandestinely with the 

Mujahideen: When his cover was about to be blown, he became a Mujahideen commander in Ghorband. He commanded a mobile group in the Ghorband front near Charikar. 

[Map sheet 2887]. 

1 There is no map for this vignette. This operation is describe in Chapter 10, Vignette 4, 

"Defending Against a Cordon and Search Operation in Parwan" by Commander H~ji Abdul 

Qader. 
Chapter 13, Vignette 1 Page 357 

position. As the enemy approa~;hed us, we were glad to have the 20 

RPGs. We joined the local Mujahideen in the fray. The battle went on 

for 12 days and we killed 1.2 armored vehicles during that time. We 

tried to break out of the encirclement. We moved through the villages 

to Pul-e Matak at the mouth of the Ghorband Valley. There, we exfiltrated through gaps in the enemy lines to the Ghorband Valley. We 

had 18 killed and two wounded. We destroyed 12 armored vehicles and 

four supply trucks. During the 12-15 days that the Soviets and DRA 

cordoned the area, they succeeded in entering many parts of the area 

and clearing it. Many Mujahideen managed to escape, but the Soviets 

and DRA arrested about 800 Mujahideen and civilians in the area. 

COMMENTARY: Coordination of fire and maneuver elements is a prob- · 

lem for trained armies. It is a bigger problem for irregular forces. In 

this case, the Mujahideen fire S':!pport fell short of the target with 

deadly results. Although Mujahideen gunners who conducted regular 

shelling attacks against fixed targets were able to register their 

weapons over time, Mujahideen gunners supporting ground attacks 

seldom had the luxury of registering their weapons prior to the attack. 

This added greater risk to the assault force. 
Page 358 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

MUSAQALEH 

Map 13-1 

N 

I 

0 5KM 
VIGNETTE 2 

THE BATTLE FOR MUSA QALEH 

BY AKHUND ZADA QASEM 

We started the resistance using v~ry simple methods. We had few 

antitank weapons and so our main defenses were antitank ditches and 

Molotov cocktails that we made in the villages. The people would wait 

in their antitank ditches with axes to sort it out. I remember one fight 

where I became so frustrated with our inability to stop armored vehicles that I set my turban on fire and threw it at the tank. However, we 

eventually received better weapons and set about regaining control of 

our country. In the summer of 1980, we Mujahideen liberated Musa 

Qaleh District and established our base there. (Map ·13-1 - Qaleh) 

Musa Qaleh is in a heavily-populated green zone on the Musa Qaleh 

Stream which empties into the Helmond River. The area around Musa 

Qaleh is high desert plain. 

In June 1983, the Soviets launched an offensive to control Helmond 

Province. They began with an attack from Girishk moving north 

toward Nawzad (which is to the west of Musa Qaleh). This column 

attacked the Mujahideen of HIH at their base in the Far had Mountain. 

:fhe Mujahideen of Musa Qaleh sent their MRL to this fight to strike 

the Soviets. Mter the Soviets reduced the HIH base, they sent two 

columns to attack Musa Qaleh. The column that had destroyed the 

HIH base turned east and moved against us while a second column 

moved from Girishk along the river roads and approached us from the 

southwest. The columns met and cordoned Musa Qaleh. 

We had established a perimeter defense and we fought the Soviets 

for seven days in late June and early July 1983. We lost 4 72 

Mujahideen KIA. Civilian deaths were much higher. I was in charge 

of the hospital at that time and it was overflowing. During the fighting, Soviet tanks arrived from the east and were just 300 meters south· 

Akhund Zada Qasem was a commander with Harakat-e lngilab-i lslami (HAR) of Mawlawi 

Nabi Mohammadi. He was also in charge of medical support to the Musa Qaleh Front in 

Helmond Province. This was a major Mujahideen stronghold under the late Mawlawi 

Nasim Akhund Zada. Akhund Zada was one of the major Mujahideen regional commanders. After his assassination in 1986, his brother Mawlawi Sediq Akhund Zada took over. 

This front was in control of much of Helmond Province during the war and was one of the 

few major unified Mujahideen commands. The front was supported by and became rich 

from the drug trade. Qasem was in charge of medical support and was a member of the 

counsel of the command. [Map sheet 1981]. 
Page 360 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

. of my hospital. They began shelling the hospital and I had to evacuate 

the wounded. We managed to move the hospital outside of the cordoned area to the 'north at night. We carried the wounded on stretchers for about ·500 meters where we were met by other Mujahideen from 

the Baghran front. The Baghran front sent trucks and moved our 

wounded to safety on the trucks. Mter I evacuated the wounded, I 

retlJ.rned to Musa Qaleh at about 2200 hours. The front council met 

and we decided to break out -of the encirclement. That night, the 

weather cooperated with the breakout. There was a heavy gusty wind 

which blew sand around. The noise of the wind and the dust concealed 

us as we moved between the enemy tanks. There were many 

Mujahideen in that cordon. There were Mujahideen from two districts 

and other areas as well. About 2,000 Mujahideen escaped into the 

night.· The dust and wind also helped the civilia:O:s exfiltrate and covered their escape. When we got out, the wind died down. Later on, 

people said that this was the hand of God that got them out. The 

Mujahideen went to the surrounding mountains. I went to Kohe Musa 

Qaleh, the small mountain just north of Musa Qa:leh. 

Mter this heavy defeat, we decided to keep a presence in Musa 

Qaleh but to establish a mountain base where we would keep our 

heavy weapons, ammunition stocks and supplies. We set up our 

mountain base in Ghulmesh Ghar (mountain) about 30 kilometers 

northeast of Kajaki dam. The base was in a narrow canyon leading 

into the mountain. The canyon opened up into a bowl in the mountain. 

The canyon was about 10 kilometers deep. We protected this base with 

ZGU-1s and DShKs. We named the base Islamabad (built .by 

Muslims). 

The following year, in October 1984, the Soviets attacked 

Islamabad. They sent a major column from Girishk and again laid 

siege to Musa Qaleh, while another moved further north and attacked 

Islamabad. There were few Mujahideen in the mountain base since 

the majority were in Musa Qaleh; The Soviets landed air assault 

troops on the high ground and attacked with the ground column to capture the base after three day's fighting. They destroyed the base and 

left it unusable due to all the mines that they left behind. 

We then moved our base and stores to Khanjak Mazar south of 

Kalata-e .Baghni. We distributed our ammunition to different bases 

and districts so that the capture of our central base would not cripple 

us completely. 

COMMENTARY: The area around Musa Qaleh is open, flat tank country 
Chapter 13, Vignette 2 Page 361 

and the Soviets were able to move freely around the perimeter of the 

green zone. The Mujahideen field fortifications within the green zone 

enabled them to hold on for sev~n days, but at a very high price. The 

Mujahideen wanted to control Musa Qaleh for its political value as a 

district capital. The political considerations overrode the military and 

the front still kept the bulk of its force there once they had built a 

strong mountain base. 
;;..-

-~ - - ;;_v.o 'l> ~~ /~o"~~ 

0 

_/ MALEK GHAR 

2§J ARGHANDAY 

Map 13-2 

1 2KM 

-u 

~ C1> 

(,.) 

0> 

N 

-I 

::r 

C1> 

0 

:Y 

~ 

(J) 

a: 

C1> 

Q. 

:Y 

C1> 

:s::: 

0 

c 

:::J 

S" s· 

:s::: 

c 

or 

::r 

a: 

C1> 

C1> 

:::J 

~ Q. 

f)" 

CJ) 

s· 

:Y 

C1> 

(J) 

0 

< 

~~ 

co 

~ 

::r 

Sll 

:::J 

~ 
VIGNETTE 3 

ESCAPE FROM THE ARGHANDAY ENCIRCLEMENT 

BY COMMANDER HAJI MOHAMMAD SEDDIQ 

In July 1986, I took a detachment of 13 Mujahideen to abduct a 

DRAofficer from his house in the westerp. Kat-e Sangi section ofKabul. 

For several days, we gathered information about the officer-his time 

of arrival and departure from his house and the road he took to and 

from his residence. We gathered the information with the help of a 

contact at the Kat-e Sangi gas station. We discovered that the officer 

did n_ot stay at his residence overnight, but spent a few hours in the 

evening at home and then returned to his uriit. We decided to abduct 

him during those hours he was at his house. 

We spent the night in the nearby Deh-Bori section of Kabul. The 

· next day, at dusk, we met with our gas station contact who reported 

that the officer was at his residence. I took three men who were 

dressed in army uniform with me. I had on traditional clothing. We 

went to the officer's home which was located between Qala-e Shada 

security outpost and the Kat-e Sangi Police station. When we reached 

the house, the uniformed Mujahideen -knocked on the door. The officer's daughter answered the door. One of the Mujahideen told her that 

there was an urgent message for the officer from his unit. A few minutes later, the officer came to the door. As he stepped out, I stepped 

around from behind the corner and told him to follow us and make no 

attempt to escape because we would shoot him on the spot. The officer 

and. I knew each other and he recognized me. He was nervous _but 

made no attempt to escape. We escorted him through the streets to 

Qala-e Shada and from there to the Mujahideen base atArghanday. At 

Arghanday, we turned the officer . over to a Paghman commander 

named Zahed. The officer supposedly had killed several Mujahideen 

from Zahed's group. 

We spent the night at the residence/base of Shafeh, a local commander. Early the next morning, at about 0400 hours, we woke up to 

Haji Mohammad Seddiq is from No-Burja Village in Logar Province. The village is in the 

Tangi-Wardak area which connects the Saydabad District of Wardak Province to the Baraki 

Barak District in the Logar Province. Commander Seddiq's village is located on the border 

between the two provinces. Therefore, his command fought in both provinces in coordination with other Mujahideen. Commander Haji Mohammad Seddiq was affiliated with 

Hekmatyar's HIH. [ Map sheet 2785]. 
Page 364 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

the noise. of tanks approaching the village (Map 13-2- Arghanday). At 

first, we thought that the noise was from normal military traffic resupplying the security outposts along the Kabul-Ghazni highway. Then 

Shafeh's father climbed to the roof top and saw that the village was 

surrounded by tanks and other vehicles. Soviet soldiers and DRA militia men from Rashid Dostum's Militia group occupied the surrounding 

hills. We were trapped. Shafeh took us to a hideout near the house. 

It was a cave that they had dug to hide the Mujahide(:m during the 

enemy's cordon and search op-erations. Mter a while, we heard movement and noticed that the Soviet/DRA search party had posted a guard 

at the entrance of the cave. The guard called out and asked if there 

was some one inside. Then he asked for anyone inside to come out. 

Next, he stooped over to check out the cave. At that point, Alam Gul 

(who we nicknamed the Uzbek-because he looked like an Uzbek) shot 

the soldier. The soldier's body fell into the cave. We pulled his body 

aside and rushed out of the cave. As we came out, we encountered 

soldiers in the streets. We fought our way to a natural ditch at the 

edge of the village. 

We jumped in the ditch and faced in both directions. We all had 

AK-47s plus one RPG-7. We fought from this position until1300 hours. 

At that time, some Mujahideen units at Kot-e Ashro, about 10 kilometers to the southwest, started shelling the area with BM-12 fire. 

The rockets' explosions forced the enemy away from the south side of 

the village. We took advantage of this and slipped out of the encirclement through the southern gap and fled to Kot-e Ashro through the 

mountains. One of my Mujahideen was wounded. 

CHAPTER COMMENTARY 

The porous nature of the Soviet and DRA encirclement allowed the 

Mujahideen to exfiltrate. It helped to have other distracters such as 

incoming artillery, sand storms and nightfall to escape. The 

Mujahideen were skilled exfiltrators and often small groups of Soviets 

or DRA guarding the cordon would allow the Mujahideen to escape 

rather than risk a fire fight at uneven odds. The Soviets resorted to 

scatterable mines, ground sensors, parachute flares and other technology to prevent escapes, but Mujahideen groups would exfiltrate singly, 

or in small groups, and regroup outside the encirclement. 
CHAPTER 14: 

URBAN COMBAT 

Urban guerrillas are surrounded by potential informants and 

government spies. They must frequently move around unarmed and 

the government can usually react to their actions much faster than 

they can in the countryside. For this reason, urban guerrilla groups 

were usually small and fought back with short-duration actions. Many 

urban guerrillas lived in the countryside or suburbs and only entered 

the cities for combat. 
VIGNETTE 1 

KIDNAPING A SOVIET ADVISER 

by Commander Shahabuddin 

We were in contact with an Mghan driver from Paktia Province 

who drove for a civilian Soviet adviser. The adviser worked with the 

DRA mining industry. We wanted to kidnap the adviser. The driver 

had trained for a short time in the USSR and so the adviser trusted 

him. The driver agreed to help us, but we did not trust the driver and 

asked him to prove his loyalty. He stated "I will bring my family to 

stay in a Mujahideen-controlled area as proof of my trustworthiness".· 

The driver came to our camp with his wife and family. I sent his family to my village of Shewaki to stay while we captured the adviser. 

One day the driver informed us that the adviser's wife was coming 

from the Soviet Union to join him. The driver would take the adviser 

to the airport to meet his wife. We gave the driver a small hand-held 

radio and told him to contact us if there were any changes. We would 

contact him within twenty minutes of his call. The driver called us c;me 

morning. He reported that the adviser's wife was arriving that ·day 

and that no one would accompany the adviser to the airport but the 

driver. We dressed one of our Mujahideen in a DRAmilitary officer's 

uniform and put him in a car and sent him to wait at the bridge over 

the Kabul River at the micro rayon in East Kabul. He got out of the 

car and· waited for the Soviet adviser's car. Soon, the Soviet adviser's 

car arrived. The driver pointed at our Mujahideen and told the adviser "That's my brother. He's going to the airport. Can we give him a 

ride?" The adviser agreed and they stopped to pick up "the officer". He 

got into the back seat behind the adviser and pulled out a pistol. He 

held the pistol to the adviser's back and ordered the driver to drive to 

Shewaki. Another car, carrying eight of our Mujahideen armed with 

pistols with silencers, followed the adviser's car. We had no trouble 

with the checkpoints since the guards saw the DRA officer's uniform, 

saluted and waived the car and its "security tail" right through. 

We took the adviser to Shewaki and burned his car. The government launched a major search effort, so we moved the adviser again to 

the Abdara Valley. Government helicopters strafed Shewaki after we 

left and landed search detachments trying to find the adviser. We kept 

Commander Shahabuddin is from Shewaki Village south of Kabul. There is no map for this 

vignette. Kabul map sheets are 2885 and 2886. · 
Chapter 14, Vignette 1 Page 367 

the adviser in the Abdara Valley near the Chakari monument (the 

Buddhist pinnacle) for two days. Then we moved him to Tezin, near 

Jalalabad, for a few more days. Finally, we took him across the border 

to Peshawar, Pakistan, where we turned him over to one of the factions. I do not know what happened to him. 
VIGNETTE 2 

FOUR URBAN 80MB ATTACKS 

by Haji Mohammad Yakub 

Bombing is a necessary part of being an urban guerrilla. The object 

is to create fear and take out selected individuals. We got our explosives from Pakistan, Commander Azizuddin and Commander 

Meskinyar were our contacts in Paghman District who forwarded the 

explosives and detonators to us. They used elderly people as our gobetweens to carry messages and explosives to us. 

[1] In April 1980, we carried out an attack on the Radio 

Mghanistan building. This housed the central offices for Mghanistan 

radio and television broadcasting. Soviet advisers worked at the 

building where they oversaw radio and television broadcasting and 

edited and cleared the news before broadcast. The Soviets were our · 

targets. We received a bomb from our contacts and gave it to a woman 

who worked in the radio station. She smuggled it into the station and 

armed it. The bomb went off at 1000 hours on a workday. The explosion killed two Mghan Party activists and two Soviets. It also wounded a DRA soldier. For some time after the blast, Mghanistan Radio 

and TV stopped broadcasting. Mter this, the security procedures for 

the building were greatly increased and everyone was carefully 

searched. Our lady contact later managed to get herself transferred 

to the payroll office of Kabul University. 

[2] The communist regime converted Kabul University into a 

center for communist indoctrination. We decided to target the primary Party Organization at Kabul University in January 1981. Bombing 

seemed to be our best option. By this time, our lady contact at Radio 

Mghanistan was working in the payroll office at Kabul University. 

We gave her two bombs. She planted one in the University Administration building and set the timer for 1100. She set the second in the 

primary Party Organization building and set that timer for 1145. The 

theory was that, after the first bomb went off, people would mill 

around the site and then the key party activists would gather in the 

primary Party Organization building to discuss the bombing. The 

Haji Mohammad Yakub, whose nickname was Mansur (Victor), was an urban guerrilla in 

Kabul. He belonged to the HIH faction. There is no map with this vignette. 
Chapter 14, Vignette 2 Page 369 

second bomb would attack this concentration. Our plan worked as we 

thought it would. Following the blast in the administration building, 

the party secretaries of all the various communist organizations gathered in the primary Party Organization building. The blast killed a 

Soviet adviser and several party secretaries. The bombs killed a total 

of 10 and wounded an unknown number. 

[3] On 6 May 1983, we bombed the Ministry of Interior building 

in Kabul. We had planted 27 kilograms of explosive in a room on the 

second floor of the building close to the office of the Minister. The 

bombs were hidden in four large flower pots that had been there for 

some time. We had a contact who was a gardener for the Ministry of 

the Interior. He agreedto smuggle in the explosives, plant the bombs 

and set them for detonation. We trained him how to do the job. He 

mixed the explosives with limestone and smuggled them in plastic 

bags over a period of time. We planned to detonate the bombs during 

the daytime for maximum casualties. However, our HIH headquarters in Peshawar overruled us and told us to set the bombs off at 

night. HIH wanted to keep Minister of the Interior Gulab Zoy alive 

since he was a leading member of the Khalq faction and his survival 

would insure that the friction between the Khalq and Parchim 

communist party factions continued. 

The gardener set all the time pencils for 2300 hours when he went 

home at 1600 hours. There was no sense setting different times since 

the building would virtually be deserted. ,The time bombs went off on 

time and killed four duty officers and damaged the Minister's office. 

If we had set off the bombs during the day, we would have killed 

Gulab Zoy, Ghazi (his body guard), Sheruddin (his aide-de-camp) and 

perhaps a hundred others. The DRA closed roads around the building for 24 hours and conducted an investigation. However, they 

thought that the blast was connected to some internal quarrel within the communist leadership and never suspected our gardener. 

[ 4] The Soviets lived in the eastern Micro rayon region of Kabul. 

We decided to attack the Soviets right where they were living. There 

was a bus stop in the area wh~re the Soviets would wait for their 

buses to work. We checked the timing of the buses. There was a daily 

07 45 morning bus that drew the most Soviets. We needed to establish a pattern so that we could leave a bomb without drawing attention. We got a push cart and loaded it with the best fruits and 

vegetables that we could. get. The produce came from Parwan 
· Page 370 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

Province. We charged reasonable prices. The Soviets and local 

people got used to seeing us there and buying from us. We kept this 

up for several days. At night, we would work on the pushcart. We 

put in a false bottom in the cart so that we could put our bombs in the 

bottom of the cart and they would be undetected even if the cart were 

inspected. We attacked on the 2nd of October 1983. We loaded five 

bombs into the bottom of the cart. We inserted time pencil fuses in 

the bombs and set them for 0743. Then we put in the false bottom 

and loaded the cart with produce. Six Mujahideen carried out the 

attack. None of us carried weapons. We brought the cart to the bus 

stop as usual. Thirteen Soviets crowded around it to see what was on 

sale. We slipped away from the cart and mixed with the local people. 

The bombs went off at 07 43 just before the bus arrived. The blast 

killed 13, wounded 12 and damaged a nearby store. The DRA 

searched the crowd but made no arrests from our group. 

CoMMENTARY: Many people find such bombing attacks morally reprehensible, yet have no qualms when much larger bombs are dropped 

from aircraft. Neither type of bombing attack is surgical an:d both 

types kill innocent bystanders. The only real difference is in the size 

of the bomb and the means of delivery. The Mujahideen lacked an air 

force but retained a limited bombing option. The Soviets had an air 

force and conducted large-scale bombing attacks throughout the war. 
VIGNETTE 3 

INCIDENT AT QALA·E JABAR 

by Mohammad Humayun Shahin 

During Ramadan (June) of 1981, five Mujahideen were assigned to 

meet with a Soviet soldier in Qala-e Jabar to buy some Kalashnikov 

magazines from him. Qala-e Jabar is some three kilometers south of 

the Darulaman Soviet military base. Our group leader was Alozai, who 

was known as Sher Khan. Hukum Khan, two others and I made up the 

group. We went to Qala-e Jabar and met with the Soviet soldier. He 

said that his name was Hasan and he showed us his merchandise. We 

agreed to buy the magazines and pulled out a wad of 50 Mghani notes 

to pay him with. The Soviet soldier was not familiar with the 50 

Mghani note. He demanded that we pay in 100s. Since we could not 

speak Russian, Sher Khan tried to show him that two 50 Mghani notes 

equaled one 100 Mghani note. He even wrote it on a scrap of paper. 

The Soviet, however, apparently did not understand and kept demanding 100 Mghani notes. We did not have any 100 Mghani notes. 

As we tried to communicate, the Soviet got louder and louder. We 

were fairly close to the Soviet camp and were beginning to worry that 

this might be a trap. Hukum Khan grabbed the Soviet in a headlock and 

wrestled him to the ground while Commander Sher Khan stabbed the 

Soviet to death. Then we grabbed the rifle magazines, plus the Soviet's 

AK-7 4 assault rifle and left the area. 

COMMENTARY: There was a regular commerce between the Soviet 

soldiers and the Mghan populace. Soviet conscripts would sell fuel, 

ammunition, weapons, batteries and military equipment for hashish, 

food and Afghan money. They would use the money in the bazaars of · 

Kabul to buy western stereos, music tapes, cigarettes and clothing. 

Some goods ~ere available in the Soviet PX, but conscripts had little 

access or cash so they tried to shop locally for items they wanted. 

Mohammad Humayun Shahin joined the Mujahideen as a high school student and served as 

a combatant and commander in the HIH urban guerrillas in the southwestern suburbs of 

Kabul in the Chardehi District. His high school student identification enabled him to move 

around Kabul until he graduated in 1981. Then, he was provided with forged documents 

showing that he had completed military service. This enabled him to stay in the city and 

avoid being press-ganged into the army. His group often conducted combined actions with 

the famed Mohseni urban guerrillas. After the collapse of the communist regime, Shahin was 

appointed regiment commander under the Islamic government and promoted to Brigadier 

General. There is no map with this vignette. 
Page 372 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 
VIGNETTE 4 

AFSHAR AMBUSH 

by Commander Asil Khan 

On 28 May 1982, I led a gro:up of four Mujahideen in an ambush at 

the very gates of the Soviet garrison in Kabul. At that time, elements 

ofthe Soviet 103rdAirborne Division and some other units were based 

in Darulaman about 10 kilometers southwest of downtown Kabul. The 

headquarters of the Soviet 40th Army was also located there in the 

Tajbeg Palace. I was a small unit commander in my father's front. My 

father is Haji Dawlat and the Front's main base was at Morghgiran, 10 

kilometers west of Darulaman. 

I selected the ambush site after we spent several days in reconnaissance and surveillance of the Soviet traffic around Darulaman. 

During the reconnaissance, we detected a pattern in Soviet vehicular 

movement .along the road from Kabul to the Soviet headquarters in 

the Tajbeg palace. Just north of the Soviet Darulaman base is the 

small village of Afshar. (Map 14-1 -Afshar) It has a typical subur-

. ban bazaar with several grocery and fresh fruit stores and stalls. 

Soviet soldiers frequented this bazaar and would stop their vehicles 

there to buy cigarettes, food and imported vodka. Mshar looked like 

a good ambush site. Soviet soldiers felt secure there, there was room 

enough to set up an ambush, and site entrance and exit were fairly 

easy. The path to and from the ambush was mostly concealed and we 

could easily reach Mujahideen bases and safe houses in the Chardehi 

District using this path. 

We spent the day of the ambush in Qala-e Bakhtiar--a village six 

kilometers to the west of the ambush site. We had four AK-47s and a 

non-Soviet manufactured light ariti-tank grenade launcher. In the 

early evening, we moved ·out toward Mshar. It was the Muslim month 

of Ramadan when Muslims fast during the entire day. Few people 

were out at sunset since this is the time to break the daily fast. Since 

our ambush site was in the immediate vicinity of the Soviet base, I 

decided to conduct a very quick attack on a single Soviet vehicle and to 

take prisoners if possible. 

We moved through a narrow street of Mshar which opened onto 

the main road north of the Darulaman palace. Around 1930 :qours, as 

Commander Asil Khan was a famed urban guerrilla cdmmander in Kabul. He served the 

NIFA faction. 
Page 374 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

my leading riflemen reached the street intersection, a Soviet GAZ-66 

truck approached from the east on its way to the military camp. The 

truck had five passengers-a driver, a soldier in the right front seat 

and three soldiers in the back. One of the soldiers had a back-packed 

radio. I told my anti-tank gunner to fire when the vehicle was in the 

kill zone. He fired, but he narrowly missed the truck. The truck came 

to a sudden halt and its occupants jumped out of the vehicle, took up 

positions and started firing at random. 

During the brief fire fight, we killed one Soviet soldier. Two soldiers ran away to the southwest toward their camp. One soldier 

crawled under the truck near the rear tires. The radio-man rushed 

into an open grocery store and hid there. One of my Mujahideen was 

close to the shop behind a concrete electric pylon. I told him to follow 

the Soviet radio-man into the front of the shop while I went into the 

shop's back door and introduced myself as a "friend". The Soviet 

soldier was flustered at first, but when he saw the foreign light antitank weapon in the hands of my Mujahideen, he uttered "dushman" 

[enemy]. He kept quiet as we bound his hands and led him out back. 

I recalled my team and we quickly left the area. The whole action 

lasted only a few minutes. 

Fearing enemy retaliation, we moved out swiftly in the dark, heading to Qala-e Bakhtiar. From there, we went on to Qala-e Bahadur 

Khan, Qala-e Jabar Khan and Qala-e Qazi until we reached our Front's 

base at Morghgiran around 2200 hours. We kept our prisoner there for 

three days and then transferred him to NIFA headquarters in 

Peshawar, Pakistan. 

CoMMENTARY: Detailed reconnaissance and knowledge of the 

enemy's movement and security arrangements contributed to a workable ambush right in the heart of the Soviet garrison area. The 

Soviets had not posted a vulnerable point adjacent to their garrison-

-either through overconfidence or negligence on the part of lowerlevel commanders. 

Selection of a small group of fighters with an effective mix of 

weapons, and good selection of the ambush site played a significant 

role in the action. However, using a non-standard anti-tank weapon 

probably caused the gunner to miss a large target at close range. One 

wonders if the gunner had any training or practice with the weapon 

before he used it. An RPG-7 and an experienced gunner were needed. 

One wonders why the Soviets stopped their truck in the middle of 

a kill zone once the Mujahideen rocket missed them. Since the 
Chapter 14, Vignette 4 Page 375 

Mujahideen rocket missed the vehicle, there was no need for the truck 

to stop and the soldiers could have escaped through the small-arms fire 

before the anti-tank gunner had a chance to reload. The Soviets failed 

to react effectively. Stopping in the kill zone under small-arms fire was 

a risky and unwise move that cost the Soviets the life of one soldier 

while another one was captured. 
Page 376 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

•• QALA·E 

\11-CHITGAR 

--' QALA.i ~ I!,. - WAZIR ,.. 

CHAR ...,. 

QALA ~­

/ 

QALA-E / 

PAKHCHAK. t - - - / .. \. 

/ \ 

• 

• • 

• •• 

•• 

• • 

• 

• 

-IS QALA·E • ~ • QALA·E :. 

BAHADURKHAN . QALA·E All MARDA•N'o;;:::=:::::::::::::-""""F;;:=-.s:,----.... BAKHTIAR 

N 

t 

\ 

\ 

\ 

0 

ALIMARDAN 

Map 14·2 

1 KM 
VIGNETTE 5 

REMOTE-CONTROL ATTACK ON A CONVOY IN THE SUBURBS 

by Mohammad Humayun Shahin 

There were some 40 guerrillas in my force. We lived inside Kabul 

and in the suburbs. Most of the men were ethnic Pashtun, but there 

were seven Dari speakers from outside Kabul as well. The Pashtu 

speakers often mingled with the Kochi nomads who would pitch their 

tents and graze their herds on the outskirts of Kabul. The Dari speakers posed as dairy product buyers when the DRA checked the area. 

In October 1982, I was a combatant, not a commander. Our 

commander was Qarar. He led us on a convoy attack against the Kote Sangi--Darulaman road near Qala-e Alimardan (Map Alimardan). It 

· was a combined action involving HIH forces under Commander Didar, 

Commander Firoz and Commander Qarar, as well as fighters from the 

Mohseni faction. The combined force numbered 76 men. We expected 

a convoy from Darulaman to Kabul the next day. We all moved to the 

area at night and surrounded the area. Our mining teams emplaced 

seven remote-controlled (shartaki) mines. Then they camouflaged 

them. Mter positioning two observation posts and designating a detonation team, the Mujahideen withdrew. A Mujahideen known as Sher 

Bach-e Khala (a Hazara) and I were the detonation team. Commander 

Qarar was at the Darulaman observation post and another observer 

was by the mined area. Sher Bach-e Khala and I spent the night in a 

clover field some 200 meters from the road. 

The next morning, Commander Qarar came down the road on his 

bicycle. He told us that the Soviet convoy was moving from 

Darulaman. We moved into our detonation position. Commander 

Qarar then moved to the other observation post. He told the observer 

to take off his turban and wave it when the first two vehicles had 

passed the mined stretch of the road. He would do this since we could 

not see the mined stretch from the detonation position. A moment 

later, the convoy reached the site and the observer took off his turban, 

waved it and moved to a safe spot. We operated the detonator and four 

of the seven mines exploded. The explosion destroyed or damaged one 

BMP and three trucks. The four-man Mujahideen group safely 

escaped from the area. 

Mohammad Humayun Shahin provided the material for a previous vignette in this chapter. 
Page 378 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

CoMMENTARY: It is always a good idea for a detonation party to be able 

to see the target area. Mujahideen communications were often primitive and, in this case, depended on one visual signal. The attack, like 

most urban attacks, was a quick, single strike followed by an immediate withdrawal. Such harassing attacks seldom had any major impact 

other than on morale. It was a good idea to have a small detonation 

group, but a 76-man force to secure the area while it was mined seems 

too large. Kabul was under a night-time curfew and a large group 

could be detected by patrols along main roads. 
VIGNETTE 6 

ATTACK ON THE MINISTRY OF DEFENSE 

by Mohammad Humayun Shahin 

In November 1982, some 60 Mujahideen from HIH and Mohseni's 

Harakat-e Islami launched a night attack on the DRA Ministry of 

Defense located in the Darulaman Palace (Map 14-3 - Darulaman). 

'I'he security in the area was very tight and the area between the 

Darulaman Palace and the·Tajbeg Palace (headquarters of the Soviet 

40th Army) was heavily patrolled. We decided to limit the attack to 

a short-range RPG attack. The HIH group were armed with AK-47 

Kalashnikovs, while the Mohseni group had British Sten guns1 and 

other weapons. The Mohnseni had the RPG-7 we used in the attack. 

Both sides provided ammunition for the RPG. 

We assembled in the staging area at Char Qala in the late afternoon. Char Qala is about three kilometers north of the target. From 

there, we moved south in groups to the intermediate villages of 

Qala-e Pakhchak and Qala-e Bahadur Khan and Qala-e Bakhtiar. 

Our attack position was a water mill outside the· Juvenile 

Penitentiary close to the Darulaman Palace. As we moved, we 

dropped off security elements. Most of the men in the group were 

assigned to provide security during movement to and from the· 

target area. Security elements were positioned at key locations, 

which facilitated our infiltration and withdrawal. Once our forward 

security elements secured the firing area, the RPG-7 gunner Saadat 

(from the' Mohseni faction) took his position. He was about 250 

meters from the target. He fired two rockets at the building. The 

enemy response was immediate. Guards from around the palace 

filled the night with heavy small-arms fire. We did not return their 

fire. Instead, we immediately began retracing our steps and pulled 

out along the route held by our security detail. We then scattered 

into hiding places and safe houses .in the villages of Chardehi. Some 

years later, a prison inmate who was on the DRA side during the 

night attack told a Mujahideen contact that about 20 people were 

killed or injured in our attack. 

Mohammad Humayun Shahin provided the material for the previous vignette. 

1 The British Sten gun is a 9mm World War II submachine gun. It has a 32 round magazine and a rate of fire of some 540 rounds per minute. 
Page 380 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

·oARULAMAN 

Map 14·3 

0 1 KM 

I 

I 

I 

I 

/ 

, 

/ II 

I 

I 

II 

II 

I 

I 

TAJBEG PALACE 

(40th ARMY HQ) 

I 

I 

N 

i 
Chapter 14, Vignette 6 Page 381 

CoMMENTARY: The Mujahideen urban warfare tactics were low-level 

and fairly unsophisticated. Their actions were usually limited to a single strike followed by an immediate withdrawal to avoid decisive 

engagement with a better-armed and supported regular force. 

Survival dictated the tactics, but their impact was political and psychological rather than military. The work and risk that the urban 

guerrillas accepted was great and the results were often. minimal or 

not immediately evident. 

Mujahideen success in the urban areas was due primarily to the 

support of the population and the lack·of DRNSoviet control outside 

the areas that they physically controlled. The cities were under nighttime curfew, but the patrols enforcing the curfew could hardly move 

safely off the main city roads. The Mujahideen had great freedom of 

action outside the main thoroughfares and in the suburbs. However, 

they could not fully exploit this advantage due to insufficient training, 

poor organizational structure, a lack of modern weapons and equipment, an ineffective command and control system and a lack of tactical cohesiveness among the various Mujahideen combatant groups. 

Lack of communications equipment, particularly in the early days of 

the war, severely hampered the Mujahideen. 
VIGNETTE 7 

ALCOHOL CAN BE DEADLY 

by "The Mountain Man" 

The DRA 8th Infantry Division was garrisoned in Kabul. We had a 

contact who was an officer in that division. Over the years he provided 

us with lots of good information. His cooperation put him, and his 

family, at risk. He wanted to defect to the Mujahideen. We helped engineer his defection while hurting the enemy. We told our contact to 

arrange a party on September 24, 1983. He invited the Political Officer 

of the 8th Infantry Division with two Soviet advl.sers who worked with 

them to his home in Kot-e Sangi. The three accepted his invitation and 

arrived at night driving their military jeep. Our officer had plenty of 

Western whiskey and shish kebabs on hand. The Soviets and the 

Political Officer ate and drank and became totally drunk. They passed 

out. Then our officer summoned us. We came into his house and carried 

the unconscious drunks out to their jeep. We drove them to the village 

of Qala-e Qazi located to the southwest of Kabul. Since we were in their 

·jeep, no one stopped us or challenged us. We took the drunks out and 

sent the jeep back to the officer. He loaded his family into the jeep and 

took his family to Pakistan. Then he joined our cause openly. 

We carried the drunks to a hideout in the Morghgiran Mountain 

· village.2 When the drunks sobered up the next day, we offered them the 

chance to convert to Islam and to choose a righteous path. The Soviets 

became very angry and began cursing us and insulting us. They stated 

that "There is no way back from the path chosen. Afghanistan will be 

communist. We will not accept you or your dirty religion." They refused 

to cooperate. We could not get them out of the area without some cooperation on their part and we could not shoot them because the shots 

might draw attention from nearby security outposts. So, we buried 

them all alive. We kept their clothing and papers which we eventually 

sent to HIH headquarters in Peshawar. The next day, the Soviets surrounded the area, so we left and went to Parwan and Maidan. While the 

Soviets were looking for us, they had a clash with Mawlawi Rahmatgul's 

forces. After the clash, the Soviets found where we had buried the three. 

They were all dead and their bodies had turned black. 

After we interviewed this source, the authors agreed that he should be provided anonymity. There is no map with this vignette. 

2 Morghgiran means "chicken snatchEfrs". 
VIGNETTE 8 

RAID ON BALAHESSAR FORTRESS 

by Commander Shahabuddin 

A Soviet regiment was garrisoned in the Balahessar Fortress in 

Kabul. In September or October of 1983, we decided to raid a security 

outpost south of Balahessar. This outpost formed part of the security 

belt around the fortress. I had 62 Mujahideen in my group. My armaments included eight RPG-7s and two 82mm recoilless rifles. My base 

was some ten kilometers south of Kabul at Yakhdara. We planned the 

raid in our base at Yakhdara, moved in the late afternoon to the village 

of Shewaki and waited until dark. We moved out at dark. On the 

way, there were several regime outposts. I detailed a five-man security element against each one as we passed it. The main outpost was at 

Akhozi and others were at Bagh-e Mzal and Qalacha. The security 

elements mission was to secure our return trip so that we wouldn't be 

ambushed by the enemy. 

We reached Balahessar fortress which is surrounded by several 

security posts. I retained a 15-man attack group and posted the rest 

of my command as security elements guarding the other outposts. I 

divided my attack group into a five-man support group and a 10-man 

assault group. We crept up to the outpost, climbed the wall, got up on 

the roof of the outpost and then attacked it. I led the assault group. 

We hit the sentry with a RPG and he vaporized. We blew open the 

doors with RPG rockets and opened fire on the soldiers in the courtyard. We killed' 12 of the DRA and captured three of their wounded. 

The rest escaped through a secret covered passage into Balahessar 

fortress. I had two KIA. One was Zabet Halim.3 We took our dead 

with us. We could not carry the wounded prisoners so we left them 

there. We captured 16 weapons-Kalashnikovs and machine guns, a 

mortar and a RP(}. As we left, there was a commotion in Balahessar 

and tanks moved out of the fortress in our direction. One tank came 

close to us and we destroyed it with an RPG. The other tanks then quit 

coming toward us-they had lost their taste for a fight. We just wanted to get out of there, so. we left for our assembly area. We had a 

Commander Shahabuddin is from Shewaki Village south of Kabul. There is no map with 

this vignette. 

3 Zabat Halim was a legendary urban guerrilla who had been an NCO in the Royal Afghan 

Army. His death was a blow to the Mujahideen. 
Page 384 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

designated assembly area and, as we approached it, we were challenged and responded with the password. Once I assembled my entire 

group, we left. My security elements guaranteed a safe return. This 

raid was on the lOth day of the first month of the Islamic Lunar 

calendar-the Day of Ashura. This day commemorates the anniversary of the massacre of the Prophet Mohammad's grandson Hussein 

and his 72 followers at Karbala in Iraq. It is a day of mourning, reflection and solemn thinking for Shia and others. On this Day of Ashura, 

we thought of our own dead who died defending truth and righteousness. They had died appropriately on the Day of Ashura. 

COMMENTARY: Many of the urban guerrilla c(n'nmanders maintained 

their main operating base within the suburbs' or outlying villages 

where it was easier to assemble and train a group of men without 

government observation. The guerrilla commanders maintained a net 

of informers and supporters who aided their entry and passage 

through the urban area. Still, guerrilla groups operating within an 

urban area had to secure their route of entry and Withdrawal which 

took the bulk of their force. 
VIGNETTE 9 

RAID ON THE KABUL METROPOLITAN 

Bus TRANSPORTATION AUTHORITY 

by Commander Shabuddin 

The Kabul Metropolitan Bus Transportation Authority is located 

oii the eastern side of the city and served as the central bus terminal 

for 130 buses. In October 1983, I assembled 120 Mujahideen for the 

raid at our base at Yakhdara. We had 16 RPG-7s, three mortars, 

three 82mm recoilless rifles and numerous small arms. I divided the 

force into three 20-man teams to attack the Bagrami textile co:rp.pany, the police station, and our main objective, the city bus transportation authority. Sixty men constituted the security element 

which would secure our route of advance and withdrawal. A primary 

consideration of the urban guerrilla is always covering his route of 

retreat. We moved our force. from our base and spread out into the 

surrounding villages. To preserve mission security, only my subcommanders and I knew the plan. Once we were in position, the commanders would brief their men and tell them what to do. The first 

group went to the textile mill. The second group, reinforced with a · 

82mm recoilless rifle, a mortar and some RPG-7s, set out to attack 

the police station at Kart-e N aw. I commanded the main attack 

against the bus authority. As we moved, we posted security elements 

outside all the security outposts in the area. I sent one group of 

Mujahideen to the Eqbal cinema to attack the security outpost located there so that they would not interfere with our raid. As our 

Mujahideen were getting ready to attack the outpost, a roving jeep 

patrol came by. They destroyed the jeep with a rocket. The soldiers 

in the security outpost saw the burning jeep and ran away. The 

Mujahideen captured three Kalashnikovs at this site. 

I led my group to the large enclosure of the bus transportation authority. When we got there, I posted a few guards to prevent . 

anyone from surprising us. Then we attacked the security detachment at the bus park. We killed eight, captured two and torched 127 

buses in the enclosure. Only three buses escaped destruction. We 

also captured 13-14 Kalashnikovs and 155 bayonets! We withdrew 

over our escape route to our base camp. I learned that the group 

Commander Shahabuddin is from Shewaki Village south of Kabul. There is no map with 

this vignette. 
Page 386 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

attacking against the textile mi~l fired their mortar and heavy 

weapons and inflicted damage on the building. Kabul was without 

full bus transportation for a good while. 

CoMMENTARY: The urban guerrilla attacks the credibility of the 

government by chipping away at morale, attacking notable government targets and disrupting the daily life of the populace. The bus 

terminal was an optimum target since it clearly demonstrated the 

reach of the Mujahideen and slowed the life of the capital city 

considerably. 
VIGNETTE 10 

WEAPONS RAID IN CHARIKAR 

by Commander Sarshar 

Charikar, the capital of Parwan Province, has a compact city core, 

approximately one kilometer by one kilometer, and a large suburb. 

The northern section of Charikar is called the "new jail" area. The 

headquarters of the DRA militia forces (self-defense units) was in the 

"new jail" area. Malek Shah was our contact inside that headquarters. 

In October 1983, he promised to get us inside the militia compound 

when the commander of the compound was asleep. I brought 65 

Mujahideen from my base camp for this mission. We were armed with 

two Goryunov heavy machine guns, three PK medium machine guns, 

four RPG-7s, and Kalashnikov and Enfield rifles. I divided my force 

into three security groups and an assault group. One security group 

deployed near the road northeast of the headquarters, while the other 

deployed to the northwest of the headquarters to cover the other flank. 

These two security groups protected the assault group. The third security group secured our withdrawal route north to Ofian-e Sharif. 

We approached the target in the night at 0200 hours. At 0300 

hours, we got a flashlight signal from the headquarters. I clinibed the 

wall and the eight other Mujahideen in the assault group followed me. 

We were all inside the compound and Malek Shah was just starting to 

point out the three rooms of the compound building when one of the 

sleeping militia got up. He saw us and began shouting. We had no _ 

time, so we burst into the three rooms firing as we went. I led the 

group into their commander's room. We killed 20 and I lost one KIA 

and one WIA. We captured 16 Kalashnikovs and I got their commander's Makarov pistol. Since all the firing was inside the rooms, much 

of the noise was muffled and the other security outposts did not react. 

Apparently the other security posts did not know that we had taken 

this post. We left the post before dawn. We went back to Ofian-e 

Sharif and the following night returned to our base camp in Ghorband. 

COMMENTARY: The side streets of Charikar are narrow and crooked. 

Security of the flanks and withdrawal route were always a prime 

Commander Sarshar was a police officer in Parwan and worked clandestinely with the 

Mujahideen. When his cover was about to be blown, he became a Mujahideen commander in Ghorband. He commanded a mobile group in the Ghorband front near Charikar. 

There is no map with this vignette. Charikar is found on Map sheet 2887. 
Page 388 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

consideration and took most of the urban fighters personnel. In this 

instance, 87% of the force was used for security. It was probably not 

excessive. One wonders about the effectiveness of Charikar's security 

system when 20 soldiers are killed with automatic weapons at 0300 

hours in the morning-and nobody notices. 
VIGNETTE 11 

NIGHT RAID ON A CITY OUTPOST 

by Ghulam Farouq 

I was a high school student in Kandahar. I used my student identification to move freely around the city to support the Mujahideen. I 

·would try to make contacts with DRA soldiers in the government 

outposts during the day and then the Mujahideen would use the 

soldiers' information to attack them at night. One day in January 

1984, I made contact with a soldier who showed a willingness to cooperate with the Mujahideen in capturing his outpost. This was the 

Saray-e Saat-ha security outpost in Kandahar. The post was located 

on the second floor of a building in the Bazaar-e Shah section of the 

city. This is across from the road junction of Alizai street and Bazaare Shah. The outpost was located there since the Mujahideen used 

Alizai street to enter the city and the outpost controlled this path. 

I took the soldier with me on my bicycle to Chardewal-some six 

kilometers south of the city. There, we met with my commander, Ali 

Yawar. We all discussed our plan and then I brought the soldier back 

to the city on my bicycle. That night, our group of 30 Mujahideen 

assembled. We entered the city on the south side near the Shekarpur 

gate (Rangrez~ha street). From there, we moved along Sherali Khan 

street near Bazaar-e Herat and from there to Wali Mohammad street. 

As we moved along this path, we posted security so we could withdraw 

safely. We had agreed with my contact that we would arrive at 2200 

hours. We arrived on time and, as we approached the outpost, we 

signaled with a flashlight. Our contact answered our signal. We 

crossed the paved road and posted our men at the gate. There were 

22 Mujahideen now securing the route and gate. The remaining eight 

of us entered the gate and climbed to the second floor. Everyone 

appeared to be asleep. There was one soldier who just had completed 

his turn as sentry and we assumed that he was asleep. He wasn't. He 

. grabbed his Kalashnikov and fired at us, killing one: The dead 

Mujahideen's brother returned fire, killing the soldier and two of his 

sleeping comrades. We captured four other DRA soldiers plus nine 

Kalashnikovs and a pistol. My contact deserted to us. 

Ghulam Farouq was a urban guerrilla in Kandahar. He belonged to the Islamic Movement 

(HI-- Harakat-1 lslami) of Ayatollah Shaikh Asef Muhseni which is a minority Shia Muslim 

faction. His nickname is Gulalai. There is no map with this vignette. 
Page 390 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

The firing alerted DRA forces and it would be hard to leave the city 

carrying a body, so we started to take the body to a safe house where 

we could leave it for the night. As we were moving down the street, one 

of our four captives escaped. A Mujahideen tried to fire at him, but 

discovered that he was out of ammunition. We knew that the escaped 

DRA soldier would report our whereabouts to the authorities and, 

since he escaped near the safe house, we could not now risk leaving the 

body there. So we left the body hidden near a bakery. We covered the 

blood trail with dirt and then withdrew along the same route we 

entered. We exited the city at 0200 hours. 

Since the government knew that we had left our dead behind, they 

blocked all entrances into the city. We tried to return for our dead the 

next night but could not get in. On the third night, we tried a different route from the north of town through the Chawnay suburbs. We 

traveled from Kalacha-e Mirza to Chawnay. We got into the city and 

we went to the bakery. The government had not found the body, so we 

retrieved it and took it outside of town for a decent burial. The person 

who was killed was Hafizullah-a graduate of Kabul university. 

CoMMENTARY: Movement through a city is high risk unless the route 

is secured. In this case, over two-thirds of the available force secured 

the route. This got the force out safely. On the other hand, prisoner 

security was not too good. Prisoners should be bound, gagged and 

roped together in small groups for firm control. If possible, they should 

be blindfolded so that they remain disoriented and unable to give much 

immediate information should they escape. Finally, a raiding force 

should be kept. small, but the correlation of Mujahideen to DRA was 

almost one to one. Surprise gave the Mujahideen an advantage, but 

the non-sleeping soldier offset that advantage. 
Vignette 12 

Raid on Kandahar Communications Center 

by Ghulam Farouq 

I continued to use my high school student identification to get 

around Kandahar. I would deliver messages for the Mujahideen and 

try to contact DRA soldiers who might give me valuable information or 

agree to cooperate with the resistance. In August 1984, I again found 

a DRA soldier who wanted to cooperate. His name was Hanif and he 

worked in the Kandahar Telephone Exchange Center. He and his 

friend in the DRA agreed to help us, so I took Hanif to our base south 

of the city in Chardewal to talk to my commander, Ali Yawar. Ali 

Yawar said that the exchange was too strong to take in a raid, but · 

Hanif said that he and his friends would help. 

Several nights later, Ali Yawar assembled 120 Muja:hideen for the 

raid. We used the northern approach from Kalacha-e Mirza 

Mohammad Khan to Chawnay suburb. From Chawnay, we went to 

Topkhana-the Shia section of the city. Then we moved down Bala 

street. Ali Yawar posted about 100 Mujahideen as security along our 

route. Finally, we arrived at a point directly across from the outpost 

which guarded the telephone exchange. We gave our flashlight signal and Hanif answered it. Ali Yawar posted additional security and 

then we crossed the street one at a time. Twelve of us went inside the 

walled compound. It had a guard house and other buildings. Hanif 

took us all into the guard house. We sat there while the roving DRA 

security patrol passed outside. As usual, the security patrol came 

from the east and passed by the compound. They did not notice 

anything unusual. Hanif told us to remain quiet since another 

roving patrol was due from the west. We waited until they passed. 

There were three other sentries inside the compound that we had 

to neutralize. Hanif had held a tea break during the three previous 

nights. After the two roving patrols passed, the sentries would gather individually in the guard house to talk and drink Hanif's tea 

and eat his cakes. As the first sentry entered the guard house, we 

overpowered him, bound and gagged him and took him to the outside 

security group who took him away. In this fashion, we got rid of the 

three sentries. 

We spent some 35 minutes in the guard room dodging the patrols 

Ghulam Farouq contributed to. the previous vignette. There is no map with this vignette. 
Page 392 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

and getting rid of the sentries. We exited the guard room carrying our 

jerry cans of gasoline. We planned to burn down the telephone 

exchange and surrounding compound. As we entered the main telephone exchange building, the guard who was sleeping inside woke up. 

As we were climbing the stairs to the second floor, he took his 

Kalashnikov and began shooting. He killed Mohammad N abi from 

Chardewahl and Sherandam. He wounded Ghulam Reza. Things 

became very chaotic at that point. We were firing in all directions and 

other people were firing back. No one knew what was going on. We 

grabbed nine Kalashnikovs and our dead and wounded and left. In our 

haste, we did not set anything on fire. We retraced our steps and 

reached Kalacha-e Mirza Mohammad Khan about 0230 in the morning. The next day, we learned that we killed four DRA soldiers plus 

some of their relatives who were staying there with them. 

COMMENTARY: The Mujahideen had a good movement plan through 

the city, but no plan for action once they were inside the compound. 

Consequently, there was no rehearsal before the raid. The commander 

left the critical inside plan to the collaborator-which is not always a 

good idea. In effect, the commander surrendered his command to an 

outsider at the critical phase of the raid. The raiding force spent 35 

minutes all together inside the guard house. This is very risky. The 

concentrated raiding force was very vulnerable in case the collaborator 

had not really turned. Further, sleepers don't always sleep throughout 

the night and guard houses get a lot of visitors. The raiders needed a 

covering force inside the compound. Maybe there was no other way to 

neutralize the other sentries, but this was high risk to the raiding 

party. The collaborator should have known about the sentry inside the 

telephone exchange, but apparently made no plan to silence him before 

the force entered the building. A raiding force needs to get in and out 

in a hurry. Since the commander had abrogated his command for the 

critical phase, when things went bad, everyone acted on his own. The 

Mujahideen evacuation of dead and wounded and their capture of 

enemy weapons is commendable, but no one took 30 seconds to spill 

some gasoline and light a match. The main objective was to torch the 

exchange-and that did not happen. 
VIGNETTE 13 

ATTACK ON KHAD HEADQUARTERS 

by Mohammad Humayun Shahin 

On the evening of 13 August 1986, I led a five-man attack on the 

KHAD headquarters in Kabul. The building of the First Directorate of 

the KHAD was located near Darulaman at Alia uddin in the south of 

Kabul. The directorate worked round the clock and was located in a 

well-protected part of town (Map 14-4 - KHAD). Therefore, we had to 

use a small group and hit the target and leave. We took an RPG-7 

grenade launcher and four AK-47s. Our plan was to sneak up on the 

building at night, fire a rocket at the building and leave. In the group 

were my brother, Nurullah, Mamur Abdul, Shah Mohammad and 

Mohammad Zaher. 

I had an underground headquarters in Qala-'e Ch:ltgar Village, 

which is located some 2.5 kilometers from the western edge of Kabul. 

We kept our weapons there. After each mission, we would clean and 

lubricate our weapons and then wrap them in cotton cloth and then 

put them into sealed plastic bags. We would hide the plastic bags in 

sewer pipes and other out-of-the-way, hidden spots. We prepared for 

the mission, took out our weapons and waited for dark. We left Qalae Chitgar in the late evening. The village is some four kilometers west 

of the target building. When we reached a concealed area outside the 

KHAD building, I put my security and RPG gunner in position. My 

regular RPG gunner was absent and so I had to assign another 

Mujahideen to fire the RPG. Since we were urban guerrillas, we 

did not have much opportunity for target practice and the gunner 

had never fired the RPG before .. I served as his assistant gunner. I 

carried his rockets and helped him load the weapon. From the lights 

in the windows, I judged that the second floor was the most crowded 

and told him to aim for a second floor window. I did not have any ear 

protectors for any of us, so I wanted the gunner to keep his mouth 

open during the firing to equalize the pressure. In order to do this, I 

told him to loudly chant "Allahu Akbar" [God is the greatest] three 

times before firing. My new gunner, who was a Shia, smiled and said 

he would do so but would add ''Ya Ali" at the end of the litany.4 

Mohammad Hurriayun Shahin contributed to other vignettes in this chapter. 

4 "Ya Ali" is a saying commonly chanted by Shia when asking for heavenly help. 
Page 394 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

KHAD 

Map 14-4 

0 1 KM 

• 

• • • • 

• • 

N 

I 
Chapter 14, Vignette 13 Page 395 

My gunner aimed, chanted and fired the RPG-7. The rocket flew, 

but instead of hitting the second floor, it hit the fourth floor. A major 

commotion ensued, but no one fired at us. We immediately left the 

area and withdrew to our base. Later on, we were told that more than 

20 people had been killed or wounded by our attack. 

COMMENTARY: There are better sites for weapons instruction and qualification than in the middle of a mission. In this case, the target was 

large enough that it was difficult to miss. Still, the gunner was off by 

two stories. Training to standard was a constant problem for 

Mujahideen commanders. The best training was conducted in training 

camps in Pakistan or in mountain bases. Unless urban guerrillas were 

sent out for training, they had very little live-fire training other than 

actual combat. Usually, urban guerrillas would detail a large security 

party to hold the withdrawal route. · In this case, the five-man teain 

relied on local contacts to watch the area rather than posting route 

·security. 
Vignette 14 

Raid on 15 Division Garrison 

by Commander Akhtarjhan 

The DRA 15th Infantry Division was garrisoned in Kandahar city. 

We had contacts within the division. In the fall of 1987, our contacts 

invited us to come and seize the weapons from the division's military 

police company. We gathered about 100 Mujahideen for the operation. I commanded a group of 15 within the larger group. We crossed 

the Argandab River from our base camp at Chaharqulba to Baha 

Walisaheb and, from there, we went through the suburb of Chawnay. 

Local guerrillas secured our passage through Chawnay. We finally 

reached the division's main garrison. We waited until the moon set 

around midnight. The military police company building was at the 

end of the main compound. We crept to the building and saw that our 

contacts had placed a ladder against the wall for us. Some 50 of our 

group took up positions outside the compound while our raiding 

group of 50 climbed the ladder up onto the roof of the building. Then 

we climbed down from the roof inside the compound walls. 

Some of our contacts were on sentry duty, so we had no troubles. 

Our contacts met us and led us into the barracks building. We assembled in a large empty room. Our contacts then took us to different 

rooms where the soldiers were sleeping-five or six soldiers per room. 

Their weapons were stored in the rooms. We took their weapons. Next 

to the barracks was a larger arms room. Mter disarming the sleeping 

soldiers, we raided the arms room and took hundreds of weapons. We 

then started carrying all the weapons onto the roof and passing them 

down to our fellows outside the compound walls. While we were doing 

this, the company political officer got out of bed and saw us. He started to make a noise, so we killed him with some of the bayonets. We finished getting the weapons out and left for our base camp. Our contacts 

deserted the DRA and came with us. We had some Arabs who were 

with us for jihad credit. They had a video camera and all.they wanted 

to do was to take videos. They were of no value to us. 

Commander Akhtarjhan was a Jamiat-e-lslami (JIA} commander in Arghandab District 

northwest of Kandahar. He was an elementary school student when he joined the jihad at 

the age of twelve. At end of the war, he was 25 years old and a commander. He joined 

the Jihad since he had two brothers in the Jihad and they were both killed. He took their 

place as family tradition dictated. He served under Mulla Naqib, the most powerful Jamiat 

commander in the area. There is no map with this vignette. Kandahar map sheet is 2180. 
Chapter 14, Vignette 14 Page 397 

CoMMENTARY: The Mujahideen penetration of the DRA was essential 

for successful raids like this. Entering a sleeping compound is always 

a high-risk proposition since someone is always awake, or wakes up, 

besides the sentries. A secure approach and withdrawal route is essential to urban guerrillas. Having local guerrillas secure the route 

allowed the force to bring enough people to carry the weapons without 

worrying about being ambushed on the way out. 

CHAPTER COMMENTARY 

Urban combat is difficult for the urban guerrilla and the regular 

force. Throughout the war, the Soviets and DRA were never able to 

completely control Kandahar and Herat. Finally, the Soviets dealt 

with the Herat guerrillas by bombing 75% of the city into rubble. That 

still failed to stop the urban guerrilla. The DRA had more success in 

controlling Kabul-but still were unable to stop the rocket attacks and 

guerrilla actions. On the other hand, surviving urban guerrillas are 

harder to find to interview. The urban guerrilla must be anonymous 

and ruthless to· survive. The Soviets and DRA devoted a great deal of 

effort to finding and eliminating the -urban guerrilla. 
CHAPTER 15 

CONCLUSION 

"As a nation, we believed that history repeats itself. What 

happened in the 19th Century to the invading British would also be 

the fate of the Soviet invaders. Philosophically, the Soviets believed 

that history is unidirectional, progressive and does not repeat itself. 

History did repeat itself and we· did prevail." 

General Abdul Rahim Wardak 

The Mujahideen understood that guerrilla war is a contest of 

endurance and national will. Battlefield victory is almost irrelevant, 

provided that the guerrilla survives to fight the next of a thousand 

battles before passing·the torch to his children. The Mujahideen did 

not necessarily expect to win this war but fought because it was the 

right thing to do-it was a religious and national obligation. They 

accepted an asymmetry of casualties which eventually, but unexpectedly, led to the Soviet withdrawal. 

In many respects, the tactics of the Anglo-Afghan Wars (1839 

1842, 1878-1880, 1919) still applied. Technology has added range 

and accuracy, but the terrain still dictates tactics and the Mujahideen 

were quite comfortable applying their time-honored tactics against a 

modern foe. Much more innovation was required from the Soviet 

forces. Two modern systems, the helicopter and the antipersonnel 

mine, created severe tactical problems which were outside the 

Mujahideen historical experience. Tactical innovation occurs only· 

where tactical innovation is required and the Mujahideen eventually 

found ways to work around the problem technology. Where innovation was not required, the Mujahideen stayed with the tried and true. 

Thus the basic Mujahideen ambush and pursuit were little changed 

from last century whereas their actions against an air assault or a 

fortified security post were quickly developed out of necessity. 
Page 400 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

Technology 

Technology can provide advantages but is not decisive in this type 

of war. Soviet smart bombs had a decided impact when an appropriate target set could be identified. U;S.-supplied, shoulder fired 

Stinger air defense missiles, in the hands of the Mujahideen, created 

a great deal of consternation and led to a dramatic change in Soviet 

air tactics. Neither system, however, was a war winner. The Soviet 

equipment was designed for a different war on different terrain. It 

failed to function optimally in the mountains and deserts of 

Mghanistan. The Kalashnikov assault rifle was not always better 

. than the World War !-designed British bolt-action Enfield rifle. The 

Enfield shot further accurately and would penetrate flak jackets 

designed to stop Kalashnikov bullets. 

The RPG-7 antitank grenade launcher was the Mujahideen weapon 

of choice. It is a light-weight technology killer that destroys tanks, 

armored personnel carriers, trucks and helicopters. The Soviets and 

DRA tried to stay at least 300 meters away from the Mujahideen-out 

of Kalashnikov and RPG-7 range. This tactical timidity led to 

Mujahideen acquisition of crew-served weapons. Over time, heavy 

machine guns, recoilless rifles, mortars and portable multiple rocket 

launcher systems became an essential part of the Mujahideen arsenal 

which the Mujahideen used to pin their enemy in place in order to get 

close enough to use their Kalashnikovs and RPGs. Crew-served 

weapons also limited guerrilla mobility. 

Soviet high performance jet fighters and bombers played a significant strategic role, but not a tactically significant one. The Soviets 

used their air forces to devastate the countryside and force the 

populace to leave in order to deny food to the Mujahideen. The Soviet 

air force destroyed farms, crops, animal herds, orchards and irrigation systems and forced millions of people to flee. The Mujahideen 

were then forced to carry their rations along with the other impedimenta of war. However, the Mujahideen seldom presented a target 

set that the Soviet air force or artillery could fully exploit to influence 

the tactical fight. 

Technology did serve the Soviets as a force multiplier. Besieged 

garrisons could be maintained indefinitely by aerial resupply. Carpet 

bombing could stave off immediate disaster. Helicopter medical evacuation could save personnel who could later be returned to duty. 

Sensors could provide reconnaissance data in isolated areas .. 
Chapter 15 Page 401 

Disunity of Command 

The Mujahideen were nominally divided into seven main factions, 

but the disunity was much greater. There were factions within the 

factions. Old disputes and disagreements were not always put aside 

for the duration of the war. There were frequent armed clashes 

between Mujahideen of different factions. The reputation of certain 

factions was that they were more interested in fighting other 

Mujahideen than Soviets. Still, the lSI struggled to coordinate the 

actions of the various factions into some comprehensive plan. In 

some combat zones, such as Kandahar, the Mujahideen of different 

factions cooperated readily despite the politics of their factions. 

In the Vietnam War, the North Vietnamese and VietCong were 

controlled by a strict chain of command in a clear hierarchy. This was 

considered a strength of the communist forces and the United States 

spent a lot of effort trying to find and decapitate the central leadership. The Mujahideen structure would be difficult to fit into a lineand-block chart and there was never a central leadership that was 

critical to the cause. Yet this inefficient disunity may have been a 

strength of the Mujahideen. No matter which commanders or leaders were killed, the Mujahideen effort would continue and the Soviets 

would never be short of enemies. 

On the tact~cal level, the Mujahideen were prepared for a long 

war. Their goal was to hit, survive and fight again. Thus; the 

Mujahideen could not exploit. success. After a victory, they went 

home. Group leaders, let alone loose coalitions, could not hold a force 

together for long after a fight. As was earlier noted by the British 

fighting the hill tribes, the mountain warriors could not stay together in victory or defeat. Thus, tactical victory could not be converted 

into operational gain. 

Role of Military Professionals 

Not more than 15% of the Mujahideen tactical leaders were 

professional military officers. However, the Afghan military officer 

corps played a major role in stalemating or defeating the Soviet 

invasion. The most important role oftheAfghan military officers who 

stayed in uniform was their lack of cooperation with the government 

and their subversion directed against the communist regime and 

its Soviet backers. In 1978 and 1979, Afghan military officers staged· 

numerous, spontaneous uprisings against the regime in · Herat, 

Paktia, Asmar, Bala-hessar (in Kabul) and many others sites. Many 

Afghan military officers passed information to the Mujahideen. In 
Page 402 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

the mid-1980s, the entire leadership ofthe Intelligence Directorate of 

the Ministry of Defense, including the head of the directorate 

(General Khalil-who was later executed by the regime), was arrested for its secret collaboration with the Mujahideen. Most of the 

serving Mghan officers refused communist party membership. Many 

of those who were forced to join the party were not loyal to the 

regime. Many of them secretly carried membership cards in one of 

the Mujahideen factions. Such lack of cooperation foiled all efforts by 

the Soviet Union to create a viable, indigenous military power in 

Mghanistan. Consequently the Soviet Union was forced to use mostly its own soldiers to carry the fight to the Mujahideen. 

Mghan military officers who openly joined the Mujahideen faced 

many obstacles in integrating fully into the resistance hierarchy, 

based in Pakistan. Some faction leaders saw these former military 

officers as a challenge to their leadership and their factional 

interests and tried to sideline the professionals. Factions with a 

fundamentalist Islamic orientation were generally more opposed to 

accepting those military officers who had trained in and served under 

the old regimes. Therefore, many well-trained military officers who 

could bring effective leadership and organization to the ranks of the 

resistance forces, were sidelined by the factional politics of the jihad. 

Nevertheless, the former officers proved to be the most effective 

tactical and operational leaders that the Mujahideen had during the 

long years of war with the Soviet forces. 

Logistics 

Initially, the Mujahideen lived in the villages they defended and 

the villagers provided their food and shelter. Ammunition, weapons 

and other material came from the local bazaar or from Iran or 

Pakistan. The Soviets .decided to break this link between the populace and the guerrilla by driving the populace out of the countryside. 

Soviet air and artillery attacked villages, standing crops, orchards, 

animal herds, granaries, water mills and irrigation systems. 

Eventually the populace was driven out of many rural areas and the 

Mujahideen could no longer readily subsist in these areas. With the 

agricultural system destroyed, the Mujahideen had to transport 

their own food and forage. The Mujahideen factions responded to this 

crisis by establishing fixed supply bases within Afghanistan. The 

larger supply bases were located in the mountains near the Pakistan 

border. Smaller supply bases were caches hidden outside the towns 

and villages. The Soviets then concentrated on finding and destroy-
Chapter 15 Page 403 

ing the large and small supply bases. The Mujahideen dependence on 

the large fixed supply bases meant that they had to defend them. 

This provided a viable target set for Soviet air and artillery. 

Although weapons and material were furnished free to the 

Mujahideen in the essential safe haven of Pakistan, there were significant costs to the Mujahideen in 'getting it to where it was needed. 

Often, the issued material was not what the commander needed in his 

area. So the material had to be traded or sold for what he needed. 

Then, the material had to be transported. Transportation was usually 

by commercial teamsters using donkeys, mules, camels or pickup 

trucks.1 Commanders and faction leaders who ~stablished their own 

transportation systems discovered that it was cheaper and easier to 

stay with the established teamsters and muleteers. Once the materials were loaded and in transit, there were still taxes and fees to oe 

paid. Every time the supplies crossed into a different tribe or faction 

area, there was a tax or tariff-often 10% of the goods. Mujahideen 

groups located well within Mghanistan were at the end of the p~peline 

and found that perhaps 40% of their material had gone to other 

Mujahideen groups between issue and final receipt. Western nations 

preferred to distribJ.Ite aid in goods. Mujahideen leaders, particularly 

in the interior, preferred cash. They could always buy the needed 

mines, ammunition, food and material in the local bazaar. Saudi 

Arabia usually provided cash as aid.2 Often, the Mujahideen needed 

more material than they were receiving through the factions and 

raised their own funds to buy it. Gem stones and narcotics, two traditional exports, provided some of these funds. 

As the Mujahideen acquired more crew-served weapons, the 

ammunition tonnages required rose dramatically. At the same time, 

Soviet airstrikes on animal herds and their widespread use of 

scatterable mines alon'g trails and mountain passes killed many of 

the transport animals. There was more· demand for transport and 

fewer animals to transport the goods. The United States tried to 

solve the 'mule-gap" by providing Missouri mules. Unfortunately 

1 Animal carrying capabilities are: mule-250 to 335 pounds [H. W. Daly, Manual of Pack 

Transportation, Washington: Government Printing Office, 1917, page 18]; camel-400 to 

600 pounds [ Lewis Burt Lesley, Uncle Sam's Camels: The Journal of May Humphreys 

Stacey Supplemented by the Report of Edward Fitzgerald Beale (1857-1858), Cambridge: 

Harvard University Press, 1929, page 9]; and central Asian horse-215 pounds [William 

H. Carter, Horses Saddles and Bridles, Baltimore: The Lord Baltimore Press, 1902, pages 

262-263]. Donkey figures unavailable. 

2 "The Logistics System of the Mujahideen";unpublished government contract study written in 1987. 
Page 404 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

these required more food, carried less and died more quickly than the 

local variety. · 

Medical care and medical evacuation was a Mujahideen weakness. 

There were few M11jahideen doctors, although established Afghan 

doctors frequently treated Mujahideen casualties at great personal 

risk. Some Mujahideen groups had a medic who had graduated from 

a eight-month to a year course in Pakistan or other countries. Most 

groups were lucky to have a graduate of a six-week first aid course. 

Some French doctors worked inside Afghanistan while many other 

western doctors worked in the border areas ofPakistan. If the wounded Mujahideen managed to survive the harrowing trip to Pakistan, he 

probably survived. However, a seriously wounded Mujahideen inside 

~ghanistan usually died. 

Tactics 

Guerrilla warfare demands.quantities of quality light infantry on 

both sides. The Soviets never fielded enough. The Mujahideen were 

natural light infantry. They were hardy, tough; courageous and local. 

They had high morale, the warrior spirit and excellent tactical intelligence. They were naturals at the ambush and pursuit. They were 

raised from childhood with weapons, but they lacked unit training and 

discipline. Training varied from valley to valley and force to force. The 

Pakistani lSI provided some training courses and the former military 

officers from the Afghan Army who joined the Mujahideen tried to 

train the Mujahideen to a standard. Still, the Mujahideen were not 

trained to a standard and the quality of the individual groups was a 

function of their leadership. 

The Mujahideen had warrior spirit and their focus was on battle, 

not easy LOC targets. They wanted noise, excitement, personal glory 

and the spoils of war. The Pakistani lSI cajoled and threatened, but it 

was difficult to persuade the Mujahideen to attack the lucrative and 

easy oil pipelines when security outposts were available.3 The 

Mujahideen had some distinct tactical faults. Ifthey were in their own 

area, they tended to ignore local security and could be surprised. They 

were very predictable in their selection of ambush sites and shelling 

sites. The Soviets, however, seemed unaware of this predictability. 

The Mujahideen would habitually reuse the same sites, but there is little evidence of the Soviets exploiting this pattern with aggressive foot 

patrols, site raids, mining or plotting artillery fire on these sites. 

3 Mohammad Yousaf and Mark Ad kin, The Bear Trap: Afghanistan's Untold Story, London: 

Leo Cooper, 1992, 36. 
Chapter 15 Page 405 

The overall Mujahideen air defense posture was weak. The introduction of the Stinger shoulder-fired air defense missile toward the 

end of the war helped, but the Soviets countered the new system with 

a change in tactics. The tactical threat to Mujahideen were Su-25 

close air support aircraft, helicopter gunships and helicopter lift 

ships carrying air assault forces. The Mujahideen developed the air 

defense ambush as an answer to the threat of these aircraft. There 

are several variations of the ambush, but basically the Mujahideen 

would position air defense weapons in optimum firing positions and 

then bait the ambush to draw aircraft into the kill zone. The most 

popular firing positions were caves dug into canyon walls where 

heavy machine guns could fire horizontally across the narrow canyon. 

The bait would lure the aircraft into the canyon where multiple 

machine guns would open up on its flight path. Other aircraft would 

be unable to engage these machine guns since they could not get an 

approach shot at the caves. The Mujahideen also learned to identify 

likely helicopter landing zones and mine them. They would position 

machine guns and RPG-7 gunners around the landing zone. As the 

helicopter landed, massed RPG and machine gun fire would tear 

into the aircraft. The Mujahideen also liked to hit aircraft parked on 

airfields and would stage shelling attacks for the purpose of killing 

aircraft on the grouna. A large percentage of total Mujahideen 

aircraft kills was from mortar and multiple rocket launcher attacks 

on airfields. 

Antipersonnel mines were a major problem for the Mujahideen. The Soviets employed millions of mines in Mghanistan. They 

surrounded installations, garrisons, security posts and government 

facilities with minefields. They mined the road banks along critical 

stretches of road. They dispersed scatterable mines over trails, 

mountain passes, cropland and grazing pasture. Most of the mines' 

components were nonmetallic and hard to detect. These antipersonnel mines were designed to maim, not kill. Thus, the mine would rip 

off a Mujahideen's leg and the Mujahideen's comrades would then 

have to transport the crippled combatant back to Pakistan. Should 

he survive the slow, painful trip,he would probably never fight again, 

but the trip back would involve six or eight Mujahideen who could 

have been fighting. Mine detectors were in short supply and not too 

effective against plastic mines. Mujahideen would breach minefields 

with captured vehicles, flocks of sheep, by firing consecutive recoilless rifles rounds to create a path, or by hurling large rocks acro"ss the 

minefield to create a path. None of these methods were too effective. 
Page 406 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

Although disinclined to dig in ,the hard, rocky soil of Mghanistan, 

the Mujahideen soon learned the value of field fortifications against 

SoViet artillery, armored vehicles and airstrikes. Field fortifications 

came to play a dominant role in the war as the Mujahideen learned to 

build sturdy, redundant, camouflaged bunkers and fighting positions 

which ensured their survivability. 

Finally, the Mujahideen were a tactical force with a tactical focus, 

but, when the occasion demanded, they were capable of operationallevel actions. Such actions as operation Gashay, Zhawar II and the 

defense against operation Magistral demonstrated this capability. 

Such actions were usually under the planning or leadership of former 

officers of the Mghan Army. What the Mujahideen were not capable 

of was transitioning quickly into a conventional force. After the 

Soviets withdrew, the Mujahideen tried and failed to take Jalalabad 

and Kabul by a conventional attack. These efforts ended in disorganized chaos as the DRA found heart and battled on successfully. It 

would be years before the DRA collapsed and the Mujahideen tried to 

unite to rebuild Mghanistan. 
GLOSSARY 

Mghanistan National Liberation Front (ANLF)-Jebh-e-Nejat-iMelli Mghanistan}) founded by Sebqhatullah Mojadeddi. The 

party is moderate. , 

AGS-17-A Soviet-manufactured, tripod-mounted automatic grenade 

launcher which fires 30mm grenades from a thirty round drum 

magazine. The maximum range oftheAGS-17 is 1,700 meters. 

Air assault-Helicopter borne assault into an area. 

ANLF_:_Mghanistan National Liberation Front ofMojadeddi. 

AO-Area of operations. 

APC-Armored personnel carrier, any of· the wheeled or tracked 

Soviet-manufactured combat vehicles used to transport 

soldiers. 

Bernau-Czechoslovak M26 light machine gun which fires from a toploading 20-round magazine. This excellent 7 .9mm weapon was 

developed between World War I and II and was sold abroad as 

the M30 to China, Yugoslavia and Romania. The British Bren 

gun is based on the M26 design. The Mujahideen called them 

20-shooters. 

BM-1-Single barrel107mm rocket launcher. 

BM-12-An obsolete Soviet multiple rocket launcher. The Chinese 

improved and manufactured it as the Type 63. Most 

Mujahideen BM-12s were actually Chinese Type 63s. It is 

ground-mounted, has twelve barrels and fires 107mm rockets to 

a distance of 8,500 meters. It weighs 611 kilograms. 

BM-21-A truck-mounted, 40-tube multiple rocket launcher which 

fires 122mm rockets to a distance of 20.5 kilometers. The 

Mujahideen mostly called this the BM-40. 

BM-22-A truck-mounted, 16-tube multiple rocket launcher which 

fires 220mm rockets to a distance of 40 kilometers. The type of 

rocket warheads include high-explosive fragmentation, chemical, incendiary and remotely delivery mines. The Soviet nick-
Page 408 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

name for this lethal system is Dragan (Hurricane). Western 

analysts initially identified this system as the BM27. 

BMP-A Soviet tracked infantry fighting vehicle that carries a threeman crew and a squad of eight soldiers. The BMP-1 mounts a 

73mm cannon, a 7.62mm machine gun and an antitank missile. 

The BMP-2 carries a 30mm automatic gun and a different antitank missile and launcher. 

BRDM-A Soviet four-wheeled armored car used primarily for reconnaissance. It has two auxiliary wheels for extra mobility. In its 

various configurations, it car.ries either a 12. 7mm machine gun, 

a 7.62mm machine gun or both. 

BMD-A Soviet air-dropable, armored personnel carrier that carries 

up to nine men (usually a maximum of seven). It has the same 

turret as the BMP, so the BMD-1 has the 73mm cannon of the 

BMP-1 and the BMD-2 has the 30mm automatic gun of the 

BMP-2. They were widely used by Soviet airborne and air 

assault force. The Mujahideen called them "commando tanks". 

BTR-A Soviet eight-wheeled armored personnel carrier that can 

carry up to an 11-man squad. It mounts 14.5mm and 7.62mm 

machine guns and can carry antitank weapons as well. The 

BTR and BMP were the most common infantry carriers of the 

Soviet Forces. 

·Commander-During the war against the Soviets, the Mujahideen 

had no rank structure, so the term commander applied to all 

military commanders whether they led 10 men or 1,000. 

Dari-Mghan Farsi or Persian spoken by about 50% of the population. 

DRA-Democratic Republic of Mghanistan. The communist government of Mghanistan . 

. DShK-Soviet-manufactured 12. 7mm heavy machine gun. It is a 

primary armament on Soviet-manufactured armored vehicles 

and is effective against ground and air targets. It has a 

wheeled carriage, tripod and mountain mount for ground and 

air defense firing. It has rate of fire of 540-600 rounds per 

minute with a maximum range of 7000 meters and an effective 

range of 1500 meters against ground targets and 1000 meters 

against air targets. 

Enfield-British-manufactured .303 bQlt-action rifle which was the 

standard British infantry weapon from 1895 through (he 
Glossary Page 409 

Korean War. It saw wide service on the North-West Frontier 

and its long range and powerful cartridge made it a favorite in 

India and Mghanistan. It has a maximum range of 2550 

meters and an effective range of 800 meters. It has a 10-round 

magazine and can carry an additional round in the chamber, so 

the Mujahideen called them 11-shooters. 

Etehad-e Islami (EIA)-Mujahideen faction led by Abdurab Rasul 

Sayaf. 

Ghar-Pushto term for mountain. 

Green zone-Agricultural region of gardens, orchards, fields and 

vineyards bisected by a network of irrigation ditches. They normally border rivers and some sections of highway and most are 

practically impassible for vehicles. 

Goryunov-The heavy machine· gun SGM Stankovy Goryunou 

Modernizouanniy M-49 was adopted by the Soviet Army during 

World War II and modernized versions are in service with the 

Russian Army today. It is a gas..:operated, air-cooled, companylevel, 7.62mm weapon that has vehicle and ground mounts. It 

has a rate qf fire of 650 round per minute and a maximum range 

of 2,500 meters and an effective range of 1,000 meters. 

Haji-The title of a person who has made the pilgrimage to Mecca. 

Harbakai-Pashtu tribal policemen or regulators .. 

HI-Islamic Movement of Ayatollah Shaikh Asef Muhsini. 

HIH-Islamic Party of Gulbuddin Hikmatyar. 

HIK-Islamic Party of Mawlawi Yunus Khalis. 

Inter-Sertices Intelligence (ISI)-Pakistan's intelligence service 

for internal and external security, political and military intelligence and counterintelligence. The lSI was responsible for funneling aid to the Mujahideen and providing training to 

Mujahideen combatants and support personnel. 

IRMA-Islamic Revolutionary Movement of Mghanistan of Mawlawi 

Mohammad Nabi Mohammadi. 

Islamic Party (HIH)- (Hezb-e-Islami-Gulbuddin) founded in 1974 to 

· fight the Daoud government. It later split as cofounders 

Rabanni and Khalis founded their own factions. Its leader, 

Gulbuddin Hikmatyar is a fundamentalist internationalist. 

Hikmatyar's party received more outside aid from Pakistan, the 

United States and Saudi Arabia than any other party. 
Page 410 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

Islamic Party (HIK)-(Hezb-e-Islami-Khalis) was founded by 

Mawlawi Mohammed Yunis Khalis who left Mghanistan for 

Pakistan in 1973 after the Daoud coup. Khalis is from 

N angahar Province. His most famous commanders include 

Abdul Haq in Kabul and Jalladuddin Hagani of Paktia 

Province. The party is fundamentalist. 

Islamic Revolutionary Movement (IRMA)-(Harakat-e-Inqilab-iIslami) was founded by Mohammad N abi Mohammadi. The 

party is moderate (traditional Islamist). 

Islamic Movement (HI)-(Harakat-i Islami) was founded by 

Ayatollah Asef Muhsini in Iran as a minority Shia faction. The 

party has a traditional Islamic orientation. 

Islamic Society (JIA)-(Jamiat-i-Islami) was founded by Burhanud-din Rabbani who fled to Pakistan in 1974. His most 

famous commanders are Ahmd Shah Masood and Ismail 

Khan. The party is primarily fundamentalist and dominated 

by ethnic Tadjiks. 

Islamic Union for the Liberation of Mghanistan (IUA)-

(Itttihad-i-Islami) was founded by Abd Al-Rab Abdul-Rassul 

Sayyaf. This used to be called the EIA until.1981. The faction 

is fundamentalist. In the mid-1980s, they again changed the 

name to the Islamic Union of Mghanistan. 

_JIA-Islamic Society of Rabbani. 

Jihad-Holy war conducted for preservation of the faith. 

Kal-Local term in Farah Province for canyon 

Kalashnikov-Soviet automatic assault rifle. The AK-4 7 and AKM 

Kalashnikovs fire a 7.62mm round while the AK-74 fires a 

5.45mm round. 

Kandow-Pushto term for mountain·pass. 

Karez-An Mghanistan system of underground tunnels used for the 

collection of ground water and for carrying water for surface 

irrigation. The Mujahideen used them for shelter and ambush. 

KHAD-The secret police of the Mghan government responsible for 

detecting and eradicating domestic political opposition, subverting the mujahideen, penetrating opposition groups abroad 

and providing military intelligence to the armed forces through 

its military wing. The KHAD was patterned after the Soviet 

KGB and GRU and apparently reported to the KGB. 

Khalq-(Farsi for masses or people). One of the two communist factions of the PDP A. 

KIA-Killed in action. 
Glossary Page 411 

Kochi-Kochi are nomadic tribesmen of Afghanistan. They live 

primarily by herding and trading sheep, goats and camels. 

Koh-Dari term for mountain. 

Lashkar-A Push to term for tribal armed force. 

LOC-Lines of communication. 

LZ-Landing zone. 

Madrassa-Arabic term for an Islamic religious school. 

Markaz-Mujahideen base. 

Mawlawi-Islamic religious scholar. 

MIA-Missing in Action. 

Model1938 Mortar-The Soviet Model1938 107mm mortar was originally the standard regimental mortar for mountain units. It is 

a reduced size version of the 120mm mortar suitable for transport on a pack animal. It can fire 15 rounds per minute and has 

a maximum range of 5150 meters firing the heavy round and 

6300 meters firing the light round. 

Mulla-Islamic religious leader or Imam. 

Mosi:n-Nagant-:-The Model M1891/30 is a Russian/Soviet bolt-action 

rifle or carbine which fires the 7.62x54 cartridge. It was used 

in the Russo-Japanese War, World War I and World War II. 

Many models come with a folding bayonet. The rifle has a maximum range of 2000 meters and an effective range of 400 

meters. The Mujahideen called them five-shooters. 

MRL (Multiple rocket launcher)-A ground-mounted or truckmounted rocket artillery system capable of firing a salvo of 

rockets at a target. 

Mujahideen (holy warrior)-A member of the Afghan resistance. 

National Islamic Front of Mghanistan (NIFA)-(Mahaz-e-Melli 

Islami} ). Founded by Pir Sayed Ahmad Gailani, this moderate 

party attracted a number of former officers from the Afghan 

Army and moderate technocrats. 

NIFA-National Islamic Front of Afghanistan of Gailani. 

OP-Observation Post. 

Parcham-(Farsi for flag) Faction of the communist PDP A. 

PDPA-Peoples Democratic Party of Afghanistan-the communist 

party of Afghanistan. 

Pir-Title designating sainthood and leader in the Sufi orders. 
Page 412 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

PK-Soviet 7.62mm company machine gun which replaced the 

Goryunov machine gun. It weighs 16.5 kilograms and has an 

effective range of 1000 meters. The Mujahideen call them tOOshooters since they fire out of a 100 round box of linked 

ammunition. 

POL-Petroleum, oil and lubricants. 

Pushtun-The dominant ethnic group (nearly 50%) of Mghanistan 

who speak Pashtu. The British historically referred to these 

people as Pathans. 

Qawm-The basic subnational Mghan identify based on kinship, residence and sometimes occupation. 

Ramadan-The Islamic holy month of fasting. 

RDM-Remotely delivered mines. Mines which can be emplaced by 

aviation, artillery or MRL fire. 

RPG-7-Soviet manufactured shoulder-fired antitank weapon which 

fires a shaped~charge rocket. It has an effective range of 300 

meters. 

RPG-18-Soviet manufactured single-shot, shoulder-fired antitank 

weapon which fires a 66mm shaped-charge rocket. The rocket is stored in an extendable storage tube which also functions 

as a launcher. The launcher is thrown away after use. It has · 

an effective range of 135 meters and is a copy of the 

USM72A2 LAW. 

Saqar-Egyptian 107mm or 122mm MRL. It has one, two, three and 

four-barrel light-weight launchers. The 107mm (Saqar 20) has 

a maximum range of 8000 meters and the 122mm (Saqar 30) 

has a maximum range of 10,800 meters. The 107mm model was 

more common in Mghanistan. Some Mujahideen state that 

they had special rounds which enabled the Saqar to reach 20 

kilometers and the Saqar 30 to reach 30 kilometers. Saqar 

means "eagle" in Egyptian. 

Sarandoy-DRA Ministry of the Interior armed forces, a heavily 

armed police force. They were organized into six brigades or 

regiments (numbering about 60,000 men) and were based in 

Kandahar, Badakhstan, Baghlan and Paravan provinces plus 

two in Kabul. The Sarandoy had an additional estimated 6,000 

men in operational and mountain battalions. 

Sbaheed-Martyr. The plural is shaheedan or shuhada .. 
. Glossary Page 413 

Shia-The minority Islamic community in Mghanistan following the 

Imami Shiism (the dominant faith in neighboring Iran) or 

Ismaili Shiism. . 

SKS-(Samozaryadiy karabin Simonova}) gas-operated semi-automatic Soviet carbine with a foldin:g bayonet. It has a ten-shot magazine· and fires the 7.62x39 cartridge to a maximum range of 

1000 meters with a 400 meter effective range. The first models 

were fielded in 1931 and it was a standard weapon of the Soviet· 

Army during World War II through the early 1950s. The 

Mujahideen simply called them carbines. 

SOP-Standard operating procedures. 

Spetsnaz-Soviet forces trained for long-range reconnaissance, commando and special forces type combat. 

Sufi-A mystic branch of Islam with considerable influence in 

Mghanistan. Sufis are more widespread among Sunnis. 

·sunni-The majority Islamic community in Mghanistan. Over twothirds of the populace are Sunnis, followers of the Hanafi 

School. 

Tadjik-Ethnic Mghans from the northeastern regions of Mghanistan 

who make up about 25% of the population. 

Tsadar-All purpose cloth that Mghans carry and wear. It serves as 

a ground cloth, sleeping bag, camouflage covering, bundle wrap 

and shroud. 

Uzbek-Ethnic Mghans primarily in the north central part of 

Mghanistan who make up 10% of the population and speak 

Turkic. 

WJA-.,.-Wounded in Action. 

ZGU-(Zenitnaya gornaya ustanovka}) Mountain air defense weapons 

mount. Any Soviet air defense weapon that can disassembled 

for transport into the mountains by pack animals or porters. 

Usually this means that the weapons mount or pedestal has no 

wheels. 

ZGU-1-A ZPU-1 mounted on a ZGU mount. 

ZPU-1-A Soviet 14.5mm ground-mounted antiaircraft machine gun 

which is towed on a light; two-wheeled carriage. The system is 

built around a single-barreled KPV heavy machine gun which 

has a cyclic rate of fire of 600 rounds per minute and a practi-
Page 414 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

cal rate of fire of 150 rounds per minute. The belt-fed machine 

gun feeds from a 150 round box and has a maximum horizontal 

range of 7000 meters and a maximum effective antiaircraft 

. range of 1400 meters. It weighs 581 kilograms. 

ZPU-2-A twin-barrel version of the ZPU-1. 

ZSU-23-4-A Soviet self-propelled air defense weapon which fires four 

23mm machine guns simultaneously. . The Soviets used this 

weapon for counter ambushes and in the destruction of ground 

targets. 
SYMBOLS LIBRARY 

Red = Soviet or ORA Forces 

Blue = Mujahideen 

0 Rifleman 0 Vehicle 

i· Light Machine Gun . 0 Armored Personnel 

Carrier (BTR or BMD) 

t Medium Machine ~ Infantry Fighting 

Gun Vehicle (BMP) 

t Heavy Machine () Tank 

Gun 

~ Heavy Anti-Aircraft 

~ Machine Gun 

± 

Convoy 

RPG-7 

± AGS-17 A Attack 

* Recoiless Rifle 5f Failed Attack 

'd Mortar 

0 ~ Withdrawal 

Multiple Rocket 

Launcher 

1~1 122mm Howitzer 

~ Defensive Position 

& 122mm 

Fire 

Howitzer 

Base ~ Ambush 

~ Ambush 

~ Truck 
Page 416 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

6. · Strong Point, Check c Gully Point, Observation Post 

A Command Post 

Platoon // Air Strike A Commarid Post 

Company 

6 Mosque 0 Heliborne 

Insertion 

L.L- Cemetary ~ fl Helicopter Gunship L. I I Attack 

'----J Bridge 2 ~ Air Patrol 

¢ Windmill 0 Airfield 

@ Remotely Delivered 

0 0 Minefield 

Garrison or 

Field Lager 

I····· I Anti-Tank Minefield 

looooool 41 I Anti-Personnel Command Post 

Minefield Battalion 

Regiment 

l

0

e•o 0el Brigade Mixed Minefield 
INDEX 

Abdul-Rahman, Mawlawi 167, 169, 323 

Abdullah-e Bmj bridge 31-33, 163-165 

Akbar, Mohammad 5 

Aiingar 100-102, 118-121, 184, 192, 229, 233 

Alishang 145, 216-218 

Alkozai, Doctor Abdul Qudus 229-234 

Asef, Assadullah Mohammad 271 

Assadullah, Commander 329-334 

Bagram 31-33, 159, 162-164, 212-215, 257-259, 356 

Baloch, Mawlawi Mohayddin 297-301, 341, 350 

Balots, Abdul Baqi 251 

Baraki Barak 39, 55, 242-246, 363 

Cham tala plain 73-7 4 

Charikar 23-25, 71, 135, 159, 164, 257-259, 347, 356-357,387-388 

DRA units 

8th Infantry Division 75, 87, 137, 177, 184,243,247, 256,382 

11th Infantry Division 184, 235 

25th Infantry Division 169, 174, 320 

60th Infantry Division 177 

71st Infantry Regiment 119, 218 

81st Infantry Regiment 119 

4th Border Guards Brigade 291, 300 

8th Border Guards Brigade 177 

18th Border Guards Brigade 177 

15th Tank Brigade 75, 81, 177,243 

37th Commando Brigade 59, 75, 243, 247, 256, 320 

38th Commando Brigade 320 

Durow canyon 15, 275, 279 

. Faizan, Mawlawi 63 

Farouq, Ghulam 389, 391 

Ghamsharik, Haji Zaman 179, 191, 195 

Ghani, Abdul 307, 337 

Ghorband 71, 358, 389 
Page 418 The Other Side of the Mountain: Mujahideeri Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

Gul, Commander Wazir 89, 93, 97 

Gul, Sofi Lal 23, 27, 159 

Habib, Tsaranwal Sher 73, 247 

Hanif, Haji Sayed Mohammad 13,275,279 

Haqani, Jalaluddin 169, 174, 199, 319-327 

Haqani, Mawlawi Nezamuddin 169, 170, 174,319,323 

Hayat, Commander 5 

Hemat, Toryalai 9, 27, 129, 235 

Ibrahim, Engineer Mohammad 285 

Kako, Mohammad Shah-307 

Kama district 107-113, 251-256, 263-266 

Karokhel, Wali Khan 81, 82 

Karokhel, Hasan Khan 59, 81-85, 89 

Khan, Asef 179, 191 

Khan, Asil 49-52, 87, 373 

Khan, Haji Badshah 151 

Khan, Nawaz 119-122 

Khayat, Doctor Wali 6, 8, 9 

Kochay, Major Sher Aqa 59, 81-85 

Kochi 73-75, 320, 343-346, 377 

Lewano Kandow 81-85 

Malajat 37, 43, 44, 303-310 

Malang, Mulla 35, 43-46, 123-126, 143, 205, 207, 208 

Malang, Lala 45 

Malangyar, Haji 130 

Mamur Hotel 5-13 

Mohammad Agha District 5-13, 243 

Mohammad, Amir 335, 337, 349 

Mohhamad, Haji Pir 335, 337, 338 

Mulla Omar 59, 81-84, 89-96 

Ofian-e Sharif 71, 356, 387 

Omar, DRA General Jamaluddin 201, 203 

Omar, Lieutenant 167, 323, 329 

Padshah, Commander Sher 145; 147, 217, 283 

Panjshir 31, 32 

Panjwayee District 34, 35, 37, 38, 123-126 

Qader, Haji Abdul 31, 32, 163, 213-216, 257, 259-261 

Qasab, Haji 3, 32 

Qasem, Akhund Zada 205, 361 

Qasem, Mawlawi 205 

Rahim, LTC Haji Mohammad 21, 22, 77 
Razek, Abdul 335 

Sadeq, Doctor Mohammad 17, 127, 219, 223 

Sahak, Haji Aaquelshah 155, 351 

Sarobi31,59,81,82,89,93, 163,177,179,181,183-185,188 

SarotiPass 151,153,170,172,174 

Sarshar, Commander 71, 356, 387 

Satakandow Pass 151, 153, 170, 172, 17 4 

Seddiq, Haji Mohammad 39, 53, 363 

Shah, Mawlawi Mohammad 285, 287, 289, 291, 292, 295 

Shahabuddin, Commander 76, 366, 383 

Shahin, Mohammad Humayun.371, 377, 379, 393 

Sheragai, Commander 73 

Sheragha 145, 147 

Sidiqullah, Commander Haji 101, 119-121, 229, 233 

Soviet units 

40th Army 135, 167, 373, 379 

5th Motorized Rifle Division 35, 295 

Index Page 419 

108th Motorized Rifle Division 71, 75, 243, 247, 257, 353 

103rdAirborne Division 75, 243,247, 257, 303,353, 373 

345th Separate Airborne Regiment 213 

56th Air Assault Brigade 235, 243, 353 

66th Separate Motorized Rifle Brigade 107, 108, 113, 218, 223, 235, 

251,263 

70th Separate Motorized Rifle Brigade 35, 108, 303, 309 

Tangi Waghjan Gorge 13, 15 

Tani, DRA General Shanawaz 320, 322 

Tayeb, Qazi Guljan 55, 243 

Topkhana, Sultan Mohammad of 303 

Wakil, Doctor Mohammad 53, 135 

Wali, Saranwal Abdul 44 

Wardak, General Abdul Rahim 81, 177, 184, 186, 192, 194 

Yakub, Haji Mohammad 366 

Yasini, Mawlawi Shukur 107, 113, 263 

Zadran, General Gulzarak 167, 169, 173-175, 199, ·204 
ABOUT THE AUTHORS 

Ali Ahmad. Jalali is a former Mghan Army Colonel. A distinguished 

graduate of the Military University in Kabul, he has also attended the 

Infantry Officers Advanced Course in Fort Benning, Georgia; the 

British Army Staff College in Camberley; the U.S. Naval Postgraduate 

School in Monterey, California; the Frunze Academy in Moscow and 

the Institute of World Politics in Washington, DC. He taught in the 

Military Academy and advanced military schools in Kabul. He joined 

the Mujahideen in 1980 and served as the top military planner on the 

directing staff of the Islamic Unity of Mghan Mujahideen (an alliance 

of three moderate Mujahideen factions) during the early 1980s before 

he joined Voice of America (VOA). As a journalist, he has covered 

Central Asia and Mghanistan over the past 15 years. He is the author 

of several books including works on the Soviet Military, works on 

Central Asia and a three-volume Military History of Mghanistan. 

Lester W. Grau is a retired U.S. Army Lieutenant Colonel. He served 

as an infantry officer and a Soviet Foreign Area Officer (FAO) throughout his career. He fought in Vietnam. In 1981, he completed one year 

of Russian language training at the Defense Language Institute at 

Monterey, California and then graduated from the U.S. Army Russian 

Institute (USARI) in Garmisch-Partenkirchen, Germany in 1983. 

USARI was a two-year post-graduate school which dealt with all 

aspects of the then Soviet Union and all classes were taught in 

Russian. He has served in Moscow and traveled extensively in the former Warsaw Pact and former Soviet Union and continues that travel 

today. Since 1983, his work has focused on Russian and Soviet tactics 

and operations. He has written a book on Soviet tactics in 

Mghanistan. Mr. Grau currently works at the Foreign Military 

Studies Office (FMSO) at Fort Leavenworth where he continues to 

work on operational and tactical issues. 
The Other Side of the Mountain: 

Mujahideen Tactics in the Soviet-Afghan War 

Text in New Century Schoolbook 11 point type 

Book Editing and Design by Jonathan W. Pierce 

Cover Design and Final Map Graphics by Emily Pierce 

Initial Map Graphics by Rhonda Gross